Micom P438: Rail Catenary Protection Device P438/En M/Cf8

MiCOM P438
Rail Catenary Protection Device
P438/EN M/Cf8
Version P438 -305 -409/410/411 -615

P438 -308 -415/416/417 -616
Technical Manual
Content P438/UK M/De7 (-615)

P438/EN AD/Af8 (-616)
MiCOM P438
P438/UK M/De7
Version P438 -305 -409/410/411 -615
Technical Manual
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment.
Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment
and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used,
insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be employed.
The signals 'M a i n : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y ' and 'S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) ' (permanently assigned to the LEDs
labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE' and 'ALARM') can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the
device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made
without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the
warnings in Chapters 5, 9, 10 and 11 and with the content of Chapter 13, before working on the equipment. If
the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Installation of the DHMI:
A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be connected to the DHMI protective
conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.
To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.
The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside high-voltage cables or connections.
Currents can be induced in the cable which may result in electromagnetic interference.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-
energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot
cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do
not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the
necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of
warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
3
Notes:
This manual (P438/EN M/De7) is based on the P438-305/307-409/410/411-613 full manual
(P438/EN M/Bd7) but incorporates all the changes up to (and including) version
P438-305-409/410/411-615.
All parts of this manual that are not affected by the product upgrade have not been modified in any
way and therefore still show the -613 version in the footer.
Software version -615 is compatible with two different hardware versions, -305 and -307, which are
therefore both covered in this manual. The only difference is that hardware version -307 was designed
for another communication module, the “Dual Redundant Ethernet Board” (REB). At the time of
publishing the P438 -615 manual, however, the REB module had not been released yet but became
available with hardware version -308, see the Upgrade Description P438 -308 -616.
4 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

Changes after going to press
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-2
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-2
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-5
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-5
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-6
2.6 Interfaces 2-8
2.7 Information Output 2-10
2.8 Settings 2-10
2.9 Deviations 2-11
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-11
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-12
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-13
2.9.4 Resolution of the fault value recording 2-14
2.10 Recording Functions 2-15
2.11 Power supply 2-16
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications 2-17
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Measured (Function Group HMI) 3-4
Value Panels
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-8
3.4.1 PC interface (Function Group PC) 3-8
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) 3-10
3.4.5 Communication Interface (Function Groups IEC 3-27
IEC 61850 GOOSE and GSSE)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) 3-34
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) 3-35
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group INP) 3-38
of the Binary Inputs
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group RTDmA) 3-40
3.8.1 Direct Current Input 3-41
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a 3-45
Resistance Thermometer
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and (Function Group OUTP) 3-46
Blocking of the Output Relays
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group mA_OP) 3-49
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output 3-52
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-54
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data 3-60
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode (Function Group LED) 3-61
of the LED Indicators
3.12 Main Functions of the P438 (Function Group MAIN) 3-64
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured 3-64
Values
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement 3-68
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the 3-77
Protection Functions
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7

Contents
(continued)
3.12.4 Inrush stabilization (Harmonic 3-79

restraint)
3.12.5 Directional Voltage Memory 3-82
3.12.6 Multiple Blocking 3-83
3.12.7 Blocked/Faulty 3-84
3.12.8 Close Command 3-85
3.12.9 Fault Direction Signal 3-87
3.12.10 Starting Signals and Trip Logic 3-88
3.12.11 Time Tagging and Clock 3-96
Synchronization
3.12.12 Resetting Mechanisms 3-98
3.12.13 Assigning the Rear Port 3-101
Communications Interfaces to
Physical Communications Channels
3.12.14 Test Mode 3-102
3.13 Setting group selection (Function Group GROUP) 3-103
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group CHECK) 3-105
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) 3-108
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) 3-109
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) 3-110
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) 3-112
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) 3-114
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) 3-125
3.21 Distance protection (Function Group DIST) 3-130
3.21.1 Base Point Release for Impedance 3-135
and Direction Determination
3.21.2 Distance and Direction 3-136
Measurement
3.21.3 Impedance-Time Characteristics 3-153
3.21.4 Train Start-Up Detection di/dt, dv/dt 3-155
and dϕ/dt
3.21.5 Wrong Phase Coupling Protection 3-158
3.21.6 Multiple Signaling of Distance 3-162
Protection
3.22 High Impedance Protection (Function Group DELTA) 3-163
3.22.1 Minimum Current and Voltage 3-165
Enabling of High Impedance
Protection
3.22.2 Reactance-Limiting of High 3-166
Impedance Protection
3.22.3 Checking for Changes of the Phase 3-167
Angle (Sudden Angle Change
Detection)
3.22.4 Harmonics Stabilization for Load 3-168
Variations
3.22.5 Starting and Tripping of the High 3-169
Impedance Protection Function
3.23 VT and CT Supervision (Function Group C&VTS) 3-171
3.24 Backup Time-Delayed Overcurrent (Function Group BUOC) 3-176
Protection
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) 3-179
3.26 Auto-Reclose (Function Group RECLS) 3-182
3.26.1 Auto-Reclose Trip Times 3-186
3.26.2 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) 3-197
3.26.3 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR) 3-202
8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Contents
(continued)
3.26.4 Zone Extension 3-205

3.26.5 Auto-Reclose Control Function after 3-206
Trip by Thermal Overload
Protection
3.26.6 Auto-Reclose Control Function with 3-207
Parallel Protection Device
3.26.7 Auto-Reclose Counters 3-210
3.27 Definite-Time Overcurrent (Function Group DTOC) 3-211
Protection
3.28 Inverse-Time Overcurrent (Function Group IDMT) 3-219
Protection
3.29 Defrost Protection (Function Group DFRST) 3-223
3.30 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) 3-236
3.31 Under- and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) 3-248
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) 3-251
3.33 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) 3-255
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) 3-266
3.35 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC) 3-277
4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs (Case Types) 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings 4-4
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case 4-4
4.2.2 Flush-Mounted Case 4-5
4.2.3 Device View of Connection for the Detached User Interface (HMI) 4-7
4.3 Modules 4-8
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version 5-2
5.3 Location Requirements 5-3
5.4 Installation 5-4
5.5 Protective Grounding 5-12
5.6 Connection 5-13
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-13
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface 5-18
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-18
5.7 Location Diagrams P438 -305 5-22
5.8 Connection Diagrams P438 -305 5-23
5.9 Location Diagrams P438 -307 5-25
5.10 Connection Diagrams P438 -307 5-26
6 User Interface (HMI) 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing Between Display Levels 6-7
6.3 Illumination of the Display 6-8
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 6-8
6.5 Control at the Panel Level 6-10
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-11
6.6.1 Navigation of the Menu Tree 6-11
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-12
6.6.3 Setting Change Enabling 6-13
6.6.4 Changing Settings 6-16
6.6.5 Setting a List Setting 6-17
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9

Contents
(continued)
6.6.6 Memory Readout 6-18

6.6.7 Resetting 6-22
6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-24
6.6.9 Changing the Password 6-25
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameters 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-2
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters 7-6
7.1.3 Function Settings 7-52
7.1.3.1 Global 7-52
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-56
7.1.3.3 Setting Groups 7-66
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Healthy 8-2
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-2
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-2
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-7
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-15
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-35
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording 8-40
8.2 Events 8-41
8.2.1 Event Counters 8-41
8.2.2 Measured Event Data 8-42
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-44
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1
Appendix
TERMINOLOGY NOTE:
The P438 menu texts ("Data Model") referred to throughout this manual are
regional texts which have been customised for the UK market. Most diagrams contained
in this manual use the same terminology. Some diagrams however contain standard
English menu texts when those were very similar to the "regional" ones and modifying
those diagrams was not deemed essential to comprehension. In those diagrams,
references are made to "Parameter Set(s)": This is the direct equivalent to the regional
term "Setting Group(s)". Similarly, the terms "PSx", "PS1", "PS2", "PS3" and "PS4" are
respectively equivalent to "SGx", "SG1", "SG2", "SG3" and "SG4".
10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

1 Application and Scope
The catenary protection device MiCOM P438 is designed for selective short-circuit and
overload protection of catenaries. This device is designed for the protection of classic-
or autotransformer-fed catenaries in single- or multi-voltage systems with nominal
frequencies of 25, 50 or 60 Hz (settable).
The MiCOM P438 ensures fast and selective short circuit protection as well as protection
from excessive catenary overloading.
The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the device enable the user to
cover a wide range of applications in the protection of catenary systems.
Moreover there are numerous backup protection and automatic control functions
available.
The relevant protection parameters are stored in four independent setting groups in
order to adapt the device to various operating and power system management states.
General Functions
General Functions are complete function groups, which may be individually configured
or cancelled, depending on the application (e.g. included in or excluded from the
device’s configuration).
(An exception is the function M A I N , which is always visible.)
A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:
Unused or de-configured function groups are hidden to the user (except for the
configuration setting), thus simplifying the menu.
Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or

excluded.
This concept provides a wide choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings and adaptations to each protection scheme can be made.
The unit’s powerful programmable logic also makes it possible to accommodate special
applications.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-1

(continued)
General Functions
P438
ANSI IEC 61850 Function group / function
21 DisPDISx DIST Distance Protection
4 zones, individually settable forward and reverse directionals
nd rd th
Train start-up detection for 2 , 3 and 4 zones
Overreach zone, settable
Harmonics adaptation functionality, settable ( )
Wrong phase coupling protection
Classic Single Feed, Autotransformer Feed /
DELTA Stabilized high impedance protection (Delta I function) ( )
50 / 27 SofPhsPSOF1 SOTF Switch on to fault protection
50TD DtpPhsPTOCx DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages
67 Short-circuit direction determination, for each stage
50V Enabling for undervoltage stage, for each stage
50HS High-current stage
51 ItpPhsPTOC1 IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, single stage
67 Short-circuit direction determination
50V Enabling for undervoltage stage
79 RREC1 RECLS Auto-reclose
49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection
Coolant temperature acquisition (via RTDmA) ( )
27 / 59 VtpPhsPTOVx / V<> Time-delayed voltage protection
VtpPhsPTUVx
30 / 74 AlmGGIO1 C&VTS Measuring circuit monitoring function (VT Supervision)
50BU BocPhsPTOCx BUOC Backup time-delayed overcurrent protection, two stages
DFRST Defrost protection
50BF RBRF1 CBF Circuit breaker failure protection
CBM Circuit breaker condition monitoring
Classic single feed, autotransformer feed /
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LGC PloGGIOx LOGIC Programmable logic
Communication Functions P438

16S COMMx 2 serial communication interfaces, RS 422 / 485 or fiber optic ( )
CLK IRIGB IRIG-B interface ( )
16WE IEC Ethernet communication interface ( )
77 COMM3 InterMiCOM protective interface ( )
Input/output functions P438

INP / OUTP Binary signal inputs / Output relays (maximum number) 32 / 46
1-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Measured value functions

P438
26 RTDmA / Analog measured data input / output ( )
mA_OP
RtdGGIO1 PT 100 measuring input ( )
IdcGGIO1 20 mA measured data input, input value can be set ( )
20 mA measured data output, two output values can be set ( )
Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P438 offers the
following global functions:
Global functions P438

LLN0.SGCB GROUP Setting group selection

System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing
and operation
OP_RC Operating data recording (time-tagged signal logging)
OL_DA Overload data acquisition
OL_RC Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)
FT_DA Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point in time during a fault
Further functions
Further functions
MAIN Main function
DVICE Device
LED LED indicator
HMI User interface
PC PC link
CHECK Comprehensive self-monitoring
MT_RC Monitoring signal recording
Measuring inputs for current / voltage
Phase current / comparison current defrost protection
Voltage
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-3

(continued)
Functional diagram for

applications in classic and
autotransformer feed
systems
Communications 16S 16S 16E 77 Self-

IRIG-B Recording and
COMM1 COMM2 IEC COMM3 Monitoring
Measured Data Overload
to network control level / substation / via modem ... Acquisition Recording
via RS485 or fiber optic link
with IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier Measured
or LIMIT Values Disturbance Rec.
LGC
via RJ45 or fiber optic connection with IEC 61850 LOGIC
Defrost 21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 79 27/59

Line DIST DELTA SOTF DTOC DTOC IDMT THERM CBF CBM RECLS DFRST V<>
Idfrst
30/74 50BU 26
BC BUOC RTDmA mA_OP Always Further
Available Options
P438 Catenary Protection
Communications 16S 16S 16E 77 CLC Self-

IRIG-B Recording and
COMM1 COMM2 IEC COMM3 Monitoring
Measured Data Overload
Acquisition Recording
to network control level / substation / via modem ...
via RS485 or fiber optic link
with IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier Measured
LIMIT Values Disturbance Rec.
or LGC
LOGIC
via RJ45 or fiber optic connection with IEC 61850
21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 79 27/59

DIST DELTA SOTF DTOC DTOC IDMT THERM CBF CBM RECLS V<>
Icat
Ifdr Φ
Vcat
Vfdr Φ
30/74 50BU 26
BC BUOC RTDmA mA_OP Always Further
Available Options
P438 Catenary Protection
1-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Design
The P438 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum
case and electrically interconnected via one analog module and one digital module.
Inputs and outputs

The P438 has the following inputs and outputs:
3 current-measuring inputs
2 voltage-measuring inputs (depending on order).
Up to 32 binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) with user-definable function assignment
Up to 46 output relays with user-definable function assignment
1 PT 100 input (optional)
1 input, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
2 outputs, 0 to 20 mA (optional)
A special rapid-response output module with 4 Triac-assisted output relays can be

utilized to speed up trip commands, particularly for close-up faults in the vicinity of
busbars (Triac: bidirectional triode thyristor).
The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P438 can be set
with the function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an option
binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24 V DC
version is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for PT 100
resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via
20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined via 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available,
a selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-5

(continued)
Local control and display

User interface (HMI)
23 LED indicators, 18 with user-definable functional assignment
PC interface
Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the user interface (HMI), the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first communication interface, the numerical protection device can be linked
either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system.
The first communication interface is available with selectable protocols (per
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or COURIER).
The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103

only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by means of the optional IRIG-B

input.
A direct communication link can be established with another MiCOM protection device
using the optional InterMiCOM teleprotection interface (channel 3).
1-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P438 version P438-305-409/410/411-613 and P438-307-412/413/414-613.
Declaration of conformity
CE symbol
This product has been designed and manufactured in conformance with the following
major EC Directives:
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
2.2 General Data

General device data
Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529
IP 52 for the front of the device
Flush-mounted case
IP 50 for the case (excluding rear connection space)
IP 20 for the rear connection space with pin-terminal connection
IP 10 for the rear connection space with ring-terminal connection
Surface-mounted case
IP 50 for the case
IP 50 for the enclosed connection space when the
rubber grommets included with delivery are applied.
Weight
40TE case: approx. 7 kg; 84TE case: approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections
See Dimensional Drawings (Chapter 4) and Terminal Connection Diagrams (Chapter 5).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Terminals
PC interface (X6):
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication interfaces COMM1, COMM2, COMM 3

Optical fibers (X7 and X8): F-SMA optical fiber connection
per IEC 60874-2 (for plastic fiber)
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10-1 (for glass fiber)
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Wire leads (X9 and X10): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections
up to 1.5 mm2
or (only for InterMiCOM):
RS 232 (X34): DIN 41652 connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
IEC communication interface:

Optical fibers (X7 and X8): optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10 (for glass fiber)
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
optical fiber (X13) (1): SC connector per IEC 60874-14-4 (for glass fiber)and
wire leads (X12) (1): RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug.
Current Measuring Inputs:

M5 threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm2
or
threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal connection.
Other Inputs and Outputs:

M3 threaded terminals for pin-terminal connection,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections from 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
or
threaded terminals M4 for ring-terminal connection.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 664-1. Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
1
Option is not available with redundant design of the Ethernet module.
2-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6, IEC 255-6 or EN 50121-5.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
Immunity to Damped Oscillatory Waves

Per IEC 61000-4-12, Class III:
100 kHz damped oscillatory wave
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Ω
Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III:
1 MHz damped oscillatory wave
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s, Source impedance: 200 Ω
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3.
Contact discharge, single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz AM 200 Hz / 100 %
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient / Burst Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-4, Class B.
Power supply: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Inputs / outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 1 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Per DIN EN 61000-4-4, severity level 4.
Power supply: Amplitude: 4 kV, Burst frequency: 2.5 kHz and 5 kHz
Inputs / outputs: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Communications: Amplitude: 2 kV, Burst frequency: 5 kHz
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Burst duration: 15 ms,
Burst period: 300 ms,
Source impedance: 50 Ω
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-7, Class A.
Phase-to-phase:
RMS value 150 V,
Coupling resistance 100 Ω,
Coupling capacitor 0.1 µF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-GROUND:
RMS value 300 V,
Coupling resistance 220 Ω,
Coupling capacitor 0.47 µF, for 10 s.
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4.
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs
Fault current: 8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV,
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min,
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances

Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Per EN 61000-4-6§ or IEC 61000-4-6, severity level 3.
Test voltage: 10 V
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per EN 61000-4-8§ or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
Frequencies: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m, 100 A / m
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11.
12 %
2-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per DIN EN 61010 or IEC 255-5.
2 kV AC, 60 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5.
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 Ω
Corrosion resistance
Flowing Mixed Gas Corrosion Test
Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, part 2, test Ke, severity level 3
21 days at 75 % relative humidity and 30 °C
with reaction to increased concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness
1(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1§ or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 1, 5 g for 11 ms,
Shock withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
test severity class 1, 15 g for 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness
2(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2.
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 1, 10 g for 16 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 7.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
(*)
Mechanical robustness 1:
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Surface-mounted case
2-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s.
Direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test of the power
supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Limit temperature range: -25 °C to +70 °C [-13°F to +158°F]
Humidity
≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C (104°F), condensation not permissible.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
P438/EN M/Bd7 // AFSV.12.10471 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current
Rated current: 1 or 5 A AC (settable).
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.1 VA at In
Load rating:
continuous: 4 In
for 10 s: 30 In
for 1 s: 100 In
Nominal surge current: 250 In
Voltage
Nominal voltage Vn: 50 to 130 V AC (settable)
Nominal burden per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vn = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency fn: 25 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fn
Binary (opto) signal inputs

Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V ... 19 V DC
Special variant with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal supply voltage
(i.e. definitively 'low’ for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively 'high’ for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC

Power consumption per input (as per Ordering Option)

Standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W ± 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variant:
Vin > Switching threshold: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Notes
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level
(peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp
Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz.
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Direct Current Input

Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum permissible continuous current: 50 mA
Maximum permissible input voltage: 17 V
Driving-point impedance of input load: 100 Ω
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable)
Resistance thermometer
inputs
Resistance thermometer: The analog I/O module supports only PT 100.
Mapping curve as per IEC 751 § .
Value range: -40.0 ... +215.0 °C
3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted.
Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215 °C and Θ < -40 °C
Direct current output

Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Permissible load: 0 to 500 Ω
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Output relays
Binary I/O module X (4H):
with heavy-duty contacts, use only for direct voltage/current;
Rated voltage: 250 V DC
Continuous current: 10 A
Short-duration current: 250 A for 30 ms,
30 A for 3 s
Making capacity: 30 A
Breaking capacity: 7500 W (resistive load) or 30 A at 250 V DC,
maximum values: 30 A and 300 V DC
2500 W inductive (L/R 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC,
maximum values: 10 A and 300 V DC
All other modules: 250 V DC, 250 V AC

Continuous current: 5A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
BCD measured data output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interfaces
COMM1, COMM2,
COMM 3
The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels,
dependent on the module type. Channels 1 and 3 are designed for twisted pair connection
or fiber optic connection, whereas Channel 2 is intended for twisted pair connection only.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103,

IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0 and Courier can be set.
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication

schemes to be configured for real time teleprotection signaling between two protection
devices (Point-to-point connection, asynchronous, full duplex; called InterMiCOM
protection teleprotection interface).
For Wire Leads

Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged:
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. –7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. –20 dBm
Optical input: max. –5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Optical output: min. –19.8 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62,5/125

Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -24 dBm
Optical input: max. -10 dBm
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
IEC communication
interface:
For Wire Leads
IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
Transmission rate: 10 or 100 Mbit/s
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Maximum distance: 100 m
for optical fibers (100 Mbit/s)

IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
ST connector or SC connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Optical output: min. –23,5 dBm
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. –20 dBm
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
Date in binary coded decimal (BCD)

Input or output:
via 13 keys and a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 4 x 20 characters
State and fault signals:

23 LED indicators (5 fixed assignment, 18 freely configurable)
2-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data, signals and LED indications: see Chapter 8.
2.8 Settings
Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse duration for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Output pulse duration for a close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Distance Protection
Directional sensitivity
up to 2 s after fault detection: ∞
up to 2 s after fault detection or for switching on to fault: 200 mV ± 20 %
Shortest tripping time: approx. 1.5 cycles
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
High impedance protection

Shortest tripping time: approx. 2.5 cycles
resetting ratio (hysteresis):
tDelta + 150 ms
with tDelta = Blocked: 150 ms
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection, backup time-delayed overcurrent

protection
Shortest tripping time:
Timer stages: approx. 45 ms
High-current stage I>H: < 2 ms (with tI>H = 0 ms)
Starting reset time: approx. 1.5 cycles (drops from 2-fold operate value to 0)
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis): 0.95
Time-voltage protection
Shortest tripping time:
V<, V<<: approx. 150 ms
V>, V>>: approx. 150 ms
Starting reset time: approx. 1.5 cycles
Starting and measurement resetting ratio (hysteresis):
adjustable from 1 to 10%
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fn, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %,
ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Distance Protection
Impedance Measurement Z<
Deviation at ϕk = 0°, 90°: ± 3 %
Deviation at ϕk = 30°, 60°: ± 5 %
Direction determination: ± 3°
Harmonics adaptation: ± 5 %
High impedance protection

Delta I / Delta Phi criteria: ± 3°
Line reactance measurement X<
Deviation at ϕ = 0°, 90°: ± 3 %
Deviation at ϕ = 30°, 60°: ± 5 %
Harmonics dependence: ± 5 %
Definite-time and inverse-

time overcurrent protection
Operate values: ± 3 %
Direction determination: ± 3°
Backup time-delayed
overcurrent protection
Operate values: ± 3 %
Time-voltage protection
Operate values: ± 3 % (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Unom)
Thermal overload
protection
Operate value Θ: ± 5 %
20 mA DC input
Deviation: ± 1 %
PT100 resistance
thermometer
Deviation: ± 2° or ± 1 %
20 mA analog measured
data output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max load: ± 1 %
2-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions for sinusoidal signals at
nominal frequency fn, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F),
and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Definite time-delayed
stages
Deviation 1 % + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse time-delayed
stages
Deviation where I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
For IEC characteristic 'extremely inverse' and
for thermal overload characteristics:
± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fn, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Measured Operating Data

Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: ± 1 %
Measuring Input Voltages

Deviation: ± 0.5 %
Internally Summated Resultant Current

Deviation: ± 2 %
Internally Summated Resultant Voltage

Deviation: ± 2 %
Active and Reactive Power

Deviation: ± 2 %
Load Angle
Deviation: ± 2 %
Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output

Deviation: ± 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: ± 1 %
Fault data
Short-Circuit Current and Voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %
Short-Circuit Impedance
Deviation: ± 5 %
Fault Location
Deviation: ± 5 %
2-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization and a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min:

Deviation: ± 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
2.9.4 Resolution of the fault value recording
Time resolution
1 ms
Currents
Dynamic range: 25 In
Amplitude resolution
at In = 1 A: 2.0 mARMS
at In = 5 A: 10.1 mARMS
Voltage
Dynamic range: 150 V
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mV RMS
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating data memory

Scope: All operation-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals (from the "Operating Data Memory")
Depth: The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope: All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of
1024 different logic state signals
(from the "Monitoring Signal Memory")
Depth: Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of
(from the "Overload Memory")
Depth: 200 entries per overload event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent faults
Scope: Signals:
All fault relevant signals from a total of
(from the “Fault Memory”)
Fault Values:
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth: Signals:
200 entries per fault
Fault Values:
The max number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
storage capacity with a total of 32 s is available for all faults,
e.g. 800 cycles for fn = 25 Hz
1600 cycles for fn = 50 Hz
1920 cycles for fn = 60 Hz
2-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:

24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration:

40TE case:
Relay energized, approx.: 11 Ω
Relay operated, approx.: 25 Ω
84TE case:
Relay energized, approx.: 11 Ω
Relay operated, approx.: 44 Ω
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms

Permitted supply interruption: ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-19

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
(
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) ⋅ n ⋅ I nom = Rop + Ri ⋅ k ⋅ I1' ,max )
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
I'1,max: non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
Inom: rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rnom: rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
( )
Vsat = Rop + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
n≥
(Rop + Ri ) ⋅k ⋅
I1' ,max
=
(Pop + Pi ) ⋅k ⋅
I1' ,max
( Rnom + Ri ) Inom ( Pnom +P i ) Inom
with
Pnom = Rnom ⋅ Inom

2
Pop = Rop ⋅ Inom

2
Pi = Ri ⋅ Inom
2
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max ≈ 1 + ωT1
with:
ω: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant
2-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2 Technical Data
(continued)
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-

dimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is
guaranteed under the given conditions.
The over-dimensioning factor 'k' necessary for the distance protection may be read from
figure 2-1. The dotted line depicts the theoretical characteristic k(T1) = 1 + ωT1.
Current transformers should observe the error limit values for class 5P. CTs class TPY
per IEC 44-6 Part 6 ("Current Transformers with Anti-remanence Cores") should
preferably be used in case a HSR is applied.
2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for distance protection with fn = 50 Hz
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-21

2-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P438, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of products. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P438.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules: T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals internally generated by the device are connected to the external plant via
contacts through binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to
power supply module V, which in turn supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required
internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog values, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog vaues and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X
via the digital bus module. The processor module also handles overall device
communication. As an option, communication module A can be mounted on the
processor module to provide serial communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated user interface (HMI) and the
integrated PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated local control panel (HMI)

PC interface
Rear communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
‘Settings’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device's
interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions
to the process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means
that the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
‘Measurement and Tests’

branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Fault and Events’ branch

The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. Chapters 7, 8 and 10 describe the settings, signals and
measured values available with the P438. The possible setting values can be found in
the P438's data model file associated with the PC support software (MiCOM S1).
The configuration of the user interface (HMI) also permits the installation of Measured
Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically displayed for
specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal operation to
operation under overload conditions to operation during a ground fault to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P438 provides the measured data
relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group HMI)
The P438 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured values relevant at
a given time.
During normal power system operation, the Operation Panel is displayed. As an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel - provided that measured
values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload event, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided that at
least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on the
Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more measured values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to
the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e
or when the appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
HMI:Operation
Panel Fct
[ 053 007 ]
Measured Value 1 m out of n

Measured Value 2
Measured Value 3 HMI: Auto Return HMI: Auto Return
Time Time
[ 003 014 ]
Measured Value n
HMI: Panel Hold- HMI: Hold-Time
Select. Meas. Values Time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress S1 1 C
[ 035 000 ] ≥1
R1
OL_RC: Record. in
Progress
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute ≥1
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: Execute
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
47Z1301A_UK
3-2 Operation Panel
3-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the
appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
HMI: Fault Panel

Fct
[ 053 003 ]

Measured Value 2
Measured Value 3
Measured Value n
Selected Meas.Values
HMI: Panel Hold-
Time
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: Execute
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA_UK
3-3 Fault Panel
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured.
The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at H M I : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the
appropriate key on the user interface (HMI) is pressed.
HMI: Overload
Panel Fct
[ 053 005 ]

Measured Value 2
Measured Value 3
Measured Value n
Select. Meas. Values

HMI: Hold-Time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
Record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: Execute
OL_RC: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
47Z1302A_UK
3-4 Overload Panel
3-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Function keys on the user

interface HMI
The user interface HMI is fitted with 6 freely configurable function keys. Either a single
function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two menu jump lists may
be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting at
F _ K e y : F c t . F x A s s i g n (Fx: F1 to F6).
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in the figure in section

'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)'. Function key F1 is enabled only
after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d F u n c t . K e y 1 ,
has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain
active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m e . Thereafter, the
function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for
function keys F2 to F6.
Additional information pertaining to function keys and their application can be found in
section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting
Actions' of Chapter 3 and in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' of
Chapter 6.
Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely
configurable, like the other 12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration of the
function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission).
Configuration of the
READ key
Similarly to the setting at H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x up to 16 functions may
also be selected from the menu jump list at H M I : F c t R e a d K e y . They are
triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key.
CLEAR key ('C')
Similarly to the setting at M A I N : F c t . A s s i g n . R e s e t x up to 10 reset functions
may be selected from a list at H M I : F k t R e s e t K e y . These are carried out by
pressing the "CLEAR" C key. Additional information pertaining to reset functions can
be found in sub-section 'Resetting Actions' in section 'Main Functions of the P438
(Function Group MAIN) of Chapter 3.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P438 has a front port PC link as standard. Optionally a communication module A
providing two communication channels is available. Communication between the P438
and SCADA is done through communication module A. Setting and interrogation is
possible through all the P438’s interfaces.
Two rear port communications interfaces may be fitted. The settings of rear port
communications interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communications
channels 1 or 2 (see function group "MAIN"). If the COMM1 settings have been
assigned to communications channel 2, then the settings of communications interface 2
(COMM2) will automatically be active for communications channel 1. Communication
channel 2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P438 if its PC link has been
de-activated. As soon as the PC link is used to transmit data, communication channel 2
becomes "dead". It will be enabled again only after the PC interface “Time-out” has
elapsed.
If tests are run on the P438, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see
function group "MAIN").
3.4.1 PC Link (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is done through the PC link. In order for
data transfer between the P438 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P438.
There is an operating program available as an accessory for control of the P438 (see
Chapter 13).
3-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Relay
3-5 PC link settings
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 Rear Port Communications Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
Communication between the P438 and the control station’s computer is done through
the communications interface. Several interface protocols are available at the rear port
communications interface 1. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is always supported.
The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P438:
IEC 60870-5-103, “Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, “Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2”, February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be entered in the
P438.
The rear port communications interface can be blocked through a binary signal input.
In addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal
input.
3-10 P438/EN M/Ad7-S // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-6 Rear port communications interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Cycl. data

state ILS tel.
COMM1: Baude rate COMM1: Delta V
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta I
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta P

monitoring
COMM1: Mon. Time COMM1: Delta f

polling
COMM1: Octet comm. COMM1: Delta T

address
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta Z

monitor on
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta phi

manufacturer
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta

address ASDU meas.v.ILS tel
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Delta t

sig. enable
COMM1: Select. COMM1: Contin.

spontan.sig. general scan
COMM1: Transm.
enab.cycl.dat
COMM1: Selected
protocol
COMM1: IEC
60870-5-103
COMM1: General
enable USER
COMM1: Command
blocking
MAIN: Test mode Commun. interface
COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block.USER
0: No COMM1: Sig./meas.
1: Yes val.block.
COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block EXT
MAIN: Prot. Ext.

disabled
48Z50FFA_EN
3-7 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Delta V COMM1: Address

state length ASDU
COMM1: Baude rate COMM1: Delta I COMM1: Octet 2

addr. ASDU
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta P COMM1: Addr.

length inf.obj.
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta f COMM1: Oct.3

monitoring addr. inf.obj.
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta T COMM1: Inf.No.

polling <->funct.type
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta Z COMM1: Time tag

comm. address length
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta phi COMM1: ASDU1 /

monitor on ASDU20 conv.
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta COMM1: ASDU2

manufacturer meas.v.ILS tel conversion
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta t COMM1: Initializ.

address ASDU signal
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Contin. COMM1: Balanced

sig. enable general scan operation
COMM1: Select. COMM1: Comm. COMM1: Direction

spontan.sig. address length bit
COMM1: Selected
protocol COMM1: Transm. COMM1: Octet 2 COMM1: Time-out
enab.cycl.dat comm. Addr. interval
COMM1: IEC
60870-5-101
COMM1: Cycl. data COMM1: Cause
ILS tel. transm. length
COMM1: General
enable USER
COMM1: Command
blocking
MAIN: Test mode

COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block.USER
Commun. interface
0: No
COMM1: Sig./meas.
1: Yes val.block.
COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block EXT
MAIN: Prot. Ext.

disabled
48Z50FGA_EN
3-8 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.

state enab.cycl.dat
COMM1: Baude rate COMM1: Cycl. data

ILS tel.
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I

monitoring
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P

polling
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f

comm. address
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta T

monitor on
COMM1: Name of COMM1: Delta Z

manufacturer
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta phi

address ASDU
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Delta

sig. enable meas.v.ILS tel
COMM1: Select. COMM1: Delta t

spontan.sig.
COMM1: Contin.
general scan
COMM1: Selected
protocol
COMM1: IEC
60870-5, ILS
COMM1: General
enable USER
1: Yes
COMM1: Command
blocking
Commun. interface
MAIN: Test mode
COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block.USER
0: No
COMM1: Sig./meas.
1: Yes val.block.
COMM1: Sig./meas.
Block EXT
MAIN: Prot. Ext.

disabled
48Z50FHA_EN
3-9 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-10 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
Octet 2
Comm.Add DNP3
Ph-Ph
PhasePhase
3-11 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Rear port communications interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
3-13 Checking spontaneous signals
3-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.3 Rear Port Communications Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
Rear port communications interface 2 supports the interface protocol based on

IEC 60870-5-103.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P438.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
3-14 Setting the rear port communications interface 2
3-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting parameters.
3-15 Checking spontaneous signals
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.4 Communications Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3)
Application
Communications interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link
between two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be
transmitted. Whereas communications interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information
interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access,
communication interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will
transmit real time signals (InterMiCOM teleprotection interface). Communications
interface 3 is mainly used to exchange information for teleprotection (protective
signaling). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be
transmitted.
Physical medium
Communications interface 3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication
interface. The following physical media are available for data transmission:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n G r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting
parameter is visible only if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.
After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated with this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General Enable USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d R a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel's requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
(C O M M 3 : S o u r c e A d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i v i n g A d d r e s s can be set
to different values, thus avoiding that the device communicate with itself.
The InterMiCOM teleprotection interface provides independent transmission of eight

binary signals in each direction. For the send signals (C O M M 3 : F c t . S e n d x
A s s i g n , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs
(OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals (C O M M 3 : F c t . R e c . x A s s i g n ,
with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be
chosen.
3-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

( C O M M 3 : O p e r . M o d e R e c e i v e x , with x = 1 t o 8 ) , thus defining the
required checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically
selected telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal
encoding along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual
balance of "Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct Intertrip'
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct Intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command-based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-16). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select the binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8
and set the operating mode to 'Direct Intertrip'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select the binary signal from groups 5 to 8 and
set the operating mode to 'Permissive'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select the binary signal from groups 1 to 8 and
set the operating mode to 'Permissive'
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
47Z1030A_EN
3-16 Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Communication monitoring
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - O u t C o m m . F a u l t is used to monitor the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct telegram
received). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission
times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking
scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s F a u l t
and C H E C K : C o m m u n i c . F a u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals
are automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C O M M 3 : D e f a u l t V a l u e R e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG using the C O M M 3 : S i g . A s g . C o m m . F a u l t setting.
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - O u t L i n k F a i l . is used to determine a persistent

failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
C O M M 3 : C o m m . L i n k F a i l u r e and C H E C K : C o m m . L i n k F a i l . C O M M 3
are issued.
3-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Message
received
Character frame &

Source address check
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals

accepted
(Re-)Trigger
COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault
[120 033]
COMM3:
Communications
1 fault
[120 043]
COMM3: Time-out
link fail
[120 035]
COMM3: Comm. link

1 failure
[120 044]
47Z1031B_EN
3-17 Message processing and communication monitoring
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication
link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as an updating measured value C O M M 3 : N o . T e l . E r r o r s
p . u . and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.T.Err.,Max,Stored.
If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t T e l e g r . E r r o r s is exceeded the
corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m . E x c e e d . , T e l . E r r .
and C H E C K : L i m . E x c e e d . , T e l . E r r . will be issued. All the corrupted telegrams
are counted (C O M M 3 : N o . T e l e g r a m E r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the
stored maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset using
C O M M 3 : R s e t . N o . T l g . E r r . U S E R (as well as via the binary signal
C O M M 3 : R e s e t N o . T l g . E r r . E X T ).
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : S t a t e S e n d x and C O M M 3 : S t a t e R e c e i v e x , with
x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for the commissioning of the
protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the desired bit pattern (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p B a c k S e n d ) the test can be triggered using
C O M M 3 : L o o p B a c k T e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time
set at C O M M 3 : H o l d T i m e f o r T e s t . For this test only, the source address is set
to ' 0 '; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can
be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p B a c k R e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p B a c k R e c e i v e . As soon
as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to
the normal send mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM teleprotection interface, the loopback
test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The transmission channel
including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual binary
signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d S i g n a l f o r T e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . S t a t e f o r T e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d S i g n a l , T e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset
value for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d T i m e f o r T e s t . The 7 remaining binary
signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual
values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device,
e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode
is automatically reset and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
3-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5 Communications Interface IEC 61850

(Function Groups IEC GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and
the Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 Communications Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now the new IEC 61850 communication standard has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation, with the description of the IEC 61850 data model used
with the P438, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of the data, properties and services, available from the device, that
are to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two
interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the
I E C : E t h e r n e t M e d i a parameter. For the optical interface on the Ethernet
communications module the user may either select as an ordering option the ST
connector or the SC connector with 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector
supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P438 can be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
IEC 61850 Ethernet-based communication protocol is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.

Function group IEC can be activated by setting the I E C : I E C 6 1 8 5 0 C o m m u n i c .
parameter. This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module
is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this function
group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
IEC: General Enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE are not
automatically activated in the device. Activation occurs either when the I E C : E n a b l e
C o n f i g u r a t i o n command is executed, or automatically when the device is switched
online at M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d .
Client Log-on
Ethernet communications no longer occur in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P438 can supply up to 16 clients with information.
3-28 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850, clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the P438 functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization is
effected via a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the
network, and in the second operating mode the P438 requests the device specific time
signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no
longer received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically
active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independently of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, reverse interlocking, transfer
tripping or decentralized substation interlocking. In the future the "Goose Message" will
therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by
'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE enables transmission
of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values
or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with
the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With
IEC-GOOSE the P438 at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information.
Communication with the
MiCOM S1 support
software via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated MiCOM S1
support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished
over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication
and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P438 provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE makes it possible to transmit, quickly and
securely, trip commands, blocking, contacts' position and enabling signals as well as
other signals.
"Goose Messages" are transmitted only by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G O O S E : G e n . O b j O r . S u b s t E v e n t . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
GOOSE: General Enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the
I E C : E n a b l e C o n f i g u r a t i o n command is executed or automatically when the
device is switched online with M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d . In addition function
group IEC must be configured and enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE, up to 32 logic binary state signals from the P438 can be sent. Selection of
binary state signals is made by setting
G O O S E : O u t p u t n F c t . A s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The assignment of data object
indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the
assignment to GOOSE outputs.
A GOOSE message is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured
binary state signal or an external device. There are numerous sending repetitions in
fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, and
2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, the GOOSE
message is then sent cyclically at 2-second intervals.
3-30 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
In order to have unambiguous identification of the GOOSE sent, characteristics such as

the Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through setting parameters. Further characteristics are the "Dataset Configuration
Revision" with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
GOOSE-DataSet: LLN0$GooseST
Identification: Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID: 12288
Goose ID: "Local IED"
DataSet Ref. : "Local IEDSystem/LLNO$GooseST"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range: Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

… …
Server nameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
64Z6090A_EN
3-18 Basic structure of sent GOOSE
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic state signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n F c t . A s s i g . , where n = 1 to 16) is
made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received the GOOSE message is selected by setting the
GOOSE ID, Application ID and 'DataSet Reference' which includes the information
wanted. With the further setting of the data object index and the data attribute index
through parameters, the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected.
The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset
Configuration Revision’ that are also included in the GOOSE received.
Each GOOSE message includes time information on the validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the validity
period has elapsed before this GOOSE message is received again (i.e. because of a
fault in communication), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values at G O O S E : I n p u t n D e f a u l t .
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P438 provides, as an additional functionality, the GSSE
function group (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE makes it
possible to transmit, quickly and securely, logic binary state signals such as trip
commands, blocking and enabling signals as well as other signals.
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G S S E : G e n . S u b s t . S t a t . E v e n t . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data
points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.)
become visible.
GSSE: General Enable USER.
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. Activation occurs either when the I E C : E n a b l e
C o n f i g u r a t i o n command is executed or automatically when the device is switched
on-line at
M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d . In addition the IEC function group must be
configured and enabled.
3-32 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting G S S E : O u t p u t n F c t . A s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each
selected state signal is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE
(G S S E : O u t p u t n B i t P a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this state signal.
A GSSE message is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state
signal. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send
repetition occurs at the given cycle time set for G S S E : M i n . C y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
using the G S S E : I n c r e m e n t parameter. Should no further state changes occur up
to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . C y c l e ) , then
the GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a sent GSSE message, the IED name is
used which was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n F c t . A s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32)
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D N a m e ) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(G S S E : B i t P a i r ) .
Each GSSE message includes time information on the validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the validity
period has elapsed before this GSSE message is received again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default values ( G S S E : I n p u t n D e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings and signals for function group GOOSE are described in chapters 7
and 8.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P438 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P438, the P438 calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Ready to synchronize
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P438 checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P438. If the P438 does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-19 IRIG-B interface
3-34 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P438 includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. A password
can be assigned to each of the function keys F1 to Fx at
F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d F u n c t . K e y x so that the function key will be enabled only
after the password is entered. The default setting (as of version -613) however requires
no password entry when pressing a function key.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure 3-19. When a

password has been configured the respective function key will remain active, after
password entry, during the time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m .
Thereafter the function key will be disabled until the password is entered again.
The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. (With the default setting, i.e. no password
assigned, the function key is always active.)
Configuration of function
keys with a single function
Each function key may be assigned a single function by selecting a logic state signal at
F _ K E Y : F c t . A s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception:
H M I : T r i g . M e n u J m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing
the corresponding function key on the P438.
Configuration of function
keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function, each function key may be assigned one of the two menu
jump lists at F _ K E Y : F c t . F x A s s i g n (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the list at
H M I : T r i g . M e n u J m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu
jump list are triggered in sequence by pressing repeatedly the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x (x: 1 or 2).

Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be
selected.
Note: LED indicators - including the six positioned directly next to the function keys - are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective
function key configuration.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
READ key
Similarly to the setting at H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x up to 16 functions can also
be selected from the menu jump list at H M I : F c t . R e a d K e y . They are triggered in
sequence by pressing repeatedly the "READ" key.
Operating mode of the

function keys
For each function key the operating mode can be selected at
F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g M o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether
the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode 'Key' the
selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode
'Switch' the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Handling keys
If the LCD backlight is switched off it will automatically light up again when a function key
or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will be triggered only when the
respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
3-36 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
F_KEY: Fct.
F1 Assign
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected Function Activate Function
F_KEY: Operating
Mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 F_KEY: State F1
[ 080 122 ]
2
1: Key
2: Switch
1) Keys, local control

40Z5003C_UK
3-20 Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function, one of the two group resetting
functions or a menu jump list.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P438 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system.
The functions that will be activated in the P438 by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The typical response time is
less than 10 ms, although for reliability it is recommended that the initiating signal is
maintained for at least 20 ms so that it will be reliably detected by the P438. When a
general start is apparent this response time may be extended to 40 ms under
unfavorable conditions.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several binary signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands

are not mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog module as these have an
increased reaction time due to internal processing.
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence ('Active "High"' mode) or the absence ('Active "Low"' mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic ' 1 ' signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input - 'Low' or 'High' - is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
binary signal input.
Filter function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference
peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low",
Filt.'). Where this function is enabled a status change at the binary logic input is signaled
only when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of
sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set
at I N P : F i l t e r .
3-38 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-21 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group RTDmA)
The P438 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current is fed
to the P438 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for connection of a
resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC is displayed as a measured operating value. The current that is
conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating
value. In addition, it is monitored by the limit value monitoring function to detect whether
it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
The measured temperature is also displayed as a measured operating value and

monitored by the limit value monitoring function to determine whether it exceeds or falls
below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
Disabling or enabling the

measured data input
function
The measured data input can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
3-22 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-40 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.1 Direct Current Input
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example. If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that
the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, it may be necessary for certain
applications to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range
with a higher or lower sensitivity. By setting the value pair R T D m A : I D C x and
R T D m A : I D C , l i n x , the user specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the
current that is monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting
points, which are called "interpolation points", are connected by straight lines in an
IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify
two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting values (see figure 3-23). Up to
20 interpolation points are available for implementing a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only monotonically
increasing curve is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the
C H E C K : I n v a l i d S c a l i n g I D C signal will be generated.
IDC,lin / IDC, nom

1.2
1.1
IDC,lin 20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDC,lin 1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC / IDC, nom
IDC 1 IDC 20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-23 Example of the conversion of 4-10 mA input current to 0-20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom

Enable IDC p.u.
D5Z52KEC_UK
3-24 Example of a characteristic having five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a
broken line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting R T D m A : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the
current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of ‘ 0 ’.
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold, R T D m A : I D C < O p e n C i r c u i t , the R T D m A : O p e n C i r c .
2 0 m A i n p . signal is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA input against overloading.
If it exceeds the fixed threshold of 24.8 mA, the R T D m A : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A I n p u t
signal is issued.
3-42 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-25 Analog direct current input
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-26 Scaling of the linearized measured value
3-44 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
This input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping curve
R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in the DIN IEC 751 standard. If
the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no
further calibration is required.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the R T D m A : P T 1 0 0
F a u l t y signal is issued.
3-27 Temperature measurement using a resistance thermometer
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P438 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user..
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually using a setting parameter, or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on
the selected operating mode.
Blocking the output relays

The P438 offers the option of blocking all output relays using a setting parameter or by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled using appropriately configured binary inputs.
In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e. relays in
a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in a normally
closed arrangement (NC) are triggered.
This does not apply to the relays associated with the C H E C K : A l a r m ( r e l a y ) or

M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y signals. Self-monitoring alarms are thus correctly indicated.
If the self-monitoring feature detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in
Chapter 10, which will lead to a blocking of protection), all output relays are reset
regardless of the set operating mode or signal configuration.
3-46 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
OUTP: USER Outp

Rel Block
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP: Outp.
1 ≥1 Relays Blocked
[ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: Block 1: Yes
Outp.Rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN: Prot. Ext.
Disabled
[ 038 046 ]
CHECK: Hardware
Fault
304 950
OUTP: Oper. Mode

K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
4 -K xxx
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: Follower
2: Follower Latching
≥1
3: Follower Rst on Flt
4: Follower Rst onStart
5: Inverted & ≥1 OUTP: State K xxx
[ zzz zzz ]
6: Inverted Latching &
&
& ≥1
OUTP: Fct. K xxx & S1 1

Assign
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected Signals
&
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress OUTP: Latching
[ 035 000 ] 1 Reset
& [ 040 088 ]
OSCIL: System
Disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
Latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1 1
100 ms
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
OUTP: Reset
Latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
50Z0141A_UK
3-28 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it using a setting
parameter. Therefore protection must be disabled. Triggering persists for the duration
of the set hold time.
3-29 Testing the output relays
3-48 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group mA_OP)
Measured values made available by the P438 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD-coded output, however, is possible, regardless of whether the
device is equipped with analog module Y or not.
Disabling or enabling
the measured data
output function
Measured data output can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
3-30 Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured
data output
Measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that the
function m A _ O P : O u t p u t e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If
m A _ O P : O u t p u t e n a b l e d E X T has not been assigned to a binary signal
input, then measured data output is always enabled.
3-31 Enabling measured data output
3-50 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD or analog output of measured values is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output function is reset either using a setting parameter or an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
The LED indicators have been reset.
mA_OP: Reset
Output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
mA_OP: Reset mA_OP: Output

Output EXT Reset
[ 036 087 ] [ 037 117 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER mA_OP: Reset
[ 003 002 ] meas.val.outp.
1: Execute 304 601
MAIN: Reset
Indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
Indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A_UK
3-32 Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device’s inherent setting
range.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.1 BCD Measured Data Output
The user can select a measured value for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measured value is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time m A _ O P : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measured value value.
Output of measured
event values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate
output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold
time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is
re-started. If the hold time has been set to ’Blocked’, the measured operating value
that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Scaling of BCD output

The resolution for measured data output is defined by setting the scaling factor.
The scaling factor should be selected so that the value 399 is not exceeded by the
maximum measured value to be output. If this should occur or if the measured value
is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the value for "Overflow" (all relays
triggered) is transmitted.
M x ,max
M x , scal =
Scaling Factor
where:
M x , scal : scaled measured value
M x,max maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
3-52 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-33 BCD measured data output
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.2 Analog Measured Data Output
Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measured values available in the P438 for output in
the form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured
operating value.
The selected measured value is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time m A _ O P : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measured value value.
Output of measured
event values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measured value
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate
output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold
time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is
re-started. If the hold time has been set to ’Blocked’, the measured operating value
that has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output
relays assigned to the output channels are configured for m A _ O P : V a l u e A - x
O u t p u t , since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see
terminal connection diagrams).
3-54 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog

display
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measured value range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value
for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog
output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-34.
Measured value range

to be output
The measured value range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: Minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measured value range to be output
Mx,max: Maximum value to be output
This measured value range to be output is defined by setting the following

parameters:
mA_OP: Scaled Min. Val. A-x mA_OP: Scaled Knee Val.

A-x
mA_OP: Scaled MAX. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measured value (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program
S&R-103 - PC Support Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measured values Range

Measured values of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values
Measured values to be Range

output
Measured values with knee- Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
point to be output
Scaled measured values Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
with a scaled knee-point to
be output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set "Scal. min. value Ax" ...

values in the data model ... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ...
... "Scal. max. value Ax"
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display
range
The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
mA_OP: AnOut Min. Val. A-x

mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-x
mA_OP: AnOut Max. Val. A-x
Measured values Analog display values

Measured values in the "AnOut min. val. A-x" ... ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
range "Measured values to ... ... "AnOut max. val. A-x"
be output" (Value A-x valid)
Measured values: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measured values Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-56 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measured value to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vn with Vn = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vn
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vn with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measured values Range

Measured values of the 0 V ... 150 V
variable Mx
Associated scaled measured 0 ... 1
values
Measured values to be output Range

Measured values with knee- 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
point to be output
Associated scaled measured 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
values
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measured values Analog display values

Measured values in the 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
range "Measured values to
be output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vn ... 1 Vn
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Settings/Configuration/
Address Description Current value
056 020 mA_OP: Current Loop mA Outp Enabled
031 074 mA_OP: General Enable USER Yes
053 000 mA_OP: Function A-1 Assign MAIN:
Voltage A-B p.u.
010 114 mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 mA_OP: Scaled Min. Val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02
Vn)
037 105 mA_OP: Scaled Knee Val. A-1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10
Vn)
037 106 mA_OP: Scaled Max. Val. A-1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00
Vn)
037 107 mA_OP: AnOut Min. Val. A-1 4 mA
037 108 mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-1 16 mA
037 109 mA_OP: AnOut Max. Val. A-1 18 mA
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
By setting m A _ O P : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output

current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum
measured value to be transmitted. The setting at m A _ O P : A n O u t M a x . v a l .
A - x defines the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be
transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve
sections with different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind
that only a monotonically increasing (rising/rising) or decreasing (falling/falling) curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If a vee or peak shape is
attempted, the signal C H E C K : I n v a l i d S c a l i n g A - x will be generated.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, set to M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n
E n a b l e d is switched on-line again.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value 18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
6
Min.
output value 4
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0.013 0.067 0.667 1.0 Mx,scal
19Z5265B_EN
D5Z52KFA
3-34 Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-58 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-35 Analog measured data output
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P438 using the communications interface.
mA_OP: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P438 either in BCD data form or
as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output
function or the channels of the analog measured data output function are configured
accordingly.
3-60 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P438 has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other 12 LED indicators are
freely configurable. These freely configurable multicolor LED indicators may be set to
emit red, green or amber light, but amber cannot be configured individually as it results
from the LED indicator simultaneously emitting both red and green light.
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors), if
required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 1 (green) 'HEALTHY' Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) 'EDIT MODE' Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input mode. Only when the device
is in this mode, can setting parameters be changed by pressing the
and keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and Keypad')
H 2 (amber) 'OUT OF SERVICE' Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y .

H 3 (amber) 'ALARM' Permanently configured with function C H E C K : A l a r m ( L E D ) .
H 4 (red) 'TRIP' With the P438 this LED indicator is assigned the
M A I N : G e n . T r i p S i g n a l function by default. This assignment
can be modified.
H 4 (green) ---- This LED indicator may be freely configured to emit green light.
H 5 to H 16 ---- Both colors (red & green) may be configured individually and freely for
these LED indicators.
The figure below shows the layout of the LED indicators situated on the front panel user
interface (HMI) of the 40TE & 84TE cases.
H4
H3
TRIP
ALARM
F1 H18
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1
H17
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
F2 H19
H5
H6
F3 H20
H7
H8 C
G
H9
H10
G F4 H21
H11
H12
G G F5
G
H13 H22
H14
H15
H16
G F6 H23
12 Z6100B_EN
3-36 Layout of the LED indicators situated on the front panel user interface (HMI)
P438/EN M/Ad7-S // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually using a setting
parameter or through an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main
Functions of the P438"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance,
depending on the selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:
• flashing / continuous,
• energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
• updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-62 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating
Mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-Hxx
12 (Red)
! G !
1: ES Updating
2: ES Manual Reset
3: ES Reset (Fault) ≥1
4: ES Reset (Syst.Dist)
5: NE Updating
6: NE Manual Reset
7: ES Updating Bl
8: ES Manual Reset Bl
9: ES Reset (Fault) Bl LED: State H xx
10: ES Rst (Syst.Dst) Bl & Red
[ zzz zzz ]
11: NE Updating Bl
&
12: NE Manual Reset Bl &
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.Assig.
Hxx Red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED: State H xx
Signal n & Green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected Signals
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.Assig.
Hxx Green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx
Signal 3 m out of n (Green)
Signal n
Selected Signals &
&
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress
[ 035 000 ]
&
OSCIL: System
Disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
12Z6200A_UK
3-37 Configuration and operating mode of the LED indicators
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Main Functions of the P438 (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values
The secondary phase currents and voltages of the system transformers are fed into the
P438 and are – electrically isolated – converted to standardized electronics levels.
The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P438 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection arrangement of the measuring circuits on the P438 must also be set.
Figures 3-38 and 3-40 show the standard connection. The phase of the digitized
currents is rotated by 180° by this setting.
The P438 is designed for operation in Classic single feed or Autotransformer feed
modes. Figure 3-38 shows the connection in Classic single feed mode and figure 3-39
the connection in Autotransformer feed mode.
3-64 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Supply
Catenary
I>
MAIN: Feeding
Mode
[ 010 135 ]
1
2
1: Classic Single
Feed
2: Auto-
Transformer Feed
MAIN: Vn VT.
c Sec.
[ 010 009 ]
1U
2U V
MAIN: Line CT MAIN: In Device

c Orientation [ 010 003 ]
[ 010 004 ]
Icat
X X.Y I
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Catenary
Rail
48Z5411A_UK
3-38 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Classic single feed' operating mode
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
Supply Catenary
Supply Feeder
MAIN: Feeding
Mode
[ 010 135 ]
1
2
I>
1: Classic Single
Feed
2: Auto-
Transformer Feed
MAIN: Vn VT.
I> c Sec.
[ 010 009 ]
1U
2U Vcat
3U Vfdr
4U
S
+ V
-
MAIN: Line CT MAIN: In

c Orientation c Device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
Icat
X X.Y Icat
Ifdr X X.Y Ifdr
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1) S
+ I
-
Feeder
Catenary
Rail
48Z5412A_UK
3-39 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Autotransformer feed' operating mode
3-66 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the protection of the catenary in normal train operation, the P438 also
provides defrost protection. An additional current transformer must be connected when
the device is in the 'Defrost operation' operating mode. Figure 3-40 shows the
connection with 'Defrost operation'. In this operating mode, circuit breakers Q1, Q3 and
Q4 are closed whereas circuit breaker Q2 is open. It is important to ensure - from the
installation side - that circuit breaker Q2 is opened before circuit breakers Q3 and Q4 are
closed.
Supply
Catenary
Q1 Q2
Orientation [ 010 003 ]
[ 010 004 ]
Icat
X X.Y I
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: Idfrst MAIN: Idfrst,nom

CT Orientat'n Device
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
Idfrst
X X.Y Idfrst
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Catenary 1
Q3
Catenary 2
Q4
Rail
48Z5413A_UK
3-40 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits for 'Defrost operation'
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement
The P438 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values.
Set minimum thresholds must be exceeded in order for measured values to be
displayed, in orderso as to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these minimum
thresholds are not exceeded, 'Not Measured' is displayed in place of a value. The
following measured values are displayed:
The current I used by the protection functions.

Defrost protection current Idfrst
The voltage V used by the protection functions.
Active and reactive power P, Q
Active power factor cos ϕ
Load angle ϕ
Load flow direction
Operating impedance Z
Operating reactance X
Operating Resistance R
Frequency f
The second harmonic current component: I(2fn)
When the 'Autotransformer feed' operating mode is set the following additional measured
values are displayed:
Catenary current Icat

Feeder current Ifdr
Catenary voltage Vcat
Feeder voltage Vfdr
When the optional processor module fitted with an integrated DSP coprocessor the
following additional measured values are displayed:
The third harmonic current component: I(3fn)

The fifth harmonic current component: I(5fn)
When the harmonics adaptation feature is enabled in the distance protection function the
following additional measured values are displayed:
The ratio of the second, third and fifth harmonic current components to the
fundamental component of the current: kHarm,ΣI(xfn)/I(fn)
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if the self-
monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-68 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P438.
MAIN: Minimum I
MAIN: Hardware Measurem't
fault [ 011 030 ]
306 018
I
Icat
Ifdr
MAIN: Current
I p.u.
[ 004 111 ]
MAIN: Current
Icat p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN: Current
Ifdr p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T.
prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Current
I prim.
[ 004 110 ]
MAIN: Current
Icat prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN: Current
Ifdr prim.
[ 006 040 ]
48Z5432A_UK
3-41 Measured operating data - Current
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
Harmonic current
components
The harmonic current components are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to
the nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. When the optional
processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted the additional third and
fifth harmonic current components are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to
the nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P438.
When distance protection is operated with the harmonics adaptation feature enabled
then dynamic harmonics factor M A I N : k H a r m . Σ I ( x f n ) / I ( f n ) is displayed.
3-70 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-42 Measured operating data - Harmonic current components and harmonics factor for distance protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the transformer needs to be set in the P438.
MAIN: Minimum V
C&VTS: VTS Volts Meas'mt
Failure [ 011 032 ]
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
V
Vcat
Vfdr
MAIN: Voltage
V p.u.
[ 004 113 ]
MAIN: Voltage
Vcat p.u.
[ 005 043 ]
MAIN: Voltage
Vfdr p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
MAIN: Vn V.T.
prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Voltage
V prim.
[ 004 112 ]
MAIN: Voltage
Vcat prim.
[ 005 042 ]
MAIN: Voltage
Vfdr prim.
[ 006 042 ]
48Z5433A_UK
3-43 Measured operating data - voltage
3-72 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values angle,

power, active power factor
and load flow direction
If there is a fault in the hardware or in the voltage-measuring circuit, the measured
values are not determined.
The fundamental components of current and voltage are used for determining the
measured values.
Angles and load flow direction are determined only if the current exceeds the minimum
threshold of 0.1 In and if the voltage exceeds the threshold of 1 V. The active power
factor is determined if, in addition to the previously mentioned thresholds, the apparent
power exceeds the threshold of 0.05 Sn.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MCMON: VTS Volts Failure

[ 038 023 ] & &
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
I I > 0.1 In
V V > 1 V
MAIN: Frequency fn
[ 010 030 ]
C
fn
MAIN: Load Angle

phi
fn [ 004 167 ]
MAIN: Load Angle

/100° phi p.u.
[ 004 078 ]
-45°> N<135° 1
-45°< N>135° 2
MAIN: Load Flow

1 … 2 Direction
[ 004 166 ]
MAIN: Load Flow

1 Forward
[ 039 076 ]
MAIN: Load Flow

2 Reverse
[ 039 077 ]
1: Forward
Directional
2: Reverse
Directional
48Z6310A_UK
3-44 Measured operating data – Angle and load flow direction
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MCMON: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ] &
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
MAIN: Frequency
fn
[ 010 030 ]
C
fn
1)
Icat (I)
fn
1)
MAIN: Active
Ifdr Power P p.u.
[ 004 051 ]
fn
Vcat (V) 1)
MAIN: Reac.
Power Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
S > 0.05 Sn
&
MAIN: Active
Power Factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN: In C.T.
Prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Vn V.T.
Prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Active
Power P Prim.
[ 004 050 ]
MAIN: Reac.
Power Q Prim.
[ 004 052 ]
1) depending on setting 010 135 MAIN: Feeder Mode

48Z6311A_UK
3-45 Measured operating data – Power and active power factor
3-74 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating impedance,
reactance and resistance
If there is a fault in the hardware or in the voltage-measuring circuit, the measured
values are not determined.
The fundamental components of current and voltage are used for determining the
measured values. The values are determined only if the current exceeds the minimum
threshold of 0.1 In and if the voltage exceeds the threshold of 1 V.
C&VTS: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
I
V
V
MAIN: Frequency fn
[ 010 030 ]
MAIN: Load
impedance Z p.u
[ 005 004 ]
MAIN: In device
[ 010 003 ]
MAIN: Vn VT. Sec..

[ 010 009 ]
MAIN: Load
impedance Z sec
[ 005 000 ]
MAIN: Load
reactance X sec
[ 005 195 ]
MAIN: Load
resist. R sec
[ 005 197 ]
MAIN: In C.T.
prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Vn V.T.
prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Load imped

Z prim.
[ 005 005 ]
MAIN: Load react

X prim.
[ 005 196 ]
MAIN: Load
resist. R prim.
[ 005 198 ]
48Z5415A_UK
3-46 Measured operating data - operating impedance, reactance and resistance
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency
The P438 determines the frequency from the voltage. The frequency is determined only
if the voltage exceeds a minimum threshold of 10 V and if there is no fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.
C&VTS: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018
V
MAIN: Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
C&VTS: Frequency
fn
[ 010 030 ]
MAIN: Frequency
f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
48Z5416A_UK
3-47 Frequency measurement
3-76 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the Protection Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the relevant protection functions in
the configuration and cancelling all the others, the user creates an individually configured
device adapted to the specific application. Parameters, signals and measured values of
cancelled protection functions are not displayed on the user interface (HMI). Functions
of general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions
(MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Cancelling a protection
function
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.

None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled are assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the protection function are assigned to a binary output or an
LED indicator.
No signal or measured value of the protection function to be cancelled are selected in
a list setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the protection function to be cancelled. If, for
example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, access the L I M I T : L i m i t
T h r e s h o l d s I < > parameter and set its value to 'Disabled'. To re-include the
"LIMIT" function in the device configuration, access the same parameter and set its value
to 'Enabled'.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (for example: “LIMIT”) In the following
description of the protection functions, it is presumed that this protection function is
included in the configuration.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

protection function
Protection functions that are included in the configuration may still be disabled using a
function setting or binary inputs. The protection device can only be disabled or enabled
through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T and
M A I N : E n a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When neither or
only one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as "Protection
externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible –
i.e. both are at logic level = "1" – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
Note: The M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal is not issued when the protection

device is disabled using a binary signal input, configured at
M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T ,.
3-48 Enabling or disabling protection
3-78 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.4 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
Turning an autotransformer on or reclosing a circuit breaker on a locomotive, after

passing through a neutral section, could lead to inrush currents that are interpreted as
starting criteria by the protection device P438. The inrush stabilization fonction detects
such inrush currents and can selectively prevent starting of selected protection functions.
Blocking inrush
stabilization
Inrush stabilization is blocked if M A I N : I n r . I ( 2 f n ) / I ( f n ) S G x is set to 'Blocked' or
if an external blocking signal has been triggered.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Inrush
MAIN: Protection Restr. Ready
Active & [ 041 024 ]
306 001
MAIN: Block.
Inrush RstrEXT
[ 039 169 ]
MAIN: Inr.
I(2fn)/I(fn)SGx
[ * ]
Blocked
*
Setting MAIN: Inr.
I(2fn)/I(fn)SGx
Group 1 017 098

Group 2 001 091
Group 3 001 092
Group 4 001 093
48Z6313A_UK
3-49 Blocking inrush stabilization
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation of inrush
stabilization
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current component to the fundamental. Inrush stabilization will start
when this ratio exceeds the threshold set at M A I N : I n r . I ( 2 * f n ) / I ( f n ) S G x .
The current triggers M A I N : I > E n a b . I n r . R e s t . S G x and
M A I N : I > L i f t I n r . R s t r . S G x limit the operating range of inrush stabilization.
The function will be blocked if the current drops below or exceeds these set thresholds.
A maximum hold-time for inrush stabilization can be set at

MAIN: t lift rush rstr.SGx.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Inrush MAIN: I> Lift MAIN: t Lift

Restr. Ready C Inr.Rstr.SGx Inr.Rstr. SG
[ 041 024 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Inr.Restr.
I & 1 t & Triggered
[ 041 025 ]
MAIN: I> Enab.

Inr.Rest.SGx
[ * ]
MAIN: Inr.
I(2fn)/I(fn)SGx
[ * ]
MAIN: I(2fn)/
I(fn)
310 052
*
Setting MAIN: I> Lift MAIN: t Lift MAIN: I> Enab. MAIN: Inr.
Inr.Rstr.SGx Inr.Rstr. SG Inr.Rest.SGx I(2fn)/I(fn)SGx
Group 1 017 095 019 001 017 058 017 098

Group 2 001 085 019 002 017 113 001 091
Group 3 001 086 019 003 017 254 001 092
Group 4 001 087 019 004 017 255 001 093
48Z6314A_UK
3-50 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
3-80 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting criteria for

inrush stabilization
Inrush stabilization is featured in function groups DIST, BUOC, DTOC, IDMT and
DELTA. Depending on the setting of parameters M A I N : F c t . A s g . I n r . R s t r . S G x ,
starting decisions of the above function groups will be selectively prevented.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Inr.Restr. MAIN: Inrush

& stabil. trigg
Triggered 306 014
[ 041 025 ]
MAIN: Fct.Asg.
Inr.Rstr.SGx
[ * ]
Starting signal 1
m out of n
Starting signal 2
...
Starting signal n
Selected
starting signals
Setting MAIN: Fct.Asg.

Inr.Rstr.SGx
Group 1 017 093
Group 2 017 064
Group 3 017 082
Group 4 017 083
48Z5431A_UK
3-51 Selecting starting conditions for the inrush stabilization
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.5 Directional Voltage Memory
Using the measured values U and I, a fault's resistance and direction are determined by
the distance, high impedance and directional overcurrent protection functions. Voltage
memory is available so that direction measurement will function correctly, even with very
low fault voltages.
The voltage V is fed to a voltage memory. If the voltage exceeds the default value of
0.55 Vn and if there is no general starting of the distance protection function, then the
voltage memory will be synchronized. Synchronization requires approximately 10 full
cycles.
If the magnitude of the voltage V drops below 0.5 Vn or if distance protection starts,
voltage memory synchronization will be terminated. The voltage memory is then free-
running and remains enabled for 6 s.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: General
starting
[ 036 000 ] &
BUOC: Starting I>
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: Starting I>>

[ 036 115 ]
> 0.55 * Vnom
1 MAIN: Vmemory
& & S1 1 enable
10 T 305 049
V R MAIN: tVmemory
active
1 [ 040 034 ]
6.0 s
C C
V(memory)
48Z6318A_EN
3-52 Voltage memory
3-82 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.6 Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blockings can be defined using 'm out of n' parameters. The selected
functions may then be blocked using an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-53 Multiple blocking
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.7 Blocked/Faulty
If the protection functions are blocked, this condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of amber LED indicator H 2 on the user interface (HMI) and also by a signal
from an output relay mapped to M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition, the user can
select the functions that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting an
‘m out of n’ parameter. If the "Blocked/Faulty" signal is included in the selection of the
output relay with the assignation "Trip command" a signal with high priority will be
generated. The protection will remain active in this case.
3-54 "Blocked/Faulty" signal
3-84 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.8 Close Command
As of version –606 the circuit breaker may be closed either by the auto-reclose function
(RECLS) integrated in the P438, by a setting or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The close command issued from the user interface (HMI), the setting
parameter or the binary signal input will only be executed if there is no main-trip or re-trip
command present at the P438. Moreover an appropriate enable condition must be met.
Additionally the close command is not executed when, with the setting of
M A I N : C l C m d I n h i b . b y C B C l to 'Yes', there is a "CB closed" position signal
present.
The duration of the close command can be set. The close command is terminated when
a main-trip command or re-trip command is issued.
Close command counter
The number of close commands is counted. This counter and the trip command counter
may be reset together or by "General Reset".
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
Signal
[ 039 101 ]
MAIN: Re-Trip
Signal
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN: CB Closed
Sig. EXT &
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN: ClCmd
Inhib.by CB Cl
[ 015 042 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: En.Man. MAIN: Rel.t.

Clos.Cmd.USER Enab. Man.Cmd
[ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ]
MAIN: Man Close

0 1 t Cmd. Enab.
[ 039 113 ]
1
0: No
MAIN: Man. Close MAIN: Man. Close
1: Yes Cmd. USER Cmd. EXT
[ 018 033 ] [ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Man. Close
0 & Command
500 ms [ 037 068 ]
1
&
0: don't execute
MAIN: Man.Cl.Cmd 1: execute
Enabl.EXT MAIN: CB Close
[ 041 023 ] Pulse Durn.
MAIN: Man. Close [ 015 067 ]
Cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ] MAIN: Close
1 t & Command
[ 037 009 ]
RECLS: Close
Command
303 021
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0 MAIN: No. Close

+ Commands
[ 009 055 ]
1 R
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.
C.Cl/Tr.Cmd USER
[ 003 007 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Rst.
Co.Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT
[ 005 210 ]
48Z6316A_UK
3-55 Close command
3-86 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.9 Fault Direction Signal
The direction decisions of the distance protection function are signaled.
reverse
3-56 Fault direction signal
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.10 Starting Signals and Trip Logic
General start
Starting signals from the distance, backup overcurrent, definite-time overcurrent,
inverse-time overcurrent and high impedance protection functions are collectively issued
as the "General Start" signal. The number of general starts is counted.
DIST: Starting MAIN: General

[ 036 135 ] starting
[ 036 000 ]
DELTA: Delta I
starting MAIN: No.
[ 038 060 ] + general start.
BUOC: Starting [ 004 000 ]
I> R
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: Starting
I>>
[ 036 115 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>H
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
48Z6315A_EN
3-57 General start
PIR Starting
In the event of the end of the main-trip and re-trip command a timer stage of 500 ms is
started. While this timer stage is running, the 'PIR Starting' signals are set.
(PIR: Automatic testing device for Catenary, with a pre-insertion/pre-closing resistor as a
line check)
PIR Main-Trip
Re-Trip
command PIR Re-Trip
3-58 PIR starting
3-88 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command
The P438 provides the following trip commands:
Main-Trip command
Re-Trip command
Back-Trip command
The functions required to trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n' parameter
independently for each of the trip commands. The trip command minimum trip time is
settable. The trip signals are present only as long as the conditions for the signal are
satisfied.
Block
MainTrip USER
Main-Trip
Block.
MainTrip EXT
Man. Main-Trip
MainTrip sig.
Main-Trip
'OR' gate tDWELL
MainTrip Cmd
Main-Trip
Latch
MainTrip Cmd?
3-59 Main-trip command
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
Block
ReTrip USER
Re-Trip
Block.
ReTrip EXT
Man. Re-Trip
ReTrip signal
Re-Trip
'OR' gate tDWELL
ReTrip Cmd
Re-Trip
Latch
ReTrip Cmd?
3-60 Re-trip command
3-90 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Block
BackTrip USER
Back-Trip
Block.
BackTrip EXT
Man. Back-Trip
BackTrip sig.
Back-Trip
'OR' gate tDWELL
BackTrip Cmd
Back-Trip
Latch
BackTrip Cmd?
3-61 Back-trip command
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command

The manual trip command may be issued using setting parameters or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. It will be issued only if the manual trip
command was enabled. The manual trip command issued using a setting parameter is
enabled only for a set time period. The manual trip command issued from an
appropriately configured binary signal input is enabled only for as long as the associated
enabling input is set.
Man.M-trip
cmd USER
Man.
MainTrip sig.
Man. Mtrip
cmd EXT
Man.Re-Trip
cmd USER
Man.
ReTrip signal
Man. ReTrip
cmd. EXT
Man.B-trip
cmd USER
Man.
BackTrip sig.
Man. Btrip
cmd. EXT
3-62 Manual trip command
3-92 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Latching of the trip

commands
For each of the trip commands, the user can specify by way of the appropriate setting
that it will operate in latching mode. If the latching mode is selected, the trip command
persists until it is reset using setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-63 Latch resetting
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands may be blocked using a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input, either selectively (see figure 3-59 to 3-61) or collectively
(see figure 3-64). The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands
are blocked collectively, this is indicated by a continuously illuminated amber LED
indicator H 2 on the user interface (HMI) and by a signal from an output relay mapped to
"Blocked/Faulty".
3-64 Collective blocking of the trip commands
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command counter

The trip commands are counted. These counters and the close command counter may
be reset together or by a "General Reset".
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RECLS: Cycle MAIN: No. Final

Running + Trip Cmds.
[ 037 000 ] & [ 004 005 ]
R
&
RECLS: Recl. Time 1 MAIN: Final Trip
Running [ 038 103 ]
[ 036 042 ]
RECLS: Recl. Time 2
Running
[ 036 221 ]
MAIN: H-Trip MAIN: No. Main-Trip
Command + Cmds.
[ 039 011 ] [ 009 005 ]
R
MAIN: Re-Trip MAIN: No. Re-Trip

Command + Cmds.
[ 039 012 ] [ 009 006 ]
R
MAIN: Back-Trip MAIN: No. Back-Trip

Command + Cmds.
[ 039 013 ] [ 009 007 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Rst.C.
Cl/Tr.Cmd USER
[ 003 007 ]
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Rst.Co.
Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT
[ 005 210 ]
48Z6317A_UK
3-65 Trip command counter
3-94 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
General trip signal

Trip signals from the Main-Trip command, the Re-Trip command and the Back-Trip
command are collectively issued as the "Gen Trip Signal" (general trip).
MAIN: Main-Trip MAIN: Gen. Trip

Signal Signal
MAIN: Re-Trip
Signal
MAIN: Back-Trip
Signal
48Z5016A_UK
3-66 General trip signal
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.11 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct time-tagging, the date and time
need to be set in the P438.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The P438 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the next full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
Note: It is not possible to use a signal input on the analog module Y as a minute
pulse input.
3-67 Date and time setting and clock synchronization
3-96 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronization source
The P438 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o Telegram including the time of day received via communication interface
COMM1/IEC (full time)
o Telegram including the time of day received via communication interface
COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o Minute signal pulse presented to a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-67 and
the paragraph above this figure.
With older device versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock synchronization
was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No conflicts have to
be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master, IRIG-
B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the
synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in
the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization
is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while
the SCADA communication is out of service.
For such applications the current device versions provide a selectable primary source
and back-up source for time of day synchronization that feature all of the four options
listed above.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
Synchronization is carried out from the primary source only as long as repeated
synchronization telegrams (or minute signal pulses) are received within the timeout
period set at M A I N : T i m e S y n c . T i m e - O u t . The backup source is required if
after the set time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.12 Resetting Mechanisms
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following mechanisms are available:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the
displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the
fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel
LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel user interface
(HMI). By selecting the required function at H M I : F c t . R e s e t K e y further
memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is
pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. For this example: Navigate to menu point
O S C I L : R e s e t R e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-
for-step description in Chapter 6 'User Interface (HMI)' section 'Reset'.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
O S C I L : R e s e t R e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . A s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (Assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . A s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . A s s i g n . R e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l R e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l R e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-98 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured in such a way that resetting of a specific memory is
assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similarly to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u J m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t L a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through H M I : F c t . R e a d K e y .
3-68 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the user interface (HMI)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
HMI: Reset Key OP_RC: Reset Record.

active ≥1 EXT
310 024 & [ 005 213 ]
HMI: Fct. Reset

Key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset Record.

EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
Reset 1 USER
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 &
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
MAIN: Group
Reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: Fct.Assign.
Reset 1
[ * ]
m out of n
x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

Reset 1 USER Reset 1 EXT Assign. Reset 1
OP_RC: Reset Record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249
12Z61RMB_UK
3-69 "CLEAR" key on the user interface (HMI) and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t R e c o r d . E X T ); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- MAIN: Rst.Co.Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT
- MT_RC: Reset Record. EXT
- OL_RC: Reset Record. EXT
- OSCIL: Reset Record. EXT
- RECLS: Reset Counters EXT
- CBM: Reset Meas.Val.EXT
- [005 255] MAIN: General Reset EXT
- [006 054] COMM3: Reset No.Tlg.Err.EXT
- [034 059]... [034 066] LOGIC: Reset x EXT (x=1...8)
- [036 087] RTDmA: Reset Output EXT
- [036 223] RECLS: Reset Recl.Time2 EXT
- [038 061] THERM: Reset Replica EXT
- [040 015] OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT
- [040 138] MAIN: Reset Latch.Trip EXT
- [065 001] MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT
3-100 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.13 Assigning the Rear Port Communication Interfaces to Physical

Communication Channels
Depending on the design of the communication module A there are up to two

communication channels available (see "Technical Data"). These physical
communication channels may be assigned to the rear port communication interfaces
COMM1 and COMM2.
If communication interface COMM1 is assigned to communication channel 2, then the

settings of communication interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communication channel 1. Communication channel 2 can only be used to transmit data
to and from the P438 if its PC link has been de-activated. As soon as the PC link is used
to transmit data, communication channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-70 Assigning the rear port communication interfaces to physical communication channels
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12.14 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P438, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces using protocols according to IEC will be marked
accordingly.
3-71 Setting the test mode
3-102 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Setting Group Selection (Function Group GROUP)
With the P438, four independent setting groups may be pre-set. The user may switch
between setting groups during operation without interrupting the protection function.
Selecting the setting group

The control path determining the active setting group (function setting or binary signal
input) may be selected using the function setting G R O U P : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or
the external signal G R O U P : C o n t r o l V i a U s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the
setting group is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
G R O U P : S e t t i n g G r p S e l U S E R or in accordance with external signals.
The setting group actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning
logic state signals G R O U P : A c t u a l S e t t i n g G r o u p or G R O U P : G r o u p
x Active.
Selecting the setting group

using binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for setting group selection, then the P438 first
checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for setting group
selection. If this is not the case, then the setting group selected using the function
setting will be active. The P438 also checks whether the signals present at the binary
signal inputs allow an unambiguous setting group selection. This is only true when only
one binary signal input is set to a logic level of ' 1 '. If more than one signal input is set to
a logic level of ' 1 ', then the setting group previously selected remains active. Should a
dead interval occur while switching between setting groups (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of ' 0 '), then the stored hold time is started. While this
timer stage is running, the previously selected setting group remains active. As soon as
a signal input has a logic level of ' 1 ', the associated setting group becomes active.
If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic level of ' 1 ',
the setting group selected using the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the setting group selection, then the setting group
selected using the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous setting group remains active while the stored hold timer stage is
running.
Setting group selection may also occur during a general starting condition. In this case,
the settings of all protection functions, for example the Impedance-Time Characteristics
of the distance protection, are immediately updated. For setting group selection, a
maximum inherent delay of approximately 100 ms must be taken into account. This
must be considered for the duration of the triggering signal when binary signal inputs are
used for setting group selection.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four setting groups.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
3-72 Activating the setting groups
3-104 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group CHECK)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P438 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
Tests during start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P438. If the P438 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P438 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory – the monitoring signal memory – along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Peripheral fault
By setting an 'm out of n' parameter, a peripheral fault can generate an alarm in addition
to the self-monitoring signals.
Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay mapped to
C H E C K : A l a r m . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-73 Monitoring signals
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P438 depends on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protection functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no settings are affected by the procedure. A warm
restart can also be triggered manually by a control action. During a warm restart
sequence the protection functions and the communication through serial interfaces
will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered
by the self-monitoring function, then the protection functions remain blocked but
communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted setting group is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part of
the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which setting in the group is corrupted.
A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means
that all the device's settings are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish
a safe initial state, the default values have been selected so that the protection
functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and
the value indicating settings loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.
3-106 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)

(as of version P438 -606)
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 'Troubleshooting’.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred
independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was
issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or display and clearing of the monitoring
signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A "memory retention
time" timer has been introduced to defuse this problem.
CHECK: Mon. Sig. Retention
Now device blocking only occurs when the same internal device fault is detected twice
during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a
warm restart. This timer is blocked is blocked by default so that, when an internal fault is
detected, the device will operate in the same way as the previous versions.

time tagging
(as of version P438 -606)
Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring
signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was
previously recorded. As of version P438 -606 the time when the device fault occurred
last is now recorded.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a

non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals, each
fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads or short circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be
cleared/reset.
Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC: Operat.
data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN: Oper.-relev.
signal
306 024
MAIN: General
reset USER + OP_RC: No. oper.
[ 003 002 ] data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMB_EN
3-74 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
3-108 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of 30 entries.
If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory clearance, the
C H E C K : O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry. Monitoring signals
prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be entered into the
monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by setting an
'm out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the user interface (HMI). Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the
corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The
contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or
through the PC or communication interface. The time and date information assigned to
the individual entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from
the user interface (HMI) or operating program.
Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (M T _ R C : N o . M o n i t . S i g n a l s ).
MT_RC: Mon. Signal

Record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN: Time tag

306 021
CHECK: Hardware
fault
304 950
Selected Monit.
sig.
MT_RC: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 CHECK: Overflow
≥1 MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC: No. Monit.
1 ≥1 Signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: Don't Execute
MT_RC: Reset 1: Execute
Record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A_UK
3-75 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
Overload Duration
In the event of an overload, the P438 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
P r o g r e s s signal.
OL_RC: Record. OL_DA: Overload

in progress + duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A_EN
3-76 Overload duration
3-110 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Measurement data stored

for the overload
During the overload, the device will store measurements relating to the circuit's thermal
state – using data from the thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the
end of the overload event.
OL_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Status OL_DA: Status

THERM replica THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: I OL_DA: Load

current THER
305 202
[ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: Object OL_DA: Object

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: Coolant OL_DA: Coolant

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: Pre-trip OL_DA: Pre-trip

time left t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: Temp. OL_DA: Offset

offset replica THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A_EN
3-77 Measured overload data of thermal overload protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists and overload recording starts if the current exceeds the set threshold:
T H E R M : S t a r t . F a c t . O L _ R C S G x . In this case, the P438 issues the
T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > signal.
Counting overload events
Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Starting OL_RC: No.
k*Iref> + overload
[ 041 108 ] [ 004 101 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
45Z63DXA_EN
3-78 Counting overload events
Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC
or communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_ R C : O v e r l .
M e m . O v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal.
3-112 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the user interface (HMI) or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
OL_RC: Record. C
in Progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 + CT200 OL_RC: Overl. Mem.

1 ≥1 Overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 007 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC: Overload
Recording n
[ * ]
OL_RC: Overload
n
Measured Value 1 Recording n
1 033 020
Measured Value 2
2 033 021
Measured Value 3
Measured Value n 3 033 022
MAIN: Time tag 4 033 023

306 021
5 033 024
OSCIL: Record. in & 6 033 025

Progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R 8 033 027
OL_RC: Reset
Record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
0
1 ≥1
MAIN: General
Reset USER 0: Don't Execute
[ 003 002 ] 1: Execute
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117A_UK
3-79 Overload memory
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P438 collects the following measured fault
data:
Running Time
Fault Duration
Fault Determination
Run Time to Measurement
Fault current
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Fault angle
Primary and secondary fault reactance
Primary and secondary fault resistance
Fault location in km or percentage of the protected line
Catenary current (only in ‘Autotransformer feed’ operating mode)
Feeder current (only in ‘Autotransformer feed’ operating mode)
Current which determines the defrost protection
Voltage of the catenary (only in ‘Autotransformer feed’ operating mode)
Voltage of the feeder (only in ‘Autotransformer feed’ operating mode)
fundamental component of the current, kHarmΣI(xfn)/I(fn) (only in ‘Autotransformer
feed’ operating mode and with the optional processor module with an integrated DSP
coprocessor fitted and if the harmonics adaptation feature is enabled in the distance
protection function)
3-114 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
O S C I L : R e c o r d . i n P r o g r e s s signal.
MAIN: General FT_DA: Running

Start + Time
[ 036 000 ] [ 004 021 ]
R
OSCIL: Record. FT_DA: Fault

in Progress + Duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
64Z70DMA_UK
3-80 Running time and fault duration
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The P438 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time during a fault.
Depending on which protection function detects the fault, the criterion for the
determination of the recording start time is selected by the P438. Normally, this occurs
when the maximum current flows. If the defrost protection function detects a fault, the
acquisition of the fault data occurs when the maximum current flows. The measured
fault data are displayed at the end of the fault. The protection function which detects a
fault will be displayed on the P438. If several protection functions detect a fault, then the
protection function with the highest priority is displayed. The priorities are given in the
table below.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion

1 I>H of DTOC protection Maximum current
2 Distance protection Maximum current
3 Backup overcurrent-time protection Maximum current
4 DTOC/IDMT protection Maximum current
5 Defrost protection Maximum differential current
6 Time-voltage protection Maximum current
7 Thermal overload protection Maximum current
8 I> Trigger of the fault recording Maximum current
9 Manual trigger Maximum current
The time difference between the begining of the fault and the fault data acquisition time
is also displayed.
3-116 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
OSCIL: Record.
in Progress
[ 035 000 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>H
[ 035 022 ]
DIST: Starting
[ 036 135 ]
BUOC: Starting I>

[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: Starting
I>>
[ 036 115 ]
DTOC: Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
DFRST: Starting
[ 041 204 ]
V<>: Starting V>

[ 041 030 ]
V<>: Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>: Starting V<
[ 041 037 ]
FT_DA: Fault
V<>: Starting V<< Determination
[ 041 099 ] [ 004 198 ]
THERM: Trip
Signal
[ 039 020 ]
OSCIL: I>
Triggered
[ 035 013 ]
OSCIL: Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
I Imax
1 ... 4, 6 ... 9
Id,max 5
Idfrst
1 ... 9 FT_DA: Save

measured values
305 052
FT_DA: Run Time

to Meas.
MAIN: General [ 004 199 ]
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
48Z6321A_UK
3-81 Determination of the fault data acquisition time
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting at F T _ D A : O u t p . F a u l t L o c . S G x determines upon which

conditions output of the fault location takes place. The following settings are available:
'Always'
The calculation and output of fault location always takes place if the other measured
fault data have also been determined.
'Only aft. trip Z1/t1'
The calculation and output of fault location takes place if the P438 issues the 'trip in
impedance zone 1 with normal reach’ decision.
'Only aft.trp Z1ze/t1'
The calculation and output of the fault location takes place if the P438 issues the 'trip
in impedance zone 1 with extended reach’ decision.
FT_DA: Save
measured values
305 052
FT_DA: Outp.
Fault Loc. SGx
[ * ]
1: Always
2: Only aft. Trip
Z1/t1
3: Only aft. Tr.
Z1ze/t1 FT_DA: Outp.
fault location
305 051
DIST: Trip
Signal Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
DIST: Trip
Signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
Setting FT_DA: Outp.

Fault Loc. SGx
Group 1 010 032
Group 2 010 033
Group 3 010 034
Group 4 010 035
48Z5021A_UK
3-82 Enabling of fault location output
3-118 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of short circuit

data
The P438 stores the fault's current and voltage data determined at the time of
acquisition, as well as the calculated values of the fault reactance, fault impedance and
fault angle. The P438 additionally stores – if it operates in Autotransformer feed mode –
the current and voltage values of the catenary and the feeder. For 'Defrost operation',
the current evaluated by the defrost protection is stored.
If the fault is detected by the Backup DTOC protection, the fault voltage, the voltage of
the catenary and feeder, as well as the fault reactance, the fault impedance and the fault
angle cannot be determined.
The currents and voltages are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to In and Vn If
the measured or calculated values are outside of the acceptable measuring range,
‘Overflow’ is displayed.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: Save C
measured values
305 052
BUOC: Starting I> C1

[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: Starting
I>>
[ 036 115 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T.
prim.
[ 010 001 ]
C
MAIN: Vnom V.T.
prim.
[ 010 002 ]
I
FT_DA: Fault
current p.u.
[ 004 025 ]
R
V
FT_DA: Fault
voltage p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
MAIN: Σ I(xfn)/ FT_DA: kHarm, Σ I

I(fn) (xfn)/I(fn) 1)
1)
310 053
[ 008 217 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
loop angle
[ 004 024 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
impedance,sec.
[ 004 023 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
reactance,prim
[ 004 029 ]
R
FT_DA: Fault
impedance,prim
[ 004 176 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
1) only if the processor module with DSP co-processor (optional) is fitted.

48Z6322A_EN
3-83 Acquisition of the fault currents and voltage, fault angles, fault reactance and impedance
3-120 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Record.
in Progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: Save C
measured Values
305 052
BUOC: Starting I> C1 C

[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: Starting
I>>
[ 036 115 ]
FT_DA: Icat p.u.
Icat
[ 004 181 ]
R
FT_DA: Ifdr p.u.

Ifdr
[ 004 182 ]
R
Vcat FT_DA: Vcat p.u.

[ 004 183 ]
R
FT_DA: Vfdr p.u.

Vfdr
[ 004 184 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
48Z6323A_UK
3-84 Acquisition of the catenary and feeder currents and voltages
FT_DA: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA: Save
measured values C C
305 052
Idfrst FT_DA: Idfrst

p.u.
[ 004 177 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
48Z6324A_EN
3-85 Acquisition of the defrost current
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault location acquisition

In order to determine the fault location in percentage of the line length and in km, the
value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the line section, as well as the
corresponding line length in km, must be set at the P438.
FT_DA: Line
Length 1 SGx
[ * ]
FT_DA: Line
ReactXSec 1 SGx
[ * ]
FT_DA: Outp. C
fault location
305 051
FT_DA: Fault
FT_DA: Fault Location
Reactance,Sec. [ 004 022 ]
[ 004 028 ] R
MAIN: General FT_DA: Fault

Reset USER Locat. Percent
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 027 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
Setting FT_DA: Line FT_DA: Line

Length 1 SGx ReactXSec 1 SGx
Group 1 010 005 010 012
Group 2 010 006 010 013
Group 3 010 007 010 014
Group 4 010 008 010 015
48Z63DQA_UK
3-86 Fault location acquisition. (The diagram displays data points with only one line section used. The P438 can consider a maximum of 10 line
sections in its acquisition of the fault location.)
Extended fault location

data acquisition
As of version -613 up to 10 line sections (with differing reactance values) can be
considered by the fault locator. The lengths and reactances of the relevant line sections
are entered using the following parameters:
FT_DA: Line Length n SGx (n=1,...,10)

Value range for n=1: 0.01 to 500.00 km
Value range for n=2, to 10: Blocked or 0.01 to 500.00 km
FT_DA: Line Reacts n SGx (n=1,...,10)

Value range for n=1: 0.01 to 500.00 Ω
Value range for n=2, to 10: Blocked or 0.01 to 500.00 Ω
Each line section is considered a linear segment; line sections must be configured in
consecutive sequence. Any line section not needed is set to Blocked.
3-122 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
The example in the figure below shows the setting for three line sections. For this
example line sections 4 to 10 are set to Blocked.
Reactance
X3
XF
X2
X1
L1 L2 L(XF) L3 Length
of Line
48Z6320A_EN
3-87 Illustrated example for a fault location acquisition with three line sections used for calculation
Reactance values exceeding the set parameter range are calculated with the values set
for the last line section.
In the example in figure 3-87 the fault location results from the sum L2 of the first two line
sections' lengths and the calculated segment of line section 3.
Example: X1 = 10 Ω, L1 = 10 km
X2 = 18 Ω, L2 = 20 km
X3 = 30 Ω, L3 = 35 km
If, for example, the measured fault reactance is XF = 27.5 Ω

The fault location is then calculated as
L(XF) = L2 + (XF-X2) · (L3-L2) / (X3-X2),
therefore:
L(XF) = L2 + 9.5 Ω · 15 km / 12 Ω = 20 km + 11.875 km ˜ 31.88 km.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
Calculating the fault

location as a percentage of
the line length
The normalized fault location, i.e. the fault location expressed as a percentage of the line
length, is always calculated (even with the extended fault location acquisition featured as
of version -613) as the ratio of the measured fault reactance to maximum fault
reactance.
For the above example this results in:
XF = 27.5 Ω, Xmax = X3 = 30 Ω
therefore:
XFnorm = (27.5 Ω / 30 Ω) · 100 % = 91.67 %
Monitoring the setting

Within the frame of setting line sections the sequential entry of these line sections is
monitored. No parameters for further line sections are permitted when the first line
section is set to Blocked.
A line section is considered to be Blocked when at least one of its parameters (reactance
or line length) is set to Blocked.
In case of an incorrect setting the P438 will issue an error message which is entered into
the monitoring signal memory:
FT_DA: Wrong Setting F.loc

CHECK: Wrong Setting F.loc
In this case the fault location is not calculated. The measured value is issued as 'Not
Measured'.
Fault data reset

After pressing the reset key C on the user interface (HMI), the fault data value is
displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-124 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group OSCIL)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists and therefore fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
OSCIL: I>
OSCIL: Trigger
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
setting) which appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OSCIL: I>
[ 016 013 ]
I OSCIL: I>
Triggered
[ 035 013 ]
OSCIL: Fct
Assig. Trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
OSCIL: Trigger OSCIL: Trigger

EXT [ 037 076 ]
[ 036 089 ]
OSCIL: Trigger
USER
[ 003 041 ]
0 OSCIL: Record.
in Progress
1 [ 035 000 ]
0: don’t execute OSCIL: System

Disturb. Runn
1: execute [ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General OSCIL: No. of

+ Faults
Reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ] R
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT OSCIL: No. System
[ 005 255 ] + Disturb.
OSCIL: Reset [ 004 010 ]
Record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
48Z6325A_UK
3-88 Start of fault recording and fault counter
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the HMI or through the
PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the
fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory or through
the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault
windows, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of
eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the
non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault
recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then O S C I L : F a u l t
M e m . O v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed
during the pre-fault time, the O S C I L : F a u l t y T i m e T a g signal is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the RMS measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the user interface (HMI) or through the PC or
3-126 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
OSCIL: Record. C
in Progress
[ 035 000 ]
OSCIL: Fault Mem.
Signal 1 + CT200 Overflow
1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1
OSCIL: Fault
Recording n
1 [ * ]
OSCIL: Pre-Fault
Time
[ 003 078 ]
OSCIL: Post-
Fault Time
[ 003 079 ]
OSCIL: Fault
n Recording n
Fault Memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured Value 1 4 033 003
Measured Value n 7 033 006

MAIN: Time tag 8 033 007
306 021
MAIN: General &

Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute R
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1 1: Execute
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
12Z6161B_UK
3-89 Fault memory
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded by the P438:
The catenary current

The feeder current
The defrost current
The catenary voltage
The feeder voltage.
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
disturbance recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of
32 s - independent of system frequency - is available for recording. This period can be
divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be
set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum recording
time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 32 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred since
the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog waveform data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-128 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Record.
in Progress C
[ 035 000 ]
OSCIL: Max
Record Time
[ 003 075 ]
OSCIL: Pre-Fault
Time
[ 003 078 ]
OSCIL: Post-Fault
Time
[ 003 079 ]
Icat Analog Channel 1

R
Ifdr Analog Channel 2

R
Idfrst
Analog Channel 3
R
Vcat
Analog Channel 4
R
Vfdr
Analog Channel 5
R
OSCIL: Reset
Record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: Execute
≥1
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OSCIL: Reset
Record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
48Z6326A_UK
3-90 Fault value recording
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)
Four impedance zones are provided by the distance protection function. The first
impedance zone offers dynamic reach settings. Zones 2, 3 and 4 provide train start-up
detection, di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt, to differentiate start-ups from short circuits and overload
conditions. The user can select polygonal (quadrilateral) or circular tripping
characteristics.
Wrong phase coupling protection is integrated.
distance protection
Distance protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling can
be carried out separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: General
enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
0
1 DIST: Enabled
& [ 036 104 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes ** *
GROUP: Group y GROUP: Group y Setting DIST: Enable
Active Active SGx
y
[ ** ]
1 036 090 Group 1 072 200
2 036 091 Group 2 073 200
3 036 092 Group 3 074 200
4 036 093 Group 4 075 200
48Z6331A_UK
3-91 Disabling or enabling distance protection
3-130 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Distance protection
blocking
Distance protection is blocked if one of the following conditions occurs:
Distance protection has not been enabled.

The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Monitoring (VT supervision) has detected a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit.
Distance protection is not set correctly.
C&VTS
3-92 Distance protection blocking
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
Selective blocking of the

impedance zones
An impedance zone is blocked if the impedances of that zone in forward and reverse
directions have been set to Blocked, or if the associated time stage has been set to
Blocked. Figure 3-94 shows the blocking of impedance zone 2. The blocking of
impedance zones 3 and 4 is similar.
DIST: Z1, DIST: Zone 1

Enabled Not Ready
DIST: Blocking
DIST: Z1 Forward
Reach SGx
Blocked
DIST: Z1 Reverse
Reach SGx
Blocked
DIST: tZ1,
SGx
Blocked
DIST: Blocking
t1 EXT
DIST: Z1' Enabled
DIST: Z1' Dynamic

Fwd SGx
Blocked
DIST: Z1' Dynamic
Rev SGx
Blocked
Setting DIST: Z1 Forward DIST: Z1 Reverse DIST: tZ1 DIST: Z1' Dynamic DIST: Z1' Dynamic
Reach SGx Reach SGx SGx Fwd SGx Rev SGx
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
48Z5030A_UK
3-93 Blocking of impedance zone 1
3-132 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Z2 Enabled & ≥1 DIST: Zone 2 not ready

[ 039 068 ] [ 038 035 ]
DIST: Z2´ Enabled &

[ 039 069 ]
DIST: Blocking ≥1
303 667
DIST: Z2 Forward Reach

SGx &
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Z2 Reverse Reach
SGx
[ * ]
blocked
≥1
DIST: Z2' Dynamic Fwd
SGx &
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Z2' Dynamic Rev
SGx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: tZ2S Short Delay

SGx ≥1 &
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Blocking t2K EXT
[ 039 164 ]
DIST: tZ2L Long Delay

SGx ≥1
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Blocking t2L EXT
[ 039 165 ]
DIST: Z2 Op.Mode dx/dt

SGx
[ * ]
0: Disabled
&
DIST: Z2Delta I(di/dt)

SGx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Z2Delta V(dv/dt)
SGx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST: Z2D.phi(dphi/dt)
SGx
[ * ]
blocked
Setting DIST: Z2 Forward DIST: Z2 Reverse DIST: Z2' DIST: Z2' DIST: tZ2S Short
Reach SGx Reach SGx Dynamic Fwd SGx Dynamic Rev SGx Delay SGx
Group 1 076 094 076 101 076 097 076 104 012 029
Group 2 077 094 077 101 077 097 077 104 012 079
Group 3 078 094 078 101 078 097 078 104 013 029
Group 4 079 094 079 101 079 097 079 104 013 079
Setting DIST: tZ2L Long DIST: Z2 Op.Mode DIST: Z2Delta DIST: Z2Delta DIST: Z2D.phi
Delay SGx dx/dt SGx I(di/dt) SGx V(dv/dt) SGx (dphi/dt) SGx
Group 1 012 190 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
Group 2 012 191 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
Group 3 012 192 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
Group 4 012 193 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206
48Z5410C_UK
3-94 Blocking of impedance zone 2
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of distance
protection
The distance protection function issues the D I S T : N o t r e a d y signal if all
impedance zones and the wrong phase coupling protection are blocked.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Zone 1 DIST: Not ready

not ready [ 041 086 ]
[ 038 034 ] &
DIST: Zone 2
not ready
[ 038 035 ]
DIST: Zone 3
not ready
[ 038 036 ]
DIST: Zone 4
not ready
[ 038 064 ]
DIST: WPC
not ready
[ 039 156 ]
48Z6332A_EN
3-95 D I S T : N o t r e a d y signal
Inrush Stabilization
(Harmonic Restraint)
Depending on the setting for M A I N : F c t . I n r u s h R s t r . S G x , starting decisions
made by the distance zones can be cancelled when the inrush stabilization function has
detected an inrush current.
3-134 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.1 Base Point Release for Impedance and Direction Determination
The base point trigger compares the r.m.s. value of the current to the set value I>.
The pickup of the base point trigger is determined by a half-cycle r.m.s. calculation of the
current in order to ensure a short response time.
After operation, the full-cycle r.m.s. value of the current is monitored. This ensures the
required stability and accuracy of the measuring system.
DIST: I>
SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Enabled C
[ 036 104 ]
I DIST: I>
Starting
[ 039 001 ]
Setting DIST: I>

SGx
Group 1 072 195
Group 2 073 195
Group 3 074 195
Group 4 075 195
48Z5032A_UK
3-96 Base point release for impedance and direction determination
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.2 Distance and Direction Measurement
The P438 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction using the measured
variables V and I. In order for direction measurement to function correctly, even at very
small fault voltage values, the information stored in the voltage memory is also put to
use in these cases.
Direction measurement
The following applies to direction measurement:
Forward direction: -45° < ϕ < +135°

Reverse direction: -45° > ϕ > +135°
For very low fault voltages, the voltage from the voltage memory is used in place of the
measured voltage in order to avoid erroneous direction decisions. The direction
decision is dependent on the following conditions:
VF > 0.1 Vn
The direction decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the measured
fault voltage VF.
VF < 0.1 Vn
Voltage memory enabled:
The direction decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the voltage
stored in the voltage memory.
Voltage memory not enabled:
fault voltage down to a minimum value of 1 V. If the fault voltage drops to a value of
less than approximately 1 V, an accurate direction determination is no longer
possible. In this case, a Fault forward decision is issued - independent of the actual
fault direction.
3-136 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Forw. w/o

& measurem.
[ 038 044 ]
DIST: Direct.
< 1 V & using Vmeas
[ 038 045 ]
&
< 0.1 Vnom
DIST: Direct.
& using memory
[ 038 047 ]
DIST: I> starting C1

[ 039 001 ]
C2
MAIN: Vmemory
enable
305 049
V
K 1
DIST: Direction
forward
I 303 669
S 2 -45° > N < 135°
V(stored)
DIST: Direction
1 … 2 -45° < N > 135° backward
303 670
DIST: Forward
& fault
[ 036 138 ]
DIST: Starting
[ 036 135 ]
DIST: Backwards
& fault
[ 036 139 ]
48Z6335A_EN
3-97 Direction measurement
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
Distance characteristic
Distance characteristics for zones 1 and 2 are always visible. If they are required
distance characteristics for zones 3 and 4 can also be switched to visible and activated.
The P438 offers both circular and polygonal (quadrilateral) tripping characteristics.
The required tripping characteristics can be selected separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
The circular characteristic is

DIST: Charac- Circle active.
teristic SGx
[ * ] The polygonal (qadrilateral)
characteristic angle and the
reserve are visible but inactive.
Polygon
The polygonal (qadrilateral)
characteristic is active.
*
Setting DIST: Charac-
teristic SGx
Group 1 012 040

Group 2 073 079
Group 3 074 079
Group 4 075 079
48Z6333A_UK
3-98 Visibility control and activation of the characteristics
Selecting the reach

The zones' reaches can be switched dynamically from Zn, Rn, Rgn to Zn', Rn', Rgn’
(n = 1 to 4) in order to adapt the distance measurement system to different switching
states of the catenary installation.
The setting at D I S T : C o n t r o l V i a U S E R determines whether switching is carried

out from the user interface (HMI) or using the binary signal inputs. Switching using the
binary signal inputs is only possible by setting D I S T : C o n t r o l V i a U S E R to Yes.
If the setting for D I S T : C o n t r o l V i a U S E R is No , switching using the binary
signal inputs is not possible.
3-138 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Control via

USER
[ 022 008 ]
0
DIST: Control via
1 user
[ 038 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST: Control
via user EXT
[ 038 171 ]
DIST: Select
Z1/Z1' USER
[ 022 011 ] DIST: Z1 enabled
& [ 039 066 ]
1
2 &
1: Z1
2: Z1'
& DIST: Z1'
DIST: Z1' enabled
enabled EXT [ 039 067 ]
[ 038 067 ]
&
DIST: Z1' ext.
enabled
[ 038 078 ]
DIST: Select
Z2/Z2' USER DIST: Z2
[ 022 021 ] enabled
& [ 039 068 ]
1
2 &
1: Z2
2: Z2'
& DIST: Z2'
DIST: Z2' enabled
[ 038 069 ]
&
DIST: Z2' ext.
enabled
[ 038 079 ]
DIST: Select
[ 022 038 ] enabled
& [ 036 124 ]
1
2 &
1: Z3
2: Z3'
& DIST: Z3'
DIST: Z3' enabled
[ 036 123 ]
&
DIST: Z3' ext.
enabled
[ 038 147 ]
DIST: Select
[ 022 194 ] enabled
& [ 036 154 ]
1
2 &
1: Z4
2: Z4'
& DIST: Z4'
DIST: Z4' enabled
[ 036 129 ]
&
DIST: Z4' ext.
enabled
[ 038 090 ]
48Z6334A_EN
3-99 Selecting the reach
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)
Circular characteristic
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-100 is obtained.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Forward direction
Zn,fwd
Tripping zone
Reverse direction
βn
αn
Rgn,rev
Rgn,fwd R
γn
Zn,rev
48Z5453BA_UK
3-100 Impedance and direction characteristic of the P438 for the 'Circle' setting
3-140 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Circular characteristic,
settings
The characteristic is determined by the settings listed below. It can be set separately for
all four zones (n: 1 to 4).
Impedance Zn or Zn' in forward direction.
Impedance Zn or Zn' in reverse direction
The impedance limits the maximum reach of the circular characteristic.
If the setting is Blocked, the zone in the corresponding direction is ineffective.
Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in forward direction.
Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in reverse direction.
Therefore the tripping zone is limited to the resistances within the load blinder – i.e.
lower than Rgn (Rgn’).
For this setting, the condition: Rgn ≤ Zn must be met for all enabled zones (all
4 setting groups, all unblocked Z and Z´ zones).
If the condition is not satisfied, a warning indication and the device blocking alarm are
issued.
Load blinding angle αn
This setting is only applied if the resistive limit line, defined by Rgn, falls within the Z
circle (this is the case for α < arccos (Rgn/Zn) or α < arccos (Rgn‘/Zn‘)).
At fault impedance angles outside of the blinder cone region, the circle characteristic
operates unaffected (non-blinded).
Angle βn
Angle γn
These angles limit the tripping area in quadrants 2 and 4..
Angle γn defines areas with the form of a triangle in the 2nd and 4th quadrants.
The limit in the R-direction is given either by Rgn or by Zn, depending on the value
leading to the smaller zone.
The P438 checks whether the impedance locus is within the defined tripping area or not.
Since the reach for forward and reverse direction can be selected separately, the
direction decision determines the quadrilateral segment where the measured impedance
locus must be located so that a distance decision is issued. If the short-circuit voltages
are lower than 10 V, angles αn, βn and γn are not taken into account. The dashed
characteristic in Figure 3-100 results.
harmonics adaptation
If distance protection operates while the harmonics adaptation feature is enabled
(D I S T : H a r m . A d a p t . A v a i l . = Yes) then impedance and reactance settings for all
zones are processed with dynamic harmonics factor
M A I N : k H a r m . Σ I ( x f n ) / I ( f n ) . In this case distance zone boundaries are reduced
dynamically:
1 1
Z n,Harm. = ⋅ Zn or Z n,Harm. ' = ⋅ Zn '
1 + k Harm. 1 + k Harm .
1 1
R gn,Harm. = ⋅ R gn or R gn,Harm. ' = ⋅ R gn '
1 + k Harm . 1 + k Harm .
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
zone 1,
Zone extensions
For zone 1, the impedance reach can be extended by the zone extension factor kze.
Valid impedance and reactance values are extended for each of the set directions.
Z1,kze = k ze ⋅ Z1 or Z1,kze ´= k ze ⋅ Z1´
R g1,kze = k ze ⋅ R g1 or R g1,kze ´= k ze ⋅ R g1´

Impedance reach is extended using the following parameters:
Zone extension factor for high-speed reclosure

(D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d H S R S G x )
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if the internal auto-reclose function
permits a zone extension during high-speed reclosures
(R E C L S : Z o n e E x t n o n H S R S G x ). Depending on the setting, zone
extension may remain active until the reclosure command
(R E C L S : Z o n e E x t . D u r . R C S G x ) is terminated.
Zone extension factor for time-delay reclosure
(D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d T D R S G x )
permits a zone extension during time-delayed reclosures
(R E C L S : Z o n e E x t n o n T D R S G x ). Depending on the setting, zone
Zone extension factor for external extension or tripping by the switch on to a fault
protection (D I S T : k z e S O T F / E X T S G x ).
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if switch on to fault protection
(S O T F : Z 1 E x t e n d e d ) has been activated or an external signal
(D I S T : Z o n e E x t e n s i o n E X T ) is set.
Figure 3-101 shows the formation of distance decisions of the first impedance zone for
the circular characteristic operating mode.
Zones 2, 3 and 4
Figure 3-102 shows the formation of the distance decisions for impedance zone 2.
This will apply similarly to impedance zones 3 and 4.
3-142 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
*
DIST: Enabled C Setting
[ 036 104 ] & Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
DIST: I> Starting DIST: Charac- 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
[ 039 001 ] C teristic SGx
C&VTS: VTS Volts DIST: Z1 Forward DIST: Z1 Forward 076 093 077 093 078 093 079 093
Failure C Reach SGx Reach SGx
[ 038 023 ] [ * ] DIST: Rg1,
DIST: Charac- DIST: Rg1, Forward SGx 076 138 077 138 078 138 079 138
teristic SGx C Forward SGx
[ * ] [ * ] DIST: Z1' 076 096 077 096 078 096 079 096
Circle DIST: Z1' Dynamic Fwd SGx
DIST: Harm. Adapt. C Dynamic Fwd SGx DIST: Rg1',
Avail. [ * ] Forward SGx 076 141 077 141 078 141 079 141
[ 022 197 ] 1) DIST: Rg1',
Yes C Forward SGx DIST: Z1 Reverse
Reach SGx 076 100 077 100 078 100 079 100
[ * ]
DIST: Forward DIST: Rg1, DIST: Rg1,
direction C Reverse SGx Reverse SGx 076 144 077 144 078 144 079 144
303 669 & [ * ]
DIST: Z1 DIST: Z1'
Enabled DIST: Rg1, Dynamic Rev SGx 076 103 077 103 078 103 079 103
[ 039 066 ] C Reverse SGx
[ * ] DIST: Rg1',
& 076 147 077 147 078 147 079 147
DIST: Z1' DIST: Z1' Reverse SGx
Enabled C Dynamic Rev SGx
[ 039 067 ] [ * ] DIST: Alpha 1 076 090 077 090 078 090 079 090
DIST: Rg1', SGx
& C Reverse SGx
DIST: Reverse DIST: beta 1 072 208 073 208 074 208 075 208
direction [ * ] Angle SGx
303 670
DIST: Alpha 1
C SGx DIST: gamma 1 076 247 077 247 078 247 079 247
& [ * ] Angle SGx
DIST: beta 1 DIST: kze
C Angle SGx Extended HSR SGx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
[ * ]
DIST: gamma 1 DIST: kze 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
C Angle SGx Extended TDR SGx
[ * ] DIST: kze
RECLS: Zone DIST: kze SOTF/EXT SGx 012 067 012 068 012 069 012 070
Extension HSR C Extended HSR SGx
[ 036 226 ] [ * ]
RECLS: Zone DIST: kze DIST: Starting
Extension TDR C Extended TDR SGx [ 036 135 ]
[ 036 227 ] [ * ]
SOTF: Z1 Extended DIST: kze DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze)
[ 035 076 ] C SOTF/EXT SGx Starting
[ * ] & [ 039 003 ]
DIST: Zone
Extension EXT
[ 036 046 ] DIST: Z1'
& (Z1',ze) Starting
[ 039 004 ]
MAIN: Σ I(xfn)/
I(fn) 1)
310 053
CHECK: Wrong
V set. DIST Rg1
[ 098 046 ]
CHECK: Wrong
I set. DIST Rg1'
[ 098 047 ]
DIST: Wrong
MAIN: Inrush Setting Rg,x
stabil. trigg [ 041 085 ]
306 014
DIST: Zone
& Extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: Zone
& Extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST: Zone
& Extension SOTF
[ 036 134 ]
DIST: Z1 Extended
& Extern.
[ 036 140 ]
1) only if the processor module with DSP co-processor (optional) is fitted. 48Z6330A_UK
3-101 Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement, operating mode set to 'Circle'
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Enabled C
[ 036 104 ] &
DIST: I>
Starting C
[ 039 001 ]
C&VTS: VTS Volts DIST: Z2 Forward
Failure C Reach SGx
[ 038 023 ] [ * ]
DIST: Charac- DIST: Rg2,
teristic SGx C Forward SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Circle DIST: Z2'
DIST: Harm.- 1) C Dynamic Fwd SGx
Adapt. Avail. [ * ]
[ 022 197 ] DIST: Rg2',
Yes C Forward SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Forward DIST: Z2 Reverse
direction & C Reach SGx
303 669 [ * ]
DIST: Z2 DIST: Rg2,
Enabled C Reverse SGx
[ 039 068 ] [ * ]
&
DIST: Z2' DIST: Z2'
Enabled C Dynamic Rev SGx
[ 039 069 ] [ * ]
& DIST: Rg2',
DIST: Reverse C Reverse SGx
direction [ * ]
303 670
DIST: Alpha 2
& C SGx
[ * ]
DIST: beta 2 DIST: Starting
C Angle SGx [ 036 135 ]
[ * ]
DIST: gamma 2 DIST: Z2
C Angle SGx Starting
[ * ] & [ 039 005 ]
DIST: Z2'
& Starting
[ 039 006 ]
MAIN: ΣI(xfn)/
I(fn) 1)
310 053
CHECK: Wrong set.
V DIST Rg2
[ 098 048 ]
CHECK: Wrong set.
I DIST Rg2'
[ 098 049 ]
DIST: Wrong
306 014
* Setting DIST: Charac- DIST: Z2 Forward DIST: Rg2, DIST: Z2' DIST: Rg2', DIST: Z2 Reverse
teristic SGx Reach SGx Forward SGx Dynamic Fwd SGx Forward SGx Reach SGx
Group 1 012 040 076 094 076 139 076 097 076 142 076 101
Group 2 073 097 077 094 077 139 077 097 077 142 077 101
Group 3 074 097 078 094 078 139 078 097 078 142 078 101
Group 4 075 097 079 094 079 139 079 097 079 142 079 101
* Setting DIST: Rg2, DIST: Z2' DIST: Rg2', DIST: Alpha 2 DIST: beta 2 DIST: gamma 2
Reverse SGx Dynamic Rev SGx Reverse SGx SGx Angle SGx Angle SGx
Group 1 076 145 076 104 076 148 076 091 072 209 076 248
Group 2 077 145 077 104 077 148 077 091 073 209 077 248
Group 3 078 145 078 104 078 148 078 091 074 209 078 248
Group 4 079 145 079 104 079 148 079 091 075 209 079 248
3-102 Setting impedance zone 2 and distance measurement, operating mode set to 'Circle'
3-144 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Polygonal (quadrilateral)
characteristic
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in Figure 3-103 is obtained.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Forward direction Zn,fwd
Tripping zone
Reverse direction
βn
αLn
αn
Rgn,rev
Rn,fwd
Rn,rev
Rgn,fwd R
γn
Zn,rev
48Z6344A_UK
3-103 Impedance and direction characteristic of the P438 for the 'Polygon’ setting
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)
characteristic,
settings
The characteristic is determined by the settings listed below. It can be set separately for
all four zones (n: 1 to 4).
Impedance Zn or Zn' in forward direction.
Impedance Zn or Zn' in reverse direction
Line impedance angle αLn.
The maximum X-reach of the polygonal characteristic is calculated using the
impedance and the line angle. If the impedance setting is Blocked, the zone in the
corresponding direction is disabled.
Resistance Rn or Rn' in forward direction.
Resistance Rn or Rn' in reverse direction
Therefore the R-reach of the tripping zones is limited. The gradient of the resistive
reach line is also defined by the line angle αLn.
Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in forward direction.
Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in reverse direction.
Therefore the tripping zone is limited to the resistances within the load blinder –
i.e. lower than Rgn (Rgn’).
For this setting, the condition: Rgn ≤ Rn must be met for all enabled zones (all 4
setting groups, all unblocked Z and Z´ zones).
If the condition is not satisfied, a warning indication and the device blocking alarm are
issued.
Load blinding angle αn
At fault impedance angles outside of the blinder cone region, the circular
characteristic operates unaffectedly (non-blinded).
Angle βn
Angle γn
These angles limit the tripping area in quadrants 2 and 4..
The P438 checks whether the impedance locus is within the defined tripping area or not.
Since the reaches for forward and reverse directions can be selected separately, the
directional decision determines the quadrilateral segment where the measured
impedance locus must be located so that a distance decision is issued. If the short-
circuit voltage is lower than 10 V, angles αn, βn and γn are not taken into account.
The dashed characteristic in Figure 3-103 results.
3-146 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
characteristic,
harmonics adaptation
If distance protection operates while the harmonics adaptation feature is enabled
(D I S T : H a r m . A d a p t . A v a i l . = Yes) then impedance and reactance settings for all
zones are processed with dynamic harmonics factor
M A I N : k H a r m . Σ I ( x f n ) / I ( f n ) . In this case distance zone boundaries are reduced
dynamically
1 1
Z n,Harm. = ⋅ Zn or Z n,Harm. ' = ⋅ Zn '
1 1
R n,Harm. = ⋅ Rn or R n,Harm. ' = ⋅ Rn '
1 + k Harm. 1 + k Harm.
1 1
R gn,Harm. = ⋅ R gn or R gn,Harm. ' = ⋅ R gn '
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)
Polygon (quadrilateral)
characteristic, Zone 1
Zone extensions
For zone 1, the impedance reach can be extended by the zone extension factor kze.
Valid impedance and reactance values are extended for each of the set directions.
Z1,kze = k ze ⋅ Z1 or Z1,kze ´= k ze ⋅ Z1´
R1,kze = k ze ⋅ R1 or R1,kÜ ´= k Ü ⋅ R1´
R g1,kze = k ze ⋅ R g1 or R g1,kze ´= k ze ⋅ R g1´
Impedance reach is extended using the following parameters:
Zone extension factor for high-speed reclosure

(D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d H S R S G x )
permits a zone extension during high-speed reclosures
(R E C L S : Z o n e E x t n o n H S R S G x ). Depending on the setting, zone
Zone extension factor for time-delay reclosure
(D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d T D R S G x )
permits a zone extension during time-delayed reclosures
(R E C L S : Z o n e E x t n o n T D R S G x ). Depending on the setting, zone
Zone extension factor for external extension or tripping by the switch on to a fault
protection (D I S T : k z e S O T F / E X T S G x ).
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if switch on to a fault protection
(S O T F : Z 1 E x t e n d e d ) has been activated or an external signal
(D I S T : Z o n e E x t e n s i o n E X T ) is set.
Figure 3-104 shows the formation of distance decisions of the first impedance zone for
the polygonal characteristic operating mode.
Polygonal characteristic,
zones 2, 3 and 4
Figure 3-105 shows the formation of the distance decisions for impedance zone 2.
This will apply similarly to impedance zones 3 and 4.
3-148 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
* Setting
DIST: Enabled C
[ 036 104 ] & Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4
DIST: I> Starting DIST: Charac- 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
[ 039 001 ] C teristic SGx
C&VTS: VTS Volts DIST: Z1 Forward DIST: Z1 Forward 076 093 077 093 078 093 079 093
Failure C Reach SGx Reach SGx
[ 038 023 ] [ * ] DIST: R1,
DIST: Charac- DIST: Z1 Forward forw. (poly) SGx 076 115 077 115 078 115 079 115
teristic SGx C Reach SGx
[ * ] [ * ] DIST: Rg1,
Circle Forward SGx 076 138 077 138 078 138 079 138
DIST: Rg1,
DIST: Harm. C Forward SGx DIST: Z1'
Adapt. Avail. [ * ] Dynamic Fwd SGx 076 096 077 096 078 096 079 096
[ 022 197 ] 1) DIST: Z1'
Yes C Dynamic Fwd SGx DIST: R1',Dyn.
Fwd(Poly)SGx 076 118 077 118 078 118 079 118
[ * ]
DIST: Forward
direction & DIST: R1',Dyn. DIST: Rg1',
C Fwd(Poly)SGx 076 141 077 141 078 141 079 141
DIST: 303
Z1669 [ * ]
Forward SGx
Enabled
[ 039 066 ] DIST: Rg1', DIST: Z1 Reverse 076 100 077 100 078 100 079 100
C Forward SGx Reach SGx
& [ * ]
DIST: Z1' DIST: R1,Rev.
Enabled DIST: Z1 Reverse Res.(Poly)SGx 076 121 077 121 078 121 079 121
[ 039 067 ] C Reach SGx
[ * ] DIST: Rg1, 076 144 077 144 078 144 079 144
DIST: R1,Rev. Reverse SGx
C Res.(Poly)SGx DIST: Z1'
& [ * ] 076 103 077 103 078 103 079 103
Dynamic Rev SGx
DIST: Reverse DIST: Rg1,
direction C Reverse SGx DIST: R1',Dyn. 076 124 077 124 078 124 079 124
303 670 [ * ] Rev(Poly)SGx
DIST: Z1' DIST: Rg1',
C Dynamic Rev SGx Reverse SGx 076 147 077 147 078 147 079 147
& [ * ]
DIST: R1',Dyn. DIST: alpha_L 1 012 013 012 063 013 033 013 063
C Fwd(Poly)SGx (Poly) SGx
[ * ] DIST: Alpha 1
DIST: Rg1', SGx 076 090 077 090 078 090 079 090
C Reverse SGx
[ * ] DIST: beta 1 072 208 073 208 074 208 075 208
DIST: alpha_L 1 Angle SGx
C (Poly) SGx DIST: gamma 1
[ * ] Angle SGx 076 247 077 247 078 247 079 247
DIST: Alpha 1
C SGx DIST: kze 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
[ * ] Extended HSR SGx
DIST: beta 1 DIST: kze
C Angle SGx Extended TDR SGx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
[ * ]
DIST: gamma 1 DIST: kze 012 067 012 068 012 069 012 070
C Angle SGx SOTF/EXT SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: Zone DIST: kze
Extension HSR C Extended HSR SGx
[ 036 226 ] [ * ]
RECLS: Zone DIST: kze DIST: Starting
Extension TDR C Extended TDR SGx [ 036 135 ]
[ 036 227 ] [ * ]
SOTF: Z1 Extended DIST: kze DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze)
[ 035 076 ] C SOTF/EXT SGx Starting
[ * ] & [ 039 003 ]
DIST: Zone
Extension EXT
[ 036 046 ] DIST: Z1'(Z1',ze)
Starting
& [ 039 004 ]
MAIN: I(xfn)/
I(fn) 1)
310 053
CHECK: Wrong
V set. DIST Rg1
[ 098 046 ]
CHECK: Wrong
I set. DIST Rg1'
[ 098 047 ]
DIST: Wrong
306 014
DIST: Zone
& Extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: Zone
& Extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST: Zone
& Extension SOTF
[ 036 134 ]
DIST: Z1 Extended
Extern.
& [ 036 140 ]
1) only if the processor module with DSP co-processor (optional) is fitted. 48Z6342B_UK
3-104 Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement, operating mode set to ‘Polygon’
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Enabled C
[ 036 104 ] &
DIST: I>
Starting C
[ 039 001 ]
C&VTS: VTS DIST: Z2 Forward
Volts Failure C Reach SGx
[ 038 023 ] [ * ]
DIST: Charac- DIST: R2,Fwd.
teristic SGx C Res.(Poly)SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Circle DIST: Rg2,
DIST: Harm.- C Forward SGx
adapt. avail. [ * ]
[ 022 197 ] 1) DIST: Z2'
Yes C Dynamic Fwd SGx
DIST: Forward [ * ]
direction & DIST: R2',
303 669 C forw. (Poly) SGx
DIST: Z2 [ * ]
Enabled
[ 039 068 ] DIST: Rg2',
C Forward SGx
& [ * ]
DIST: Z2'
Enabled DIST: Z2 Reverse
[ 039 069 ] C Reach SGx
[ * ]
DIST: R2,Rev.
& C Res.(Poly)SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Reverse DIST: Rg2,
direction C Reverse SGx
303 670 [ * ]
DIST: Z2'
C Dynamic Rev SGx
& [ * ]
DIST: R2',Dyn.
C Rev(Poly)SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Rg2',
C Reverse SGx
[ * ]
DIST: alpha_L 2
C (Poly) SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Alpha 2
C SGx
[ * ]
DIST: beta 2 DIST: Starting
C Angle SGx [ 036 135 ]
[ * ]
DIST: gamma 2 DIST: Z2
C Angle SGx Starting
[ * ] & [ 039 005 ]
DIST: Z2'
& Starting
[ 039 006 ]
MAIN: Σ I(xfn)/
I(fn) 1)
310 053
CHECK: Wrong
V set. DIST Rg2
[ 098 048 ]
CHECK: Wrong
I set. DIST Rg2'
[ 098 049 ]
DIST: Wrong
306 014
*
Setting DIST: Charac- DIST: Z2 Forward DIST: R2,Fwd. DIST: Rg2, DIST: Z2' DIST: Rg2', DIST: R2',Dyn.
teristic SGx Reach SGx Res.(Poly)SGx Forward SGx Dynamic Fwd SGx Forward SGx Fwd(Poly)SGx
Group 1 012 040 076 094 076 116 076 139 076 097 076 142 076 119
Group 2 073 097 077 094 077 116 077 139 077 097 077 142 077 119
Group 3 074 097 078 094 078 116 078 139 078 097 078 142 078 119
Group 4 075 097 079 094 079 116 079 139 079 097 079 142 079 119
Setting DIST: Z2 Reverse DIST: R2,Rev. DIST: Rg2, DIST: Z2' DIST: R2',Dyn. DIST: Rg2', DIST: alpha_L 2
Reach SGx Res.(Poly)SGx Reverse SGx Dynamic Rev SGx Rev(Poly)SGx Reverse SGx (Poly) SGx
Group 1 076 101 076 122 076 145 076 104 076 125 076 148 012 014
Group 2 077 101 077 122 077 145 077 104 077 125 077 148 012 064
Group 3 078 101 078 122 078 145 078 104 078 125 078 148 013 014
Group 4 079 101 079 122 079 145 079 104 079 125 079 148 013 064
Setting DIST: Alpha 2 DIST: beta 2 DIST: gamma 2

SGx Angle SGx Angle SGx
Group 1 076 091 072 209 076 248
Group 2 077 091 073 209 077 248
Group 3 078 091 074 209 078 248
Group 4 079 091 075 209 079 248
3-105 Setting impedance zone 2 and distance measurement, operating mode set to ‘Polygon’
3-150 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Distance measurement
If the base point current is exceeded, the inductive and resistive components (X and R)
of the loop impedance (Z) are calculated continuously even during normal operation.
The algorithm is based on solving the first-order line differential equation according to
"Bonard-Bastide".
The X and R components are calculated from the 0.5 ms instantaneous values of
current and voltage and updated every 2 ms.
In the event of a line fault there is the danger of a transient overreach and an incorrect
angle measurement since the measured impedance can be lower than the static fault
impedance for a period longer than a cycle.
In order to avoid unwanted operation or failure to operate, the following optimization

measures have been implemented in the distance protection system so as to ensure
stable operation:
Monitoring the Current and Voltage Values:

The RMS values of current and voltage are monitored for a sudden increase or
decrease. Any such change is regarded as occurrence of a fault and a dead time is
started.
Monitoring of the current for a sudden step increase:
For I ≤ 0.25 In: ΔI = 0.1 In
For I > 0.25 In: ΔI = 0.17 I
Monitoring of the voltage for a sudden step decrease:
For V < 0.5 Vn: ΔV = 0.1 Vn
For V ≥ 0.5 Vn: ΔV = 0.06 V
Dead time for a setting of tZ1 = 0 s:
For I < 0.75 In: 53 ms
For 0.75 In < I < 3.5 In: 32 ms
For I > 3.5 In: 28 ms
For a setting of tZ1 > 0 s, the dead time is 45 ms.
Impedance measurements taken during the dead time are rejected. Impedance
measurements taken after the end of the dead time are valid.
These measures ensure the selectivity of impedance and direction for any zones with
zero, or short applied time delays.
Switching on to a Line Without Voltage:
In this event, impedance measurement can temporarily yield undefined measured
values.
In order to avoid unwanted tripping, the impedance comparison is interrupted for

75 ms after a voltage rise above a threshold value voltage of 0.008 Vn. After this
period of 75 ms, the voltage gradient must have fallen to less than 3 %. If this is not
the case, the dead time is extended until the voltage gradient falls below this value.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)
Isolation of a Line:
When a faulty or healthy line is isolated externally, the impedance measurement can
also temporarily yield undefined values.
The danger of an unwanted tripping is eliminated by a special di/dt stage that will
block distance measurement if a negative current gradient of approx. 8 % within a
half-cycle occurs with a simultaneous voltage drop (breaker open blocking).
These optimization measures provide stable operation of the device in normal operation
of the installation.
The distance measurement system exhibits the following time response:
For a timer stage setting of tZ1 = 0 s, the trip command times in zone 1 are approx.
1.5 cycles in the 'core region'. For the P438, the 'core region' is defined as 0 to 95 %
of the set tripping area.
Outside the 'core region', the trip times are longer.
For fault currents < 0.8 In the calculation window is extended to achieve a stable
response.
3-152 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.3 Impedance-Time Characteristics
Each impedance zone has a timer stage assigned. These timer stages are triggered by a
distance decision of the associated impedance zone. Each timer stage can be blocked
through a binary input signal.
Tripping in extended
zone 1
The impedance reach for zone 1 may be extended by the zone extension factor set at
D I S T : k z e S O T F / E X T S G x . Tripping in the extended zone takes place after the
set time-delay D I S T : t 1 , z e S O T F / E X T S G x has elapsed, and if the impedance
Z1 lies within the tripping zone of the Impedance and direction characteristic of the P438
for the 'Polygon’ setting (see Figure 3-103 on Page 3-145). The latter condition is
determined by means of the “Z1 Decision” block which evaluates the amount of
harmonics, the zero-crossings and the logic to detect fault- clearance at the end of a
fault.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Blocking DIST: t1

t1 EXT PSx
[ 039 163 ] [ * ]
DIST: Z1(Z1,ze) DIST: t1 elapsed

starting t 0 [ 036 026 ]
[ 039 003 ]
DIST: Z1'(Z1',ze)
starting
[ 039 004 ] Z1 Decision DIST: Trip signal
Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
DIST: t1,ze
& SOTF/EXT PSx
DIST: Z1 extended [ * ]
extern.
[ 036 140 ]
DIST: Zone DIST: t1,ze
extension SOTF t 0 elapsed
[ 036 134 ] [ 035 079 ]
Z1 Decision DIST: Trip signal

Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
Parameter DIST: t1 DIST: t1,ze
PSx SOTF/EXT PSx
set 1 012 028 012 198
set 2 012 078 012 199
set 3 013 028 012 200
set 4 013 078 012 201
48Z6336B_EN
3-106 Setting the time-delay period for distance protection, zone 1
Tripping in
zones 2, 3 and 4
There are two timer stages available for zone 2 and two timer stages for zone 3. One of
these timer stages is triggered if fault (short-circuit) conditions apply, the other for
overload conditions. The train start-up detection stages di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt determine
which timer stage is triggered. “Zn Decision” blocks similar to zone 1.
P438/EN M/De7 // AFSV.12.11063 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST : Blocking DIST : t2S

t2 S EXT PSx
[ 039 164] [ * ]
DIST : t2 S
DIST : t2 S & t 0 elapsed
Enable [ 039 009]
303 671
Z2 Decision DIST : Trip signal

Z2/t2S
[ 039 017]
DIST : Blocking DIST : t2L
t2 L EXT PSx
[ 039 165] [ * ]
DIST : t2 L
& t 0 elapsed
DIST : Z 2 [ 039 010]
starting
[ 039 005]
DIST : Z2 ' Z2 Decision DIST : Trip signal
starting Z2/t2L
[ 039 006] [ 039 018]

t3 S EXT PSx
[ 039 166] [ * ]
DIST : t3 S
Enable [ 039 143]
303 672

Z3/t3S
[ 039 145]
DIST : Blocking
t3 L EXT DIST : t3L
[ 039 167] PSx
[ * ]
DIST : t3 L
& t 0 elapsed
DIST : Z 3 [ 039 144]
starting
[ 039 140]
starting Z3/t3L
[ 039 141] [ 039 146]

t4 S EXT PSx
[ 039 002] [ * ]
DIST : t4 S
Enable [ 039 047]
310 056

Z4/t4S
[ 039 040]
DIST : Blocking DIST : t4L
t4 L EXT PSx
[ 039 019] [ * ]
DIST : t4 L
t 0 elapsed
& [ 039 048]
DIST : Z 4
starting
[ 039 042]
starting Z4/t4L
[ 039 043] [ 039 041]
Parameter DIST : t2S DIST : t2L DIST : t3S DIST : t3L DIST : t4S DIST : t4L
PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx PSx
set 1 012 029 012 190 012 030 012 194 080 011 080 012
set 2 012 079 012 191 012 080 012 195 081 011 081 012
set 3 013 029 012 192 013 030 012 196 082 011 082 012
set 4 013 079 012 193 013 080 012 197 083 011 083 012
48Z6337B_EN
3-107 Setting the time-delay period for distance protection, zones 2, 3 and 4
3-154 P438/EN M/De7 // AFSV.12.11063 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.4 Train Start-Up Detection di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt
It may be difficult, by impedance measurement alone, to discriminate between faults far

along the catenary, and heavy loading at poor power factors. Zones 2, 3 and 4 of the
distance protection are therefore equipped with three additional functions to distinguish
faults (short circuits) from features of normal operation (high load due to the acceleration
of powerful traction vehicles). The three train start-up detection stages can be enabled
and set separately for zones 3 and 4.
Readiness of the train

start-up detection stages
The train start-up detection stages are ready if the following conditions are met:
Distance protection is not blocked.

The second and/or third stage(s) of distance protection are (is) to operate with train
start-up detection stages.
The operate value of the respective train start-up detection stages (di/dt, dv/dt or
dϕ/dt) is not set to Blocked.
Using zone 2 as an example, Figure 3-108 shows the conditions to be met for the train
start-up detection stages to be ready. This will apply accordingly to zones 3 and 4.
DIST: di/dt not

DIST: Blocking ready, Z2
303 667 >1
[039 030]
DIST: Z2 Op.mode
dx/dt SGx
[ * ]
0: Disabled
DIST: Z2Delta I
(di/dt) SGx
[ * ]
0: Blocked DIST: dv/dt
>
not ready, Z2
1 [039 031]
DIST: Z2Delta V
(dv/dt) SGx
[ * ]
0: Blocked DIST: dphi/dt
>
not ready,Z2
1 [039 032]
DIST: Z2D.phi
(dphi/dt) SGx
[ * ]
0: Blocked
Setting DIST: Z2 Op.mode DIST: Z2Delta I DIST: Z2Delta V DIST: Z2D.phi
dx/dt SGx (di/dt) SGx (dv/dt) SGx (dphi/dt) SGx
Group 1 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
Group 2 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
Group 3 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
Group 4 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206
48Z5443A_UK
3-108 Readiness of the train start-up detection stages, zone 2
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation of the train

start-up detection stages
The maximum change in measured values D e l t a I , D e l t a U and D e l t a ϕ during
sampling intervals D e l t a t = 9 0 m s can be set separately for zones 2, 3 and 4. A
short circuit is detected if the following conditions are met during a sampling interval:
The current rises by more than the set D e l t a I

AND/OR
The voltage falls by more than the set D e l t a V
AND/OR
The angle changes by more than the set D e l t a ϕ and the current has exceeded a
0.2 Inom threshold.
The P438 user can select by setting whether all three criteria (AND operation) or just one
criterion (OR operation) must be met for a short-circuit detection. If not all the criteria are
used, the P438 will set outputs of the blocked stages according to the operation selected
such that a switch between overload and short-circuit mode can be effected by the
remaining stages, as required.
If all three delta criteria are set to Blocked, short time-delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S are
always used regardless of the operation criteria (WITHOUT, OR, AND).
If a short-circuit is detected, short time-delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S are used; if an

overload is detected, long time-delays tZ2L, tZ3L or tZ4L are used. If no dx/dt stage is
enabled, time delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S are always used.
The dx/dt decisions remain stored for the duration of the distance protection start.
Figure 3-109 shows the operation of the train start-up detection stages, using zone 2 as
an example. This will apply similarly to zones 3 and 4.
3-156 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Z2 Op.Mode
dx/dt SGx
[ * ] DIST: tZ2S
Enable
303 671
0
1 &
2
&
0: Without
1: OR
2: AND
DIST: di/dt
Not Ready, Z2
[ 039 030 ] &
DIST: dv/dt
Not Ready, Z2
[ 039 031 ]
DIST: dphi/dt
Not Ready, Z2
[ 039 032 ]
DIST: Z2Delta
C I(di/dt) SGx
[ * ]
DIST: di/dt
I COMP S 1 Starting, Z2
[ 039 007 ]
R
1 t
&
DIST: Z2Delta
C V(dv/dt) SGx
[ * ]
DIST: dv/dt
V COMP S 1 Starting, Z2
[ 039 008 ]
R
1 t &
DIST: Z2D.
C phi(dphi/dt) SGx
[ * ]
DIST: dphi/dt
COMP S 1 Starting, Z2
[ 039 142 ]
R
1 t &
DIST: Starting
[ 036 135 ]
Setting DIST: Z2 Op.Mode DIST: Z2Delta DIST: Z2Delta DIST: Z2D.

dx/dt SGx I(di/dt) SGx V(dv/dt) SGx phi(dphi/dt) SGx
Group 1 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
Group 2 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
Group 3 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
Group 4 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206
48Z6338A_UK
3-109 Train start-up detection stages of zone 2 of distance protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.5 Wrong Phase Coupling Protection
This protection function is required for the detection of inadvertent paralleling of phase-
displaced infeeds. A typical example presents the direct feed from the three-phase
system (see figure 3-110). Each catenary section has its own supply. In order to
achieve an optimum load balance in the three-phase system, the catenary sections are
usually supplied from different phases of the three-phase system.
The catenary sections can be connected to allow compensation for the failure of one of the
section supplies. This coupling is permissible only when the supply of a section has
actually failed. If two out-of-phase supplies are inadvertently connected via the catenary,
a short circuit results. The fault (short-circuit) impedance is located on the line
perpendicular to the resultant impedance of catenary and transformers.
A
B
C
Transformer A Transformer B
Catenary
Rail
Section A Section B
X Transformer A
Angle between Zres

fed voltages
Z Section A + B
X Transformer B
48Z5445A_UK
3-110 Wrong phase coupling
3-158 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
The settings for the characteristics of the wrong phase coupling protection function have
to be selected such that the fault (short-circuit) impedance is located safely within the
tripping area.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
X
Tripping zone
WPC:Zmax
WPC:Zmin WPC:β
WPC:α
48Z5448B_UK
3-111 Characteristics of the wrong phase coupling protection function
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling/enabling the
wrong phase coupling
protection
The wrong phase coupling protection function must first be switched to available
(visible). Then this protection function can be disabled/enabled in each setting group.
Readiness of the wrong

phase coupling protection
The wrong phase coupling protection function is not ready if any one of the following
conditions applies:
Distance protection is disabled.

Distance protection is blocked.
The time-delay of the wrong phase coupling protection function is set to Blocked.
The wrong phase coupling protection function is blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
DIST: WPC Zone

Available
[ 022 002 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST: WPC Enable

SGx
[ * ]
1 & DIST: WPC Enabled

[039 155]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST: Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
DIST: WPC
& not ready
[039 156]
>1
DIST: Blocking
303 667
Setting DIST: WPC Enable DIST: WPC t SGx

DIST: WPC t SGx SGx
[ * ]
Group 1 076 130 076 137
Blocked Group 2 077 130 077 137
DIST: Blocking Group 3 078 130 078 137
tWPC EXT Group 4 079 130 079 137
[ 039 168 ]
48Z5447A_UK
3-112 Disabling, enabling and readiness of the wrong phase coupling protection
3-160 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation of the wrong

phase coupling protection
function
The P438 checks whether the voltage is lower than the set threshold
D I S T : W P C V < S G x and whether the current exceeds the set base-point current
(D I S T : I > S G x ). If this is the case, the P438 calculates the impedance. If the
impedance value is within the set tripping area, a timer stage is started. Once this time
period has elapsed, the trip signal is issued.
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
DIST: WPC Enabled DIST: WPC Zmin

[039 155] SGx
[ * ]
DIST: WPC
not ready DIST: WPC Zmax
[039 156] SGx
[ * ]
DIST: I> starting
[039 001]
DIST: WPC Beta
Angle SGx
[ * ]
DIST: WPC V<
SGx
[ * ]
DIST: WPC Alpha
SGx
[ * ]
V
& DIST: WPC

starting
MAIN: Inrush [039 158]
stabil. trigg
306 014
DIST: WPC t
SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Trip Signal

WPC
[039 159]
Setting DIST: WPC V< SGx DIST: WPC Zmin DIST: WPC Zmax DIST: WPC Beta DIST: WPC Alpha DIST: WPC t
SGx SGx Angle SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 132 076 135 076 136 076 134 076 133 076 137
Group 2 077 132 077 135 077 136 077 134 077 133 077 137
Group 3 078 132 078 135 078 136 078 134 078 133 078 137
Group 4 079 132 079 135 079 136 078 134 079 133 079 137
48Z5449A_UK
3-113 Wrong phase coupling protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21.6 Multiple Signaling of Distance Protection
The starting and trip signals generated by the distance protection function are grouped
together to form multiple (composite) signals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze) DIST: Starting

starting [ 036 135 ]
[ 039 003 ]
DIST: Z2
starting
[ 039 005 ]
DIST: Z3
starting
[ 039 140 ]
DIST: Z4
startingn
[ 039 042 ]
DIST: Z1'
(Z1',ze) starting
[ 039 004 ]
DIST: Z2'
starting
[ 039 006 ]
DIST: Z3'
starting
[ 039 141 ]
DIST: Z4'
starting
[ 039 043 ]
DIST: WPC
starting
[ 039 158 ]
48Z6339A_EN
3-114 Starting signals of distance protection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DIST: Trip signal DIST: Trip Signal

Z1/t1 [ 036 009 ]
[ 039 016 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z1,ze
[ 039 074 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z2/t2S
[ 039 017 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z2/t2L
[ 039 018 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z3/t3S
[ 039 145 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z3/t3L
[ 039 146 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z4/t4S
[ 039 040 ]
DIST: Trip signal
Z4/t4L
[ 039 041 ]
DIST: Trip signal
WPC
[ 039 159 ]
48Z6340A_EN
3-115 Trip signal of distance protection
3-162 P438/EN M/Ad7_ // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 High Impedance Protection (Function Group DELTA)
High impedance protection is designed to detect faults with high transient resistances
and it is based on a continuous monitoring for sudden current changes. The third and
fifth harmonic current components are continuously monitored so as to provide
stabilization during sudden current changes caused by load variations (e.g. a train enters
an adjacent feeder section). The operating range of the high impedance protection
function is characterized by adjustable minimum current and reactance limit values.
The sudden change of the current’s phase angle may additionally be selected as a
stabilization criterion.
Enabling/disabling high
impedance protection
High impedance protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: General
Enable USER
[ 022 179 ]
0
1 DELTA: Enabled
& [ 038 054 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DELTA: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes ** GROUP: Group y * Setting DELTA: Enable
y Active SGx
GROUP: Group y
Active 1 036 090 Group 1 062 030
[ ** ]
2 036 091 Group 2 063 030
3 036 092 Group 3 064 030
4 036 093 Group 4 065 030
48Z6351A_UK
3-116 Enabling/disabling high impedance protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of high
High impedance protection will issue the D E L T A : N ot Ready signal should one of the
following conditions be met:
High impedance protection has not been enabled.

High impedance protection is blocked by an appropriately configured binary input
function.
High impedance protection is blocked by a Close command, issued to the circuit
breaker, dependent on the duration of the blocking time period tBlock.
Time-delay tDelta is set to Blocked.
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit
AND the function is to be blocked according to the setting.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled DELTA: Not Ready

[ 038 054 ] [ 038 055 ]
DELTA: Block.
tDelta EXT
[ 038 053 ]
DELTA: tDelta
SGx
[ * ]
Blocked
DELTA: Blocking
by CB Close DELTA: tBlock
[ 022 191 ] SGx
[ * ]
0
1 & 1 t
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Close
Command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN: Manual
Close EXT
[ 036 047 ]
DELTA: Mode w/o

Voltage SGx
[ * ]
1
2 &
1: Delta I only
2: blocked
C&VTS: VTS Volts
Failure
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: M.c.b.
Trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DELTA: Vmin
triggered * Setting
310 051 DELTA: tDelta DELTA: tBlock DELTA: Mode w/o
SGx SGx Voltage SGx
DELTA: Delta Phi
Available Group 1 062 039 062 045 062 036
[ 022 189 ]
1: Yes
Group 2 063 039 063 045 063 036
DELTA: X Super.
Available Group 3 064 039 064 045 064 036
[ 022 188 ]
1: Yes
Group 4 065 039 065 045 065 036
48Z6352C_UK
3-117 Readiness of high impedance protection
3-164 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22.1 Minimum Current and Voltage Enabling of High Impedance Protection
The minimum current trigger for high impedance protection compares the RMS value of
the current to the set value Imin. The pickup of the base point trigger is determined by a
half-cycle RMS calculation of the current in order to ensure a short response time.
After operation, the full-cycle RMS value of the current is monitored. This ensures the
required stability and accuracy of the measuring system.
A permanent minimum voltage threshold (0.1 Vnom) is provided as additional

stabilization for reactance and angle measured values.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled
[ 038 054 ] c
DELTA: Imin
SGx
[ * ]
DELTA: Imin
I Starting
[ 038 059 ]
DELTA: Vmin
V > 0.1 Vnom Triggered
310 051
Setting DELTA: Imin

SGx
Group 1 062 031

Group 2 063 031
Group 3 064 031
Group 4 065 031
48Z6353B_UK
3-118 Minimum current and voltage enabling of high impedance protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22.2 Reactance-Limiting of High Impedance Protection
The high impedance protection function can be stabilized selectively by a reactance

check in forward and/or reverse direction which will issue a release signal to authorize
tripping. The function will operate independently of the setting for distance protection.
The reactance release feature must first be made globally available, i.e. 'visible'. Then
release conditions may be configured selectively for each setting group.
Operation of the
reactance release feature
The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds the minimum current value set at
D E L T A : I m i n S G x and that no fault is apparent in the voltage-measuring circuit.
If such is the case, the P438 will calculate the reactance value. If the resulting reactance
value lies within the set limits then the D E L T A : X - R e l e a s e authorization signal is
issued.
Note: Triggering of high impedance protection will be fairly unlikely when the
minimum value is set in only one direction. In such a case high impedance
protection will operate only in the direction "opposite" to the set reactance limit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled
[ 038 054 ] C
DELTA: X Super.
Available
[ 022 188 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DELTA: Imin &
Starting
[ 038 059 ]
C&VTS: VTS Volts
Failure C
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: M.c.b. DELTA: X,
Trip V EXT Forward SGx
[ 004 061 ] [ * ]
DELTA: Vmin DELTA: X,
Triggered Reverse SGx
310 051
[ * ]
V
DELTA: X-Release
[ 038 065 ]
I
*
Setting DELTA: X, DELTA: X,
Forward SGx Reverse SGx
Group 1 062 032 062 033
Group 2 063 032 063 033
Group 3 064 032 064 033
Group 4 065 032 065 033
48Z6354B_UK
3-119 Reactance-limiting of high impedance protection
3-166 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22.3 Checking for Changes of the Phase Angle (Sudden Angle Change
Detection)
The P438 will check for sudden angle changes to distinguish between load variations
and high impedance faults. A the phase angle change may be used as a criterion for a
fault.
The monitoring feature for sudden angle changes must first be made globally available,
i.e. 'visible'. Then operate thresholds for the monitoring feature may be configured
selectively for each setting group.
Operation of the monitoring

feature for sudden angle
changes
The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds the minimum current value set at
D E L T A : I m i n S G x and that no fault is apparent in the voltage-measuring circuit. If
this is the case, the P438 will monitor the phase angle. Should the phase angle value
change by more than the set D e l t a ϕ value during a set sampling interval then the
D E L T A : D e l t a P h i S t a r t i n g signal is issued.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled
[ 038 054 ] C
DELTA: Delta Phi

Available
[ 022 189 ]
0: No
1: Yes
&
DELTA: Imin
Starting
[ 038 059 ]
C&VTS: VTS Volts
Failure
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: M.c.b.
Trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ] C
DELTA: Vmin
Starting DELTA: Delta
310 051 Phi SGx
[ * ]
V
DELTA: Delta Phi
Starting
[ 038 063 ]
I
Setting DELTA: Delta

Phi SGx
Group 1 062 034

Group 2 063 034
Group 3 064 034
Group 4 065 034
48Z6357B_UK
3-120 Monitoring feature for sudden angle changes
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22.4 Harmonics Stabilization for Load Variations
The P438 will monitor the third and, selectively, the fifth harmonic current components to
distinguish between load variations and high impedance faults. Sudden current changes
caused by high impedance faults do not create any odd-numbered harmonic
components.
The harmonics stabilization feature must first be made globally available, i.e. 'visible'.
Then operate thresholds for the stabilization feature may be configured selectively for
each setting group.
The P438 will evaluate the ratio to the fundamental of the third and/or fifth harmonic
current components so as to detect load variations. Should these ratios exceed the
threshold values set at D E L T A : I ( 3 f n ) / I ( f n ) S G x or
D E L T A : I ( 5 f n ) / I ( f n ) S G x then the device has detected a load variation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled C
[ 038 054 ] &
DELTA: I(3fn)/
DELTA: Imin I(fn) SGx
Starting [ * ]
[ 038 059 ]
MAIN: I(3fn)/ DELTA: I(3fn)
I(fn) Starting
1)
310 054 [ 038 076 ]
DELTA: Superv.
I(5fn)avail
[ 022 193 ]
&
0
1 C
0: No DELTA: I(5fn)/
1: Yes I(fn) SGx
[ * ]
DELTA: I(5fn)
MAIN: I(5fn)/ Starting
I(fn) 1) [ 038 077 ]
310 055
DELTA: Delta I
Blocked
& [ 038 068 ]
DELTA: kST,
I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx
[ * ]
Blocked DELTA: Delta I
Extended
[ 038 066 ]
*
Setting DELTA: I(3fn)/ DELTA: I(5fn)/ DELTA: kST,
I(fn) SGx I(fn) SGx I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx
Group 1 062 040 062 042 062 041
Group 2 063 040 063 042 063 041
Group 3 064 040 064 042 064 041
Group 4 065 040 065 042 065 041
1) only if the processor module with DSP co-processor (optional) is fitted.

48Z6355C_UK
3-121 Harmonics stabilization for load variations
3-168 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22.5 Starting and Tripping of the High Impedance Protection Function
The sudden current change criterion of by the high impedance protection function
monitors the fundamental component of the current during a set sampling interval. With
this feature the setting of the sudden current change criterion can be handled
dynamically according to the harmonics stabilization setting. The high impedance
protection function is either blocked or stabilized (dynamically extended by multiplication
with the set factor) in accordance with the setting of parameter
DELTA: kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx.
Starting of the high

function
The sudden current change criterion represents the stabilized starting criterion and is
considered to be satisfied when the following conditions are met:
The minimum current threshold enabling the high impedance protection function has
been triggered.
The setting-dependent harmonics stabilization block is not active.
Reactance limits monitoring has been triggered OR is not configured.
Sudden angle change monitoring has been triggered OR is not configured.
Measuring-circuit monitoring of the voltage has not been triggered OR a setting-

dependent enabling of the sudden current change function has been issued with a
faulty voltage measuring-circuit.
A sudden current change, D e l t a I , (possibly stabilized) has been detected.
Starting of the high impedance protection function is recorded. Recording is reset when
minimum current enabling and reactance limit monitoring have dropped out. Additionally
recording is reset when both the tDelta time-delay and a 100 ms pulse duration have
elapsed.
Note: When tDelta is set to Blocked then resetting of the recorded start is carried out
after the 100 ms pulse duration.
Inrush stabilization
Depending on the settings of the M A I N : F c t . I n r u s h . R s t r . S G x parameters
T T
starting decisions issued by the high impedance protection function can be cancelled
when the inrush stabilization function has detected an inrush current.
Tripping of the high

function
tDelta is triggered when the high impedance protection function operates. Once the
starting time has elapsed, a trip signal is generated.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DELTA: Enabled
[ 038 054 ] &
DELTA: Not Ready
[ 038 055 ]
DELTA: Imin
Starting
[ 038 059 ]
DELTA: Delta I
Blocked
[ 038 068 ]
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014
DELTA: Mode w/o

Voltage SGx
[ * ]
1 &
2
1: Delta I only
2: Blocked
C&VTS: VTS Volts
Failure
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: M.c.b.
Trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DELTA: Vmin
Triggered
310 051
DELTA: X-Release
[ 038 065 ]
DELTA: X Super.
Available
[ 022 188 ] C
No
DELTA: Delta I
SGx
[ * ]
DELTA: Delta Phi
Starting
[ 038 063 ] DELTA: kST,
I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx
DELTA: Delta Phi [ * ]
Available
[ 022 189 ]
No
fnom
DELTA: Delta I
I S 1 Starting
& [ 038 060 ]
R
DELTA: Delta I
Extended
[ 038 066 ]
t1) 0
DELTA: Block.
tDelta EXT C
[ 038 053 ]
DELTA: tDelta
SGx
[ * ]
DELTA: Trip
t 0 Signal
[ 038 056 ]
Setting DELTA: Mode w/o DELTA: Delta I DELTA: kST, DELTA: tDelta
Voltage SGx SGx I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx SGx
Group 1 062 036 062 037 062 041 062 039
Group 2 063 036 063 037 063 041 063 039
Group 3 064 036 064 037 064 041 064 039
Group 4 065 036 065 037 065 041 065 039
1) t = tDelta + 100 ms 48Z6356B_UK

if tDelta = Blocked: t = 100 ms
3-122 Starting and tripping of the high impedance protection function
3-170 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Measuring-circuit Monitoring (Function Group C&VTS)
In normal (healthy system) operation, the P438 monitors the measured voltages
continuously. When the supervision detects an a.c. input problem, appropriate
measures are taken to prevent malfunction of the device and the faulty condition is
alarmed.
Enable/disable the VT and

CT Supervision function
The VT and CT Supervision function can be disabled or enabled using a setting
parameter. Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
CHECK
CHECK
CHECK
SGx
Setting CHECK
SGx
Group
Group
Group
Group
3-123 Enable/disable the VT and CT Supervision function
The supervision function is blocked for the duration of a system disturbance (general
starting).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the voltage-

measuring circuits
In addition to the monitoring of m.c.b. trip operating independently in function group
MAIN, the P438 also offers monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits based on
measured values. This is divided into the following sub-functions:
Undervoltage monitoring
Fuse failure monitoring
If triggered both sub-functions automatically block all functions using the measured
voltage.
Undervoltage monitoring
If undervoltage monitoring is enabled and it is not blocked by a binary signal input and
there is no general starting, the P438 monitors the voltage for it to fall below the
threshold set at C & V T S : V < , V - M o n i t . S G x . In this case the current must exceed
the threshold set at C & V T S : I > E n a b V < F u s e F S G x . Once the set time delay
has elapsed, the C & V T S : U n d e r v o l t a g e signal is issued.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: General
Start
[ 036 000 ]
C&VTS: Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
C&VTS: Blocking
V< EXT
[ 038 033 ]
C&VTS: VTS/Fuse
F. Enab SGx
[ * ] & C
0
C&VTS: V<, V- C&VTS: tV<, V-
1 monit. SGx monit. SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
0: No C&VTS: Undervoltage
& S1 1
1: Yes t [ 038 038 ]
0 R1
C&VTS: U< triggered

C&VTS: I> Enab 304 652
V< FuseF SGx
[ * ]
Setting C&VTS: VTS/Fuse C&VTS: V<, V- C&VTS: tV<, V- C&VTS: I> Enab
F. Enab SGx monit. SGx monit. SGx V< FuseF SGx
Group 1 014 225 014 229 014 233 014 188
Group 2 014 226 014 230 014 234 014 237
Group 3 014 227 014 231 014 235 014 238
Group 4 014 228 014 232 014 236 014 239
48Z5520B_UK
3-124 Undervoltage monitoring
3-172 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Fuse failure monitoring

If fuse failure monitoring is enabled and it is not blocked by a binary signal input and
there is no general starting, the voltage is monitored. Fuse failure monitoring issues an
alarm if the following conditions are met:
A voltage drop has to exceed the set threshold: C & V T S : D e l t a V V T S / F u s e

S G x within 2 power frequency cycles.
AND
As the voltage drops, the change in current must not exceed the set threshold:
C & V T S : D e l t a I V T S / F u s e S G x ( r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e s i g n , + o r -) .
AND
After the voltage drop, the voltage must be lower than the set threshold:
C&VTS: V<, FF SGx.
AND
After the voltage drop, the current is higher than the set threshold:
C&VTS: I> Enab V< FuseF SGx.
The C & V T S : V T S / F F V t r i g g e r e d signal will be reset if the following conditions

are satisfied:
The voltage is higher than the set threshold: C & V T S : V > V T S / F u s e F a i l S G x

AND
A minimum hold-time period of 125 ms has elapsed.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: General
Start
[ 036 000]
C&VTS:Enabled
[ 040 094]
C&VTS: Blocking
Fuse F. EXT
[038 037 ]
C&VTS: VTS/Fuse F.
Enab SGx
[ * ]
0
1
C&VTS: Delta V
0: No VTS/Fuse SGx
1: Yes [ * ]
125 ms C&VTS: VTS/FF

V triggered
V [ 035 081]
C&VTS: Delta I
VTS/Fuse SGx
[ * ]
C&VTS: V< VTS/Fuse

Fail SGx
[ * ]
C&VTS: I> Enab V<

FuseF SGx
[ * ]
C&VTS: V> VTS/

Fuse Fail SGx
[ * ]
Setting C&VTS: VTS/Fuse C&VTS: Delta V C&VTS: Delta I C&VTS: V< VTS/ C&VTS: I> Enab V< C&VTS: V> VTS/
F. Enab SGx VTS/Fuse SGx VTS/Fuse SGx Fuse Fail SGx FuseF SGx Fuse Fail SGx
Group 1 014 204 014 216 014 221 014 208 014 188 014 212
Group 2 014 205 014 217 014 222 014 209 014 237 014 213
Group 3 014 206 014 218 014 223 014 210 014 238 014 214
Group 4 014 207 014 219 014 224 014 211 014 239 014 215
48Z5521B_UK
3-125 Fuse failure monitoring
3-174 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Multiple signaling of the

monitoring functions
The C & V T S : M e a s . v o l t a g e o . k . signal is issued if the following conditions are
met:
No general starting signal is present.

The binary signal input configured to M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T is not
energized.
Undervoltage monitoring has not operated.
Fuse failure monitoring has not operated.
C&VTS
C&VTS
C&VTS: VTS/FF
V triggered
3-126 C & V T S : M e a s . V o l t a g e o . k . signal
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip C&VTS: VTS Volts

V EXT Failure
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
C&VTS:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
C&VTS: VTS/FF,
V triggered
[ 035 081 ]
48Z5470A_UK
3-127 Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Backup Time-Delayed Overcurrent Protection (Function Group BUOC)
If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked, since

accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup time-delayed overcurrent
protection (BUOC) is then automatically activated – if set accordingly. The backup
overcurrent protection function provides two definite-time overcurrent protection
stages.
BUOC protection
BUOC protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can
BUOC: General
Enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
BUOC: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
BUOC: Enabled
[ 040 093 ]
0
1
Setting BUOC: Enable
0: No SGx
1: Yes Group 1 072 118
Group 2 073 118
Group 3 074 118
Group 4 075 118
48Z5055A_UK
3-128 Disabling or enabling BUOC protection
3-176 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of backup
time-delayed overcurrent
protection
BUOC protection is ready when it is activated, enabled and at least one stage is
unblocked. If this is the case then BUOC protection will become effective
automatically as soon as the distance protection function is not ready. The latter can
occur, for example, if there is a malfunction in the voltage-measuring circuit or if the
distance protection function is not enabled in the active setting group.
Provided that the backup time-delayed overcurrent protection has started, it remains
active at least until the end of this starting, even when the condition for its activation
disappear (for example M.c.b. trip).
BUOC: Not ready

BUOC: Enable
BUOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
BUOC: Blocking
tI>> EXT
BUOC: Active
DIST: Not ready
48Z5056A_EN
3-129 Readiness of backup time-delayed overcurrent protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)
Current measurement
When the BUOC protection function is active, it monitors the current I to detect when
the set thresholds are exceeded. When a stage operates and the set time-delays have
elapsed, signals are issued and can be used as criteria for fault recording or tripping.
The timer stages connected in series to the triggers can be blocked by way of
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(Harmonic Restraint)
Depending on the setting at M A I N : F c t . A s g . I n r . R s t r . S G x starting decisions
made by the distance zones can be cancelled when the inrush stabilization function
has detected an inrush current.
BUOC: Enabled
[ 037 021 ]
BUOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 038 127 ]
BUOC: I> BUOC: tI>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
BUOC: Trip Signal
I>
& [ 036 114 ]
BUOC: Starting I>

[ 036 113 ]
BUOC: Blocking BUOC: Gen. Trip

tI>> EXT >1 Signal
[ 038 128 ] [ 036 122 ]
BUOC: I>> BUOC: tI>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
BUOC: Trip Signal

I>>
& [ 036 116 ]
BUOC: Starting
I>>
MAIN: Inrush [ 036 115 ]
stabil. trigg
306 014
Setting BUOC: I> BUOC: I>> BUOC: tI> BUOC: tI>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 010 058 010 127 010 059 010 128
Group 2 010 078 010 129 010 079 010 130
Group 3 010 098 010 131 010 099 010 132
Group 4 011 018 010 133 011 019 010 134
48Z5457A_UK
3-130 Backup Time-Delayed Overcurrent Protection
3-178 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)
When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing

fault. This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp were inadvertently left
connected at the remote end of the line, since the distance protection function -
depending on the setting - would not clear the fault until zone 2's time-delay tZ2 had
elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is desired.
Enable/disable switch on to
fault (short circuit)
protection
Switch on to fault protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
SOTF: General
Enable USER
[ 011 068 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
SOTF: Enabled
[ 040 069 ]
0
1
Setting SOTF Enable
0: No SGx
1: Yes Group 1 011 120
Group 2 011 121
Group 3 011 122
Group 4 011 123
48Z5065A_UK
3-131 Enable/disable switch on to fault (short circuit) protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking of switch on to
fault protection
As of version –606 switch on to fault protection may be blocked if the following
conditions are met:
an external blocking command signal, present at the binary signal input configured at
SOTF: B l o c k i n g E X T
an external auto-reclose signal, present at the binary signal input configured at
SOTF: Par. ARC Running EXT
a reclose command issued by the internal auto-reclose control function
Pulse duration of manual

closing
To ensure fast fault clearance upon manual closing, the manual close signal must be
applied not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P438. The manual close signal is
converted to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The user may specify whether the
following shall occur while this timer is running: The setting S O T F : O p e r a t i n g
M o d e S G x allows the user to choose between the following operating modes:
the occurrence of a general start while a timer stage is running shall cause a trip
(S O T F : T r i p s i g n a l )
(See section 'Starting Signals and Tripping Logic' for a definition of general starting)
OR
While this timer is running, a zone 1 extension shall occur (S O T F : Z 1
Extended).
3-180 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: General start

[ 036 000 ] SOTF: Trip signal
& [ 036 064 ]
SOTF: Enabled
[ 040 069 ] &
SOTF: Par. ARC
running EXT SOTF: Z1extended
& [ 035 076 ]
[ 039 063 ]
SOTF: Blocking EXT
[ 036 098 ]
MAIN: Protection SOTF: Man.

active Close timer SGx
[ * ]
MAIN: Manual close EXT 1 t SOTF: tManualclose

[ 036 047 ] & runn.
[ 036 063 ]
RECLS: Close
command SOTF: Blocking RECLS
305 650
SOTF: Operating
Mode SGx
[ * ]
4
5
4: Trip with starting

5: Trip with overreach
Setting SOTF: Man. SOTF: Operating
Close timer SGx Mode SGx
Group 1 011 060 011 061
Group 2 011 111 011 114
Group 3 011 112 011 115
Group 4 011 113 011 116
48Z5321A_UK
3-132 Switch on to fault protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Auto-Reclose Control (Function Group RECLS)
As of version –606 the auto-reclose control function (RECLS) will cause an automatic
reclosure on a line, previously cleared by a protection device, after certain faults have
occurred.
The auto-reclose control function of the P438 allows triggering of trip times by different
starting signals. Once the trip times have elapsed, a trip signal is generated. The auto-
reclose control function of the P438 permits multiple reclosing sequences. A reclosing
sequence begins with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after
reclosure by a HSR, then successive attempt(s) can be made to clear the fault with time-
delayed reclosure(s) (TDR).
Enabling and disabling the

auto-reclose function
The function is globally made available (independently of setting groups) using
R E C L S : G e n e r a l E n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a setting group
using R E C L S : E n a b l e S G x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the
auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The front panel user interface
(HMI) or the MiCOM S1 support software and the binary signal inputs have equal status
in this regard. If only the R E C L S : E n a b l e E X T setting is assigned to a binary
signal input, then auto-recloser will be enabled by a positive edge (pick-up) of the input
signal and disabled by a negative edge (drop-off). If only the
R E C L S : D i s a b l e E X T setting has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a
signal at this input will have no effect.
3-182 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
RECLS:
Setting RECLS:
Group
Group
Group
Group
3-133 Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)
Auto-reclose blocking
The auto-recloser is blocked and the R E C L S : B l o c k e d signal will be issued if the
following conditions are met:
A manual close has occurred,

A trip signal is present at the circuit breaker’s re-trip input
(only relevant with setting R E C L S : W i t h R e - T r i p = 'No'),
A trip signal is present at the back-up circuit breaker / the back-up protection device.
A manual trip command has been issued.
The current measured at the instant of tripping exceeds the threshold value
RECLS: Block. ARC f. I> SGx.
A signal is present at the binary signal input configured to
RECLS: Blocking EXT.
When all blocking conditions have been removed, the associated blocking timer stage is
triggered. Auto-reclose blocking is cancelled when both blocking time-delays have
elapsed.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RECLS: Enabled RECLS: Blocked

1 1 [ 004 069 ]
[ 015 064 ]
SOTF: Blocking RECLS

305 650
RECLS: With Re-

Trip RECLS: Block.
[ 015 018 ] time int. SGx
[ * ]
0 & RECLS: Block. Time
Running
1 1 t 1 [ 037 004 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Re-Trip signal

[ 039 103 ]
MAIN: Back-Trip signal
[ 039 105 ]
RECLS: Blocked by I>
MAIN: Man. MainTrip sig. [ 037 126 ]
[ 039 081 ]
MAIN: Man. ReTrip signal
[ 039 082 ]
MAIN: Man. BackTrip sig.
[ 039 083 ]
RECLS: Block.
ARC f. I> SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: Block.
I time ext. SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: Blocking EXT 1 t

[ 036 050 ]
Setting RECLS: Block. RECLS: Block. RECLS: Block.

ARC f. I> SGx time int. SGx time ext. SGx
Group 1 015 104 015 043 015 058
Group 2 016 104 024 021 024 032
Group 3 017 104 024 081 024 092
Group 4 020 104 025 041 025 052
48Z5352A_UK
3-134 Auto-reclose blocking
3-184 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Auto-reclose function ready

to operate
The auto-recloser is ready to operate if the following conditions are met:
Protection is activated (on).

The auto-recloser is not blocked.
No auto-reclose cycle is running.
(A reclose cycle begins with the start of operative times and is terminated when
reclaim time 1 elapses.)
Reclaim time 2 is not running.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening and
closing mechanism ready).
The circuit breaker contacts must be in closed position.
Closed position scanning is optional.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RECLS: Check CB
Closed? SGx
[ * ]
0 ≥1
1 &
0: No
RECLS: CB closed
1: Yes 303 004
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT RECLS: Ready
[ 036 051 ] &
[ 004 068 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
RECLS: CB drive
ready EXT
[ 004 066 ]
RECLS: Blocked
[ 004 069 ]
RECLS: Cycle
running
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Not Ready
RECLS: Recl. Time 2
Running [ 037 008 ]
[ 036 221 ]
Setting RECLS: Check CB

Closed? SGx
Group 1 015 050
Group 2 024 024
Group 3 024 084
Group 4 025 044
48Z5351B_UK
3-135 Auto-reclose function ready to operate
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.1 Auto-Reclose Trip Times
When protection functions operating with auto-reclose control are started, the trip times
(HSR or TDR) are triggered together with operative time 1 and operative time 2. Trip
times may replace timer stages associated with the respective protection functions if the
following conditions are met:
The protection function’s trip signal is set as a criterion for the main-trip command or
re-trip command (only relevant when R E C L S : W i t h R e - T r i p is set to 'Yes'),
The trip time is not set to 'Blocked'.
The auto-recloser is ready to operate at starting time.
Operative time 1 or operative time 2 is running.
If the trip time has elapsed during an active auto-reclose cycle while the operative times
are still running, a trip signal from the associated function is issued. The HSR or TDR
trip time having caused the trip signal also determines when the dead time (HSR or
TDR) is to be started. Once the dead time commences, all trip times already triggered
and the operative times will be reset.
The beginning of the following starts or input signals trigger the trip times, provided that
the starting conditions are met and the respective trip times are not "blocked":
DIST: Starting Z1
DIST: Starting Z2 together with train start-up detection dx/dt Z2
DIST: Starting Z3 together with train start-up detection dx/dt Z3
DELTA: Delta I Starting
DTOC: Starting I>H
DTOC: Starting I>
DTOC: Starting I>>
IDMT: Starting Iref>
BUOC: Starting I>
BUOC: Starting I>>
Start by programmable logic
3-186 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
1
Signal n
Selected signals
&
RECLS: With Re-Trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready 1 &
[ 004 068 ]
RECLS: HSR trip time
RECLS: Cycle running 1 elapsed 303 152
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1
Running 1
[ 037 005 ] RECLS: HSR trip
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 Ctime t1 SGx
Running
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze) starting 1 t 0 DIST: tZ1 elapsed

[ 039 003 ] [ 036 026 ]
DIST: Z1'(Z1',ze) DIST: Trip signal Z1/t1
starting [ 039 016 ]
[ 039 004 ]
RECLS: HSR-
Ctr.DIST t2S SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Enable tZ2S & t 0 DIST: tZ2S elapsed

303 671 [ 039 009 ]
DIST: Z2 starting 1
[ 039 005 ] DIST: Trip signal Z2/t2S
[ 039 017 ]
DIST: Z2´ starting RECLS: HSR-
[ 039 006 ] Ctr.DIST t2L SGx
[ * ]
& t 0 DIST: tZ2L elapsed

[ 039 010 ]
DIST: Trip signal Z2/t2L
[ 039 018 ]
RECLS: HSR-
Ctr.DIST t3S SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Enable tZ3S & t 0 DIST: tZ3S elapsed

303 672 [ 039 143 ]
DIST: Z3 starting 1
[ 039 140 ] DIST: Trip signal Z3/t3S
[ 039 145 ]
DIST: Z3´ starting RECLS: HSR-
[ 039 141 ] Ctr.DIST t3L SGx
[ * ]
& t 0 DIST: tZ3L elapsed

[ 039 144 ]
DIST: Trip signal Z3/t3L
[ 039 146 ]
Setting RECLS: HSR trip RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR-
time t1 SGx tr.DIST t2S SGx tr.DIST t2L SGx tr.DIST t3S SGx tr.DIST t3L SGx
Group 1 015 072 015 144 015 152 015 160 015 168
Group 2 024 040 015 145 015 153 015 161 015 169
Group 3 025 000 015 146 015 154 015 162 015 170
Group 4 025 060 015 147 015 155 015 163 015 171
48Z5353A_UK
3-136 Auto-reclose trip times for distance protection HSR
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
’OR’ Gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
’OR’ Gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
&
RECLS: With Re-trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ] &
RECLS: TDR
RECLS: Cycle trip time elapsed
Running 303 153
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1
Running
[ 037 005 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 RECLS: TDR-
Running C Tr.DIST t1 SGx
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze) t 0 DIST: t1Z Elapsed

Starting [ 036 026 ]
[ 039 003 ]
DIST: Z1´(Z1´,ze) DIST: Trip Signal
Starting Z1/t1
[ 039 004 ] [ 039 016 ]
RECLS: TDR-
C Tr.DIST t2S SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Enable tZ2S t 0 DIST: tZ2S Elapsed

303 671 & [ 039 009 ]
DIST: Z2 Starting
[ 039 005 ] DIST: Trip Signal
Z2/t2S
[ 039 017 ]
DIST: Z2´ Starting RECLS: TDR-
[ 039 006 ] C Tr.DIST t2L SGx
[ * ]
t 0 DIST: tZ2L Elapsed

& [ 039 010 ]
DIST: Trip Signal
Z2/t2L
[ 039 018 ]
RECLS: TDR-
C Tr.DIST t3S SGx
[ * ]
DIST: tZ3S Enable t 0 DIST: tZ3S Elapsed

303 672 & [ 039 143 ]
DIST: Z3 Starting
[ 039 140 ] DIST: Trip Signal
Z3/t3S
[ 039 145 ]
DIST: Z3´ Starting RECLS: TDR-
[ 039 141 ] C Tr.DIST t3L SGx
[ * ]
t 0 DIST: tZ3L Elapsed

& [ 039 144 ]
DIST: Trip Signal
Z2/t3L
[ 039 146 ]
Setting RECLS: TDR- RECLS: TDR- RECLS: TDR- RECLS: TDR- RECLS: TDR-
Tr.DIST t1 SGx Tr.DIST t2S SGx Tr.DIST t2L SGx Tr.DIST t3S SGx Tr.DIST t3L SGx
Group 1 015 073 015 148 015 156 015 164 015 172
Group 2 024 041 015 149 015 157 015 165 015 173
Group 3 025 001 015 150 015 158 015 166 015 174
Group 4 025 061 015 151 015 159 015 167 015 175
48Z5354B_UK
3-137 Auto-reclose trip times for distance protection TDR
3-188 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
'OR' Gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected Signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
'OR' Gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected Signals &
RECLS: With Re-Trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ] &
RECLS: Cycle
Running
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1
Running
[ 037 005 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 RECLS: HSR-
Running C Tr.DELTA tD. SGx
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
DELTA: Delta I t 0
Starting RECLS: Trip time
[ 038 060 ] HSR elaps
303 152
DELTA: Trip
Signal
[ 038 056 ]
RECLS: TDR-
C Tr.DELTA tD. SGx
[ * ]
t 0 RECLS: Trip time

TDR elaps.
303 153
* Setting RECLS: HSR- RECLS: TDR-

Tr.DELTA tD. SGx Tr.DELTA tD. SGx
Group 1 008 192 008 196
Group 2 008 193 008 197
Group 3 008 194 008 198
Group 4 008 195 008 199
48Z6366A_UK
3-138 HSR and TDR auto-reclose trip times for high impedance protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip 'OR'

gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
1
Signal n
Selected signals
&
RECLS: With Re-Trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready 1 &
[ 004 068 ]
RECLS: Cycle running
[ 037 000 ] RECLS: HSR trip time
1 elapsed
303 152
RECLS: Oper. Time 1 1
Running
[ 037 005 ] RECLS:HSR-
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 Ctr.DTOC tI>H SGx
Running
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
DTOC: Starting I>H t 0 DTOC: Trip signal tI>H

[ 035 022 ] [ 040 076 ]
RECLS: HSR-
Ctr.DTOC tI> SGx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting I> t 0 DTOC: tI> Elapsed

[ 035 020 ] [ 040 010 ]
DTOC: Trip signal tI>
[ 041 020 ]
RECLS: HSR-
Ctr.DTOC tI>> SGx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting I>> t 0 DTOC: tI>> Elapsed

[ 035 021 ] [ 040 106 ]
DTOC: Trip signal tI>>
[ 040 011 ]
RECLS: HSR-
Ctr.IDMT kIrefSGx
[ * ]
IDMT: Starting Iref> t 0 IDMT: Trip signal tIref

[ 040 080 ] [ 040 084 ]
Setting RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR-

tr.DTOC tI>H SGx tr.DTOC tI> SGx tr.DTOC tI>> SGx tr.IDMT kIrefSGx
Group 1 015 069 015 105 015 074 015 094

Group 2 024 052 020 105 020 107 020 113
Group 3 024 053 021 105 021 107 021 113
Group 4 024 054 022 105 022 107 022 113
48Z5355A_UK
3-139 Auto-reclose trip times for DTOC and IDMT protection HSR
3-190 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
'OR' Gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
'OR' Gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals &
RECLS: With
Re-Trip
[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ] &
RECLS: Cycle
Running
[ 037 000 ] RECLS: TDR Trip
RECLS: Oper. t. Elapsed
303 153
Time 1 Running
[ 037 005 ]
RECLS: TDR-Tr.
RECLS: Oper. C DTOC tI>H SGx
Time 2 Running [ * ]
[ 037 065 ]
DTOC: Starting t 0 DTOC: Trip
I>H signal tI>H
[ 035 022 ] [ 040 076 ]
RECLS: TDR-Tr.
C DTOC tI> SGx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting t 0 DTOC: tI>

I> Elapsed
[ 035 020 ] [ 040 010 ]
DTOC: Trip
Signal tI>
[ 041 020 ]
RECLS: TDR-Tr.
C DTOC tI>> SGx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting t 0 DTOC: tI>>

I>> Elapsed
[ 035 021 ] [ 040 106 ]
DTOC: Trip
Signal tI>>
[ 040 011 ]
RECLS: TDR-Tr.
C IDMT kIrefSGx
[ * ]
IDMT: Starting t 0 IDMT: Trip

Iref> Signal tIref>
[ 040 080 ] [ 040 084 ]
Setting RECLS: TDR-Tr. RECLS: TDR-Tr. RECLS: TDR-Tr. RECLS: TDR-Tr.

DTOC tI>H SGx DTOC tI> SGx DTOC tI>> SGx IDMT kIrefSGx
Group 1 015 070 015 106 015 075 015 095
Group 2 024 055 020 106 020 108 020 114
Group 3 024 056 021 106 021 108 021 114
Group 4 024 057 022 106 022 108 022 114
48Z5356A_UK
3-140 Auto-reclose trip times for DTOC and IDMT protection TDR
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
≥1
Signal n
Selected signals &
RECLS: With Re-Trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready ≥1 &

[ 004 068 ]

[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1
Running ≥1
[ 037 005 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 RECLS: HSR-tr.
Running C BUOC tI> SGx
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
BUOC: Starting I> t 0 RECLS: HSR trip

≥1 time elapsed
[ 036 013 ] 303 152
RECLS: HSR-tr.
C BUOC tI>> SGx
[ * ]
BUOC: Starting I>> t 0 BUOC: Trip signal

≥1 I>
[ 036 115 ] [ 036 014 ]
RECLS: TDR-tr.
C BUOC tI> SGx
[ * ]
t 0 RECLS: TDR trip

≥1 time elapsed
303 153
RECLS: TDR-tr.
C BUOC tI>> SGx
[ * ]
BUOC: Trip signal
≥1 I>>
[ 036 116 ]
t 0
Setting RECLS: HSR- RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: TDR-tr. RECLS: TDR-tr.

tr.BUOC tI> SGx BUOC tI>> SGx BUOC tI> SGx BUOC tI>> SGx
Group 1 015 109 015 111 015 110 015 112
Group 2 020 109 020 111 020 110 020 112
Group 3 022 109 021 111 021 110 021 112
Group 4 023 109 022 111 022 110 022 112
48Z5357B_UK
3-141 Auto-reclose trip times for BUOC protection HSR and TDR
3-192 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Auto-reclose starting by
programmable logic
(example)
This example (see Figure 3-142) illustrates the possible interconnection and the binary
signal output for starting the trip time using a binary signal input.
By using the programmable logic, a binary signal input with an operate delay and an
AND element is implemented. The R E C L S : T r i p b l o c k e d signal has been
assigned to the second input on this AND element. The output from the AND element
must be included in the configuration of the ‘m out of n’ selection for the main trip
command. The trip time can be triggered by the output signal
RECLS: Start by logic.
In this example, the following list settings need to be set (see section ‘Setting a List
Setting’ in chapter ‘User Interface (HMI)’).
List Parameter
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. OR e.g. L O G I C : I n p u t 4
Outp. 1 EXT
(address 030 000) (address 034 003)
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. OR LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
Outp. 2 (address 042 033)
AND NOT RECLS: Not Ready
(address 037 008)
In general, any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to start the
auto-reclose trip time.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
LOGIC: Fct.
Assignm. Outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
LOGIC: Op. Mode t

Output 1
[ 030 001 ]
Signal 1 RECLS: Fct.

assignm. tLOGIC
Signal 2 m out of n [ 015 033 ]
Signal n
LOGIC: Output 1 1 out of n
t 0
RECLS: Start by
LOGIC
LOGIC: [ 037 078 ]
Output 1 (t)
LOGIC: Fct.
Assignm. Outp. 2
[ 030 004 ]
LOGIC: Op. Mode t

Output 2
[ 030 005 ]
m out of n
³1 &
RECLS: Not Ready
[ 037 008 ]
LOGIC: Output 2
LOGIC: LOGIC: Output 2 (t)

Output 2 (t) [ 042 035 ]
48Z5366A_UK
3-142 Example of programmable logic in the auto-reclose control function
3-194 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Main-Trip Setting RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: TDR-tr.

'OR' gate LOGIC SGx LOGIC SGx
[ 021 007 ] Group 1 015 098 015 099
Group 2 024 110 024 122
Signal 1
Group 3 024 160 024 172
Signal 2 m out of n Group 4 025 110 025 122
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN: Re-Trip
'OR' gate
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
1
Signal n
Selected signals &
RECLS: With Re-Trip

[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: Ready 1 &
[ 004 068 ]
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1 1
Running
[ 037 005 ] RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: Start by
RECLS: Oper. Time 2 C LOGIC SGx LOGIC
Running 303 152
[ 037 065 ] [ * ]
RECLS: Start by LOGIC t 0 1 RECLS: Trip signal

[ 037 078 ] [ 039 099 ]
RECLS: TDR-tr.
C LOGIC SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: TDR trip time

t 0 elapsed
303 153
48Z5358A_UK
3-143 HSR and TDR auto-reclose trip times for programmable logic
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-195

3 Operation
(continued)
Auto-reclose cycle
When the auto-recloser is ready, an auto-reclose cycle is started by one of the following
functions:
Starting of protection functions that have a trip time configured and thus allow
reclosing
Starting or tripping of an external protection device, if it has been configured
accordingly (R E C L S : P a r a l l e l T r i p S G x )
A test HSR
As the auto-reclose cycle runs, the R E C L S : R e a d y signal is no longer taken into
account.
The auto-reclose cycle consists in:

Dead time HSR, dead time TDR or maximum dead time is running.
Reclaim time 1 is running.
The R E C L S : D e f . r e c l . t i m e r u n n . signal is issued with the last reclose
command in the auto-reclose cycle. Simultaneously the last, uninterruptible reclaim
time 1 is triggered. An auto-reclose cycle is terminated when this last reclaim time 1 has
elapsed.
If there is a new protection start during the last reclaim time 1, the auto-recloser is also
blocked for the duration of the starting pulse. The R E C L S : L o c k f . G e n . S t a r t i n g
signal is issued.
3-196 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.2 High-speed Reclosure (HSR)
If the starting conditions are met then any auto-recloser-relevant protection start will
trigger an auto-reclose cycle. Any start will trigger the associated trip times, operative
time 1 and operative time 2. Operative time 1 and operative time 2 have equal status
when they are running. Starting conditions for an auto-reclose cycle must be released
while operative timer stages are running. This means that the circuit breaker has opened
(start and trip signals of the function have dropped out) so that a dead time may be
triggered. Which dead time is triggered depends on which operative time has elapsed.
Voltage-independent
reclosure
When the start signal is reset, operative time 1 is terminated and the HSR dead time
begins. If there is no starting during the HSR dead time, a reclose command is issued
once the HSR dead time has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered. If
there is no starting during reclaim time 1, the R E C L S : R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l
signal will be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is
complete.
Voltage-dependent
reclosure
Should starting conditions for an auto-reclose cycle drop out after operative time 1 has
elapsed but not before operative time 2 has elapsed, the maximum dead time
(R E C L S : D e a d T i m e M a x S G x ) will be triggered. With the triggering of the
maximum dead time a reclosure of the line from the far end will be expected. A reclose
command is issued and the maximum dead time is reset when the voltage criterion
(R E C L S : V > S G x ) is met and the associated time delay (R E C L S : t V > S G x ) has
elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered. If no start occurs during reclaim
time 1, the R E C L S : R e c l o s u r e S u c c e s s f u l signal will be issued when reclaim
time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is complete.
HSR rejection
Reclaim time 1 is triggered should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault during the
operative times. All protection timer stages are enabled again simultaneously, provided
that their trip time was not set to 'Blocked'.
If operative times elapse without the protection having reached a decision to trip, the
RECLS function is ready again immediately after the relevant starting condition has
dropped out.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-197

3 Operation
(continued)
Unsuccessful high-speed
reclosure
If the HSR does not succeed and another protection start occurs then a time-delayed
reclosure (TDR) is started if at least one TDR is permitted. If no TDR is permitted after a
HSR then the reclaim time 1 presently running is the last reclaim time 1 of the auto-
reclose cycle. All trip times are reset when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. Simultaneously
all protection timer stages are enabled again. If a trip signal is issued during the last
reclaim time 1 then it will be regarded as a final trip. The auto-reclose cycle is complete
after the last reclaim time 1 has elapsed.
The final trip will trigger reclaim time 2. The auto-reclose control function remains
blocked while reclaim time 2 is running after an unsuccessful reclose attempt.
Auto-reclose blocking may be removed if one of the following conditions is met:
Reclaim time 2 has elapsed (if it was not set to 'Blocked'),

Reclaim time 2 was reset by a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured
Suppressing CB trip
signals
When the R E C L S : C y c l e R u n n i n g signal appears, the R E C L S : S i g .
I n t e r r . C B T r i p signal (interruption of breaker trip signal) is issued and it is reset
after the final HSR or TDR of the current auto-reclose cycle, once the close command
pulse time has elapsed. When the R E C L S : B l o c k e d signal is issued during an
auto-reclose cycle, the signal is likewise reset immediately.
3-198 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HSR successful HSR has failed
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ]

[ 037 000 ]
DIST: Z1(Z1,ze) starting

[ 039 003 ]
RECLS: HSR-tr.DIST t1
runn.
310 021 1 1
DIST: t1 running
310 023
6
DIST: Trip signal Z1/t1

[ 039 016 ]
MAIN: Main-Trip command

[ 039 011 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1

Running
[ 037 005 ] 2 2
RECLS: Dead Time HSR

Runn.
[ 037 067 ] 3 3
MAIN: Close command

[ 037 009 ]
7 7
RECLS: Recl. Time 1

Running
[ 036 042 ] 4 4
RECLS: Reclosure
successful
[ 036 062 ]
RECLS: Recl. Time 2

Running
[ 036 221 ] 5
MAIN: Final trip

[ 038 103 ]
RECLS: Sig.interr. CB
trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: Operative RECLS: HSR Dead RECLS: Reclaim RECLS: Reclaim DIST: tZ1
DIST t1 SGx Time 1 SGx Time SGx Time 1 SGx Time 2 SGx SGx
Group 1 015 072 015 066 015 056 015 054 015 124 012 028
Group 2 024 040 024 035 024 030 024 028 015 125 012 078
Group 3 025 000 024 095 024 090 024 088 015 126 013 028
Group 4 025 060 025 055 025 050 025 048 015 127 013 078
7 MAIN: CB Close Pulse Durn. [ 015 067 ]

RECLS: No. permit. TDR SGx Setting: 0
48Z5359B_UK
3-144 Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 1, triggered by a trip in distance protection zone 1
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-199

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HSR successful HSR has failed
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ]

[ 037 000 ]

[ 039 003 ]
runn. 1 1
310 021
DIST: t1 running
310 023

[ 039 016 ]

[ 039 011 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 2

Running
[ 037 005 ] 2 2
RECLS: Max. Dead Time

Runn.
[ 037 069 ] 3 3
RECLS: V> starting

4
RECLS: tV> running

5
MAIN: Close command

[ 037 009 ]
7
RECLS: Recl. Time 1

Running
[ 036 042 ] 6 6
RECLS: Reclosure
successful
[ 036 062 ]
trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: Operative RECLS: Dead Time RECLS: V> SGx RECLS: tV> SGx RECLS: Reclaim
DIST t1 SGx Time 2 SGx Max SGx Time 1 SGx
Group 1 015 072 015 083 015 084 015 128 015 140 015 054
Group 2 024 040 024 042 024 043 015 129 015 141 024 028
Group 3 025 000 025 002 025 003 015 138 015 142 024 088
Group 4 025 060 025 062 025 063 015 139 015 143 025 048

48Z5360C_UK
3-145 Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 2, triggered by a trip in distance protection zone 1
3-200 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Test HSR
Triggering a test HSR is possible only if the auto-recloser is ready. Once a test HSR has
been triggered, a trip signal of defined duration is issued. The subsequent sequence
corresponds to a successful HSR (open and reclose command when the HSR dead time
has elapsed). Once the close command pulse time has elapsed, further triggering during
the reclaim time does not result in a further HSR.
A test HSR can be triggered either from the front panel user interface (HMI) or using a
binary signal input and it will add an increment to the R E C L S : N o . o f H S R
R e c l o s e s counter.
For each ‘Test HSR’ request that does not result in a HSR test, the R E C L S : R e j e c t
T e s t H S R signal i s generated.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RECLS: Test HSR

USER
[ 011 066 ]
0
1 1 1 80 ms & RECLS: Test HSR
[ 034 023 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
RECLS: Test HSR EXT & RECLS: Reject Test HSR

[ 037 017 ] [ 036 055 ]
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ]
48Z5361A_UK
3-146 Test HSR
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-201

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.3 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR)
Multiple reclosures using TDRs are possible if the operating mode is set accordingly.
A TDR may be performed after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR.
This is possible only if the setting f o r R E C L S : N o . P e r m i t . T D R S G x (number
of permitted TDRs) is not zero.
If the starting conditions are met then any start by a protection function associated with
the auto-recloser will trigger the associated trip times. Simultaneously operative time 1
and operative time 2 are also triggered.
Voltage independent
reclosure
When the start signal is reset, operative time 1 is terminated and the TDR dead time
begins. If there is no starting during the TDR dead time, a reclose command is issued
once the TDR dead time period has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered.
If there is no starting during reclaim time 1, the R E C L S : R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l
signal will be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is
complete.
Voltage-dependent
reclosure
Should starting conditions for an auto-reclose cycle drop out after operative time 1 has
elapsed but not before operative time 2 has elapsed, the maximum dead time
(R E C L S : D e a d T i m e M a x S G x ) will be triggered. With the triggering of the
maximum dead time a reclosure of the line from the far end will be expected. A reclose
command is issued and the maximum dead time is reset when the voltage criterion
(R E C L S : V > S G x ) is met and the associated time delay (R E C L S : t V > S G x ) has
elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered. If no start occurs during reclaim
time 1, the R E C L S : R e c l o s u r e S u c c e s s f u l signal will be issued when reclaim
time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is complete.
TDR rejection
operative times. All protection timer stages are enabled again simultaneously, provided
that their trip time was not set to 'Blocked'. The auto-reclose cycle is complete when
reclaim time 1 has elapsed.
If operative times elapse while the protection function has not reached a trip decision,
reclaim time 1 is triggered. The auto-reclose cycle is complete when reclaim time 1 has
elapsed.
3-202 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Unsuccessful time-delayed
reclosure
If there is a new protection start during reclaim time 1 and at least one TDR is still
permitted, then reclaim time 1 is terminated and, when the trip time has elapsed, another
trip command is issued to begin a new reclosure attempt. If no further TDR is permitted
then the reclaim time 1 presently running is the last reclaim time 1 of the auto-reclose
cycle. All trip times are reset when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. Simultaneously all
protection timer stages are enabled again. If a trip signal is issued during the last
reclaim time 1 then it will be regarded as a final trip. The auto-reclose cycle is complete
after the last reclaim time 1 has elapsed.
The final trip will trigger reclaim time 2. The auto-reclose control function remains
blocked while reclaim time 2 is running after an unsuccessful reclose attempt.
Auto-reclose blocking may be removed if one of the following conditions is met:
Reclaim time 2 has elapsed (if it was not set to 'Blocked'),

Reclaim time 2 was reset by a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured
operative times. Simultaneously all protection timer stages are enabled again.
If operative times are elapsing without the protection having reached a decision for a trip
command, the RECLS function is immediately ready again after the relevant starting has
dropped out.
Suppressing CB trip
signals
When the R E C L S : C y c l e r u n n i n g signal appears, the
R E C L S : S i g . i n t e r r . C B t r i p signal (interruption of breaker trip signal) is issued
and it is reset after the final HSR or TDR of the current auto-reclose cycle, once the
close command pulse time has elapsed. When the R E C L S : B l o c k e d signal is
issued during an auto-reclose cycle, the signal is likewise reset immediately.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-203

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HSR has failed TDR has failed TDR successful
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ]

[ 037 000 ]

[ 039 003 ]
runn.
310 021 1
RECLS: TDR-tr.DIST t1
runn.
310 022 2 2

[ 039 016 ]

[ 039 011 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1

Running
[ 037 005 ] 3 3 3
RECLS: Dead Time HSR

Runn.
[ 037 067 ] 4
RECLS: Dead Time TDR

Runn.
[ 037 003 ] 5 5
MAIN: Close command

[ 037 009 ]
7 7 7
RECLS: Recl. Time 1

Running
[ 036 042 ] 6 6 6
RECLS: Reclosure
successful
[ 036 062 ]
trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting RECLS: HSR-tr. RECLS: TDR-tr. RECLS: Operative RECLS: HSR Dead RECLS: TDR Dead RECLS: Reclaim
DIST t1 SGx DIST t1 SGx Time 1 SGx Time SGx Time SGx Time 1 SGx
Group 1 015 072 015 073 015 066 015 056 015 057 015 054
Group 2 024 040 024 041 024 035 024 030 024 031 024 028
Group 3 025 000 025 001 024 095 024 090 024 091 024 088
Group 4 025 060 025 061 025 055 025 050 025 051 025 048

48Z5362B_UK
3-147 Signal sequence of a failed HSR followed by a failed TDR and then by a final successful TDR with a trip during operative time 1,
triggered by a trip in distance protection zone 1
3-204 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.4 Zone Extension
A zone extension of impedance zone 1 generally occurs when the respective parameters
have been enabled. The extension is made for impedance and resistance values of the
forward and reverse directional zone settings.
High-speed reclosures and time-delayed reclosures will enable different zone extension
factors.
Zone extension on high-

speed reclosure
Depending on the condition that the auto-recloser is ready and that the parameter
R E C L S : Z o n e E x t n o n H S R S G x is set to 'Yes', the reach of zone 1 is then
extended by zone extension factor D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d H S R . Zone extension
remains valid while the first operative time 1 or operative time 2 is running.
Zone extension on time-

delayed reclosure
A zone extension on time-delayed reclosure is then possible only if the setting for
R E C L S : Z o n e e x t n o n T D R S G x is 'Yes'. If, during a multiple HSR/TDR, at
least one further reclosure is permitted then the reach of impedance zone 1 is extended
by zone extension factor D I S T : k z e , T D R S G x when the first dead time
commences. Zone extension remains valid until the last operative time 1 or operative
time 2 has elapsed.
Zone extension during

reclosure
A zone extension during reclosure is applied to detect faults in the respective extended
zone after the reclose command from a high-speed reclosure or after the last reclose
command from a multiple HSR/TDR was issued.
With a multiple HSR/TDR the parameter R E C L S : Z o n e E x t . D u r . R C S G x will

be active only during the last time-delayed reclosure. The following settings are
possible:
Setting for R E C L S : Z o n e E x t . D u r . R C S G x = 'No':

At the beginning of the last dead time possible the extended reach for impedance
zone 1 is removed.
Setting for R E C L S : Z o n e E x t . D u r . R C S G x = 'Following HSR':
The zone extension for the high-speed reclosure is retained until the close command
pulse time has elapsed.
Setting for R E C L S : Z o n e E x t . D u r . R C S G x = 'Following TDR':
After the last possible operative time 1 or 2 has elapsed the zone extension for the
time-delayed reclosure is retained until the close command pulse time has elapsed.
Setting for R E C L S : Z o n e e x t . d u r . R C S G x = 'Following HSR/TDR':
When a high-speed reclosure is being carried out without a further time-delayed
reclosure the zone extension for the high-speed reclosure is retained until the close
command pulse time has elapsed.
After the last possible operative time 1 or 2 has elapsed during a multiple HSR or
TDR the zone extension for the time-delayed reclosure is retained until the close
command pulse time has elapsed
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-205

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.5 Auto-Reclose Control Function after Trip by Thermal Overload Protection
The thermal overload protection trip signal may be included in the auto-reclose functional
sequence.
Parameter R E C L S : R C f . T H E R M t r i p S G x must be set for a reclosure to be

effected after a thermal overload protection trip. If this parameter is set to 'Yes' a reclose
command will be issued and reclaim time 1 triggered when the thermal overload
protection trip signal is reset. In addition the following conditions apply for a reclosure to
be effected after a thermal overload protection trip:
The thermal overload protection’s trip signal is set as a criterion for the main-trip
command or re-trip command (only relevant when R E C L S : W i t h R e - T r i p is set
to 'Yes').
3-206 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.6 Auto-Reclose Control Function with Parallel Protection Device
The trip signal from a second protection device operating in parallel to the P438 may be
included in the auto-reclose functional sequence.
In order to have a protection device, operating in parallel, trigger the RECLS function,
binary signal inputs have to be configured appropriately and the parameter
R E C L S : P a r a l l e l t r i p S G x must be set. When this parameter is set to 'With Start
ARC' the starting or the trip command issued by the protection device, operating in
parallel, is included in the auto-reclose functional sequence. In addition the following
conditions apply to have the RECLS function triggered by the protection device,
operating in parallel:
The trip signal of the parallel protection device is set as a criterion for the main-trip
command or re-trip command (only relevant when R E C L S : W i t h R e - T r i p is set
to 'Yes').
Depending on the configured binary signal inputs, operative times are triggered by the
starting or the trip command issued by the protection device, operating in parallel.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-207

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Trigger with RECLS: General Starting EXT Trigger with MAIN: Parallel trip EXT
RECLS: Ready
[ 004 068 ]
RECLS: Cycle
Running
[ 037 000 ]
RECLS: General
Starting EXT
[ 037 096 ]
MAIN: Parallel
Trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN: Main-Trip
Command
[ 039 011 ]
Terminated Terminated
RECLS: Oper.
Time 1 Running
[ 037 005 ]
2 2
RECLS: Dead Time

HSR Runn.
[ 037 067 ]
3 3
MAIN: Close
Command
[ 037 009 ]
7 7
RECLS: Recl.
Time 1 Running
[ 036 042 ]
4 4
RECLS: Reclosure
Successful
[ 036 062 ]
RECLS: Sig.
Interr. CB Trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting RECLS: HSR-Tr. RECLS: Operative RECLS: HSR Dead RECLS: Reclaim RECLS: Reclaim RECLS: tZ1
DIST t1 SGx Time 1 SGx Time SGx Time 1 SGx Time 2 SGx SGx
Group 1 015 072 015 066 015 056 015 054 015 124 012 028
Group 2 024 040 024 035 024 030 024 028 015 125 012 078
Group 3 025 000 024 095 024 090 024 088 015 126 013 028
Group 4 025 060 025 055 025 050 025 048 015 127 013 078

48Z5363A_UK
3-148 Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 1, triggered by a trip from a protection device, operating in parallel
3-208 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RECLS: Operative
Time 1 SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: Operative
Time 2 SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: HSR Dead

Time SGx
[ * ]
RECLS: Dead Time

max SGx
DELTA: Delta I Starting [ * ]
[ 038 060 ]
RECLS: No.
RECLS: Enabled Permit. TDR SGx
[ 015 064 ] [ * ]
RECLS: Blocked RECLS: TDR Dead

[ 004 069 ] Time SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Z1(Z1,ze)
Starting
[ 039 003 ] RECLS: Reclaim
Time 1 SGx
DIST: Z1´(Z1´,ze) [ * ]
Starting
[ 039 004 ]
RECLS: Reclaim
DIST: Z2 Starting Time 2 SGx
[ 039 005 ] [ * ]
DIST: Z2´ Starting RECLS: Parallel

[ 039 006 ] Trip SGx
[ * ]
DIST: Z3 Starting
[ 039 140 ] RECLS: RC f.
THERM Trip SGx
DIST: Z3´ Starting [ * ]
[ 039 141 ]
RECLS: Trip Signal
DTOC: Starting I>H [ 039 099 ]
[ 035 022 ]
RECLS: Cycle Running
DTOC: Starting I> [ 037 000 ]
[ 035 020 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 1
Running
DTOC: Starting I>> [ 037 005 ]
[ 035 021 ]
RECLS: Oper. Time 2
Running
IDMT: Starting Iref> [ 037 065 ]
[ 040 080 ]
RECLS: Dead Time
HSR Runn.
BUOC: Starting I> [ 037 067 ]
[ 036 013 ]
RECLS: Max.
Dead Time Runn.
BUOC: Starting I>> [ 037 069 ]
[ 036 115 ]
RECLS: Dead Time
RECLS: Start by TDR Runn.
LOGIC [ 037 003 ]
[ 037 078 ] RECLS: Dead Time
RECLS: Trip time Running
HSR elaps. [ 037 002 ]
303 152
RECLS: Recl. Time 1
RECLS: Trip time Running
TDR elaps. [ 036 042 ]
303 153 RECLS: Recl. Time 2
Running
THERM: Trip Signal [ 036 221 ]
[ 039 020 ]
RECLS: Def.
Recl.Time Runn.
MAIN: Main-Trip Signal [ 036 228 ]
[ 039 101 ]
RECLS: Lock f.
Gen.Starting.
RECLS: With Re-Trip [ 036 229 ]
[ 015 018 ]
RECLS: (Re)Close
Signal HSR
MAIN: Re-Trip Signal [ 037 007 ]
[ 039 103 ]
RECLS: (Re)Close
Signal TDR
RECLS: General Starting EXT [ 037 006 ]
[ 037 096 ]
RECLS: Sig.Interr.
MAIN: Parallel Trip EXT CB Trip
[ 037 019 ] [ 036 040 ]
RECLS: Reclosure
RECLS: Test HSR Successful
[ 034 023 ] [ 036 062 ]
Setting RECLS: Operative RECLS: Operative RECLS: HSR Dead RECLS: Dead Time RECLS: No.
Time 1 SGx Time 2 SGx Time SGx max SGx Permit. TDR SGx
Group 1 015 066 015 083 015 056 015 084 015 068
Group 2 024 035 024 042 024 030 024 043 024 037
Group 3 024 095 025 002 024 090 025 003 024 097
Group 4 025 055 025 062 025 050 025 063 025 057
Setting RECLS: TDR Dead RECLS: Reclaim RECLS: Reclaim RECLS: Parallel RECLS: RC f.
Time SGx Time 1 SGx Time 2 SGx Trip SGx THERM Trip SGx
Group 1 015 057 015 054 015 124 015 053 015 176
Group 2 024 031 024 028 015 125 024 027 015 177
Group 3 024 091 024 088 015 126 024 087 015 178
Group 4 025 051 025 048 015 127 025 047 015 179
48Z6367A_UK
3-149 Auto-reclose sequence
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-209

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26.7 Auto-Reclose Counters
The following events are counted:
Number of high-speed reclosures (HSR) that have been carried out.

Number of time-delayed reclosures (TDR) that have been carried out
The associated counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
RECLS: (Re)Close RECLS: No. of

Signal HSR + HSR Recloses
[ 037 007 ] [ 004 004 ]
R
RECLS: (Re)Close RECLS: No. of
Signal TDR + TDR Recloses
[ 037 006 ] [ 004 008 ]
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: Execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
RECLS: Reset
Counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
RECLS: Reset
Counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
1
0: Don't Execute
1: Execute
48Z6365A_UK
3-150 Auto-reclose counters
3-210 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)
A three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be activated

concurrently with the distance protection.
Stage I>H can be used as an instantaneous high-current stage.

Stages I> and I>> may optionally be operated in directional mode.
Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
DTOC: General
Enable USER
[ 031 068 ]
0
1 DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No **
1: Yes y GROUP: Group y Setting DTOC: Enable
Active SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 072 098
GROUP: Group y
Active 2 036 091 Group 2 073 098
[ ** ]
3 036 092 Group 3 074 098
4 036 093 Group 4 075 098
48Z63AKA_UK
3-151 Disabling or enabling DTOC protection
Current measurement
Definite-time overcurrent protection measures the current I to determine whether it
exceeds the set thresholds.
Stage I>H can be used as an instantaneous high-current stage. In this case, it operates
if two consecutive sampled values (instantaneous values) exceed the operate threshold.
If the Triac-assisted output relays are employed, a tripping time ≤ 3 ms can be achieved
(otherwise, the contact closure time must be added).
When a timer stage operates and the set operate delays have elapsed, signals are
issued and can be used as criteria for fault recording or tripping. The timer stages
connected in series to the triggers can be blocked by way of appropriately configured
binary signal inputs.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-211

3 Operation
(continued)
(harmonic restraint)
Depending on the setting for the M A I N : F c t . A s g . I n r . R s t r . S G x parameters,
starting decisions made by the distance zones can be cancelled when the inrush
stabilization function has detected an inrush current.
DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
DTOC: I> DTOC: tI>
SGx SGx DTOC: Trip
[ * ] [ * ] Signal tI>
[ 041 020 ]
DTOC: tI> Elapsed

[ 040 010 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>> EXT
[ 041 061 ]
DTOC: I>> DTOC: tI>>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ] DTOC: Trip Signal
tI>>
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC: tI>> Elapsed

[ 040 106 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC: Blocking
tI>H EXT
[ 041 062 ]
DTOC: I>H DTOC: tI>H
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
DTOC: Trip Signal

tI>H
[ 040 076 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>H
MAIN: Inrush [ 035 022 ]
stabil. trigg
306 014
Setting DTOC: I> DTOC: I>> DTOC: I>H DTOC: tI> DTOC: tI>> DTOC: tI>H
SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 007 072 008 072 009 072 019 072 020 072 021
Group 2 073 007 073 008 073 009 073 019 073 020 073 021
Group 3 074 007 074 008 074 009 074 019 074 020 074 021
Group 4 075 007 075 008 075 009 075 019 075 020 075 021
48Z5464A_UK
3-152 Definite-time overcurrent protection (without short-circuit direction determination)
3-212 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
The short-circuit direction determination function is available in the P438 as ofsoftware
version –604.
It is enabled at D T O C : D i r e c t i o n m e a s u r e m . All settings relevant to short-circuit
direction determination can be set separately for stages I> and I>>. When a starting
signal is issued by I> or I>> and the measured voltage level has dropped below the
value for V< the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the short-circuit direction is determined.
The short-circuit characteristic is defined by the angles β and γ. The algorithm decides
that the fault direction is forward when the calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given
by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
In order for direction measurement to function correctly, even at very small fault voltage
values, the information stored in the voltage memory is also put to use in these cases.
Using the D T O C : T i m e S t a r t t I > S G x and D T O C : T i m e S t a r t t I > > S G x

settings it is possible to select separately for each stage whether the timer stage is
started with the triggering of current thresholds I> or I>> or, additionally, with a
directional signal. The starting signal for each stage is formed according to the starting
conditions selected for the timer stages.
The direction determination and the starting of the respective stage are only enabled if
the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage threshold V<. Setting the
undervoltage threshold V< to Blocked will disable this voltage scan and tripping will be
permanently enabled.
measured voltage in order to avoid erroneous direction decisions. The direction decision
is dependent on the following conditions:
VF > 0.1 Vn
fault voltage Vf.
VF < 0.1 Vn
The direction decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the voltage
values stored in the voltage memory.
possible. In this case, a Fault forward decision is issued - independently of the actual
fault direction.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage-measuring circuit
will either lead to the DTOC protection operating non-directionally or to it becoming
blocked.
The starting direction may be freely set.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-213

3 Operation
(continued)
Load flow direction

Load flow direction determination is active when no short-circuit direction determination
has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded the load angle ϕ is calculated and
the load flow direction is determined according to the short-circuit characteristic selected.
The load flow direction is displayed for as long as there is no fault (short-circuit) condition
apparent, which would be characterized by the starting of the current stages and the
enabling of the undervoltage stage.
Forward direction
Reverse direction
68Z50ABB_UK
3-153 Example of a fault direction determination characteristic
3-214 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
DTOC: Timer
Start tI> SGx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC: Blocking DTOC: tI>
tI> EXT C SGx
[ 041 060 ] [ * ]
DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ] & DTOC: I>
C SGx DTOC: tI>
[ * ] & Elapsed
MAIN: Protection [ 040 010 ]
active
306 001
DTOC: Starting
I I>
[ 035 020 ]
&
DTOC: Direction
I> forw.
402 412
DTOC: Direction
I> rev. DTOC: I>
402 413
Triggered
DTOC: Trip I> 310 049
Non-direct. DTOC: Trip
402 414
& Signal tI>
DTOC: Direction [ 041 020 ]
Measurem.
[ 031 131 ]
Without
&
DTOC: Timer
Start tI>> SGx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC: Blocking DTOC: tI>>
tI>> EXT C SGx
[ 041 061 ] [ * ]
DTOC: I>>
C SGx DTOC: tI>>
[ * ] Elapsed
& [ 040 106 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>>
[ 035 021 ]
&
DTOC: Direction DTOC: I>>

I>> forw. Triggered
402 415 310 050
DTOC: Direction DTOC: Trip
I>> rev. Signal tI>>
402 416 & [ 040 011 ]
DTOC: Trip I>>
non-direc.
402 417
MAIN: Inrush &

stabil. trigg
306 014
Setting
Parameter- DTOC: Timer DTOC: I> DTOC: tI> DTOC: Timer DTOC: I>> DTOC: tI>>
Start tI> SGx SGx SGx Start tI>> SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 071 146 072
07 007 072 019 072 245 072 008 072 020
Group 2 071 147 073 007 073 019 073 044 073 008 073 020
Group 3 071 148 074 007 074 019 074 044 074 008 074 020
Group 4 071 149 075 007 075 019 075 044 075 008 075 020
48Z6370A_UK
3-154 Definite-time overcurrent protection (incl. short-circuit direction determination)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-215

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C&VTS: VTS Volts DTOC: Direct.

Failure < 1 V & Using Vmeas
[ 038 023 ] [ 036 137 ]
V
&
< 0.1 Vnom
DTOC: Direct.
& Using Memory
[ 036 136 ]
DTOC: beta (I>)

SGx
[ * ]
> 0.05 Inom DTOC: gamma
(I>) SGx
[ * ]
C1
I
C2
DTOC: Fault
K Φ1 & I> Forward
[ 035 137 ]
DTOC: Fault
S Φ 2 & I> Reverse
V(stored) [ 035 140 ]
DTOC: Power Flow

Forward direction 30 ms 0 & I> Fwd.
[ 035 223 ]
DTOC: Power Flow

MAIN: VMemory Reverse direction 30 ms 0 I> Rev.
enable & [ 035 224 ]
310 057
DTOC: I>
triggered
310 049 DTOC: I> Fwd.
DTOC: V < V< (I>) & w/o Meas.
403 410 [ 041 198 ]
DTOC: beta
(I>>) SGx
[ * ]
DTOC: gamma
(I>>) SGx
[ * ]
C1
C2
DTOC: Fault I>>

Φ1 & Forward
[ 035 147 ]
DTOC: Fault I>>

Φ 2 & Reverse
[ 035 148 ]
DTOC: Power Flow

Forward direction 30 ms 0 & I>> Fwd.
[ 035 227 ]
DTOC: Power Flow

Reverse direction 30 ms 0 & I>> Rev.
[ 035 228 ]
DTOC: I>>
triggered
310 050 DTOC: I>> Fwd.
& w/o Meas.
DTOC: V < V< (I>>) [ 041 199 ]
403 411
Setting
Setting- DTOC: beta (I>) DTOC: gamma DTOC: beta DTOC: gamma
SGx (I>) SGx (I>>) SGx (I>>) SGx
Group 1 076 068 076 073 076 069 076 074
Group 2 077 068 077 073 077 069 077 074
Group 3 078 068 078 073 078 069 078 074
Group 4 079 068 079 073 079 069 079 074
48Z6371A_UK
3-155 Fault direction determination
3-216 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C&VTS: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ]
DTOC: Mode w/o

V (I>) SGx
[ * ] DTOC: Meas. I>
& Non-Direct.
[ 035 077 ]
1
DTOC: Dir.Meas.
2 I> Blocked
& [ 035 080 ]
1: Non-Directional
2: Blocked
DTOC: V< (I>) DTOC: Direction

SGx (I>) SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V
2
3
Setting Blocked
1: Forward
Directional
2: Reverse
Directional
3: Non-
Directional DTOC: Direction
& I> forw.
DTOC: Fault 402 412
I> Forward
[ 035 137 ]
DTOC: Direction
& I> rev.
DTOC: Fault 402 413
I> Reverse
[ 035 140 ]
DTOC: Trip I>

& non-direct.
402 414
DTOC: V < V< (I>)

403 410
Setting
Setting- DTOC: Mode w/o DTOC: V< (I>) DTOC: Direction
V (I>) SGx SGx (I>) SGx
Group 1 076 128 076 131 076 080
Group 2 077 128 077 131 077 080
Group 3 078 128 078 131 078 080
Group 4 079 128 079 131 079 080
48Z63ACA_UK
3-156 Determining the starting direction for stage I>
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-217

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C&VTS: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ]
DTOC: Mode w/o

V (I>>) SGx DTOC: Meas. I>>
[ * ] Non-Direct
& [ 035 078 ]
1
DTOC: Dir.Meas.
2 I>> Blocked
& [ 035 133 ]
1: Non-Directional
2: Blocked
DTOC: U< (I>>) DTOC: Direction

SGx (I>>) SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V
2
3
Setting Blocked
1: Forward
Directional
2: Reverse
Directional
3: Non- DTOC: Direction
Directional & I>> forw..
DTOC: Fault I>> 402 415
Forward
[ 035 147 ]
DTOC: Direction
& I>> rev.
DTOC: Fault I>> 402 416
Reverse
[ 035 148 ]
DTOC: Trip I>>

& Non-Direct.
402 417
DTOC: V < V< (I>>)

403 411
Setting
Setting- DTOC: Mode w/o DTOC: V< (I>>) DTOC: Direction
V (I>>) SGx SGx (I>>) SGx
Group 1 076 129 076 150 076 088
Group 2 077 129 077 150 077 088
Group 3 078 129 078 150 078 088
Group 4 079 129 079 150 079 088
48Z63ADA_UK
3-157 Determining the starting direction for stage I>>
3-218 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)
The P438 provides a single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function.

This IDMT function can be activated concurrently with the other protection functions.
Inverse overcurrent protection may optionally be operated with short-circuit direction

determination.
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can be
carried out separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: General
enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
0
1 IDMT: Enabled
& [ 040 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No ** *
1: Yes PSS: PS y Parameter IDMT: Enable
Y active PSx
PSS: PS y
active
[ ** ] 1 036 090 set 1 072 000
2 036 091 set 2 073 000
3 036 092 set 3 074 000
4 036 093 set 4 075 000
48Z6377A_EN
3-158 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
Inrush stabilization
(Harmonic restraint)
Depending on the settings for M A I N : F c t . A s g . I n r . R s t r . S G x starting decisions
made by the distance zones can be cancelled when the inrush stabilization function has
detected an inrush current.
Time-dependent characteristics
The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below).
The measured value is current I.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in figures Fehler!
Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden. to Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte
nicht gefunden werden..
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-219

3 Operation
(continued)
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
k = 0.01...10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k

Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
a ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
t = k ⋅⎜ + c ⎟
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1
⎟ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85

6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞ R
⎜ ⎟ tr = k ⋅ 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
a ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
t = k ⋅⎜ + c⎟
⎜⎛ I ⎞ b
⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟ −1
⎟ ⎟⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00

9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟
⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
3-220 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.01
0.01 0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K1A D5Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.1
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
k=0.01
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K3A D5Z50K4A
3-159 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-221

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse

Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0,1 k=0,1 0.1

k=0.1
0,01 0.01 k=0.01

k=0,01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K5B D5Z50K6B
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50K7B
Characteristic No. 7
3-160 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
3-222 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short-Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.01 0.01 k=0.1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50K8B D5Z50K9B
ANSI, Long-Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1
k=0.01
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
D5Z50KAB
Characteristic No. 10
3-161 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-223

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
0.1 0.1
k=0.01
k=0.01
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
D5Z50KBA D5Z50KCA
3-162 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
Determining the trip time

The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds an adjustable threshold. The IDMT
protection function is triggered if 1.05 times the set current reference is exceeded. The
P438 will determine the trip time according to the set characteristic and the current level
value. Additionally, a minimum trip time can be set, independently of the current level,
which will in no case be under-run.
The inverse time-delayed stage may be blocked using an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
3-224 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
IDMT: Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT: Iref
Rating SGx
[ * ]
1.05 * Iref
IDMT: Starting
IB>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT: Block. IDMT: Charac-
tIref> EXT teristic SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Inrush IDMT: kt Time

stabil. trigg Dial/TMS SGx
306 014 [ * ]
IDMT: Min. trip

time SGx
[ * ]
IDMT: Hold time

SGx
[ * ]
IDMT: Reset SGx

[ * ]
IDMT: Memory
clear
[ 040 110 ]
IDMT: Hold time
running
[ 040 053 ]
I/Iref IDMT: tIref>
elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
IDMT: Trip
Signal tIref>
[ 040 084 ]
Setting
IDMT: Characteristic SGx
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standart Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv. Setting
10: ANSI Long Time Inv. IDMT: Reset SGx
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse 1: Instantaneous
2: Delayed as per Char.
Setting IDMT: Iref Rating IDMT: Charac- IDMT: kt Time IDMT: Min. trip IDMT: Hold time IDMT: Reset SGx
SGx teristic SGx Dial/TMS SGx time SGx SGx
Group 1 072 050 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
Group 2 073 050 073 056 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
Group 3 074 050 074 056 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
Group 4 075 050 075 056 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
48Z5472B_UK
3-163 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-225

3 Operation
(continued)
The short-circuit direction determination function is available in the P438 as of software
version –604. It is enabled with I D M T : D i r e c t i o n M e a s u r e m . When a starting
signal is issued and the measured voltage level has dropped below the value for V<, the
fault angle ϕ is calculated and the fault direction is determined. The short-circuit
characteristic is defined by the angles β and γ. The software decides that the fault
direction is ”forward“ when the calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
In order for direction measurement to function correctly, even at very small fault voltage
values, the information stored in the voltage memory is also put to use in these cases.
The setting at I D M T : T i m e r S t a . t I r e f > S G x defines whether the timer stage is

started when IDMT protection is triggered or, if a directional signal is also required. The
starting signal is also formed according to the starting conditions.
Direction determination and starting are enabled only if the measured voltage value is
below a settable undervoltage threshold, V<. Setting undervoltage threshold V< to
Blocked will disable this voltage scan and tripping will be permanently enabled.
measured voltage in order to avoid erroneous direction decisions. The directional
decision is dependent on the following conditions:
VF > 0.1 Vn
The directional decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the measured
fault voltage VF.
VF < 0.1 Vn
The directional decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the voltage
value stored in the voltage memory.
The directional decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the measured
possible. In this case, a Fault forward decision is issued - independently of the actual
fault direction.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage measuring circuit
will either lead to DTOC protection operating non-directionally or to it becoming blocked.
The starting direction may be freely set.
3-226 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Load flow direction

Load flow direction determination is active when no short-circuit direction determination
has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded the load angle ϕ is calculated and
the load flow direction is determined according to the selected short-circuit characteristic.
The load flow direction is displayed for as long as there is no fault (short-circuit) condition
apparent, which would be characterized by the starting of the current stages and the
enabling of the undervoltage stage.
Forward direction
Reverse direction
68Z50ABB_UK
3-164 Example of a fault direction determination characteristic
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-227

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IDMT: Iref UIDMT: Timer Sta.

C PSx tIref>PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
1.05 * Iref
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
IDMT: Enabled C
[ 040 100 ] & IDMT: Starting
Iref>
& [ 040 080 ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
I
&
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014
IDMT: Direction
forward
307 104
IDMT: Direction IDMT: Iref>

backward triggered
310 038
307 105
IDMT: Trip Non-

direction
307 106
IDMT: Direction
measurem.
[ 017 109 ] IDMT: Charac-
Without teristic PSx
[ * ]
IDMT: Char.
factor kt PSx
[ * ]
IDMT: Block. IDMT: Min. trip
tIB> EXT time PSx
[ 040 101 ] [ * ]
IDMT: Hold time
PSx
Setting [ * ]
C IDMT: Reset
IDMT: Characteristic PSx PSx
[ * ]
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse C
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv. IDMT: Memory
5: IEEE Moderately Inv. clear
6: IEEE Very Inverse I / Iref [ 040 110 ]
7: IEEE Extremely Inv. IDMT: Hold time
8: ANSI Normally Inv. running
[ 040 053 ]
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv. IDMT: tIref>
11: RI-Type Inverse elapsed
12: RXIDG Inverse [ 040 082 ]
IDMT: Trip signal
tIref>
& [ 040 084 ]
Setting
IDMT: Reset PSx
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char. &
Parameter IDMT: Iref IDMT: Timer Sta.

PSx tIref>PSx
set 1 072 050 006 061
set 2 073 050 006 062
set 3 074 050 006 063
set 4 075 050 006 064
Parameter IDMT: Charac- IDMT: Char. IDMT: Min. trip IDMT: Hold time IDMT: Reset
teristic PSx factor kt PSx time PSx PSx PSx
set 1 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
set 2 073 056 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
set 3 074 056 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
set 4 075 056 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
48Z6375A_EN
3-165 IDMT protection (including short-circuit direction determination)
3-228 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C&VTS: VTS Volts IDMT: Direct.

Failure < 1 V & Using Vmeas
[ 038 023 ] [ 041 015 ]
V
&
< 0.1 Vnom
IDMT: Direct.
& Using Memory
[ 041 014 ]
IDMT: beta
SGx
[ * ]
> 0.05 Inom IDMT: gamma
SGx
[ * ]
C1
I
C2
IDMT: Fault
K Φ1 & Forward
[ 041 008 ]
IDMT: Fault
S Φ2 & Reverse
V(stored) [ 041 009 ]
IDMT: Power
Forward direction 30 ms 0 & Flow Forward
[ 041 017 ]
IDMT: Power
MAIN: VMemory Reverse direction 30 ms 0 & Flow Reverse
enable [ 041 018 ]
305 049
IDMT: Iref>
triggered IDMT: Fwd. w/o
310 038
& Measurem.
IDMT: V < V< [ 041 189 ]
307 108
*
Setting
Setting- IDMT: beta IDMT: gamma
SGx SGx
Group 1 072 046 072 047
Group 2 073 046 073 047
Group 3 074 046 074 047
Group 4 075 046 075 047
48Z6376A_UK
3-166 Fault direction determination
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-229

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C&VTS: VTS Volts

Failure
[ 038 023 ]
IDMT: Mode w/o

Voltage SGx
[ * ] IDMT: Meas.
& Non-Directional
[ 041 007 ]
1
IDMT: Dir. Meas.
2 Blocked
& [ 041 006 ]
1: Non-Directional
2: Blocked
IDMT: V< IDMT: Direction

SGx (I>) SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V
2
3
Setting Blocked
1: Forward
Directional
2: Reverse
Directional
3: Non-
Directional IDMT: Forward
& direction
IDMT: Fault 307 104
Forward
[ 041 008 ]
IDMT: Reverse
& direction
307 105
IDMT: Fault
Reverse
[ 041 009 ]
IDMT: Non-
& directional trip
307 106
IDMT: V < V<

307 108
Setting
Setting- IDMT: Mode w/o IDMT: V< IDMT: Direction
Voltage SGx SGx (I>) SGx
Group 1 072 119 072 081 072 048
Group 2 073 119 073 081 073 048
Group 3 074 119 074 081 074 048
Group 4 075 119 075 081 075 048
48Z63AJA_UK
3-167 Determining starting direction
3-230 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Holding time
The P438 determines the trip time according to the current flow, and a timer stage is
started. The setting for the holding time defines the period for the IDMT starting time to
be stored after the starting signal has dropped out. Should the starting signal return
while the holding timer elapses, then the new starting time value is added to the stored
starting time. If the sum of the starting times reaches the trip time determined by the
P438, then the appropriate signal is issued. If the starting signal does not return while
the holding timer elapses, then the memory storing the sum of the starting times will – in
accordance with the setting – be cleared either without delay or according to the set
characteristic. The phase current stage serves as an example to illustrate the effect of
the holding time in Figure Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden..
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-231

3 Operation
(continued)
3-168 The effect of the holding time

Case A: The determined Trip time is not reached.
Case B: The determined Trip time is reached.
3-232 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Defrost Protection (Function Group DFRST)
Under certain operating conditions (no load, cold winter nights) catenaries can ice over.
In order to prevent this, two catenaries each are connected in series and heated with a
comparatively low current. The defrost protection function measures the feed and return
current and processes these current values in a differential protection function for
sensitive short-circuit protection.
Enabling or disabling
defrost protection
Defrost protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling can
DFRST: General
Enable USER
[ 019 096 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
DFRST: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
DFRST: Enabled
[ 041 203 ]
0
1
0: No Setting DFRST: Enable
SGx
1: Yes Group 1 019 130
Group 2 019 131
Group 3 019 132
Group 4 019 133
48Z5058A_UK
3-169 Disabling or enabling defrost protection
Transformer matching
Current transformers for the acquisition of the catenary and defrost currents can be
dimensioned within a certain range. From the CT transformation ratio data, the P438
calculates a matching factor.
I X ,prim
f =
IOL,prim
The matching factor is limited to a range of 1/32 at the minimum and 32 at the maximum.
If it is outside these limits, the P438 generates an error message.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-233

3 Operation
(continued)
Differential protection
characteristics
The P438 generates a differential current (Id) and a restraining current (IR) from the
primary values of the catenary current and the defrost current:
I d = I prim − I dfrst , prim
⎛ ⎞
I H = 0,5 ⋅ ⎜⎝ I prim + I dfrst , prim ⎟⎠
I n CT . prim
Enabled I prim = I
I nDevice
I dfrst , nCT . prim
I dfrst , prim = I dfrst
I dfrst , nDevice
Current monitoring is based on a single differential protection characteristic with two

slopes. The equations for the two parts of the characteristic are given below.
Figure 127 shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristic equation for the range 0 ≤ IH ≤ IH,m1 :

Id = Id >
where Id> = set value of the function
Id >
and IH ,m1 = m
1
Characteristic equation for the range IH > IH,m1 :

Id = m1 ⋅ I H
Operating zone
Blocking zone
46Z5066A_EN
3-170 Defrost protection tripping characteristics
3-234 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Functional blocking
The elapsing of the operate delay may be blocked using an appropriately configured
DFRST: General
Enable USER
[ 019 096 ]
0
DFRST: Enabled
1 [ 041 203 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: In C.T.
prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Idfrst,nom
C.T. prim
[ 010 016 ]
CHECK:Match.fact.
DFRSTinv.
[ 098 033 ]
COMP
DFRST: Mismatch
[ 041 207 ]
DFRST: Scaling
factor
[ 004 203 ]
DFRST: Blocking t
EXT
[ 041 206 ]
DFRST: Id> SGx

[ * ]
DFRST: t SGx
DFRST: m1 SGx c [ * ]
[ * ]
I
DFRST: Trip
Signal
[ 041 205 ]
Idfrst
DFRST: Starting
[ 041 204 ]
Setting DFRST: Id> SGx DFRST: m1 SGx DFRST: t SGx

Group 1 019 134 019 138 019 142
Group 2 019 135 019 139 019 143
Group 3 019 136 019 140 019 144
Group 4 019 137 019 141 019 145 48Z5400A_UK
3-171 The defrost protection function
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-235

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
Thermal overload protection may be implemented by applying this function.

This function is now available as of version P438 -606 and provides the following
features:
thermal overload protection
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: General
Enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
1 THERM: Enabled
& [ 040 068 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes ** GROUP: Group y * Setting THERM: Enable
y Active SGx
GROUP: Group y
Active 1 036 090 Group 1 072 175
[ ** ]
2 036 091 Group 2 073 175
3 036 092 Group 3 074 175
4 036 093 Group 4 075 175
48Z5331B_UK
3-172 Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
3-236 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of thermal
overload protection
Thermal overload protection will issue the T H E R M : N o t R e a d y signal if one of the
following conditions applies:
Thermal overload protection is disabled.

Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature
acquisition.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
The thermal replica is blocked using an appropriately configured binary signal input.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: Enabled
[ 040 068 ] ≥1 THERM: Not Ready
[ 040 035 ]
THERM: Block.
by CTA Fail
305 200
&
THERM: Replica
Block EXT
[ 041 074 ] ≥1
THERM: Setting
Error,Block.
[ 039 110 ]
48Z5332B_UK
3-173 T H E R M : N o t r e a d y signal
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-237

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
Relative Replica
Absolute Replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the operating
modes at a time may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if both
operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload protection is
blocked and an error message is generated by the P438:
THERM: Setting Error,Block.
Parallel line switching

Thermal overload protection can be adapted to differing switching states in the catenary
system by varying the effective reference current Iref by multiplication with the parallel
line factors, T H E R M : F a c t o r 2 P a r a l l . S G x and
THERM: Factor 3 Parall. SGx.
The setting for T H E R M : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R determines whether parallel line

switching is carried out from the local HMI or using the binary signal inputs. Switching
using the binary signal inputs requires that T H E R M : Control via USER is set to 'No'. If
the setting for T H E R M : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R is 'Yes' , switching using the binary
signal inputs is not possible.
3-238 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
No.Parall.Lines
ParallLine
ParallLine
parallel
ParallLine
parallel
parallel
Select Select 3
2 Paral/L EXT Paral/L EXT
Select
3 Paral/L EXT
Iref Rating
SGx
Factor 2
Parall. SGx
Factor 3
Parall. SGx
Setting Iref Rating Factor 2 Factor 3

SGx Parall. SGx Parall. SGx
Group
Group
Group
Group
3-174 Parallel line switching
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-239

3 Operation
(continued)
Influence of coolant
temperature
To permit ambient temperature correction, the analog I/O module Y must be fitted.
There are two possible means available to measure coolant temperatures:
Direct measurement by PT 100 sensor fitted on the external device

The measured temperature value is used directly to determine the tripping time.
20 mA measurements with external measuring transducers
The characteristics for transducers applied must be set in function group RTDmA.
Calculated temperature values are used to determine the tripping time.
Open measuring circuits, due to a broken wire or an overload on the 20 mA analog
measuring input, are determined by the measured value input (function group RTDmA).
This will result in the issuance of these signals:
RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA inp.
RTDmA: PT100 Open Circuit
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the coolant
temperature measurement. A fault at the selected measuring point will lead to the
issuance of the T H E R M : C T A E r r o r signal.
3-240 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting for T H E R M : F u n c t . f . C T A f a i l . S G x determines how thermal

overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. One of the following functions may be selected:
Default temperature value
The coolant temperature set at T H E R M : C o o l a n t t e m p . S G x is applied. The
thermal overload protection is not blocked.
Last measured temperature
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has occurred
in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature measured before such an
erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal overload protection is not blocked.
Blocking
All signals issued by the thermal overload protection are reset. The thermal modeling
will then be continued on the basis of the measured current alone.
All relevant parameters for coolant temperature acquisition are hidden if the analog
module Y has not been fitted to the P438. The trip time is calculated by including the
setting for T H E R M : C o o l a n t t e m p . S G x .
Minimum coolant
temperature
A setting for a minimum coolant temperature is provided for catenary sections where
coolant temperatures may differ strongly from measured values. For instance in winter
months the temperature measured in a tunnel will be higher than the ambient
temperature measured at the feeder point. In such cases the measured coolant
temperature is limited to a low value set at T H E R M : M i n i m u m T e m p e r a t . S G x .
Thermal overload
protection operation
without coolant
temperature acquisition
In order to guarantee thermal overload protection, without considering an offset because
of a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the parameter
T H E R M : C T A m b S G x to the maximum permitted coolant temperature.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-241

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: Select
CT AmbientSGx
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 THERM: with CTA
303 201
2
0: Default Temp.
Value
1: From PT 100
2: From 20 mA
input
THERM: Enabled ≥1
[ 040 068 ] & ≥1 THERM: CTA Error
[ 039 111 ]
RTDmA: Enabled
[ 035 008 ] CHECK: CTA Error
& [ 098 034 ]
RTDmA: PT100 Faulty

[ 041 190 ]
&
RTDmA: Overload 20mA Input ≥1
[ 041 191 ]
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA
inp.
[ 041 192 ]
THERM: CTA Error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
THERM: Funct.
f.CTA fail.SGx
[ * ]
0
THERM: Block.by
1 & CTA Fail
305 200
2
0: Default Temp.
Value
1: Last Meas.
Temperat
2: From 20 mA
input
Setting THERM: Select THERM: Funct.

CT AmbientSGx f.CTA fail.SGx
Group 1 072 177 076 177

Group 2 073 177 077 177
Group 3 074 177 078 177
Group 4 075 177 079 177
48Z5333B_UK
3-175 Monitoring the coolant temperature
3-242 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Relative replica
The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal replica.
In the "Relative replica" operating mode, the following settings have to be made for
thermal overload protection:
The rated operating current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f R a t i n g S G x

The tripping threshold Δϑtrip is set at T H E R M : T > T r i p R e s e t , % S G x .
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters must be

set:
The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object is set at Θmax

THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx.
The maximum temperature of the coolant (maximum ambient) is set at Θa,max
THERM: Max Perm Cool TmpSGx.
Absolute replica
The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the absolute
thermal replica. For this limit current, an over-temperature results at the maximum
coolant temperature.
In the "Absolute replica" operating mode, the following parameters have to be set for
thermal overload protection:
The thermal limit current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f R a t i n g S G x

The limit temperature for tripping is set as Θmax
THERM: Max perm obj tmp.SGx.
The over-temperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax - Θa,max )
THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. SGx
Note: The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θa,max is derived from the
difference between the settings for T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . S G x
and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s . S G x
Tripping characteristics
The maximum r.m.s. phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica as
specified in IEC 255-8. In addition to the operating mode-dependent settings, the
following parameters will govern the trip time:
The set thermal time constant of the protected object τ

THERM: Tim.Const 1(Heat)SGx
The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0.
The current measured coolant temperature Θa.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-243

3 Operation
(continued)
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜ ⎟ − ΘP
⎜f ⎟
⎝ PL,x ⋅ Iref ⎠
t = τ ⋅ ln 2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θ a − Θ a,max ⎞
⎜ ⎟ − Δϑ trip ⋅ ⎜1 − ⎟
⎜f ⎟ ⎜ Θ max − Θ a,max ⎟
⎝ PL,x ⋅ Iref ⎠ ⎝ ⎠
The tripping threshold Δϑtrip is set to a fixed value of 100 % ( = 1 ) if the operating mode
is 'Absolute replica'.
θ/%
10000
200
1000
110
τ/min
50
100
200
110
10 1000
50
t/min 200
1
110
50 30
0,1
0,01
0,001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I/IB
D5Z50BEA
3-176 Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to Δϑ0 = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum
permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature)
3-244 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Alarm
Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of the
following parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx

Absolute replica: THERM: Alarm Temp. SGx
Additionally, a pre-trip time limit can be set; when the time left until tripping falls below
this pre-trip limit, a warning will be issued.
Trip
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the following
parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: T> Trip Reset,% SGx

Absolute replica: THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the thermal
replica has decreased by the value T H E R M : T r i p H y s t e r e s i s S G x , at least for
a fixed time of 5 s.
Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is applied with
the set time constant T H E R M : T i m . C o n s t . 2 ( C o o l ) S G x . This element in the
thermal model takes into account the cooling characteristics of stopped motors.
Note: These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers and
power lines.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-245

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: I
305 202
THERM: Starting k*Iref

I AR_MW [ 041 108 ]
< 0.1 kKW*Iref

C
THERM: kKW * Iref
305 203 THERM: Tim.const
C 1(heat)SGx
THERM: Start
Fact.OL_RC SGx [ * ]
THERM: Tim.const
[ * ] & C 2(cool)SGx
[ * ]
k*kKW*Iref
THERM: O/T
C f.Iref pers. SGx
[ * ]
MAIN: Protection active &
306 001 THERM: Alarm
THERM: Enabled C temp. SGx
[ 040 068 ] [ * ]
THERM: Replica Block EXT THERM: Max perm
[ 041 074 ] C obj tmp.SGx
[ * ]
THERM: Block. by CTA
Fail THERM: Max perm
305 200
C cool tmpSGx
THERM: Absolute [ * ]
replica THERM: T> Alarm
[ 022 065 ] C Reset,% SGx
[ * ]
0 THERM: rT> Trip THERM: Within Pre-trip
C Reset,% SGx Time
1 [ 041 109 ]
[ * ]
CHECK: Setting
0: No THERM: Default Error,Block.
1: Yes C CT Amb SGx [ 039 110 ]
[ * ] THERM: Setting
Error,Block.
THERM: Relative THERM: Minimum [ 039 110 ]
replica C temperat.SGx THERM: Alarm
[ 022 064 ] [ * ] [ 039 025 ]
THERM: Trip THERM: Trip signal
0 C Hysteresis SGx [ 039 020 ]
1 [ * ]
THERM: Reclosure
THERM: Pre-Trip blocked
0: No
C Alarm SGx [ 039 024 ]
1: Yes [ * ] THERM: Buffer Empty
[ 039 112 ]
C THERM: Status
therm.replica
[ 004 016 ]
THERM: Therm. replica
p.u.
I/kKW*Iref [ 004 017 ]
THERM: Object
R temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM: Object temp.
p.u.
THERM: with CTA C [ 004 179 ]
305 201
THERM: Coolant
temperature
[ 004 149 ]
Coolant temperature
THERM: Coolant temp.
p.u.
THERM: Reset Replica [ 004 178 ]
[ 039 061 ] THERM: Pre-trip time
left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM: Temp. offset
replica
[ 004 109 ]
Setting THERM: Start THERM: Tim.const THERM: Tim.const THERM: O/T THERM: Alarm THERM: Max perm THERM: Max perm
Fact.OL_RC SGx 1(heat)SGx 2(cool)SGx f.Iref pers. SGx temp. SGx obj tmp.SGx cool tmpSGx
Group 1 072 180 072 187 072 188 072 167 072 153 072 182 072 185
Group 2 073 180 073 187 073 188 073 167 073 153 073 182 073 185
Group 3 074 180 074 187 074 188 074 167 074 153 074 182 074 185
Group 4 075 180 075 187 075 188 075 167 075 153 075 182 075 185
Setting THERM: T> Alarm THERM: T> Trip THERM: Default THERM: Minimum THERM: Trip THERM: Pre-Trip
Reset,% SGx Reset,% SGx CT Amb SGx temperat.SGx Hysteresis SGx Alarm SGx
Group 1 072 184 072 181 072 186 076 178 072 183 072 191
Group 2 073 184 073 181 073 186 077 178 073 183 073 191
Group 3 074 184 074 181 074 186 078 178 074 183 074 191
Group 4 075 184 075 181 075 186 079 178 075 183 075 191
48Z5334A_UK
3-177 Thermal overload protection
3-246 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Reset
The thermal replica may be reset either using a setting parameter or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload
protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked using an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
THERM: Reset
Replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
1 THERM: Reset Replica
1 [ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM: Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM: Reset Replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
48Z5335A_UK
3-178 Resetting the thermal replica
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-247

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Under- and Overvoltage Protection (Function group V<>)
The P438 provides a two-stage time-delayed voltage protection function for over- and
undervoltage monitoring.
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter. Enabling can be
carried out separately for each setting group.
V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit.
SGx
C&VTS:
Setting SGx
Group
Group
Group
Group
3-179 Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
3-248 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
The P438 checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked using
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage were disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
Furthermore, the undervoltage protection function provides a window function.
The windows are defined by the settings for V < > : V m i n S G x and by the set
thresholds V < or V < < , respectively. The setting for V < > : V m i n S G x defines the
lower threshold for both windows. With an appropriate setting of the successive timer
stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of voltage failure as
encountered in switching operations.
3-180 Overvoltage monitoring
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-249

3 Operation
(continued)
3-181 Undervoltage monitoring
3-250 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
Main-trip and re-trip circuits can be monitored by the integrated circuit breaker failure
protection function.
circuit breaker failure
protection
Circuit breaker failure protection may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
CBF: General
Enable USER
[ 022 100 ]
0
1 CBF: Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBF: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
GROUP: Group y
Active
[ ** ]
y GROUP: Group y Setting CBF: Enable

Active SGx
1 036 090 Group 1 072 110
2 036 091 Group 2 073 110
3 036 092 Group 3 074 110
4 036 093 Group 4 075 110
48Z6361A_UK
3-182 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-251

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of circuit
breaker failure protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available under the following conditions :
Circuit breaker failure protection is not enabled.
The protection function is not enabled.
Circuit breaker failure protection is blocked using an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
MAIN: Protection CBF: Not Ready

active [ 040 025 ]
306 001
CBF: Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF: Blocking
EXT
[ 038 058 ]
48Z5062B_UK
3-183 C B F : N o t R e a d y signal
3-252 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
CB failure protection
Circuit breaker failure protection is started by the main-trip command or by the trip
command of an external protection device (wired to an appropriate binary input).
These commands start a timer stage. Once this has elapsed, a re-trip results unless the
current monitored by the circuit breaker failure protection function has fallen below the
set threshold. Only the fundamental component of the current is monitored here.
If the fault is still present once the first timer stage (C B F : t B F 1 I n i t R e T r i p S G x )
has elapsed, the signal C B F : R e - T r i p s i g n a l is issued to trigger the re-trip.
If the fault is still present once the second timer stage (C B F : t B F 2 I n i t
B a c k T r . S G x ) has elapsed, the signal C B F : B a c k - T r i p s i g n a l is issued to
trigger the trip of an upstream circuit breaker ("back-trip").
When the signal CBF: R e - T r i p s i g n a l or the signal C B F : B a c k - T r i p s i g n a l is

issued, the multiple signal C B F : C B F a i l u r e is issued as of version P438 -607 as an
additional spontaneous signal.
CB monitoring
Additionally, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be monitored. This is only possible
if a binary signal input has been set to M A I N : C B C l o s e d S i g . E X T . The pickup
of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact starts a timer stage. If the monitored current
exceeds C B F : I m i n < , then a C B F : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l alarm results.
Auxiliary contact supervision is active only for the set operative time. This ensures that
no C B F : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l (which might lead to switching off the entire plant)
will be issued during protection injection testing.
P438/EN M/Cd7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-253

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBF: Imin<
SGx
[ * ]
f0
I
CBF: Not Ready

[ 040 025 ] c
CBF: Re-Trip
Signal
CBF: tBF1 Init [ 039 022 ]
ReTrip SGx
[ * ] CBF: Failure
Main-Trip
& [ 039 021 ]
MAIN: Main-Trip
Command t 0 CBF: Timer tBF1
[ 039 011 ] Running
& [ 036 066 ]
MAIN: Parallel
Trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
CBF: CB Failure
[ 036 017 ]
c
CBF: Back-Trip
CBF: tBF2 Init Signal
BackTr.SGx [ 039 023 ]
[ * ]
CBF: Failure
& Re-Trip
[ 036 056 ]
t 0 CBF: Timer tBF2
Running
& [ 036 110 ]
CBF: tImin<
SGx
[ * ] CBF: CB Superv.
Signal
& [ 039 000 ]
& t 0
MAIN: CB Closed
Sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF: Operative
Time SGx
[ * ]
* Setting CBF: Imin< CBF: tBF1 Init CBF: tBF2 Init CBF: tImin< CBF: Operative
SGx ReTrip SGx BackTr.SGx SGx Time SGx
Group 1 072 112 072 115 072 116 072 113 072 114
Group 2 073 112 073 115 073 116 073 113 073 114
Group 3 074 112 074 115 074 116 074 113 074 114
Group 4 075 112 075 115 075 116 075 113 075 114
48Z6263A_UK
3-184 Circuit breaker failure protection and monitoring
3-254 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Functions Group CBM)
As of version -606 the P438 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function
supports state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.
Enabling/disabling circuit
breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Enabled
USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
1 CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404B_EN
3-185 Enabling/disabling circuit breaker monitoring
Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined by a variety of methods:
Monitoring the mechanical switching operations

Accumulating ruptured current values
Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current values
Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB wear
characteristic.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-255

3 Operation
(continued)
CB wear characteristic
Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying the
maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured current.
Figure 3-186 displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current
X X
of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The mean ruptured current is
48 kA.
100000
10000
Number of permissible CB operations
1000
100
10
0.1 1 10 100
Ruptured current in kA
48Z5341A_UK
3-186 Circuit breaker wear characteristic
3-256 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
The knee points in figure 3-186 are necessary to set the wear characteristic for the circuit
X X
breaker:
The circuit breaker’s nominal current (C B M : I n o m , C B ) and the number of

C
permitted CB operations at nominal current (C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I n o m , C B ) C
The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current C B M : M e d . c u r r . I t r i p , C B and

C
the number of permitted CB operations at mean ruptured current

(C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I m e d , C B ) C
The circuit breaker’s maximum ruptured current (C B M : M a x . c u r r . I t r i p , C B )

C
and the number of permitted CB operations at maximum ruptured current

(C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I m a x , C B ) C
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers. In such a
case the parameters for this knee-point are to be set to 'Blocked'. A knee-point is not
considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters for the knee-point is
set to 'Blocked'.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that the
knee-points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously descending).
When setting currents and numbers of CB operations that are not plausible according to
the characteristic, the P438 will issue the C B M : S e t t i n g e r r o r C B M error
message and block circuit breaker monitoring.
Calculating the CB wear

state
The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining CB
operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB operations
nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively by the P438. Calculation is
per this equation:
n (I nom ,CB )
n rem (I nom ,CB ) = n rem,0 (I nom,CB ) −
n (I d ,CB )
With:
Inom,CB: Nominal current of the CB

n(Inom,CB): Maximum number of permitted CB operations at Inom,CB
Id,CB: Ruptured current
n(Id,CB): Number of permitted CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
nrem,0(Inom,CB): Number of remaining CB operations at Inom,CB before
U U
disconnection
nrem,(Inom,CB): Number of remaining CB operations at Inom,CB after U U
disconnection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-257

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
The condition under which the function will be triggered is selected using the
C B M : O p e r a t i n g m o d e parameter:
C
With Trip Cmd. Only:

Function triggered only by the main trip command
W i t h C B S i g . E X T Only:
Function triggered by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
CB Sig. EXT or Trip:
Function triggered by the main trip command or the CB open signal generated by an
auxiliary contact
These correction values can be set to determine the exact trip time:
CBM: Corr. Acqu.t. Trip

A positive correction time value can be set to offset the delay between issuing the trip
command and opening of the CB contacts.
CBM: Corr. Acqu.t.CB Sig.
A positive or negative correction time value can be set when leading or lagging
auxiliary contacts are in use.
Cycle for circuit breaker

monitoring
The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined pole-selectively. During an active cycle
the signal C B M : C y c l e R u n n i n g C a t or C B M : C y c l e R u n n i n g F d r is
issued.
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The remaining
time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected current zero crossing.
The signal C B M : C a t C u r r e n t D e a d or C B M : F d r C u r r e n t D e a d is then
issued.
The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 ms. The start of the cycle time is
corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole is considered to be
apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after the maximum cycle time has
elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB tripping are cancelled and the signal
C B M : t m a x > C a t or C B M : t m a x > F d r is issued.
3-258 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MAIN: Protection active & C

306 001
CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
CBM: Operating
Mode
[ 022 007 ]
0
1
2
0: With Trip Cmd.
Only
1: With CB Sig.EXT
Only
2: CB Sig.EXT or
Trip
CBM: Blocked C
[ 044 199 ]
CBM: Corr.
³1 C1 Acqu.T. Trip
[ 022 153 ]
CBM: Corr.
³1 C2 Acqu.T.CB Sig.
[ 022 018 ]
MAIN: Main-Trip Signal ³1 1

[ 039 101 ]
MAIN: Re-Trip Signal
[ 039 103 ]
2 C
MAIN: CB Trip EXT CBM: tmax> x
[ 044 131 ] [ * ]
1 ... 2 220 ms 0 & CBM: Cycle running x

[ * ]
³1
< 0.05 Inom
Ix
CBM: Ph. x current dead

[ * ]
Phase x / CBM: Cycle CBM: tmax> x CBM: Ph. x

Current Ix running x current dead
A / IA (cat) 044 205 044 177 044 201
B / IB (fdr) * 044 206 044 178 044 202
* Settings are represented only with "Autotransformer feed" operating mode
48Z5403B_UK
3-187 Pole-selective measuring cycle for circuit breaker monitoring
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-259

3 Operation
(continued)
Pole-selective measured
values and counter values
Depending on the set operating mode, the P438 evaluates the conductor currents
separately and generates an individual wear presentation for each circuit breaker or CB
pole.
The following measured values are presented pole selectively, and per-unit values refer
to the CB’s nominal current:
Primary ruptured current

This value is applied to evaluate wear with reference to the CB wear characteristic.
Per-unit ruptured current
Squared per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents
The ruptured current is derived from the r.m.s. current value generated during the
function cycle.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated during the function cycle. An example
for calculation of the current-time integral is displayed in figure 3-188. X X
The following counter values are presented pole selectively:
Number of mechanical switching operations carried out

Number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB’s wear
characteristic.
3-260 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Current-time integral
1 cycle
MAIN: Main-Trip
Command
[ 039 011 ]
CBM: Corr. Acqu.T.

Trip
[ 022 153 ]
CBM: Cycle running x

[ 044 205 ]
CBM: Operative time

running x
CBM: x Current Dead

[ 044 201 ]
48Z5401B_UK
3-188 Calculation of the pole-selective current-time integrals when CBM is triggered by the main-trip command
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-261

3 Operation
(continued)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Cycle running x C

[ * ]
CBM: Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
CBM: Perm. CB op.

Inom,CB
[ 022 013 ]
fnom
Ix CBM: Med. curr.
Itrip,CB
[ 022 014 ]
CBM: Perm. CB op.

C Imed,CB
[ 022 015 ]
CBM: Set CBM: Max. curr.

No. CB oper. x Itrip,CB
[ * ] [ 022 016 ]
CBM: Set CBM: Perm. CB op.

remain.CB op.x Imax,CB
[ * ] [ 022 017 ]
CBM: Set
SItrip x CBM: Itrip x
[ * ] [ * ]
R
CBM: Set CBM: I*t x
SItrip**2 x [ * ]
[ * ] R
CBM: Itrip, prim
x
CBM: Set R [ * ]
SI*t x
[ * ] CBM: Itrip**2 x
[ * ]
R
CBM: SItrip x
[ * ]
S
CBM: SItrip**2 x
[ * ]
S
CBM: SI*t x
[ * ]
S
CBM: Anz.
No. of CB oper. x
S [ * ]
CBM: Remain.
No. of CB oper. x
S [ * ]
CBM: Initialize values

[ 003 011 ]
CBM: Reset meas. values
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x / CBM: Cycle CBM: Set CBM: Set CBM: Set CBM: Set CBM: Set
Current Ix running x No. CB oper. x remain.CB op.x SItrip x SItrip**2 x SI*t x
A / IA (cat) 044 205 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143
B / IB (fdr) * 044 206 022 132 022 135 022 138 022 141 022 144
Phase x / CBM: No. of CB CBM: Remain.No. CBM: Itrip x CBM: I*t x CBM: Itrip, prim CBM: Itrip**2 x
Current Ix oper. x of CB oper. x x
A / IA (cat) 008 011 008 014 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051
B / IB (fdr) * 008 012 008 015 009 048 009 062 009 213 009 052
Phase x / CBM: SItrip x CBM: SItrip**2 x CBM: SI*t x

Current Ix
A / IA (cat) 009 071 009 077 009 087
B / IB (fdr) * 009 073 009 078 009 088
* Settings are represented only with "Autotransformer feed" operating mode
48Z5402B_UK
3-189 Calculation of circuit breaker monitoring (pole-selective illustration)
3-262 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting measured values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset using the interfaces of the
device. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.
Setting measured values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the
respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced.
The available interfaces on the device may be used to set measured values in the circuit
breaker monitoring function.
Note: Only such measured values and counter values in the P438 may be set to
new values that do not have their default values set to ‘Blocked‘.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to ‘Blocked‘.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P438
to ‘Blocked‘.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-263

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the number of

CB operations
Depending on the selected operating mode the P438 will calculate the current wear state
of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of remaining CB operations
"<" at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed.
A threshold value can be set using the C B M : R e m a i n N o . C B o p . < parameter. C
An alarm is issued should the number of remaining CB operations for a CB contact drop
below this threshold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Remain No.

CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM: Remain.No. CB CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB
op.cat 1 op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]
CBM: Remain.No. CB
op.fdr
[ 008 015 ] *
* Settings are represented only with "Autotransformer feed" operating mode 48Z5344A_UK
3-190 Monitoring the number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P438’s counter for the
number of CB operations. The number of CB operations ">" carried out for each CB
contact is displayed. A threshold value can be set using the
C B M : N o . C B O p e r a t i o n s > parameter. An alarm is issued should the number
C
of CB operations carried out exceed this threshold.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: No. CB
operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM: No. of CB oper. cat ≥1 CBM: Sig. No. CB op. >

[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM: No. of CB oper. fdr

[ 008 012 ] *
* Settings are represented only for "Autotransformer feed" operating mode.

48Z5345B_UK
3-191 Monitoring the number of CB operations carried out
3-264 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring ruptured
currents
In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number of CB
operations carried out, the P438 features the means to accumulate and display ruptured
current values and the square of these values. Threshold values can be set using the
parameters C B M : Σ I t r i p > , C B M : Σ I t r i p * * 2 > and C B M : Σ I * t . An alarm is
C C C
issued should the accumulated current values exceed any of these thresholds.
Blocking circuit breaker

monitoring
When protection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring function should be
blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring results. CBM protection is
blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Enabled CBM: Blocked

1 [ 044 199 ]
[ 022 010 ]
&
CBM: Blocking EXT 1

[ 044 128 ]
CBM: Blocking
USER
[ 022 150 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346C_UK
3-192 Blocking circuit breaker monitoring
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-265

3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
To support normal operation, a multitude of currents, voltages, temperatures and the

frequency can be monitored for falling below or exceeding limit set points. If this is the
case, a signal is issued once the set operate time-delays have elapsed. These limit
value monitoring elements are based on operating data measurement and cannot
therefore be employed as protection functions.
Disabling/enabling and
readiness of limit value
monitoring
Limit value monitoring can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling
can be carried out separately for each setting group.
Limit value monitoring will not be available under the following conditions:
Limit value monitoring is not enabled.
Protection is not enabled.
LIMIT: General
Enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT: Enable
SGx
[ * ]
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Protection LIMIT: Not Ready
active [ 041 043 ]
306 001
Setting LIMIT: Enable

SGx
Group 1 072 240
Group 2 073 240
Group 3 074 240
Group 4 075 240
48Z5405A_UK
3-193 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
3-266 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring of the phase

currents and voltages
The P438 offers the possibility of monitoring of the following measured values in order to
determine whether they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:
Current: I>, I>>

Catenary currents: Icat>, Icat>>
Feeder currents: Ifdr>, Ifdr>>
Defrost currents: Idfrst>, Idfrst>>
Voltage: V<, V<<, V>, V>>
Catenary voltages: Vcat<, Vcat<<, Vcat>, Vcat>>
Feeder voltages: Vfdr<, Vfdr<<, Vfdr>, Vfdr>>
Frequencies: f<, f<<, f>, f>>
Linearized 20mA currents: IDC,lin<, IDC,lin<<, IDC,lin>, IDC,lin>>
Measured temperatures: T<, T<<. T>, T>>.
If measured values exceed or fall below one of the set upper or lower limit values,
respectively, a signal is issued once a set time-delay has elapsed.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-267

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current value

monitoring
The measured current value is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds
set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued after a set time-
delay has elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: I> LIMIT: tI>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
I LIMIT: tI>
Elapsed
[ 004 062 ]
LIMIT: I>> LIMIT: tI>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tI>>
Elapsed
[ 040 157 ]
Setting LIMIT: I> LIMIT: I>> LIMIT: tI> LIMIT: tI>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 241 072 242 072 243 072 244
Group 2 073 241 073 242 073 243 073 244
Group 3 074 241 074 242 074 243 074 244
Group 4 075 241 075 242 075 243 075 244 48Z5406A_UK
3-194 Measured current value monitoring
3-268 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring catenary and

feeder currents
The catenary and feeder currents are monitored by two stages to determine whether
they exceed set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued
after a set time-delay has elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: Icat> LIMIT: tIcat>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
Icat LIMIT: tIcat>

Elapsed
[ 040 232 ]
LIMIT: Icat>> LIMIT: tIcat>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tIcat>>
Elapsed
[ 040 233 ]
LIMIT: Ifdr> LIMIT: tIfdr>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Ifdr LIMIT: tIfdr>

Elapsed
[ 040 234 ]
LIMIT: Ifdr>> LIMIT: tIfdr>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tIfdr>>
Elapsed
[ 040 235 ]
Setting LIMIT: Icat> LIMIT: Icat>> LIMIT: tIcat> LIMIT: tIcat>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 200 076 201 076 202 076 203
Group 2 077 200 077 201 077 202 077 203
Group 3 078 200 078 201 078 202 078 203
Group 4 079 200 079 201 079 202 079 203
Setting LIMIT: Ifdr> LIMIT: Ifdr>> LIMIT: tIfdr> LIMIT: tIfdr>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 204 076 205 076 206 076 207
Group 2 077 204 077 205 077 206 077 207
Group 3 078 204 078 205 078 206 078 207
Group 4 079 204 079 205 079 206 079 207
48Z5409A_UK
3-195 Monitoring catenary and feeder currents
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-269

3 Operation
(continued)
Defrost current
monitoring
The defrost current value is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued after a set time-
delay has elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: Idfrst> LIMIT: tIdfrst>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
Idfrst LIMIT: tIdfrst>

Elapsed
[ 040 236 ]
LIMIT: Idfrst>> LIMIT: tIdfrst>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tIdfrst>>
Elapsed
[ 040 237 ]
Setting LIMIT: Idfrst> LIMIT: Idfrst>> LIMIT: tIdfrst> LIMIT: tIdfrst>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 224 076 225 076 226 076 227
Group 2 077 224 077 225 077 226 077 227
Group 3 078 224 078 225 078 226 078 227
Group 4 079 224 079 225 079 226 079 227
48Z5417A_UK
3-196 Defrost current monitoring
3-270 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
The voltage is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below
set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued once a set
time-delay has elapsed. In addition a multiple signal is issued if any of the tV> or tV>>
(tV< or tV<<) time-delays have elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: V> LIMIT: tV>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
V LIMIT: tV>
Elapsed
[ 040 140 ]
LIMIT: tV> & tV<

Elapsed
[ 040 144 ]
LIMIT: V>> LIMIT: tV>>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tV>>
Elapsed
[ 040 141 ]
LIMIT: V< LIMIT: tV<

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tV<
Elapsed
[ 040 142 ]
LIMIT: tV>>&tV<<
Elapsed
[ 040 145 ]
LIMIT: V<< LIMIT: tV<<
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tV<<
Elapsed
[ 040 143 ]
Setting LIMIT: V> LIMIT: V>> LIMIT: tV> LIMIT: tV>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 247 072 248 072 249 072 250
Group 2 073 247 073 248 073 249 073 250
Group 3 074 247 074 248 074 249 074 250
Group 4 075 247 075 248 075 249 075 250
Setting LIMIT: V< LIMIT: V<< LIMIT: tV< LIMIT: tV<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 251 072 252 072 253 072 254
Group 2 073 251 073 252 073 253 073 254
Group 3 074 251 074 252 074 253 074 254
Group 4 075 251 075 252 075 253 075 254
48Z5407A_UK
3-197 Voltage monitoring
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-271

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring catenary
and feeder voltages
The catenary and feeder voltages are monitored by two stages to determine whether
they exceed or fall below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a
signal is issued once a set time-delay has elapsed. In addition a multiple signal is issued
if either of the tVcat> or tVcat< time-delays (or, respectively, stages tVcat>> or tVcat<<,
tVfdr> or tVfdr<, tVfdr>> or tVfdr<<) have elapsed.
3-272 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT: Vcat> LIMIT: tVcat>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN:
Protection
active
306 001
LIMIT: tVcat>
Vcat Elapsed
[ 040 240 ]
LIMIT: tVcat>&
LIMIT: Vcat>> tVcat< elap.
Setting LIMIT: Vcat> LIMIT: tVcat> LIMIT: tVcat>> [ 040 244 ]
SGx SGx SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Group 1 076 208 076 210
Group 2 077 208 077 210
Group 3 078 208 078 210
Group 4 079 208 079 210 LIMIT: tVcat>>
Elapsed
[ 040 241 ]
Setting LIMIT: Vcat>> LIMIT: tVcat>>
SGx SGx
Group 1 076 209 076 211
Group 2 077 209 077 211
LIMIT: Vcat< LIMIT: tVcat<
Group 3 078 209 078 211 SGx SGx
Group 4 079 209 079 211 [ * ] [ * ]
Setting LIMIT: Vcat< LIMIT: tVcat<

SGx SGx
Group 1 076 216 076 218 LIMIT: tVcat<
Elapsed
Group 2 077 216 077 218 [ 040 242 ]
Group 3 078 216 078 218
Group 4 079 216 079 218
LIMIT: tVcat>>&
tVcat<< elap.
Setting LIMIT: Vcat<< LIMIT: tVcat<< LIMIT: Vcat<< LIMIT: tVcat<< [ 040 245 ]
SGx SGx SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Group 1 076 217 076 219
Group 2 077 217 077 219
Group 3 078 217 078 219
Group 4 079 217 079 219
LIMIT: tVcat<<
Elapsed
[ 040 243 ]
LIMIT: Vfdr> LIMIT: tVfdr>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tVfdr>
Vfdr Elapsed
[ 040 246 ]
LIMIT: tVfdr>&
Setting LIMIT: Vfdr> LIMIT: tVfdr> tVfdr< elap.
LIMIT: Vfdr>> LIMIT: tVfdr>> [ 040 250 ]
SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 076 212 076 214 [ * ] [ * ]
Group 2 077 212 077 214
Group 3 074 212 074 214
Group 4 075 212 075 214 LIMIT: tVfdr>>
Elapsed
[ 040 247 ]
Setting LIMIT: Vfdr>> LIMIT: tVfdr>>
SGx SGx
Group 1 076 213 076 215
Group 2 077 213 077 215
Group 3 078 213 078 215 LIMIT: Vfdr< LIMIT: tVfdr<
Group 4 079 213 079 215 SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
Setting LIMIT: Vfdr< LIMIT: tVfdr<

SGx SGx
Group 1 076 220 076 222 LIMIT: tVfdr<
Group 2 077 220 077 222 Elapsed
Group 3 078 220 078 222 [ 040 248 ]
Group 4 079 220 079 222
LIMIT: tVfdr>>&
Setting LIMIT: Vfdr<< LIMIT: tVfdr<< tVfdr<< elap.
SGx SGx LIMIT: Vfdr<< LIMIT: tVfdr<< [ 040 251 ]
SGx SGx
Group 1 076 221 076 223 [ * ] [ * ]
Group 2 077 221 077 223
Group 3 078 221 078 223
Group 4 079 221 079 223
LIMIT: tVfdr<<
Elapsed
[ 040 249 ]
48Z5408A_UK
3-198 Monitoring catenary and feeder voltages
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-273

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency monitoring
The frequency is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below
set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued once a set
time-delay has elapsed.
LIMIT: Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: f> LIMIT: tf>
SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
f LIMIT: tf>
Elapsed
[ 040 196 ]
LIMIT: f>> LIMIT: tf>>

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tf>>
Elapsed
[ 040 197 ]
LIMIT: f< LIMIT: tf<

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tf<
Elapsed
[ 040 198 ]
LIMIT: f<< LIMIT: tf<<

SGx SGx
[ * ] [ * ]
LIMIT: tf<<
Elapsed
[ 040 199 ]
Setting LIMIT: f> LIMIT: f>> LIMIT: tf> LIMIT: tf>>

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 211 072 212 072 213 072 214
Group 2 073 211 073 212 073 213 073 214
Group 3 074 211 074 212 074 213 074 214
Group 4 075 211 075 212 075 213 075 214
Setting LIMIT: f< LIMIT: f<< LIMIT: tf< LIMIT: tf<<

SGx SGx SGx SGx
Group 1 072 215 072 216 072 217 072 218
Group 2 073 215 073 216 073 217 073 218
Group 3 074 215 074 216 074 217 074 218
Group 4 075 215 075 216 075 217 075 218
48Z5418A_UK
3-199 Frequency monitoring
3-274 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If the temperature value
exceeds or falls below the set thresholds a start signal is issued and a settable time-
delay is triggered. A signal is issued once the set time-delay has elapsed.
3-200 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-275

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the measured

temperature value
The temperature that is measured by the P438 using a resistance thermometer is
monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If the
temperature value exceeds or falls below the set thresholds a start signal is issued and a
settable time-delay is triggered. A signal is issued once the set time-delay has elapsed.
3-201 Monitoring the measured temperature value
3-276 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P438 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P438, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial
interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
Binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating function,
whereas input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched. The logic can
only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for L O G I C : S e t n E X T
if the corresponding reset input (L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T ) has been configured for a
binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions is configured, then this is
interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the two binary signal inputs
are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of ‘ 1 ’), then the last
plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In particular,
it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by
setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-277

3 Operation
(continued)
3-202 Control of logic operations using setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
3-278 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-203 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-279

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation as an
input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The equations
are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation. It should be noted
that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation with the
highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation.
In the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage tZ2 has no effect.
Figures 3-204 to 3-208 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
Note: If the device is switched to "offline" the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to the ' 0 ' logic level.
3-204 Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3-280 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-205 Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-206 Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, re-triggerable
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-281

3 Operation
(continued)
3-207 Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, re-triggerable
3-208 Operating mode 5: Minimum Dwell
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
3-282 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3 Operation
(continued)
3-209 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 3-283

3-284 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
4 Design
4 Design
The P438 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P438 – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 range – is equipped with the
standard user interface (HMI). Depending on the order the user interface (HMI) is fitted
either permanently to the case front panel or is detachable. The user interface is
covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained.
In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a
total of 17 LED indicators is also incorporated. The designation of the various LED
indicators is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the user interface.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4.1 Designs (Case Types)
The P438 is available either as surface-mounted case or a flush-mounted case with case
widths of 40TE and 84TE. The user interface (HMI) is either fitted permanently to the
case front panel or detachable.
12Z61TDA
4-1 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case – front view, user interface (HMI) is fitted permanently to the case front panel
12Z61ABA
4-2 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detached user interface (HMI) – front view
The detached user interface (HMI) on the 84TE basic unit also has a width of 40TE
4-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

4 Design
(continued)
49Z6202A
4-3 Detached user interface (HMI) – rear view
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-3

4 Design
(continued)
Electrical connections for both designs (surface-mounted and flush-mounted case) are
made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-
mounted case are accessible from the front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead
screws on the sides (see Figure 4-4, ) and removing the user interface (HMI). The
user interface (HMI) can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side
wall (see Figure 4-4, ). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of the case.
The user interface (HMI) is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the user interface by inserting it in the
slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the
secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger that
the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
In units for pin terminal connection, the threaded terminal block for current transformer
connection is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers
before loosening the threaded terminals.
4-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

4 Design
(continued)
4-4 Surface-mounted case, removal of user interface (HMI), illustrated here for a device with graphic display in a 40TE case
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-5

4 Design
(continued)
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
147,5
177,5
184,5
213,4 257,1
242,6
260,2
4-5 Dimensional drawing for the 40TE surface-mounted case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod.
147,5
177,5
184,5
434,8 257,1
464,0
481,6
4-6 Dimensional drawing for the 84TE surface-mounted case
4-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.2 Flush-Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
213,4 227,9
253,6
203,0
155,4
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
181,3
4-7 Panel cutout for the 40TE flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
101,6
213,4 227,9
253,6
242,6
260,2
6,4
101,6
186,5
224,5
242,6
4-8 Panel cutout for the 40TE flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
Note: The P438 has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page)
is used for the flush-mounted cases.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-7

4 Design
(continued)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
284,9
259,0
25,9
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
410,0
4-9 Panel cutout for the 84TE flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./Störung
Betrieb
Änderungsmod .
177,5
101,6
434,8 227,9
253,6
464,0
481,6
6,4
101,6
186,5
445,9
464,0
4-10 Panel cutout for the 84TE flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame)
Note: The P438 has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is
used for the flush-mounted cases.
4-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.3 Device View of Connection for the Detached User Interface (HMI)
40TE device view of connection for the detached user interface (HMI):
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
84TE device view of connection for the detached user interface (HMI):
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
Panel cutout for the detached user interface (HMI)
Aus- Kommando
War nung
107,3
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
177,5
206,0 20,7
46,3
197,5
192,5
148,0
168,0
3,0
181,3
4-11 Panel cutout and device view of connection for the detachable user interface (HMI)
Note: Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Chapter 5
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-9

4 Design
(continued)
4.3 Modules
The P438 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P438
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, : optional, : standard
equipment, : depending on order).
Type Index Description Width
A 0336 426 J ff Communication module 1 (wire connection) 4TE

1
A 9650 107 A ff Communication module (glass fiber, ST connector) 4TE
1
A 0336 428 G ff Communication module (plastic fiber) 4TE
A 9650 356 D ff Communication module 2 (wire connection) 4TE

2
A 9650 354 D ff Communication module (glass fiber, ST connector) 4TE
2
A 9650 355 D ff Communication module (plastic fiber) 4TE
A 9650 353 D ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4TE

A 9651 471 A ff Ethernet module (100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, ST 4TE
connector and twisted pair RJ45)
A 9651 427 A ff Ethernet module (100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, SC 4TE
connector and twisted pair RJ45)
A 9650 827 ff InterMiCOM module COMM3 (RS 485) 4TE
A 9650 828 ff InterMiCOM module COMM3 (glass fiber) 4TE
A 9650 829 ff InterMiCOM module COMM3 (plastic fiber) 4TE
A 9650 830 ff InterMiCOM module COMM3 (RS 232) 4TE
B 0336 188 C ff * Bus module (digital), 84TE case only 84TE
B 0336 187 B ff * Bus module (digital), 40TE case only 40TE
B 0336 421 B ff * Bus module (analog)
L 9650 194 C ff * Local control module (Western European user

interface)
L 9651 473 B ff * Local control module (Europ., for device version with
DHMI)
L 9650 563 B ff * Front plate (for 40TE device version with DHMI)
L 9651 920 B ff * Front plate (for 84TE device version with DHMI)
P 9651 472 B ff Processor module, 33 MHz, w/o DSP coprocessor 4TE
P 9651 428 D ff Processor module, 33 MHz, with DSP coprocessor 4TE
T 9650 337 A ff Transformer module 3 x I, 2 x V (pin connection) 8TE
T 9650 338 A ff Transformer module 2 x I, 1 x V (ring connection) 8TE

V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V DC 4TE
Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
V 9651 300 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, 4TE
switching threshold 73 V
1 Required for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2 Required for IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, or DNP 3.0 protocols
4-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

4 Design
(continued)
Type Index Description Width

V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 VDC / 100 to 230 VAC 4TE
V 9651 301 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 VDC / 100 to 230 VAC 4TE
Switching threshold 146 V
X 0336 971 D ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), 4TE
X 9651 306 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 8 output relays), 4TE
X 9651 493 B ff Binary I/O module (4 output relays with heavy-duty 4TE
contacts)
X 0336 973 B/D ff Binary I/O module (6 output relays) 4TE
X 9650 341 B ff Binary I/O module (6 output relays, 4 of these with 4TE
Triac)
Y 0337 406 D ff Analog I/O module, 4TE
Standard variant (Switching threshold 18 V)
Y 9651 307 A ff Analog I/O module, Switching threshold 73 V 4TE
The space available to fit the modules measures 4 H in height by 40TE or 84TE in width
(H = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the position
of the threaded terminal blocks in the P438 are shown in the installation diagrams to be
found at the end of Chapter 5.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-11

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 4-12
5 Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with content on the "Warning" page at the beginning of
this operating manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the “Protective and Operational Grounding” section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal”.
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The RJ45 twisted wire and glass fiber SC connector on the Ethernet module may not be
both connected at the same time. (The setting at I E C : E t h e r n e t M e d i a must be
observed.)
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P438 units are packaged separately in their own cartons and shipped inside outer
packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking units, and do not use
force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the unit when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list should be carefully
saved.
After unpacking each unit, inspect it visually to make sure it is in proper mechanical
condition.
If the P438 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-1

(continued)
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Version
The nominal data and design type of the P438 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One rating label is located under the hinged cover
at the top of the user interface (HMI). Another copy of the type identification label is
affixed to the outside of the P438 packaging.
P438 P438- XXXXXXX-3XX-4XX/4XX/4XX-613 Diagram P438.4Xx xx.yy
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V Inom = 1 / 5 A IX,nom = 1 / 5 fnom = 25/50/60 Hz

A
VH,nom = VA,nom = 24 ... 250 V DC

CE
Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1 Type identification label
The P438 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14.
5-2 P438/EN M/Ad7-S // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P438 is designed to be conform to DIN 57 435 Part 303. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the operating
conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several important
conditions are listed below.
Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P438.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-display remains readable.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
or 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
depending on the installation type (see Chapter 2, paragraph 'Mechanical robustness')
Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage for the
power supply
Operating range: 0,8 to 1.1 VH,nom with a residual ripple of up to
12 % VH,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Appropriate measures taken in substations must correspond to the best of modern
practices.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-3

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P438 is surface-mounted on a panel, the leads to the P438 are
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If wiring is to run to the rear a
cutout opening can be provided above and below the surface-mounted case, as shown
in the two figures below. The figures only show the bottom cutout. The same
considerations also apply to the upper cutout.
5-2 Cutout to provide space for connection cables and lines
The cutout widths are

213 mm for the 40TE case (as shown in the figure)
435 mm for the 84TE case
The other dimensions are the same for all cases.
5-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed to be flush-mounted in control panels.

The dimensions and mounting dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P438 is
mounted in a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the
degree of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
For connection of the protective ground/earth terminal see section 5.5 'Protective
Grounding'.
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P438 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or –
for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is
used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the
shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock
resistance test on permanent shock is applied additionally.
Instructions for dimensioning a panel cutout:

Dimensional drawings for panel cutouts for the P438 with all mounting methods can be
found in Chapter 4, section 'Dimensional Drawings'
If the units are to be installed in accordance with flush-mount method 1 (without the
angle brackets and frame), follow the steps described below.
Before the P438 can be installed in the control panel, the user interface (HMI) must be
removed. The procedure is as follows:
Remove the hinged covers at the top and bottom of the user interface. (Open the
hinged covers by flipping them up or down 180°. Hold them in the middle and bend
them slightly. The side mountings of the covers can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see Figures 5-3 and 5-4).
Remove the user interface.

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and loosen the upper M4 screws (see Figures 5-3
and 5-4). Insert the P438 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4
screws fit into the corresponding slots. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this,
replace the user interface (HMI).
Note: If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-5

(continued)
5-3 Installation of a 40TE case on a panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame).
The P438 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount
method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used see Figure 5-6.
Connection of protective grounding conductor, see section 5.5.
5-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
5-4 Installation of a 84TE case on a panel, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame)
The P438 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount
method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is used see Figure 5-6.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-7

(continued)
When installing devices according to flush-mount method 2, proceed as follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-5 Mounting the angle brackets, c and
mount the enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
Slide the unit into the panel opening from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Figure 5-6).
Assemble the cover frame and snap it onto the mounting bolts.
5-5 Mounting the angle brackets
5-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204 mm
for the
Frame 80 mm
W idt h: 2 n d cas
te e
s h-m ou
40T E flu
12Y6183 B_EN
5-6 Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
Example for a device in a 40TE case
The width of the frame for the 84TE case comes to 486 mm
The device has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used
for the flush-mounted cases.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-9

(continued)
The 84TE flush-mounted cases – with angle brackets mounted – are also suitable for
installation in enclosures or control cabinets equipped with a 19" mounting rack.
5-7 Installing the P438 into a control cabinet equipped with a 19" mounting rack
5-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Two rack mounting kits can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40TE case to form a
19" mounting rack (see Figure 5-8). The second sub-rack can for instance consist of
another device or an empty sub-rack with a blank front plate.
5-8 Combining 40TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19” mounting rack
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-11

(continued)
5.5 Protective Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut
as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section
of 1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e., as short as

possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-9 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal
The protective grounding (earth) conductor must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal, so as to
ensure the safety provided by the device’s design.
The bracket on the terminal is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
5-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P438 must be connected in accordance with the terminal connection diagram
indicated on the type identification label. Terminal connection diagrams relevant for the
P438 can be found at the end of this chapter.
Copper leads having a 2.5 mm2 cross-section are generally suitable as the connecting
leads between the current transformers and the P438. To reduce CT knee-point voltage
requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a greater
cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on the
P438. Copper leads having a 1.5 mm2 cross section are adequate for connecting the
binary signal inputs, the signaling and triggering circuits, and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to a
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P438 power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
Connecting the measuring

circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagram shown in Figures 5-10 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in
the 'Classic single feed' operating mode to 5-12. It is essential that the CT grounding
configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed,
this can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-13

(continued)
Supply
Catenary
I>
MAIN: Feeding
Mode
[ 010 135 ]
1
2
1: Classic Single
Feed
2: Auto-
Transformer Feed
MAIN: Vn VT.
c Sec.
[ 010 009 ]
1U
2U V

c Orientation [ 010 003 ]
[ 010 004 ]
Icat
X X.Y I
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Catenary
Rail
48Z5411A_UK
5-10 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Classic single feed' operating mode
5-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Supply Catenary
Supply Feeder
MAIN: Feeding
Mode
[ 010 135 ]
1
2
I>
1: Classic Single
Feed
2: Auto-
Transformer Feed
MAIN: Vn VT.
I> c Sec.
[ 010 009 ]
1U
2U Vcat
3U Vfdr
4U
S
+ V
-
MAIN: Line CT MAIN: In

c Orientation c Device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
Icat
X X.Y Icat
Ifdr X X.Y Ifdr
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1) S
+ I
-
Feeder
Catenary
Rail
48Z5412A_UK
5-11 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Autotransformer feed' operating mode
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-15

(continued)
In addition to the protection of the catenary in normal train operation, the P438 also
provides defrost protection. An additional current transformer must be connected when
the device is in the operating mode 'Defrost operation'. Figure 5-12 shows the
connection with 'Defrost operation'. In this operating mode, circuit breakers Q1, Q3 and
Q4 are closed whereas circuit breaker Q2 is open. It is important to ensure - from the
installation side - that the circuit breaker Q2 is opened before circuit breakers Q3 and Q4
are closed.
Supply
Catenary
Q1 Q2
Orientation [ 010 003 ]
[ 010 004 ]
Icat
X X.Y I
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: Idfrst MAIN: Idfrst,nom

CT Orientat'n Device
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
Idfrst
X X.Y Idfrst
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
Catenary 1
Q3
Catenary 2
Q4
Rail
48Z5413A_UK
5-12 Connecting the P438 measuring circuits for 'Defrost operation'
5-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
If the analog I/O module Y is fitted, a resistance thermometer can be connected.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-13). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-13 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable.
The terminal connection diagrams give a polarity for connection of the binary signal
inputs. However, this is only a recommendation. Connection to binary inputs can be
made as desired.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-17

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface
An IRIG-B-interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided in order to operate the unit from a personal computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female

connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interfaces
Communication interfaces are provided for permanent connection of the unit to a control
system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Connection to channel 2
is always by way of an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the unit is shut off.
5-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
A communication link consisting of a communication master and several slaves can be

established using the RS 485 interface. The communication master can be a control
station, for example. The devices connected to the communication master, such as the
P438, are the communication slaves.
The RS 485 interface available on the P438 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices.
However, communication through the RS 485 interface is always in the half-duplex mode
of operation. To connect the RS 485 communication interface the following must be
observed:
Always use twisted-pair shielded cables only, the kind used for telecommunications
systems.
At least one symmetrically twisted core pair will be required.
Strip cable cores and cable shield right at the connection point and connect properly
in accordance with specifications.
Ground all shields at both ends (large-area grounding).
Ground free (unshielded) cores at one end only.
As another option, a 2-wire or 4-wire connection is also possible. For the 4-wire
connection, a cable with two symmetrically twisted core pairs is required. A 2-wire data
link is shown in Figure 5-14, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-15 as an
example for channel 2 on the communication module. If channel 1 of the communication
module is designed as an RS 485 interface, then the same arrangement would apply.
2-wire data link:

The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P438. In the two units that form the
physical ends of the line, the pair of leads must be terminated by a 200 to 220 Ω resistor.
In most Schneider Electric units, and also in the P438, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into
the RS 485 interface and can be connected by means of a wire jumper. An external
resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:

Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of the slaves that have a full-duplex
interface as part of their electrical system (like the P438, for example) are connected to
the transmitter of the communication master, and the transmitters of the slaves are
connected to the receiver of the master. Units that only have a half-duplex interface are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master. In the last physical
participant (master or slave) of the communication link, the transmitter and receiver must
each be terminated by a 200 to 220 Ω resistor. In most Schneider Electric units, and
also in the P438, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface and can be
connected by a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary. The
second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order number see
Chapter 13).
P438/EN M/Ad7-S // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-19

(continued)
P438
First participant Last participant

connected to the line connected to the line
(e.g. the master)
P438
Device with half-duplex

interface
48Z5480A_EN
5-14 2-wire connection
5-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
P438
First participant Last participant

connected to the line connected to the line
(e.g. the master)
P438
Device with half-duplex

interface
48Z5481A_EN
5-15 4-wire connection
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-21

(continued)
5.7 Location Diagrams P438 -305
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A A T X X Y V X
CH1 CH3 3J 6I 6I 4I 4I
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O 6O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH
CH2 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
5-16 P438 in 40TE case, transformer module with ring-terminal connection, other modules with pin-terminal connection, diagram P438-305-409
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH
CH2 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-17 P438 in 84TE case with pin-terminal connection, diagram P438-305-410
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH
CH2 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
5.8 Connection Diagrams P438 -305
Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X Analog Type Y

module 3J / 2V module 4I / 8O module 6I / 8O module 4I
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X041 X041 inputs X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Measuring outputs
1 1 1 1 1 1
13 1 VA T5 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
14 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 valid
15 3 4 4 4 4
16 4 5 5 5 5 4 4
U
17 5 VB T6 6 6 K_02 6 6 K_02 5 5
6
#
18 7 7 7 7 6 6
8 8 8 8 0..20 mA U_08
9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03 7 7
11 7 8 8 K_02
12 8 X_2 X_2 9 9 valid
10 1 10 1
11 2 K_04 11 2 K_04 X_2
12 3 K_05 12 3 K_05 10 1
U
Current measuring 13 4 K_06 13 4 K_06 11 2
#
X042 inputs 14 5 K_07 14 5 K_07 12 3
1 1 IA T1 15 6 15 6 0..20 mA U_09
2 2 16 7 K_08 16 7 K_08
3 3 IB T2 17 8 17 8
4 4 Signal and
5 5 Idfrst T3 Signal inputs Signal inputs measuring inputs
6 6 18 9 18 9 13 4
Vin Vin Vin U_01
7 7 U_01 U_01 14 5
U
8 8 X_3 X_3 15 6
Vin _02
19 1 19 1 16 7
20 2 20 2 U_02 17 8
Vin Vin Vin U_03
21 3 U_02 21 3
22 4 22 4 U_03 18 9
Vin Vin Vin U_04
U_03
23 5 23 5 U_04 X_3
Vin Vin
24 6 U_04 24 6 19 1
25 7 U_05 20 2
U
U_05
Vin 0..20 mA
Power supply 21 3
#
25 7 + V 26 8 U_06 22 4 U U_06
aux Vin
26 8 - U100 27 9 23 5 PT100
27 9 PE 24 6 #
5-19 Connection diagrams P438 -305 (part 1 of 2)

Notes: ‘_’ is used as a wildcard for the fitting location.
See also section 5.5 "Protective Grounding"
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-23

(continued)
Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A Binary Type X Binary Type X
module CH1 / CH2 module ETH / CH2 module CH3 module 6O module 4H
Per order Per order Per order

Ring Pin Ring Pin
Channel 1 IEC 61850 COMM3 X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 High-break
optical fiber link optical fiber link ST optical fiber link 1 1 1 1 contacts
X7 X7 X31 2 2 K_01 2 2
RX
1
X//Y U17 X/Y U17 1
X//Y U22 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
X8
K_01
X8 X32 5 5 5 5 +
TX
1
X//Y U18 X/Y U18 1
X//Y U23 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 K_02 8 8
or wire link or or wire link 9 9 9 9
X9 optical fiber link SC X33
X//Y X13
X//Y
1 1
2 D2[R] RX
U26 2 D2[R] X_2 X_2
3 3 10 1 1) 10 1
U19 X/Y U24
4 TX 4 11 2 11 2 K_02
5 D1[T] 5 D1[T] 12 3 12 3 +
13 4 1) 13 4
RS 485 RS 485 14 5 K_03 14 5
15 6 15 6
and wire link or wire link
16 7 16 7
X12
Channel 2 X//Y 17 8 17 8
1
wire link only X//Y U25 X34
18 9 18 9
1
X10 RJ45 M5[DCD]
X//Y 2
D2[R]
1 X_3 X_3
3
2 D2[R] D1[T] 19 1 1) 19 1
COMM2 4 K_03
3 E U27 20 2 K_04 20 2 +
U20 wire link 5
E2[G]
4 21 3 21 3
5 D1[T] 22 4 1) 22 4
7
X10
X//Y +UB 23 5 K_05 23 5
1
RS 485 24 6 24 6
2 D2[R]
RS 232 25 7 25 7
3
IRIG-B U20 26 8 K_06 26 8 K_04
4
time synchronization D1[T] 27 9 27 9 +
5
X11
1 # U21 RS 485
#

1)
Binary module X (6O) optionally with 4 static outputs, in parallel with NO contact K_02.2, K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
See also section 5.5 "Protective Grounding".
5-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
5.9 Location Diagrams P438 -307
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A A T X X Y V X
CH1 CH3 3J 6I 6I 4I 4I
CH2 2U 8O 8O 8O 6O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH 6I
CH2 3O
alt. alt.
A X
Red.
ETH 4H
CH2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
5-21 P438 in 40TE case, transformer module with ring-terminal connection, other modules with pin-terminal connection, diagram P438-307-412
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 2U 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH 6I
CH2 3O
alt. alt.
A X
Red.
ETH 4H
CH2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 4I
CH2 2U 8O 8O 8O 8O 6O 8O
alt. alt.
A X
ETH 6I
CH2 3O
alt. alt.
A X
Red.
ETH 4H
CH2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-23 P438 in 84TE case with ring-terminal connection, diagram P438-307-414
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-25

(continued)
5.10 Connection Diagrams P438 -307
Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X
module 3J / 2V module 4I / 8O module 6O module 6I / 8O module 4H
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X041 X041 inputs X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 High-break
1 1 1 1 1 1 contacts
13 1 VA T5 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
14 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4
K_01
15 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 +
16 4 5 5 5 5 5 5
17 5 VB T6 6 6 K_02 6 6 6 6 K_02
18 6 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 K_02 8 8 X_2
9 9 K_03 9 9 9 9 K_03
11 2 K_02
X_2 X_2 12 3 +
10 1 X_2 10 1
11 2 K_04 10 1 1) 11 2 K_04
12 3 K_05 11 2 12 3 K_05
Current measuring 13 4 K_06 12 3 13 4 K_06 X_3
X042 inputs 14 5 K_07 13 4 1) 14 5 K_07 19 1
K_03
1 1 IA T1 15 6 14 5 K_03 15 6 20 2 +
2 2 16 7 K_08 15 6 16 7 K_08
3 3 IB T2 17 8 16 7 17 8
4 4 17 8
5 5 Idfrst T3 Signal inputs 18 9 Signal inputs 26 8 K_04
6 6 18 9
Vin
18 9
Vin
27 9 +
U_01 U_01
X_3 X_3 X_3
19 1 19 1 1) 19 1
20 2 20 2 K_04 20 2 U_02
Vin Vin
21 3 U_02 21 3 21 3
22 4 22 4 1) 22 4 U_03
Vin Vin
U_03 23 5 K_05
23 5 24 6 23 5 U_04
Vin Vin
24 6 U_04 25 7 24 6
26 8 K_06 25 7 U_05
Vin
Power supply 27 9
25 7 + V 26 8 U_06
aux Vin
26 8 - U100 27 9
27 9 PE

1)
Binary module X (6O) optionally with 4 static outputs, in parallel with NO contact K_02.2, K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
See also section 5.5 "Protective Grounding".
5-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Binary Type X Analog Type Y

module 6I / 8O module 4I
Ring Pin Ring Pin

X_1 X_1 Output relays X_1 X_1 Measuring outputs
1 1 1 1
2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
3 3 3 3 valid
4 4
5 5 4 4
U
6 6 K_02 5 5
#
7 7 6 6
8 8 0..20 mA U_08
9 9 K_03 7 7
8 8 K_02
X_2 9 9 valid
10 1
11 2 K_04 X_2
12 3 K_05 10 1
U
13 4 K_06 11 2
#
14 5 K_07 12 3
15 6 0..20 mA U_09
16 7 K_08
17 8
Signal and
Signal inputs measuring inputs
18 9 13 4
Vin Vin U_01
U_01 14 5
U
X_3 15 6
Vin _02
19 1 16 7
20 2 U_02 17 8
Vin Vin U_03
21 3
22 4 U_03 18 9
Vin Vin U_04
23 5 U_04 X_3
Vin
24 6 19 1
25 7 U_05 20 2
U
U_05
Vin 0..20 mA
21 3
#
26 8 U_06 22 4 U U_06
Vin
27 9 23 5 PT100
24 6 #
Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A

module CH1 / CH2 module ETH / CH2 module Red. ETH / CH2 module CH3
Per order Per order Per order

Ethernet [IEC], Port 1
Serial [Channel 1] Ethernet [IEC] optical fiber link ST Serial [COMM3]
X7
optical fiber link optical fiber link ST optical fiber link
RX
X7 X7 X/Y U17 X31
RX
1
X//Y U17 X/Y U17 1
X//Y U22
X8
TX
X8 X8 X/Y U18 X32
TX
1
X//Y U18 X/Y U18 1
X//Y U23
Ethernet [IEC], Port 2
or optical fiber link ST
or wire link X14 or wire link
X9 optical fiber link SC X33
X//Y RX X//Y
X13 X/Y U28
1 1
2 D2[R] RX
U26 X15 2 D2[R]
3 TX 3
U19 X/Y X/Y U29 U24
4 TX 4
5 D1[T] 5 D1[T]
Serial [COMM2]
RS 422 / 485 wire link only RS 422 / 485
X10
X//Y
and wire link 1 or wire link
X12 2 D2[R]
Serial [Channel 2] X//Y
1 3
wire link only X//Y U25 U20
4 X34
5 D1[T] 1
M5[DCD]
X10 RJ45
X//Y 2
D2[R]
1
RS 422 / 485 3
D1[T]
2 D2[R]
Serial [COMM2] 4
3 E U27
U20 wire link Port supervision 5
E2[G]
4
5 D1[T] 7
K21
Alarm Port 1 7
X10
X//Y
8 +UB
1 9
RS 422 / 485 K22
2 D2[R] Alarm Port 2
RS 232
3
IRIG-B U20 IRIG-B
4
time synchronization time synchronization
5 D1[T]
X11 X11
1 # U21
1 # U21
RS 422 / 485 #
#

See also section 5.5 "Protective Grounding"
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 5-27

5-28 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
6 User Interface (HMI)

All data required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control
panel, and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The
following tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
Readout and modification of settings

Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control through the PC interface is also possible. This requires a suitable PC and
operating program (MiCOM S1).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with an LC-display containing 4 x 20
alphanumeric characters.
Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD
and six additional freely configurable function keys situated to the right of the LCD.
Furthermore the user interface (HMI) is fitted with 23 LED indicators, where 17 are
mounted vertically and situated on the left side of the LCD, and six are situated on the
right side of the six freely configurable function keys.
Additional information pertaining to function keys and their application can be found in
Chapter 3, section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section
'Resetting Actions' and in this chapter, section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx
(general)'.
H4 TRIP H5
H3 ALARM H6
H2 OUT OF SERVICE H7
H1 HEALTHY H8
H17 EDIT MODE. H9
C = CLEAR
C H10
= READ G H11
= ENTER H12
H13
G
H14
H15
H16
64Z6000B_EN
6-1 View of the user interface (HMI) with positioning of the LED indicators
6-2 P438/EN M/Ad76s // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. At the
Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that provide a quick
overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level below the panel level
allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals, measured variables, etc.) and
to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected event recording from either the
panel level or from any other point in the menu tree, press the READ key .
Measured Value Recordings

Panels
Voltage A-B prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
20.7 kV Operat. data record.
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Settings Measurements & Tests Fault & Event Records
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Event recordings
+
Function parameters Operating data recording
C
Global Measured operating data
General functions Physical state signals

Parameter subset 1 Logic state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
6-2 Display panels and menu tree
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-3

(continued)
Display panels
The P438 can display 'Measured Value Panels' which are selected automatically by the
device according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The system
condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the Operation Panel and
the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. As the user navigates through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LCD
display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user.
The data points are accessed at the lowest level of a menu tree branch. They are
displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically coded form, as selected
by the user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit
of measurement is displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one value element associated with them. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list
data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating
that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a
list data point are found at the lower level. In the case of a list setting, the individual
value elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
6-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Keys
/
G
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys
Panel Level:
The ‘up’/‘down’ keys switch between the pages of the Measured Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.
‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.
ENTER Key
G

Panel Level:
Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and exit the input mode. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode:
Press the CLEAR key to reject the changes entered and exit the input mode.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-5

(continued)
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
F1 F6
Function keys to
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on
assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function
Keys (Function Group F_KEY)". More details pertaining to the use of function keys
can be found in this chapter, section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)'.
The following tables, which show the individual control steps, specify the displays that
can be changed by pressing specific keys. A small black square to the right of the
ENTER key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on. The examples
shown here do not necessarily apply to the device type described in this manual; they
merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
6.2 Changing Between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Going from the menu tree
level to the panel level 0 From the menu tree level, the user can go to Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Protection Enabled
the Panel level from any position within the No (=off)
menu tree.
1 First press the ‘up’ key and hold it down C Voltage A-B prim.
G
+
20.7 kV
while pressing the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Note:
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
Going from the panel level to
the menu tree level 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel XYYY

G
level to the menu tree level.
After the set "hold" time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: 'Set/Conf/HMI'), the display
will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has been
configured.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-7

(continued)
6.3 Illumination of the Display
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
"hold" time has elapsed (‘Backlight time’ setting in the menu tree at ‘Set/Conf/HMI’).
The backlight is turned on again by pressing one of the control keys. In this case, the
control action that is normally triggered by the key will not be executed. Reactivation of
the backlight is also possible using a binary input.
If continuous illumination is desired, the user can set the ‘Backlight time’ function to
Blocked.
6.4 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)
The function keys F1 to Fx can each have a password assigned (see section 'Changing
the Password' in this chapter). If such is the case, they will only be enabled after the
respective password has been entered. The default setting (as of version -613) however
requires no password entry when pressing a function key.
It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only
after the password - as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d F u n c t . K e y 1 - has
been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active
for the time period set at F _ K E Y : F c n K e y R e t u r n T i m e . Thereafter, the
function key is disabled until the password is entered again.

Action
0 Example of a display. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 Function key F1 is pressed. If a password F1

has been assigned then eight asterisks (*)
appear in the fourth line as a prompt to enter ********
the password.
In the default setting the next two steps are
void and the function key is available
immediately as described in step 3.
If a password has been configured it is entered G
by pressing the function key according to this

G
password as shown in the example below:

'Left' *
'Down' G
G
'Right' G
G
6-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
'Up' G
The display will change as shown in the
G
column on the right.
*
Now press the ENTER key. Voltage A-B prim.

If the correct password has been entered, the 20.7 kV
active display will re-appear. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Function key F1 is now active for the set return
time.
(No password is required with the default
setting and function key F1 is available at all
times. Each function key is protected by its
own password, and the return time elapses
individually for each function key after the
correct password has been entered!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the
display shown above in step 1 will appear.
2b This control step can be cancelled at any C Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the Voltage B-C prim.
ENTER key is pressed. 20.6 kV
3 Press F1 again. The function configured to F1 Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
this function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
4 When function keys are pressed while the Fx Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
return time period of the function key is Voltage B-C prim.
elapsing, then the configured function is carried 20.6 kV
out directly, e.g. without again checking for the
password.
(With the default setting this step is void as no
password is required and the function key is
available at all times.)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-9

(continued)
6.5 Control at the Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Set/Conf/HMI. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The menu for the Operation Panel is always present. The remarks in "Setting a List
Setting" apply to this selection. If the M A I N : D i s a b l e d setting has been selected for
a given panel, then that panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.

Action
0 Up to six selected measured values can be Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
displayed simultaneously on the Panel. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
1 If more than two measured values have Voltage C-A prim.

G
or 20.8 kV
been selected, they can be viewed one page at Current A prim.
a time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The 415 A
device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Panel
Hold-time (setting in menu tree:
"Set/Conf/HMI") has elapsed.
6-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
6.6 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.6.1 Navigation of the Menu Tree
Folders and function

groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
‘Settings’, ‘Measurements & Tests’ and ‘Fault & Event Records’, which form the first
folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure
consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Settings Measurements & Tests Fault & Event Records
level 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
level 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
level 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-3 Basic menu tree structure
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-11

(continued)
6.6.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the user interface (HMI) can be switched between address mode and
plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions.
In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree is
displayed in plain text in both modes. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Protection enabled
text mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C

+
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or 0
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C
+
in the menu tree.
6-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
6.6.3 Setting Change Enabling
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Setting Change Enabl’
parameter to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘M&T/CtrlTest/HMI’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the
factory-set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the section
entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘M&T/C&Test/HMI’, select M+T/C+Test/HMI

Setting Change enabl
the ‘Setting Change Enabl’ parameter. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) M+T/C+Test/HMI

G

appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: M+T/C+Test/HMI

G

‘left’
G
No
*
‘right’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
No
*
‘up’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
No
*
‘down’ G
M+T/C+Test/HMI
The display will change as shown in the Setting Change enabl
G
column on the right. No

*
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-13

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator M+T/C+Test/HMI
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Setting Change enabl
indicates that the setting can now be changed No
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’. M+T/C+Test/HMI

G
G
Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED M+T/C+Test/HMI
G
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further setting changes.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
6-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the user interface (HMI) by first pressing
the ‘up’ key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function (menu tree:
Set/Func/Glob/MAIN, 'Protection Enabled'). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-15

(continued)
6.6.4 Changing Settings
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. M+T/C+Test/HMI

In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the Set/Conf/HMI

G
Auto Return Time

keys.
G
50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Set/Conf/HMI

Auto Return Time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the Set/Conf/HMI

G
Auto Return Time

cursor to the left or right.
G
50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor Set/Conf/HMI

G
Auto Return Time

by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the
G
50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Set/Conf/HMI

G
Auto Return Time

labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Set/Conf/HMI

Auto Return Time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
6.6.5 Setting a List Setting
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an
‘OR’ operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available
in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals
and binary input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
setting instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used
here as an illustration.

Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Main-Trip 'OR' gate
parameter 'Main-Trip 'OR' gate' at
‘Set/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.
1 Press the ‘down’ key. Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

G
The first function and

Main-Trip 'OR' gate
the first selected signal will appear in the third
G
#01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip signal Z1/t1
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Disabled’ appears for the
first item, then this means that no function
assignment has been made yet.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

G
by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys. Main-Trip 'OR' gate

G
OR #02 DIST
Trip signal Z2/t2L
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Main-Trip 'OR' gate
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

Main-Trip 'OR' gate
list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip signal Z2/t2L
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

G
Main-Trip 'OR' gate

pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input
G
#02 DIST
mode. Trip signal Z3/t3S
5 Select the operator or the class using the Set/Func/Glob/MAIN

G
Main-Trip 'OR' gate

‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case,
G
OR #02 DIST
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip signal Z3/t3S
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-17

(continued)

Action
6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
G
Main-Trip 'OR' gate
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip signal Z3/t3S
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
G
Main-Trip 'OR' gate

in the list.
G
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Set/Func/Glob/MAIN
Main-Trip 'OR' gate
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip signal Z2/t2L
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
Deleting a list setting

If ‘M A I N : D i s a b l e d ’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6.6.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the protective
functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

In the menu tree ‘M+T/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Rec/OSCIL’: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Flt+Ev/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.
6-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data M+T/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating M+T/Rec/OP_RC

G
01.01.97 11:33 RECLS

data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
G
Enabled USER
No
2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the M+T/Rec/OP_RC

G
01.01.97 10:01 AIDED

entries one after the other in chronological
G
Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous M+T/Rec/OP_RC

G
01.01.97 11:33 RECLS

entry.
G
Enabled USER
No
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the M+T/Rec/OP_RC

G
Operat. Data Record.

operating data memory to return to the entry
G
point.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-19

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring M+T/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. Signal Record.
signal memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring Mon. Signal Record.
G
01.01.97 13:33 CHECK

signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
G
Checksum Sett Error
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display Mon. Signal Record.

G
01.01.97 10:01 CHECK

the entries one after the other in chronological G Exception Oper.Syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous Mon. Signal Record.
G
01.01.97 13:33 CHECK

entry.
G
Checksum Sett Error
4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a Mon. Signal Record.

01.01.97 13:33 CHECK
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum Sett Error
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred G
First: 13:33:59.744
Active: The fault is still being detected Active: Yes
G
(Yes) or is no longer detected (No) Reset: No

by the self-monitoring function. Number: 5
Cancel: The fault was no longer detected
by the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.
5 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the M+T/Rec/MT_RC

G
Mon. Signal Record.

monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
G
point.
6-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Flt+Ev/Rec/OSCIL

Fault Recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault Fault Recording 1

G
OSCIL
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In
G
Event
this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first Fault Recording 1

G
200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary G
Running Time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or G
Fault Recording 1
ended. 0 ms OSCIL
Record. in Progress
G
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start

(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will
have no effect. Fault Recording 1
G
241 ms OSCIL
G
Record. in Progress
End
3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous Fault Recording 1

G
0 ms OSCIL
measured value or the previous signal.
G
Record. in Progress
Start
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the Flt+Ev/Rec/OSCIL

G
Fault Recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point.
G
01.01.99 10:00:33
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-21

(continued)
6.6.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle.
However, in the event memories need to be cleared completely, as would be the case
after functional testing, then this can be done after selecting the appropriate parameter,
and in this case group resetting for several memories may also be configured. An
overview on all available resetting methods can be found in Chapter 3, section 'Resetting
Actions'.
The method for resetting a single memory from the front panel user interface is
described in the following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global
change-enabling function has already been activated.

Action
0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the M+T/C+Test/OSCIL

Reset Recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator M+T/C+Test/OSCIL

Reset Recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the M+T/C+Test/OSCIL

G
Reset Recording
setting to ‘Execute’.
G
10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator M+T/C+Test/OSCIL

G
Reset Recording
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in 0
line 3 is reset to ‘0’.
6-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)

Action
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C M+T/C+Test/OSCIL

Reset Recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
setting can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-23

(continued)
6.6.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the user interface (HMI) (such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see the section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the
following description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘M&T/C&Test/MAIN’, select M+T/C+Test/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’. Don't execute
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) M+T/C+Test/MAIN
G
Man.M-trip cmd USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: M+T/C+Test/MAIN

G
Man.M-trip cmd USER

‘left’
G
Don't execute
*
‘right’ G
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘up’ G
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘down’ G
M+T/C+Test/MAIN
The display will change as shown in the Man.M-trip cmd USER
G
column on the right. Don't execute

*
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator M+T/C+Test/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man.M-trip cmd USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’. M+T/C+Test/MAIN

G
Man.M-trip cmd USER

G
Execute
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED M+T/C+Test/MAIN

G
Man.M-trip cmd USER

indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The Don't execute
unit will execute the command.
6-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)

Action
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C M+T/C+Test/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.6.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
1 G 2
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-25

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Set/Conf/HMI’, select the Set/Conf/HMI

Password
‘Password’ setting. ********
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys Set/Conf/HMI

G
Password
to enter the valid password. The display will
G
********
change as shown in the column on the right. *
Set/Conf/HMI
G
G Password
********
*
Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
G
********
*
Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
G
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Set/Conf/HMI

Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
4 Enter the new password, which in this Set/Conf/HMI

G
Password
example is done by pressing the UP key
G
*
followed by the DOWN key.
Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
G
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Set/Conf/HMI

Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.
6-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the password. Set/Conf/HMI

G
Password
G
**
*
Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
G
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again. If the Set/Conf/HMI
G
Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered Set/Conf/HMI

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password has to be re-
entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at C Set/Conf/HMI

Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Operation from the user interface (HMI) without password protection is also possible.
To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the user interface (HMI) without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled ‘Change-
Enabling Function’).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 6-27

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

G
beginning of device startup, press the four
G
TEST
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at ˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜
the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during

G
Password
startup, the password is displayed.
G
1234
˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜˜
6-28 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P438 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located
in the folder entitled ‘Settings’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The default settings given in the Address List are activated after a cold restart.
The P438 is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note:
In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) the location of the
corresponding function description is indicated in the right hand side column.
"Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a
figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P438. They have no effect on the device's functions.
These settings should be changed only if the design version of the P438 is modified.
Device DVICE: Device Type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software Version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW Date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW Version Communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 Version 002 059
Software version for the device's communication software, based on the

IEC 61850 protocol. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text Vers Data Model 002 121
The description text of the settings can be changed by the "text replacement
tools" of the operating program and can be loaded into the device. These
user-specific data models obtain a setting which is defined by the setting of
the data model created by the user and displayed at this location. Standard
data models are marked with a ‘0’ (delivery condition).
DVICE: Language Version 002 123
Setting for the change level of the data model text. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: Serial Number 002 124
The Serial Number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot
be altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200
Order number for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.
DVICE: Order Ext. No. 1 000 003
7-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module Var. Slot 1 086 050
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.

The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given
time.
DVICE: Module Vers. Slot 1 086 193
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
Index letter specifying the version of the module inserted in the respective
slot.
DVICE: Variant of Module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: MAC Address Module A 104 061
Network hardware MAC address for the Ethernet module. This read-only
address is assigned during production.
DVICE: Variant of Module L 086 048
Item number of module L in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module L 086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module L.

DVICE: Variant of Module B 086 049
Item number of digital bus module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of Module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant Module B (a) 086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version Module B (a) 086 189
Index letter specifying the version of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Customer ID Data 1 000 040
Set your numerically-coded user data here for your records.

DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes.

See description of the relevant operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

instructions.
7-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

instructions.
DVICE: Password Level 1 000 048
DVICE: Password Level 2 000 049

instructions.
DVICE: SW Version DHMI 002 131
DVICE: SW Version DHMI DM 002 132
Internal software version numbers.
User Interface HMI: Local HMI Exists 221 099
The value Yes shows that the device is fitted with the integrated front panel
user interface (HMI).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Configuration parameters
User Interface HMI: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).

HMI: Decimal Separator 003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the user interface (HMI).

HMI: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the user interface
(HMI) can be defined here. Further information on changing the password
is given in Chapter 6.
HMI: Fct. Reset Key 005 251 Fig. 3-69
Selecting such counters or protocols that are to be reset when the "CLEAR"
key (C) is pressed.
HMI: Fct. Read Key 080 110
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
HMI: Fct. Menu Jmp List 1 030 238
HMI: Fct. Menu Jmp List 2 030 239
Functions are triggered in sequence, cyclically one after the other, by

repeatedly selecting menu jump list 1 (or 2).
HMI: Operation Panel Fct 053 007 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
HMI: Overload Panel Fct 053 005 Fig. 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

HMI: Fault Panel Fct 053 003 Fig. 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

HMI: Panel Hold-Time 031 075 Fig. 3-2
Setting for the time period for which a panel is displayed before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
HMI: Auto Return Time 003 014 Fig. 3-2
If the user does not press a key on the user interface (HMI) during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
HMI: Backlight Time 003 023
If the user does not press a key on the user interface (HMI) during this set
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
7-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
PC Link PC: Bay Address 003 068 Fig. 3-5

PC: Relay Address 003 069 Fig. 3-5
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communications via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud Rate 003 081 Fig. 3-5
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity Bit 003 181 Fig. 3-5
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P438.
PC: Spontan. Sig. Enable 003 187 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. Spontan.Sig. 003 189 Fig. 3-5
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 003 084 Fig. 3-5
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-5
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta V 003 055 Fig. 3-5
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig. 3-5
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta P 003 059 Fig. 3-5
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta f 003 057 Fig. 3-5
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs

by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta T 003 156 Fig. 3-5
The measured temperature value is transmitted via the PC interface if it

differs by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta Z 003 157 Fig. 3-5
The measured operating impedance value is transmitted via the PC

interface if it differs by more than the set delta from the last measured value
transmitted.
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
PC: Delta phi 003 158 Fig. 3-5
The measured load angle value is transmitted via the PC interface if it

differs by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 003 155 Fig. 3-5
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-5
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-Out 003 188 Fig. 3-5
Setting for the time that will elapse after the last telegram traffic via the PC
interface before the second communication channel of communication
module A is activated.
Rear Port Communications COMM1: Remote Comms Port1 056 026
Interface
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
COMM1: General Enable USER 003 170 Fig. 3-7,
3-12
Enabling/disabling communication interface 1.
COMM1: IEC870-5 Enabled 003 215 Fig. 3-6
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 Enable 003 216 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS Enable 003 217 Fig. 3-6
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS Enable 003 220 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 Enable 003 231 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings that are relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
COMM1: COURIER Enable 103 040 Fig. 3-6
Enabling settings that are relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat Protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-6
Selecting the communication protocol that shall be used for the

communication interface.
COMM1: MODBUS Variant 003 214 Fig. 3-10
The user may select either the Private or the Compatible variant of the
MODBUS protocol.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
The Compatible variant corresponds to the MODBUS implementation of
MiCOM Px20 and Px40 devices. The Private variant corresponds to the
first implementation of the MODBUS protocol.
7-8 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Line Idle State 003 165 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud Rate 003 071 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Baud rate of the communication interface.
COMM1: Parity Bit 003 171 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P438.
COMM1: Dead Time Monitoring 003 176 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The P438 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is necessary for modem transmission only.
COMM1: Mon. Time Polling 003 202 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet Comm. Address 003 072 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10,3-11,
3-12
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for 'C O M M 1 : O c t e t C o m m . A d d r e s s '
was 'ILSA: Bay Address
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Octet 2 Com.Add DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-11
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C O M M 1 : O c t e t C o m m . A d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of
the DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test Monitor On 003 166 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9,
3-10, 3-11,
3-12
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Manufacturer 003 161 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9
Setting for the name of the manufacturer. This setting can be changed to
any free text to ensure compatibility. The default value is SE. However, it
can be necessary in special cases to set the value to something different.
Note:
This parameter can be changed to any text of max. 8 characters length.
Any longer text entered is truncated to 8 characters internally.
However, changes can be carried out only via the operating program, not
using the integrated local control panel.
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet Address ASDU 003 073 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for 'C O M M 1 : O c t e t A d d r e s s A S D U '
was 'ILSA: R e l a y A d d r e s s '.
COMM1: Spontan. Sig. Enable 003 177 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. Spontan.Sig. 003 179 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 003 074 Fig. 3-7,
3-8,3-9
Enabling cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
COMM1: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 003 175 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta V 003 050 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-10 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta P 003 054 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta f 003 052 Fig. 3-7,3-
8,3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM1: Delta T 003 251 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.

COMM1: Delta Z 003 252 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last
measured value transmitted.

COMM1: Delta phi 003 253 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.

COMM1: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 003 150 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig. 3-7,

3-8, 3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
COMM1: Contin. General Scan 003 077 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
A continuous or background general scan means that the P438 transmits all
settings, signals, and alarms through the communications interface during
slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will be
data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set
defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
COMM1: Comm. Address Length 003 201 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 Comm. Addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.

enabled.
COMM1: Cause Transm. Length 003 192 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.

enabled.
COMM1: Address Length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 Addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr. Length Inf.Obj 003 196 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.

enabled.
7-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Oct.3 Addr. Inf.Obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
enabled.
COMM1: Inf.No.<->Funct.Type 003 195 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
enabled.
COMM1: Time Tag Length 003 198 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the time tag length.

enabled.
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 Conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 Conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ Signal 003 199 Fig. 3-8
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

enabled.
COMM1: Balanced Operation 003 226 Fig. 3-8
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
enabled.
COMM1: Direction Bit 003 227 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to ' 1 '
at the control center and to ' 0 ' at the substation.
enabled.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Time-out Interval 003 228 Fig. 3-8
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
enabled.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Selec. Cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-10
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
This means that the first command is given the register no. 00301, the
second the register no. 00302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Modbus protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Selec. Sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-10

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register
no. 10302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Sel. M.Val. 003 212 Fig. 3-10

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.Asg. Sel. Param. 003 213 Fig. 3-10

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second
the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-10
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom Event Confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-10
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
7-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-11
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-11
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-11
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-11
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
COMM1: Appl Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-11
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Bin. Inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Bin.Outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Analog Inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
COMM1: Ind./Cl. Analog Outp 003 236 Fig. 3-11
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
COMM1: Ph-Ph Meas V.(DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-11
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
dead band'.
COMM1: PhasePhase t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-11
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command Selection 103 042 Fig. 3-12
Selecting the commands that can be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal Selection 103 043 Fig. 3-12
Selecting the signals that can be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
COMM1: Meas. Val. Selection 103 044 Fig. 3-12
Selecting the measured values that can be transmitted via the COURIER
protocol.
COMM1: Parameter Selection 103 045 Fig. 3-12
Selecting the settings that can be changed via the COURIER protocol.
COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-12
A selected measured value is re-transmitted after this cycle time period has
elapsed.
7-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication Interface 2 COMM2: Remote Comms Port2 056 057

COMM2: General Enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Line Idle State 103 165 Fig. 3-14
Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud Rate 103 071 Fig. 3-14
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity Bit 103 171 Fig. 3-14
Setting the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P438.
COMM2: Dead Time Monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-14
The P438 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. Time Polling 103 202 Fig. 3-14
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive Ackn. Fault 103 203
This parameter is used to set whether or not faults can be positively

acknowledged after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault
overview at the COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet Comm. Address 103 072 Fig. 3-14
COMM2: Manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-14
Setting for the name of the manufacturer. This setting can be changed to
any free text to ensure compatibility. The default value is SE. However, it
can be necessary in special cases to set the value to something different.
Note:
This parameter can be changed to any text of max. 8 characters length.
Any longer text entered is truncated to 8 characters internally.
However, changes can be carried out only via the operating program, not
using the integrated local control panel.
COMM2: Octet Address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-14
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Spontan. Sig. Enable 103 177 Fig. 3-14
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. Spontan.Sig. 103 179 Fig. 3-14
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 2.
COMM2: Transm Enab Cycl Dat 103 074 Fig. 3-14
Enabling cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Cycl. Data ILS Tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-14

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V 103 050 Fig. 3-14
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig. 3-14
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta P 103 054 Fig. 3-14
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta f 103 052 Fig. 3-14
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta T 103 251 Fig. 3-14
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if

it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta Z 103 252 Fig. 3-14
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last
measured value transmitted.
COMM2: Delta phi 103 253 Fig. 3-14
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it

differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta Meas.v.ILS Tel 103 150 Fig. 3-14

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-14
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: Function Group COMM3 056 058

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
COMM3: General Enable USER 120 030

COMM3: Baud Rate 120 038
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source Address 120 031
Address for send signals.

COMM3: Receiving Address 120 032
Address for receive signals.

COMM3: Fct. Send 1 Assign 121 001
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3: Fct. Rec. 1 Assign 120 001
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3: Oper. Mode Receive 1 120 002
Selection of 'Blocking' or 'Direct Intertrip' for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
Selection of 'Permissive' or 'Direct Intertrip' for the operating mode of

receive signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3: Default Value Rec. 1 120 060
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3: Time-Out Comm.Fault 120 033 Fig. 3-17
This timer triggers the C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s F a u l t

C H E C K : C o m m u n i c . F a u l t C O M M 3 alarm signals and sets the
received signals to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when
the set time has elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was
received.
COMM3: Time-Out Link Fail. 120 035 Fig. 3-17
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. These

signals are issued when the set time-delay has elapsed:
C O M M 3 : C o m m . L i n k F a i l u r e and
CHECK: Comm.Link Fail.COMM3
COMM3: Limit Telegr. Errors 120 036
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised: C O M M 3 : L i m . E x c e e d . , T e l . E r r . and
C H E C K : L i m . E x c e e d . , T e l . E r r . When this threshold is exceeded,
the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: IEC 61850 Communic. 056 059
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General Enable USER 104 000
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable Configuration 104 058
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain

consistency of all parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE,
they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is
sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed parameter
setting of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data
model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically
with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
IEC: Ethernet Media 104 056
Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from

either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
IEC: IED Name 104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
7-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: TCP Keep-Alive Timer 104 062
This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a

communication link to a logged-on client.
IEC: IP Address 104 001
IEC: IP Address 1 104 002
IP address for the device (IED has server function).

Note:
The complete IP address is shown in the S&R-103 operating program at
I E C : I P A d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only shows the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses
IEC: Subnet Mask 104 005
IEC: Subnet Mask 1 104 006
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
I E C : S u b n e t M a s k . The device’s front panel display only shows the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses
IEC: Gateway Address 104 011
IEC: Gateway Address 1 104 012
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a

communication link to a client outside of the local network.
Note:
I E C : G a t e w a y A d d r e s s . The device’s front panel display only shows
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses
IEC: SNTP Operating Mode 104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast, synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server, each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP Poll Cycle Time 104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when the operating
mode is set to Request from Server.
IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP 104 202
IEC: SNTP Server 1 IP 1 104 203
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
I E C : S N T P S e r v e r 1 I P . The device’s front panel display only shows
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: SNTP Server 2 IP 104 210
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
I E C : S N T P S e r v e r 2 I P . The device’s front panel display only shows
IEC: Diff. Local Time 104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. Dayl.Sav. Time 104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: Switch.Dayl.Sav.Time 104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time

is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time Start 104 220
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time St. d 104 221
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time St. m 104 222
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . S a v . T i m e S t a r t are the values "first", "second", "third",
"fourth", and "last"; for I E C : D a y l . S a v . T i m e S t . d the seven
weekdays are available so that for example a setting like "on the last
Sunday in March" may be used.
IEC: Dayl.Sav.t.St.0:00 + 104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at I E C : D a y l . S a v . t . S t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . D a y l . S a v . T i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End 104 225
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End d 104 226
IEC: Dayl.Sav.Time End m 104 227
IEC: Dayl.Sav.t.End 0:00+ 104 228
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for
the clock changeover to daylight saving time.
IEC: Update Measurements 104 229
Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report

Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead Band IP 104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d I P
7-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead Band IN 104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d I N
IEC: Dead Band VPP 104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d V P P
IEC: Dead Band VPG 104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
step size measured value • setting I E C : Dead Band VPG
IEC: Dead Band f 104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d f
IEC: Dead Band P 104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d P
IEC: Dead Band Phi 104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ϕ Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ϕ measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d P h i
IEC: Dead Band Z 104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d Z
IEC: Dead Band Min/Max 104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d M i n / M a x
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead Band ASC 104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d A S C
IEC: Dead Band Temp. 104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d T e m p .
IEC: Dead Band 20ma 104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
step size measured value • setting I E C : D e a d B a n d 2 0 m A
IEC: Update Cycle Energy 104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB
transmission with setting to Blocked!
IEC Generic Substation GOOSE: Gen.ObjOr.SubstEvent 056 068 Page: 3-30

Status Events
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
The parameters of this function group are active only if function group IEC
has been configured and is active, and if the parameters of this function
group have been activated through the I E C : E n a b l e C o n f i g u r a t i o n
parameter or by switching the device off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General Enable USER 106 001 Page: 3-30
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE: Multic. MAC Address 106 003 Fig. 3-18
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving

clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID 106 004 Fig. 3-18
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: Goose ID 106 002 Fig. 3-18
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
7-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier 106 006 Fig. 3-18
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority 106 007 Fig. 3-18
VLAN priority of the GOOSE which is transmitted from this device (IED).
GOOSE: DataSet Reference 106 008 Fig. 3-18
DataSet reference of the GOOSE which is transmitted from this device

(IED).
GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision 106 009 Fig. 3-18
Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is

sent from this device (IED).
GOOSE: Output 1 Fct.Assig. 106 011 Fig. 3-18
GOOSE: Output 3 Fct.Assig. 106 015
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 001
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
7-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)

for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a
chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device
(IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data
object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then
only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Input 1 Default 107 005
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-28 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Fct.Assig. 107 006
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical

state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
Generic Object Oriented GSSE: Gen.Subst.Stat.Event 056 060
Substation Event
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. The
parameters of this function group are active only if function group IEC has
been configured and is active, and if the parameters of this function group
have been activated through the I E C : E n a b l e C o n f i g u r a t i o n
parameter or by switching the device off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General Enable USER 104 049
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. Cycle 104 052
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. Cycle 104 053
Maximum value, in seconds, for the GSSE repetition cycle time period.
See Min. Cycle for the formula to calculate the GSSE repetition cycle time
period. Should the calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to
or greater than the set maximum value then the GSSE message will be sent
repeatedly at the set maximum value time.
GSSE: Increment 104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. Cycle.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Operating Mode 104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independently of their MAC

address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the Promiscuous operating mode and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
GSSE: Output 1 Bit Pair 104 101
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
GSSE: Output 1 Fct.Assig. 104 102
7-30 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
GSSE: Input 1 Bit Pair 105 001
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input.
A GSSE message is always received, consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit
pairs of which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
GSSE: Input 1 Default 105 003
7-32 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
GSSE: Input 1 Fct.Assig. 105 004
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state

signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
IRIG_B IRIGB: IRIG-B Time Synch 056 072
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration.

IRIGB: General Enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-19
Enabling/disabling the IRIG-B interface.
Function Keys F_KEY: Password Funct.Key 1 003 036
F_KEY: Password Funct.Key 2 030 242
These passwords enable the respective function keys. Additional

information pertaining to the selection of passwords can be found in
Chapter 6.
F_KEY: Fct. F1 Assign 080 112 Fig. 3-20
F_KEY: Fct. F2 Assign 080 113
Assigning functions to function keys. Either a single function or a menu

jump list may be selected. Both menu jump lists are assembled at
H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t x (x: 1 or 2).
F_KEY: Operating Mode F1 080 132 Fig. 3-20
F_KEY: Operating Mode F2 080 133
Selecting whether the function key operates as a key or as a switch.

F_KEY: Fcn Key Return Time 003 037
After the password has been entered the function keys will remain active for
the time period set. When this set time period has elapsed the password
must again be entered.
7-34 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary Inputs
The P438 has optocoupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The
number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams.
The P438 identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not
fitted or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically
hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary signal inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or absence (active 'low' mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘ 1 ’ signal.
INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-21
Input filter which is activated when either the mode 'Active "High", Filt.' or
'Active "Low", Filt.' has been selected. In order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this
parameter to 6 [steps]. For additional information see Chapter 3.
INP: Fct. U 301 Assign 152 217 Fig. 3-21,
3-31
INP: Fct. U 302 Assign 152 220
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.

INP: Oper. Mode U 301 152 218 Fig. 3-21
INP: Oper. Mode U 302 152 221
7-36 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Input RTDmA: RTD,Curr. Loop mA IN 056 030
Cancelling function group RTDmA or including it in the configuration.

RTDmA: General Enable USER 011 100 Fig. 3-22
Enabling/disabling analog measured data input.

RTDmA: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig. 3-25
Setting the minimum current that must flow in order for the P438 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
RTDmA: IDC< Open Circuit 037 191 Fig. 3-25
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P438 will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
RTDmA: IDC 1 037 150 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 2 037 152 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 3 037 154 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 4 037 156 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 5 037 158 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 6 037 160 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 7 037 162 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 8 037 164 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 9 037 166 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 10 037 168 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 11 037 170 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 12 037 172 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 13 037 174 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 14 037 176 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 15 037 178 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 16 037 180 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 17 037 182 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 18 037 184 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 19 037 186 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: IDC 20 037 188 Fig. 3-25
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
7-38 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
RTDmA: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig. 3-25
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
RTDmA: Scaled Val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig. 3-26
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

RTDmA: Scaled Val. IDC,lin2 037 193 Fig. 3-26
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary Outputs
The P438 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number of available
output relays and their connection schemes are shown in the terminal connection
diagrams.
The P438 identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not
fitted or has fewer binary output relays than the maximum number possible at this slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing binary output relays are automatically
hidden in the menu tree.
The contact data of the relay used permit the use as command relay and as signal relay.
For multiply contacts, a signal can be assigned to several output relays simultaneously.
An operating mode can be defined for every output relay. Depending on the set
operating mode, the output relay is in closed circuit operation or in open circuit operation,
latching or not. The setting of the operating mode defines when the latch will be
cancelled for latched output relays.
OUTP: Fct. K 301 Assign 151 045 Fig. 3-28

OUTP: Fct. K 302 Assign 151 048
7-40 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to output relays.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Oper. Mode K 301 151 046 Fig. 3-28

OUTP: Oper. Mode K 302 151 049
7-42 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured Data Output mA_OP: Current Loop mA Outp 056 020
Cancelling function group RTDmA or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
mA_OP: General Enable USER 031 074 Fig. 3-30
Enabling/disabling the measured data output function.

mA_OP: Fct. BCD Assign 053 002 Fig. 3-33
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.

mA_OP: Hold Time Output BCD 010 010 Fig. 3-33
Setting the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in
BCD form.
mA_OP: Scale BCD 016 082 Fig. 3-33
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
M
Scaling factor = x,max
M x,scal
where:
M x,scal : scaled measured value
Mx,max maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
mA_OP: Function A-1 Assign 053 000 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Function A-2 Assign 053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.

mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-1 010 114 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Hold Time Output A-2 010 115
Setting the time period for output of the selected measured value.
mA_OP: Scaled Min. Val. A-1 037 104 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Scaled Min. Val. A-2 037 110
Setting for the minimum scaled measured value to be output. The value to
be set is calculated according to the following equation:
M x,min
M x,scal,min =
M x,RL
where:
Mx,min : minimum transmitted value
for the selected measured value
M x,RL : range limit of the selected measured value
7-44 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
mA_OP: Scaled Knee Val. A-1 037 105 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Scaled Knee Val. A-2 037 111
Setting for the scaled measured value for output that defines the knee point
of the characteristic. The value to be set is calculated according to the
following equation:
M x,knee
M x,scal,knee =
M x,RL
where:
M x,knee : knee point value to be transmitted for selected measured
value
M x,RL : range limit of the selected measured value
mA_OP: Scaled Max. Val. A-1 037 106 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Scaled Max. Val. A-2 037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx Mx, RL1 ... Mx, RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Measurands to be output Range

Measurands to be output Mx,min ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scal. max. value Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic Description

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scal,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
in the data model
with:
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)
mA_OP: AnOut Min. Val. A-1 037 107 Fig. 3-35

mA_OP: AnOut Min. Val. A-2 037 113
Setting for the output current that is output for measured values smaller
than or equal to the minimum measured value setting.
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-1 037 108 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: AnOut Knee Point A-2 037 114
Setting for the output current that is output if the measured value is on the
knee point of the characteristic.
mA_OP: AnOut Max. Val. A-1 037 109 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: AnOut Max. Val. A-2 037 115
Display values Designation in the data model

Output current range "AnOut min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "AnOut max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "AnOut min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "AnOut max. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max : measured values to be issued
mA_OP: Output Value 1 037 120 Fig. 3-35
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
7-46 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
LED Indicators
The P438 has a total of 23 LED indicators to simultaneously display binary signals. LED
indicator H 1 is not configurable. It indicates the working readiness of the device (supply
voltage exists). LED indicators H 2 and H 3 are also not configurable. H 2 is labeled
"OUT OF SERVICE" and signals a blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and
signals a warning alarm. LED indicator H 17 signals that the device is in the "EDIT
MODE".
The layout of the LED indicators and the factory setting for LED indicator H 4 can be
seen in section 6.1. At this point it is specifically emphasized that there is no permanent
association given between the freely configurable function keys and the LED indicators
H 18 to H 23 situated directly next to these function keys.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit
principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and in either
latching or non-latching mode, flashing or not flashing.
For LED indicators operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also
determines when latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 to H 16, H 18 to H 23) the red and green colors
can be independently assigned to functions. The third color, amber, is a combination of
red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously
present.
LED: Fct.H 1 Green Assign 085 184 Fig. 3-37
Signal of the operational readiness of the protection unit.

The M A I N : H e a l t h y function is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.H 2 Amber Assign 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED H 2 (‘OUT OF SERVICE’). The

M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y function is permanently assigned to this LED.
LED: Fct.H 3 Amber Assign 085 004
Display of the function assigned to LED H 3.

The C H E C K : A l a r m ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned to this
LED.
LED: Fct.H17 Red Assign 085 185
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 17.

The H M I : E d i t M o d e function i s permanently assigned.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Fct.H 4 Red Assign 085 007 Fig. 3-37

LED: Fct.H 4 Green Assign 085 057
LED: Fct.H 5 Red Assign 085 010
LED: Fct.H10 Green Assign 085 075
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating Mode H 1 085 182 Fig. 3-37
The E S U p d a t i n g operating mode is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating Mode H 2 085 002


7-48 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Main Function MAIN: Chann Assign.Comm1/2 003 169 Fig. 3-70
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210
Selecting the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are: COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal
pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211
Selecting the back-up source for date and time synchronization. Available
are: COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal
pulses. The back-up source will become active when the time delay set at
M A I N : T i m e S y n c . T i m e - O u t has elapsed and no synchronization
by the primary source has occurred.
MAIN: Time Sync. Time-Out 103 212
Time-out setting for time synchronization by the primary source.
Fault Recording OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch1 035 160
OSCIL: Dist Rec Analog Ch2 035 161
The user specifies the channel for which disturbance waveforms are
recorded.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling Protection
Functions
The degree of protection may be adapted to meet the requirements of a specific high-
voltage system by configuring the available function range.
The following conditions must be met before a protection function can be cancelled:
The protection function in question must be disabled.

None of the elements of the protection function being cancelled may be assigned to a
None of the signals of the protection function may be assigned to a binary output or
an LED indicator.
None of the protection function's signals should be linked by an 'm out of n' parameter
to other signals. No signal or measured value of the protection function group to be
cancelled may be selected in a setting list parameter.
The protection function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is

defined by the function group designation (for example: “LIMIT”)
Distance Protection DIST: Distance Zones (21) 056 014
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration.

High Impedance Protection DELTA: Function Group DELTA 056 078
Cancelling function group DELTA or including it in the configuration.

VT and CT Supervision C&VTS: CT VT Supervision 056 015
Cancelling function group C&VTS or including it in the configuration.

Backup Overcurrent-Time BUOC: Backup Overcurrent 056 002
Protection
Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration.
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Switch On To Fault 056 003
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration.

Auto-reclose Control RECLS: Autorecloser (79) 056 005
Cancelling function group RECLS or including it in the configuration.

7-50 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Definite-Time Overcurrent DTOC: DT Overcurr.(50/51) 056 008
Protection
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration.
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: I> Inverse Time O/C 056 009
Protection
Cancelling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration.
Defrost Protection Function DFRST: Defrost Differential 056 052
Cancelling function group DFRST or including it in the configuration.

Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Thermal Overload 49 056 023
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration.

Time-Voltage Protection V<>: Under Over Volts V<> 056 010
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration.

Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Circuit Breaker Fail 056 040
Protection
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Circuit Brk. Monitor 056 062
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration.

Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Limit Thresholds I<> 056 025
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration.

Logic LOGIC: Programmable LOGIC 056 017
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 Function Settings
7.1.3.1 Global
PC Link PC: Command Blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-5
This prevents any settings or commands from being sent to the relay from
the PC interface.
PC: Sig/Meas. Val.Block 003 086 Fig. 3-5
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Rear Port Communications COMM1: USER Command Block 003 172 Fig. 3-6
Interface 1
the COMM1 interface.
COMM1: USER Sig/Meas Block 003 076 Fig. 3-7,3-
8,3-9
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Rear Port Communications COMM2: USER Command Block 103 172 Fig. 3-14
Interface 2
the COMM2 interface.
COMM2: USER Sig/Meas Block 103 076 Fig. 3-14
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary Output OUTP: USER Outp Rel Block 021 014 Fig. 3-28
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main Function MAIN: Protection Enabled 003 030 Fig. 3-48
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some settings can be changed only
when the device is off-line (i.e. set to 'No (Disabled)').
MAIN: USER Test Mode 003 012 Fig. 3-71
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Frequency fn 010 030 Fig. 3-44,
3-46, 3-47
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: In C.T. Prim. 010 001 Fig. 3-41,
3-42, 3-188
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: Idfrst,nom C.T. Prim 010 016 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of defrost current.
7-52 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Vn V.T. Prim. 010 002 Fig. 3-43
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: In Device 010 003 Fig. 3-38,
3-39, 3-40
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the line CT for measurement of
phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device current.
MAIN: Idfrst,nom Device 010 017 Fig. 3-40
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the CT for measurement of

defrost current.
MAIN: Vn VT. Sec. 010 009 Fig. 3-38,
3-39
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the voltage transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: Line CT Orientation 010 004 Fig. 3-38,
3-39,3-40
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the
measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then this
parameter must be set to 'Standard', if the P438’s 'Forward' decision is to be
in the direction of the catenary. If the connection direction is reversed or –
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’
decision is to be in the feeder direction, it must be set to 'Reversed’.
MAIN: Idfrst CT Orientat'n 010 036 Fig. 3-40
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be

'Standard'. If the connection direction is reversed then the setting must be
'Reversed'.
MAIN: Feeding Mode 010 135 Fig. 3-38,
3-39
For use with single-voltage systems select the Classic single feed setting,
for use with dual-voltage systems select the Autotransformer feed setting.
MAIN: Minimum I Measurem't 011 030 Fig. 3-41,
3-42
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Minimum V Meas'mt 011 032 Fig. 3-43
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset 1 005 248 Fig. 3-69
Assigning such memories and counters that are reset together if

M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t 1 U S E R is set to 'Execute'.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Reset 2 005 249 Fig. 3-69
Assigning such memories and counters that are reset together if

M A I N : G r o u p R e s e t 2 U S E R is set to 'Execute'.
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 1 021 021 Fig. 3-53
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 1

(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.Assign. Block 2 021 022 Fig. 3-53
Assignment of functions that will be blocked together when blocking input 2

(M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip Cmd.Block USER 021 012 Fig. 3-64
Blocking of the trip commands from the user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Block MainTrip USER 022 090 Fig. 3-59
Blocking of the main-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Block ReTrip USER 022 091 Fig. 3-60
Blocking of the re-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Block BackTrip USER 022 092 Fig. 3-61
Blocking of the back-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).

MAIN: Main-Trip 'OR' Gate 021 007 Fig. 3-59,
3-137
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command.
MAIN: Re-Trip 'OR' Gate 021 025 Fig. 3-60,
3-137
Assignment of the signals leading to a re-trip command.
MAIN: Back-Trip 'OR' Gate 021 027 Fig. 3-61
Assignment of the signals leading to a back-trip command.

MAIN: tDWELL MainTrip Cmd 021 034 Fig. 3-59
Setting for the minimum duration of the main-trip command.

MAIN: tDWELL ReTrip Cmd 021 036 Fig. 3-60
Setting for the minimum duration of the re-trip command.

MAIN: tDWELL BackTrip Cmd 021 038 Fig. 3-61
Setting for the minimum duration of the back-trip command.

MAIN: Latch MainTrip Cmd? 021 040 Fig. 3-59
Specification as to whether the main-trip command should latch.

MAIN: Latch ReTrip Cmd? 021 042 Fig. 3-60
Specification as to whether the re-trip command should latch.

MAIN: Latch BackTrip Cmd? 021 044 Fig. 3-61
Specification as to whether the back-trip command should latch.

MAIN: CB Close Pulse Durn. 015 067 Fig. 3-55
Setting for the duration of the close command.

MAIN: ClCmd Inhib.by CB Cl 015 042 Fig. 3-55
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as

soon as the "Circuit breaker closed" signal starts.
MAIN: Rel.t. Enab. Man.Cmd 003 088 Fig. 3-55,
3-62
Setting for the release time of the enable for both the manual trip command
and the manual close command.
MAIN: Fct Assign Fault 021 031 Fig. 3-54
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the

messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty. The device is
blocked in both cases.
7-54 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

7 Settings
(continued)
Setting Group Selection GROUP: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-72
If setting group selection is to be handled from the HMI panel rather than via
the binary signal inputs, set to ‘Yes’.
GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER 003 060 Fig. 3-72
Selection of the setting group from the local control HMI panel.
GROUP: Hold Timer 003 063 Fig. 3-72
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if setting group selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the setting group selected from
the user interface (HMI) shall apply.
CHECK: Fct Assign. Alarm 021 030 Fig. 3-73
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals ‘Alarm
(LED)’ and ‘Alarm (relay) and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
‘ALARM’. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
CHECK: Mon. Sig. Retention 021 018 Page: 3-107
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
OSCIL: Fct Assig. Trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-88
This setting defines the signals that will trigger disturbance recording.
OSCIL: I> 016 013 Fig. 3-88
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current that will trigger
disturbance recording.
OSCIL: Pre-Fault Time 003 078 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
OSCIL: Post-Fault Time 003 079 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
OSCIL: Max Record Time 003 075 Fig. 3-90
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Distance Protection DIST: General Enable USER 031 073 Fig. 3-91
Enabling/disabling distance protection.

DIST: Harm. Adapt. Avail. 022 197
Making the harmonics adaptation feature "visible", i.e. available.

Note: This feature is only available if the optional processor
module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted.
DIST: Zone 3 Available 022 195
DIST: Zone 4 Available 022 196
Making the 3rd and 4th distance protection zones "visible", i.e. available.
DIST: WPC Zone Available 022 002 Fig. 3-111
Making the setting parameters for wrong phase coupling "visible", i.e.
available.
DIST: Control via USER 022 008 Fig. 3-99
Enabling switching of distance protection zone reaches via the user

interface (HMI).
DIST: Select Z1/Z1' USER 022 011 Fig. 3-99
Switching the zone reaches of the distance zones.
High Impedance Protection DELTA: General Enable USER 022 179
Enabling/disabling high impedance protection.

Note: This high impedance protection function is available only if the
optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor
is fitted.
DELTA: X Super. Available 022 188 Fig. 3-118
Making reactance release globally visible, i.e. available.

DELTA: Delta Phi Available 022 189 Fig. 3-119
Making sudden angle change monitoring globally visible, i.e. available.

DELTA: Superv. I(5fn)avail. 022 193 Fig. 3-120
Making the harmonics stabilization feature globally visible, i.e. available.

DELTA: Blocking by CB Close 022 191 Fig. 3-116
High impedance protection is blocked by a Close command, issued to the

circuit breaker, which depends on the duration of the tBlock time delay.
VT and CT Supervision C&VTS: General Enable USER 014 001 Fig. 3-122
Enabling/disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
Backup Overcurrent-Time BUOC: General Enable USER 014 011 Fig. 3-127
Protection
Enabling/disabling BUOC protection.
7-56 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: General Enable USER 011 068 Fig. 3-130
Enabling/disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.
Auto-Reclose Control RECLS: General Enable USER 015 060 Fig. 3-132
Enabling/disabling the auto-reclosing control.

RECLS: With Re-Trip 015 018 Fig. 3-135
Specify whether the re-trip command is included in the auto-recloser.

RECLS: Fct. tLOGIC Assign 015 033 Fig. 3-141
Assignment of functions to tLOGIC.
Definite-Time Overcurrent DTOC: General Enable USER 031 068 Fig. 3-150
Protection
Enabling/disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
DTOC: Direction Measurem. 031 131
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without

direction measurement.
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: General Enable USER 017 096 Fig. 3-157
Protection
Enabling/disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
IDMT: Direction Measurem. 017 109
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without

direction measurement.
Defrost Protection DFRST: General Enable USER 019 096 Fig. 3-168
Enabling/disabling defrost protection.

DFRST: Scaling Factor 004 203 Fig. 3-170
Display of the calculated matching factor for defrost protection.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: General Enable USER 022 050 Fig. 3-171
Enabling/disabling thermal overload protection.

THERM: Relative Replica 022 064 Fig. 3-176
Enabling/disabling the Relative replica mode of operation.

THERM: Absolute Replica 022 065 Fig. 3-176
Enabling/disabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.

THERM: Control via USER 022 009 Fig. 3-173
Enabling parallel line switching via the user interface (HMI).

THERM: No.Parall.Lines USER 022 062 Fig. 3-173
Setting for the number of parallel lines via the user interface (HMI).
THERM: No. of Parall. Lines 022 069
Display of the number of active parallel lines.

THERM: No. Parall.Lines EXT 022 074
Display of the number of parallel lines pre-selected via binary inputs.

THERM: O/T f. Iref Persist 004 138
Display of over-temperature as a result of persisting Iref.
Note: This display is visible only in the Relative replica mode of

operation.
Time-Delayed Voltage V<>: General Enable USER 023 030 Fig. 3-178
Protection
Enabling/disabling time-delayed voltage protection.
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: General Enable USER 022 100 Fig. 3-181
Protection
Enabling/disabling circuit breaker failure protection.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: General Enable USER 022 010 Fig. 3-184
Enabling/disabling circuit breaker condition monitoring.

CBM: Blocking USER 022 150 Fig. 3-191
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker condition monitoring when

protection injection testing is being carried out.
CBM: Operating Mode 022 007 Fig. 3-186
Setting for start criteria for circuit breaker condition monitoring. Set to ’With
Trip Cmd. Only’ in order to view all trip signals issued by the catenary
protection device. Set to ‘CB Sig. EXT or Trip’ and use a CB auxiliary
contact to obtain the additional view of trip signals issued because of
excessive catenary overloading.
CBM: Inom,CB 022 012 Fig. 3-188
Setting for the circuit breakers nominal current.

CBM: Perm. CB Op. Inom,CB 022 013 Fig. 3-188
Setting the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current.
7-58 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
CBM: Med. Curr. Itrip,CB 022 014 Fig. 3-188
Setting for the mean ruptured current for the CB.
Note: Generally valid only for pneumatically operated circuit breakers.

CBM: Perm. CB Op. Imed,CB 022 015 Fig. 3-188
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current.
Note: Generally valid only for pneumatically operated circuit breakers.

CBM: Max. Curr. Itrip,CB 022 016 Fig. 3-188
Setting for the maximum ruptured current for the CB.

CBM: Perm. CB Op. Imax,CB 022 017 Fig. 3-188
Setting for the permitted number of CB operations at maximum ruptured

current.
CBM: No. CB Operations > 022 019
Setting for the maximum permitted number of mechanical switching

operations of the CB.
CBM: Remain No. CB Op. < 022 020 Fig. 3-189
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the number of remaining CB
operations at CB nominal current.
CBM: ΣItrip> 022 022 Page: 3-265
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the accumulated ruptured current
values.
CBM: ΣItrip**2> 022 081 Page: 3-265
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the second power of the
accumulated ruptured current values.
CBM: ΣI*t> 022 096 Page: 3-265
Setting for the warning stage threshold for the sum of the current-time
integral of the ruptured currents.
CBM: Corr. Acqu.t. Trip 022 153 Fig. 3-186
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
CBM: Corr. Acqu.t.CB Sig. 022 018 Fig. 3-186
Correction of time tolerances by leading or lagging auxiliary contacts of the

circuit breaker.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: General Enable USER 014 010 Fig. 3-192
Enabling/disabling limit value monitoring.

LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig. 3-199
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig. 3-199
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig. 3-199
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig. 3-199
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig. 3-199
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig. 3-199
Setting for operate threshold IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig. 3-199
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig. 3-199
Setting for the operate delay of the undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate threshold of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig. 3-200
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
7-60 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Logic LOGIC: General Enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-202
Enabling/disabling the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig. 3-201,
3-202
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig. 3-202
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 1 030 000 Fig. 3-202
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 2 030 004 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp. 3 030 008
LOGIC: Fct.Assignm. Outp.10 030 036
These settings assign functions to the outputs.

LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 1 030 001 Fig. 3-202
LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 2 030 005 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Op. Mode t Output 3 030 009
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
LOGIC: Time t1 Output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-202
LOGIC: Time t1 Output 2 030 006
7-62 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Settings for timer stage t1 of the respective outputs.

LOGIC: Time t2 Output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-202
Settings for timer stage t2 of the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum dwell’ operating
mode.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-208
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp. 2 044 002
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-64 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-208
LOGIC: Sig.Assig.Outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig. Assig Outp10(t) 044 019
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Setting Groups
Main Function MAIN: Inr. I(2fn)/I(fn)SGx 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093 Fig. 3-49,
3-50
Setting for the operate threshold of inrush stabilization.
MAIN: I> Enab.Inr.Rest.SGx 017 058 017 113 017 254 017 255 Fig. 3-50
MAIN: I> Lift Inr.Rstr.SGx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087 Fig. 3-50
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: t Lift Inr.Rstr. SGx 019 001 019 002 019 003 019 004 Fig. 3-50
A maximum hold time for inrush stabilization can be set using this
parameter.
MAIN: Fct.Inrush Rstr. SGx 017 093 017 064 017 082 017 083 Fig. 3-51
Selecting starting conditions for blocking when an inrush condition is

detected.
Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Line Length 1 SGx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008 Fig. 3-86
This setting defines the length - in km - of line section 1, on which the

calculation of fault location is based. (A maximum of 10 line sections may
be defined; line distance and line reactance for line sections not needed are
to be set to 'Blocked'.)
FT_DA: Line Length 2 SGx 008 115 008 116 008 117 008 118

calculation of fault location is based. (If only one line section is to be used
for calculation then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than three line sections are to
be used for calculations then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than four line sections are to
be used for calculation then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than five line sections are to be
used for calculation then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than six line sections are to be
7-66 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than seven line sections are to

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than eight line sections are to

calculation of fault location is based. (If less than nine line sections are to
calculation of fault location is based. (If less than ten line sections are to be
FT_DA: Line ReactXSec 1 SGx 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015 Fig. 3-86
This setting defines line reactance X1, on which the calculation of fault
location is based. (A maximum of 10 line sections may be defined; line
distance and line reactance for line sections not needed are to be set to
'Blocked'.)
FT_DA: Line ReactXSec 2 SGx 008 151 008 152 008 153 008 154
location for the second line section is based. (If only one line section is to
be used for calculations then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)
location for the third line section is based. (If less than three line sections
are to be used for calculations then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)
location for the fourth line section is based. (If less than four line sections
are to be used for calculation then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)
location for the fifth line section is based. (If less than five line sections are
to be used for calculation then this parameter must be set to 'Blocked'.)
location for the sixth line section is based. (If less than six line sections are
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)
location for the seventh line section is based. (If less than seven line
sections are to be used for calculation then this parameter must be set to
'Blocked'.)
location for the eighth line section is based. (If less than eight line sections
location for the ninth line section is based. (If less than nine line sections
FT_DA: Line ReactXSec10 SGx 008 187 008 188 008 189 008 190
location for the tenth line section is based. (If less than ten line sections are
FT_DA: Outp. Fault Loc. SGx 010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035 Fig. 3-82
Setting for the conditions under which fault location output occurs.
Distance Protection DIST: Enable SGx 072 200 073 200 074 200 075 200 Fig. 3-91
This setting defines the setting group in which distance protection is

enabled.
DIST: Characteristic SGx 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097 Fig. 3-98,3-
102
Selection of the characteristic for distance measurement.
DIST: I> SGx 072 195 073 195 074 195 075 195 Fig. 3-96
Setting for the minimum current sensitivity of the distance zones.

DIST: Z1 Forward Reach SGx 076 093 077 093 078 093 079 093 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Z2 Forward Reach SGx 076 094 077 094 078 094 079 094 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Z3 Forward Reach SGx 076 095 077 095 078 095 079 095
DIST: Z4 Forward Reach SGx 080 015 081 015 082 015 083 015
DIST: Z1 Reverse Reach SGx 076 100 077 100 078 100 079 100 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Z2 Reverse Reach SGx 076 101 077 101 078 101 079 101 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Z3 Reverse Reach SGx 076 102 077 102 078 102 079 102
DIST: Z4 Reverse Reach SGx 080 017 081 017 082 017 083 017
DIST: Z1' Dynamic Fwd SGx 076 096 077 096 078 096 079 096 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Z2' Dynamic Fwd SGx 076 097 077 097 078 097 079 097 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Z3' Dynamic Fwd SGx 076 098 077 098 078 098 079 098
DIST: Z4' Dynamic Fwd SGx 080 016 081 016 082 016 083 016
DIST: Z1' Dynamic Rev SGx 076 103 077 103 078 103 079 103 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Z2' Dynamic Rev SGx 076 104 077 104 078 104 079 104 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
7-68 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Z3' Dynamic Rev SGx 076 105 077 105 078 105 079 105
DIST: Z4' Dynamic Rev SGx 080 018 081 018 082 018 083 018
Setting for the impedance boundaries of zones 1 to 4 (or 1´ to 4´) of the

circular and polygonal characteristics, in forward and reverse directions, in
secondary values.
DIST: R1,Fwd.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 115 077 115 078 115 079 115 Fig. 3-104
DIST: R2,Fwd.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 116 077 116 078 116 079 116 Fig. 3-105
DIST: R3,Fwd.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 117 077 117 078 117 079 117
DIST: R4,Fwd.Res.(Poly)SGx 080 019 081 019 082 019 083 019
DIST: R1,Rev.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 121 077 121 078 121 079 121 Fig. 3-104
DIST: R2,Rev.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 122 077 122 078 122 079 122 Fig. 3-105
DIST: R3,Rev.Res.(Poly)SGx 076 123 077 123 078 123 079 123
DIST: R4,Rev.Res.(Poly)SGx 080 021 081 021 082 021 083 021
DIST: R1',Dyn.Fwd(Poly)SGx 076 118 077 118 078 118 079 118 Fig. 3-104
DIST: R2',Dyn.Fwd(Poly)SGx 076 119 077 119 078 119 079 119 Fig. 3-105
DIST: R3',Dyn.Fwd(Poly)SGx 076 120 077 120 078 120 079 120
DIST: R4',Dyn.Fwd(Poly)SGx 080 020 081 020 082 020 083 020
DIST: R1',Dyn.Rev(Poly)SGx 076 124 077 124 078 124 079 124 Fig. 3-104
DIST: R2',Dyn.Rev(Poly)SGx 076 125 077 125 078 125 079 125 Fig. 3-105
DIST: R3',Dyn.Rev(Poly)SGx 076 126 077 126 078 126 079 126
DIST: R4',Dyn.Rev(Poly)SGx 080 022 081 022 082 022 083 022
Setting for the resistance boundaries (arc reserve) of zones 1 to 4 (or 1´

to 4´) of the polygonal characteristic, in forward and reverse directions, in
secondary values.
DIST: Rg1, Forward SGx 076 138 077 138 078 138 079 138 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Rg2, Forward SGx 076 139 077 139 078 139 079 139 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Rg3, Forward SGx 076 140 077 140 078 140 079 140
DIST: Rg4, Forward SGx 080 023 081 023 082 023 083 023
DIST: Rg1, Reverse SGx 076 144 077 144 078 144 079 144 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Rg2, Reverse SGx 076 145 077 145 078 145 079 145 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Rg3, Reverse SGx 076 146 077 146 078 146 079 146
DIST: Rg4, Reverse SGx 080 025 081 025 082 025 083 025
DIST: Rg1', Forward SGx 076 141 077 141 078 141 079 141 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Rg2', Forward SGx 076 142 077 142 078 142 079 142 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Rg3', Forward SGx 076 143 077 143 078 143 079 143
DIST: Rg4', Forward SGx 080 024 081 024 082 024 083 024
DIST: Rg1', Reverse SGx 076 147 077 147 078 147 079 147 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Rg2', Reverse SGx 076 148 077 148 078 148 079 148 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: Rg3', Reverse SGx 076 149 077 149 078 149 079 149
DIST: Rg4', Reverse SGx 080 026 081 026 082 026 083 026
Setting for the limit resistance for simultaneous load blinding of zones 1 to 4
(or 1´ to 4´) of the circular and polygonal characteristics, in forward and
reverse directions, in secondary values.
Note:
The maximum setting value Rg is set to the same value as that of
impedance reach Z of the respective zone.
If Rg is higher, the signal “Setting Error Distance Protection” is issued and
the protection function is blocked.
DIST: Alpha_L 1 (Poly) SGx 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063 Fig. 3-104
DIST: Alpha_L 2 (Poly) SGx 012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064 Fig. 3-105
DIST: Alpha_L 3 (Poly) SGx 012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065
DIST: Alpha_L 4 (Poly) SGx 080 010 081 010 082 010 083 010
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping characteristic of impedance

zones 1 to 4 in R-direction (resistance line), usually identical to the line
impedance angle.
DIST: beta 1 Angle SGx 072 208 073 208 074 208 075 208 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: beta 2 Angle SGx 072 209 073 209 074 209 075 209 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: beta 3 Angle SGx 072 210 073 210 074 210 075 210
DIST: beta 4 Angle SGx 080 013 081 013 082 013 083 013
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in quadrant 2 or 4 of

impedance zones 1 to 4 of the circular and polygonal characteristics.
DIST: Alpha 1 SGx 076 090 077 090 078 090 079 090 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Alpha 2 SGx 076 091 077 091 078 091 079 091 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Alpha 3 SGx 076 092 077 092 078 092 079 092
DIST: Alpha 4 SGx 080 014 081 014 082 014 083 014
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in the first or third quadrant
of impedance zones 1 to 3 of the circular characteristic.
DIST: gamma 1 Angle SGx 076 247 077 247 078 247 079 247 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: gamma 2 Angle SGx 076 248 077 248 078 248 079 248 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: gamma 3 Angle SGx 076 249 077 249 078 249 079 249
DIST: gamma 4 Angle SGx 080 027 081 027 082 027 083 027
Angle setting in quadrant 4 or 2 until the limit resistance is active with a

simultaneous load blinding, for the impedance zones 1 to 3 of the circular
and polygonal characteristics.
DIST: tZ1 SGx 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078 Fig. 3-106
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1.

DIST: tZ2S Short Delay SGx 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079 Fig. 3-107
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 2 to 4 if short circuit

detection is active (dependent on dx/dt detection).
7-70 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: tZ2L Long Delay SGx 012 190 012 191 012 192 012 193 Fig. 3-107
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 2 to 4 if starting detection is

active (dependent on dx/dt detection).
DIST: kze Extended HSR SGx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
Setting for the zone extension factor HSR for zone1.
DIST: kze Extended TDR SGx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
Setting for the zone extension factor TDR for zone1.

DIST: kze SOTF/EXT SGx 012 067 012 068 012 069 012 070
Setting for the zone extension factor of switch on to fault protection or

external zone extension.
DIST: t1,ze SOTF/EXT SGx 012 198 012 199 012 200 012 201 Fig. 3-106
Setting for the timer stage of switch on to fault protection or external zone
extension.
DIST: Z2 Op.Mode dx/dt SGx 072 107 073 107 074 107 075 107 Fig. 3-108
DIST: Z3 Op.Mode dx/dt SGx 072 197 073 197 074 197 075 197
DIST: Z4 Op.Mode dx/dt SGx 080 029 081 029 082 029 083 029
Setting for the operating mode of train start-up detection in zones 2, 3 or 4.

DIST: Z2Delta I(di/dt) SGx 072 198 073 198 074 198 075 198 Fig. 3-106,
3-108
DIST: Z3Delta I(di/dt) SGx 072 203 073 203 074 203 075 203
DIST: Z4Delta I(di/dt) SGx 080 030 081 030 082 030 083 030
Setting for the current increase required to detect a short circuit operation in
the zone 2, 3 or 4.
It must be set to 'Blocked' in order to disable sudden current change
monitoring.
DIST: Z2Delta V(dv/dt) SGx 072 139 073 139 074 139 075 139 Fig. 3-106,
3-108
DIST: Z3Delta V(dv/dt) SGx 072 108 073 108 074 108 075 108
DIST: Z4Delta V(dv/dt) SGx 080 028 081 028 082 028 083 028
Setting for the voltage drop required to detect a short circuit operation in the
zone 2, 3 or 4.
It must be set to 'Blocked' in order to disable sudden voltage change
monitoring.
DIST: Z2D.phi(dphi/dt) SGx 072 206 073 206 074 206 075 206 Fig. 3-106,
3-108
DIST: Z3D.phi(dphi/dt) SGx 072 227 073 227 074 227 075 227
DIST: Z4D.phi(dphi/dt) SGx 080 031 081 031 082 031 083 031
Setting for the angle change required to detect a short circuit operation in
the zone 2, 3 or 4.
It must be set to 'Blocked' in order to disable sudden angle change
monitoring.
DIST: WPC Enable SGx 076 130 077 130 078 130 079 130 Fig. 3-111
Enabling/disabling the zone of wrong phase coupling protection.

DIST: WPC V< SGx 076 132 077 132 078 132 079 132 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the undervoltage conditions to detect a wrong phase coupling.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)
DIST: WPC Zmin SGx 076 135 077 135 078 135 079 135 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the internal limit impedance of the wrong phase coupling
protection zone.
DIST: WPC Zmax SGx 076 136 077 136 078 136 079 136 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the external limit impedance of the wrong phase coupling
protection zone.
DIST: WPC alpha SGx 076 133 077 133 078 133 079 133 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the left limit angle of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
DIST: WPC beta Angle SGx 076 134 077 134 078 134 079 134 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the right limit angle of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
DIST: WPC t SGx 076 137 077 137 078 137 079 137 Fig. 3-112
Setting for the timer stage of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
7-72 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
High Impedance Protection DELTA: Enable SGx 062 030 063 030 064 030 065 030 Fig. 3-115
This setting defines the setting group in which high impedance protection is
enabled.
DELTA: Imin SGx 062 031 063 031 064 031 065 031 Fig. 3-117
Setting for the minimum current trigger for high impedance protection.
DELTA: Delta I SGx 062 037 063 037 064 037 065 037 Fig. 3-121
Setting for the operate threshold to detect a sudden current change.

DELTA: Delta Phi SGx 062 034 063 034 064 034 065 034 Fig. 3-119
During a defined sampling interval should the angle (with sudden angle
change monitoring enabled) change by more than the value set for this
parameter, then this signal is issued: D E L T A : D e l t a P h i S t a r t i n g .
DELTA: I(3fn)/I(fn) SGx 062 040 063 040 064 040 065 040 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the ratio of the third harmonic current component to the
fundamental. This value is used as the operate threshold for the harmonics
stabilization feature.
DELTA: I(5fn)/I(fn) SGx 062 042 063 042 064 042 065 042 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the ratio of the fifth harmonic current component to the
fundamental. This value is used as the operate threshold for the harmonics
stabilization feature.
DELTA: kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) SGx 062 041 063 041 064 041 065 041 Fig. 3-121
Setting whether high impedance protection is Blocked or stabilized

(dynamically extended by multiplication with the factor set here).
DELTA: X, Forward SGx 062 032 063 032 064 032 065 032 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the reactance limit in the forward direction.

Note: The value range depends on the setting at
DELTA: X, Reverse SGx 062 033 063 033 064 033 065 033 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the reactance limit in the reverse direction.

Note: The value range depends on the setting at
DELTA: tDelta SGx 062 039 063 039 064 039 065 039 Fig. 3-121
The timer stage tDelta is triggered with operation of high impedance

protection and a Trip signal is issued when the tDelta time-delay set here
has elapsed.
DELTA: Mode w/o Voltage SGx 062 036 063 036 064 036 065 036 Fig. 3-116
Setting whether high impedance protection will continue to operate or be

Blocked even where voltage measurement in Delta I operating mode is not
available.
DELTA: tBlock SGx 062 045 063 045 064 045 065 045 Fig. 3-116
Setting for the blocking time duration.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)
VT and CT Supervision C&VTS: Enable SGx 014 200 014 201 014 202 014 203 Fig. 3-122
This setting defines the setting group in which CT and VT Supervision is

enabled.
C&VTS: I> Enab V< FuseF SGx 014 188 014 237 014 238 014 239 Fig. 3-123, 3-
124
Enabling undervoltage and fuse failure monitoring.
C&VTS: V-Monit. Enabled SGx 014 225 014 226 014 227 014 228 Fig. 3-123
Disabling/enabling undervoltage monitoring.

C&VTS: V<, V-Monit. SGx 014 229 014 230 014 231 014 232 Fig. 3-123
Setting for the operate threshold of undervoltage monitoring.

C&VTS: tV<, V-Monit. SGx 014 233 014 234 014 235 014 236 Fig. 3-123
Setting for the time delay of undervoltage monitoring.

C&VTS: VTS/Fuse F. Enab SGx 014 204 014 205 014 206 014 207 Fig. 3-124
Enabling/disabling “fuse failure” monitoring.

C&VTS: V< VTS/Fuse Fail SGx 014 208 014 209 014 210 014 211 Fig. 3-124
Setting for the enable value V< of “fuse failure” monitoring.

C&VTS: V> VTS/Fuse Fail SGx 014 212 014 213 014 214 014 215 Fig. 3-124
Setting for the reset value V> of “fuse failure” monitoring.

C&VTS: Delta V VTS/Fuse SGx 014 216 014 217 014 218 014 219 Fig. 3-124
Setting for the minimum voltage change for the detection of a “fuse failure”
condition.
C&VTS: Delta I VTS/Fuse SGx 014 221 014 222 014 223 014 224 Fig. 3-124
Setting for the maximum current change for the detection of a “fuse failure”
condition.
Backup Overcurrent-Time BUOC: Enable SGx 072 118 073 118 074 118 075 118 Fig. 3-127
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which backup overcurrent-time
protection is enabled.
BUOC: I> SGx 010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018 Fig. 3-129
Setting for operate threshold I> of the current of the backup overcurrent-
time protection.
BUOC: I>> SGx 010 127 010 129 010 131 010 133 Fig. 3-129
Setting for operate threshold I>> of the current of the backup overcurrent-
time protection.
BUOC: tI> SGx 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the operate delay of stage I> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
BUOC: tI>> SGx 010 128 010 130 010 132 010 134 Fig. 3-129
Setting for the operate delay of stage I>> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
7-74 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Enable SGx 011 120 011 121 011 122 011 123 Fig. 3-130
This setting defines the setting group in which switch on to fault protection is
enabled.
SOTF: Operating Mode SGx 011 061 011 114 011 115 011 116 Fig. 3-131
The setting of the operating mode defines whether a general start shall
cause a trip while a timer stage is running ("trip with starting") or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone
extension factor D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d H S R S G x ("trip with
overreach").
SOTF: Man. Close Timer SGx 011 060 011 111 011 112 011 113 Fig. 3-131
Setting for the timer stage which is started by the manual close signal.
Auto-Reclose Control RECLS: Enable SGx 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049 Fig. 3-132
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.

RECLS: Check CB Closed? SGx 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044 Fig. 3-134
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'Enabled', a binary signal input must be configured
accordingly.
RECLS: Parallel Trip SGx 015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047 Fig. 3-148
This setting defines whether the trip commands of a protection device

operating together with the P438 will affect operation of the ARC function.
For further details see the section entitled ‘Parallel Blocking’ in Chapter 3.
RECLS: Operative Time 1 SGx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055 Fig. 3-148
Setting for operative time 1.

RECLS: Operative Time 2 SGx 015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062 Fig. 3-148
Setting for operative time 2.

RECLS: V> SGx 015 128 015 129 015 138 015 139
Voltage enabling of reclosure when operative time 2 is used.

RECLS: tV> SGx 015 140 015 141 015 142 015 143
Time delay of voltage enabling.

RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t1 SGx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060 Fig. 3-135
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a distance protection
zone 1 start.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t2S SGx 015 144 015 145 015 146 015 147 Fig. 3-135
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t2L SGx 015 152 015 153 015 154 015 155 Fig. 3-135
zone 2 start together with train start-up detection dx/dt in zone 2.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t3S SGx 015 160 015 161 015 162 015 163 Fig. 3-135
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t3L SGx 015 168 015 169 015 170 015 171 Fig. 3-135
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t4S SGx 015 180 015 181 015 182 015 183
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DIST t4L SGx 015 188 015 189 015 190 015 191
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DELTA tD. SGx 008 192 008 193 008 194 008 195 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the high
impedance protection.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DTOC tI>H SGx 015 069 024 052 024 053 024 054 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC
high-current stage.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DTOC tI> SGx 015 105 020 105 021 105 022 105 Fig. 3-138
RECLS: HSR-Tr.DTOC tI>> SGx 015 074 020 107 021 107 022 107 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC 1st
or 2nd high-current stage.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.IDMT kIrefSGx 015 094 020 113 021 113 022 113 Fig. 3-138
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the IDMT Ikref
stage.
RECLS: HSR-Tr.BUOC tI> SGx 015 109 020 109 022 109 023 109 Fig. 3-140
RECLS: HSR-Tr.BUOC tI>> SGx 015 111 020 111 021 111 022 111 Fig. 3-140
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the BUOC 1st
RECLS: HSR-Tr. LOGIC SGx 015 098 024 110 024 160 025 110 Fig. 3-142
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a programmable logic
start.
RECLS: HSR Dead Time SGx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050 Fig. 3-148
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.

RECLS: Dead Time Max SGx 015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063 Fig. 3-148
Setting for the maximum dead time.

RECLS: Zone Extn on HSR SGx 015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053 Page: 3-205
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by

the zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and
while the operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is active only if protective signaling is not ready.

RECLS: No. Permit. TDR SGx 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057 Fig. 3-148
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the ‘0’
setting, only one HSR is carried out.
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t1 SGx 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061 Fig. 3-136
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a distance protection
zone 1 start.
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t2S SGx 015 148 015 149 015 150 015 151 Fig. 3-136
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t2L SGx 015 156 015 157 015 158 015 159 Fig. 3-136
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t3S SGx 015 164 015 165 015 166 015 167 Fig. 3-136
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t3L SGx 015 172 015 173 015 174 015 175 Fig. 3-136
7-76 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t4S SGx 015 184 015 185 015 186 015 187
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DIST t4L SGx 015 192 015 193 015 194 015 195
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DELTA tD. SGx 008 196 008 197 008 198 008 199 Fig. 3-137
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the high
impedance protection.
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DTOC tI>H SGx 015 070 024 055 024 056 024 057 Fig. 3-139
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC
high-current stage.
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DTOC tI> SGx 015 106 020 106 021 106 022 106 Fig. 3-139
RECLS: TDR-Tr.DTOC tI>> SGx 015 075 020 108 022 108 023 108 Fig. 3-139
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC 1st
RECLS: TDR-Tr.IDMT kIrefSGx 015 095 020 114 021 114 022 114 Fig. 3-139
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the IDMT Ikref
stage.
RECLS: TDR-Tr.BUOC tI> SGx 015 110 020 110 021 110 022 110 Fig. 3-140
RECLS: TDR-Tr.BUOC tI>> SGx 015 112 020 112 021 112 022 112 Fig. 3-140
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the BUOC 1st
RECLS: TDR-Tr. LOGIC SGx 015 099 024 122 024 172 025 122 Fig. 3-142
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a programmable logic
start.
RECLS: TDR Dead Time SGx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051 Fig. 3-148
Setting for the TDR dead time.

RECLS: Zone Extn on TDR SGx 015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059 Page: 3-205
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended

prior to a TDR.
RECLS: Reclaim Time 1 SGx 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048 Fig. 3-148
Setting for reclaim time 1.

RECLS: Reclaim Time 2 SGx 015 124 015 125 015 126 015 127 Fig. 3-148
Setting for reclaim time 2.

RECLS: Block. ARC f. I> SGx 015 104 016 104 017 104 020 104 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the current threshold via which the auto-recloser is blocked.
RECLS: Block. Time Int. SGx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the time that will elapse before the auto-recloser will be ready
again after cancellation of the blocks set by the P438.
RECLS: Block. Time Ext. SGx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052 Fig. 3-133
Setting for the time that will elapse before the auto-recloser will be ready
again after blocking by a binary signal input.
RECLS: Zone Ext.Dur. RC SGx 015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067 Page: 3-205
This setting defines whether the following takes place:

A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR
without check synchronism.
Zone extension will occur with each reclose command.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-77

7 Settings
(continued)
RECLS: RC f. THERM Trip SGx 015 176 015 177 015 178 015 179 Fig. 3-148
This setting determines whether a reclose command shall be issued for a

thermal overload protection trip signal.
Definite-Time Overcurrent DTOC: Enable SGx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098 Fig. 3-150
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: I>H SGx 072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009 Fig. 3-151
Setting for the threshold of the instantaneous high-set stage I>H.

DTOC: I> SGx 072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007 Fig. 3-151
Setting for operate threshold I>.

DTOC: I>> SGx 072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008 Fig. 3-151
Setting for operate threshold I>>.

DTOC: tI>H SGx 072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021 Fig. 3-151
Setting for the operate delay of instantaneous high-set stage I>H.

DTOC: tI> SGx 072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019 Fig. 3-151
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>.

DTOC: tI>> SGx 072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020 Fig. 3-151
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>.

DTOC: Timer Start tI> SGx 071 146 071 147 071 148 071 149 Fig. 3-153
This setting defines whether timer stage tI> is started with triggering of
current thresholds I> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
DTOC: beta (I>) SGx 076 068 077 068 078 068 079 068 Fig. 3-154
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is "forward".
DTOC: gamma (I>) SGx 076 073 077 073 078 073 079 073 Fig. 3-154
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is "forward".
DTOC: Direction (I>) SGx 076 080 077 080 078 080 079 080 Fig. 3-155
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI> trip signal is sent: forward,
reverse or non-directional.
DTOC: V< (I>) SGx 076 131 077 131 078 131 079 131 Fig. 3-155
The tI> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
Enabling is permanent if it is set to 'Blocked'.
DTOC: Mode w/o V (I>) SGx 076 128 077 128 078 128 079 128 Fig. 3-155
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directionally or should be blocked.
DTOC: Timer Start tI>> SGx 072 245 073 044 074 044 075 044 Fig. 3-153
This setting defines whether timer stage tI>> is started with the triggering of
current thresholds I>> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
7-78 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: beta (I>>) SGx 076 069 077 069 078 069 079 069 Fig. 3-154
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic
determines that the direction is "forward".
DTOC: gamma (I>>) SGx 076 074 077 074 078 074 079 074 Fig. 3-154
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic
determines that the direction is "forward".
DTOC: Direction (I>>) SGx 076 088 077 088 078 088 079 088 Fig. 3-156
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI>> trip signal is sent:
forward, reverse or non-directional.
DTOC: V< (I>>) SGx 076 150 077 150 078 150 079 150 Fig. 3-156
The tI>> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
Enabling is permanent if it is set to ’Blocked’.
DTOC: Mode w/o V (I>>) SGx 076 129 077 129 078 129 079 129 Fig. 3-156
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directionally or should be blocked.
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Enable SGx 072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000 Fig. 3-157
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which IDMT protection is enabled.
IDMT: Iref Rating SGx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
Setting for the reference current of the curve.
IDMT: Characteristic SGx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
IDMT: kt Time Dial/TMS SGx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier.
IDMT: Min. Trip Time SGx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
Setting for the minimum trip time.
IDMT: Hold Time SGx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071 Fig. 3-162,
3-164, 3-167
Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults.
IDMT: Reset SGx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
Setting for the release or reset characteristic.
IDMT: Timer Sta. tIref>SGx 006 061 006 062 006 063 006 064 Fig. 3-164
This setting defines whether timer stage tIref> is started with the triggering of
IDMT protection or, additionally, with a directional signal.
IDMT: beta SGx 072 046 073 046 074 046 075 046 Fig. 3-165
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is "forward".
IDMT: gamma SGx 072 047 073 047 074 047 075 047 Fig. 3-165
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is "forward".
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-79

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Direction (I>) SGx 072 048 073 048 074 048 075 048 Fig. 3-166
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tIref> trip signal is sent:
forward, reverse or non-directional.
IDMT: V< SGx 072 081 073 081 074 081 075 081 Fig. 3-166
The tIref> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
Enabling is permanent if it is set to ’Blocked’.
IDMT: Mode w/o Voltage SGx 072 119 073 119 074 119 075 119 Fig. 3-166
This setting defines whether, in case of voltage measuring circuit failure, the
definite-time overcurrent protection function should operate non-directionally
or should be blocked.
Defrost Protection DFRST: Enable SGx 019 130 019 131 019 132 019 133 Fig. 3-168
This setting defines the setting group in which defrost protection is enabled.
DFRST: Id> SGx 019 134 019 135 019 136 019 137 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the pickup threshold of the differential characteristic of the

defrost protection function.
DFRST: m1 SGx 019 138 019 139 019 140 019 141 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the gradient of the differential characteristic of the defrost

protection function.
DFRST: t SGx 019 142 019 143 019 144 019 145 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the operate delay of the defrost protection function.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Enable SGx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig. 3-171
This setting defines the setting group in which thermal overload protection is
enabled.
THERM: Iref Rating SGx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig. 3-173
Setting for the reference current.

THERM: Start Fact.OL_RC SGx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the starting factor to trigger overload recording.

THERM: Tim.Const 1(Heat)SGx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (heating time constant).
THERM: Tim.Const 2(Cool)SGx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running.
In all other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THERM: O/T f.Iref Pers. SGx 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the over-temperature resulting from persistent thermal limit

current.
Note: This setting is enabled only in the Absolute replica operating
mode.
THERM: T> Alarm Reset,% SGx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the operate threshold of the warning stage.

Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating
mode.
7-80 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: T> Trip Reset,% SGx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the operate threshold of the trip stage.

Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating
mode.
THERM: Alarm Temp. SGx 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the temperature (in °C) to trigger a warning alarm.

Note: This setting is enabled only in the Absolute replica operating
mode.
THERM: Max Perm Obj Tmp.SGx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max Perm Cool TmpSGx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured
via the PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
THERM: Select CT AmbientSGx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig. 3-174
This setting defines whether coolant temperature (ambient) shall be

measured and, if so, whether data acquisition shall take place via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
THERM: Default CT Amb SGx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the default coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the
trip time if coolant temperature is not measured.
THERM: Funct.f.CTA Fail.SGx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177 Fig. 3-174
This setting specifies how the thermal overload protection function will
continue to operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
THERM: Minimum Temperat.SGx 076 178 077 178 078 178 079 178 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used to calculate the

tripping time if the catenary section is situated in a long tunnel.
THERM: Trip Hysteresis SGx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig. 3-176
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THERM: Pre-Trip Alarm SGx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig. 3-176
An alarm will be raised in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the alarm and the trip time is set here.
THERM: Factor 2 Parall. SGx 072 173 073 173 074 173 075 173 Fig. 3-173
THERM: Factor 3 Parall. SGx 072 174 073 174 074 174 075 174 Fig. 3-173
Setting for the parallel line factors for 2- or 3-parallel line operation.
Time-Delayed Voltage V<>: Enable SGx 076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000 Fig. 3-178
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
V<>: V> SGx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig. 3-179
Setting for operate threshold V>.

V<>: V>> SGx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig. 3-179
Setting for operate threshold V>>.

V<>: tV> SGx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig. 3-179
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-81

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: tV>> SGx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig. 3-179
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< SGx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig. 3-180
Setting for operate threshold V<.

V<>: V<< SGx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig. 3-180
Setting for operate threshold V<<.

V<>: Vmin SGx 076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046 Fig. 3-180
Setting for the lower threshold of the window function.

V<>: tV< SGx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig. 3-180
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

V<>: tV<< SGx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig. 3-180
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: tTransient SGx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig. 3-180
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> Meas. SGx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig. 3-179
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Enable SGx 072 110 073 110 074 110 075 110 Fig. 3-181
Protection
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
CBF: Imin< SGx 072 112 073 112 074 112 075 112 Fig. 3-183
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold
will be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
CBF: tImin< SGx 072 113 073 113 074 113 075 113 Fig. 3-183
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.

CBF: Operative Time SGx 072 114 073 114 074 114 075 114 Fig. 3-183
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.

CBF: tBF1 Init ReTrip SGx 072 115 073 115 074 115 075 115 Fig. 3-183
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a
re-trip.
CBF: tBF2 Init BackTr.SGx 072 116 073 116 074 116 075 116 Fig. 3-183
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a back-
trip.
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Enable SGx 072 240 073 240 074 240 075 240 Fig. 3-192
This setting defines the setting group in which the limit value monitoring
function is enabled.
LIMIT: I> SGx 072 241 073 241 074 241 075 241 Fig. 3-193
Setpoint limit of the first overcurrent stage.

LIMIT: I>> SGx 072 242 073 242 074 242 075 242 Fig. 3-193
Setpoint limit of the second overcurrent stage.

LIMIT: tI> SGx 072 243 073 243 074 243 075 243 Fig. 3-193
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage.
7-82 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tI>> SGx 072 244 073 244 074 244 075 244 Fig. 3-193
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage.

LIMIT: Icat> SGx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 Fig. 3-194
Setpoint limit of the first overcurrent stage of the catenary current.

Note: Valid only with setting
M A I N : F e e d i n g M o d e 'Autotransformer feed'.
LIMIT: Icat>> SGx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 Fig. 3-194
Setpoint limit value of the second overcurrent stage of the catenary current.
LIMIT: tIcat> SGx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 Fig. 3-194
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of the catenary
current.
LIMIT: tIcat>> SGx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203 Fig. 3-194
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of the
catenary current.
LIMIT: Ifdr> SGx 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204 Fig. 3-194
Setpoint limit value of the first overcurrent stage of the feeder current.
LIMIT: Ifdr>> SGx 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205 Fig. 3-194
Setpoint limit value of the second overcurrent stage of the feeder current.
LIMIT: tIfdr> SGx 076 206 077 206 078 206 079 206 Fig. 3-194
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of the feeder
current.
LIMIT: tIfdr>> SGx 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207 Fig. 3-194
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of the feeder
current.
LIMIT: Idfrst> SGx 076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224 Fig. 3-195
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of the defrost
current.
LIMIT: Idfrst>> SGx 076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225 Fig. 3-195
current.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-83

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tIdfrst> SGx 076 226 077 226 078 226 079 226 Fig. 3-195
current.
LIMIT: tIdfrst>> SGx 076 227 077 227 078 227 079 227 Fig. 3-195
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of the defrost
current.
LIMIT: V> SGx 072 247 073 247 074 247 075 247 Fig. 3-196
Setting for operate threshold V>.

LIMIT: V>> SGx 072 248 073 248 074 248 075 248 Fig. 3-196
Setting for operate threshold V>>.

LIMIT: tV> SGx 072 249 073 249 074 249 075 249 Fig. 3-196
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

LIMIT: tV>> SGx 072 250 073 250 074 250 075 250 Fig. 3-196
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

LIMIT: V< SGx 072 251 073 251 074 251 075 251 Fig. 3-196
Setting for operate threshold V<.

LIMIT: V<< SGx 072 252 073 252 074 252 075 252 Fig. 3-196
Setting for operate threshold V<<.

LIMIT: tV< SGx 072 253 073 253 074 253 075 253 Fig. 3-196
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

LIMIT: tV<< SGx 072 254 073 254 074 254 075 254 Fig. 3-196
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

LIMIT: Vcat> SGx 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the first overvoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
M A I N : F e e d i n g M o d e ‘Autotransformer feed’.
LIMIT: Vcat>> SGx 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the second overvoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
LIMIT: tVcat> SGx 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the first overvoltage stage of the catenary
voltage.
LIMIT: tVcat>> SGx 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the second overvoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
LIMIT: Vcat< SGx 076 216 077 216 078 216 079 216 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the first undervoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
7-84 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: Vcat<< SGx 076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the second undervoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
LIMIT: tVcat< SGx 076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of the catenary
voltage.
LIMIT: tVcat<< SGx 076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of the
catenary voltage.
LIMIT: Vfdr> SGx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the first overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
LIMIT: Vfdr>> SGx 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the second overvoltage stage of the
feeder voltage.
LIMIT: tVfdr> SGx 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the first overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
LIMIT: tVfdr>> SGx 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the second overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
LIMIT: Vfdr< SGx 076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
LIMIT: Vfdr<< SGx 076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate threshold of the second undervoltage stage of the
feeder voltage.
LIMIT: tVfdr< SGx 076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7-85

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tVfdr<< SGx 076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223 Fig. 3-197
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
LIMIT: f> SGx 072 211 073 211 074 211 075 211 Fig. 3-198
Setting for operate threshold f>.

LIMIT: f>> SGx 072 212 073 212 074 212 075 212 Fig. 3-198
Setting for operate threshold f>>.

LIMIT: tf> SGx 072 213 073 213 074 213 075 213 Fig. 3-198
Setting for the operate delay of f>.

LIMIT: tf>> SGx 072 214 073 214 074 214 075 214 Fig. 3-198
Setting for the operate delay of f>>.

LIMIT: f< SGx 072 215 073 215 074 215 075 215 Fig. 3-198
Setting for operate threshold f<.

LIMIT: f<< SGx 072 216 073 216 074 216 075 216 Fig. 3-198
Setting for operate threshold f<<.

LIMIT: tf< SGx 072 217 073 217 074 217 075 217 Fig. 3-198
Setting for the operate delay of f<.

LIMIT: tf<< SGx 072 218 073 218 074 218 075 218 Fig. 3-198
Setting for the operate delay of f<<.
7-86 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

8 Information and Control Functions
The P438 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are maintained for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated user interface.
All this information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.
Note:
In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is

indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which
displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet,
"Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-1

(continued)
8.1 Operation
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: No. Tel. Errors p.u. 120 040
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.T.Err.,Max,Stored 120 041
Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages

within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop Back Result 120 057
COMM3: Loop Back Receive 120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop-back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
Measured Data Input RTDmA: Current IDC 004 134 Fig. 3-25
Display of the milliamp current loop input current.

RTDmA: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig. 3-25
Display of the current loop input current referred to IDC,nom.

RTDmA: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136 Fig. 3-25
Display of the linearized current loop input current referred to IDC,nom.

RTDmA: Scaled Value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig. 3-26
Display of the scaled linearized value.

RTDmA: Temperature 004 133 Fig. 3-27
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer.

RTDmA: Temperature p.u. 004 221 Fig. 3-27
Display of the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer

referred to 100°C.
mA_OP: Current A-1 005 100 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Current A-2 005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1, A-2: channel 2).
8-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Main Function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-67
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time 003 091 Fig. 3-67
Display of the time (real time clock).

Note: The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Time Switching 003 095 Fig. 3-67
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig. 3-47
Measurement of system frequency.

MAIN: Current I Prim. 004 110 Fig. 3-41
Display of phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Icat Prim. 005 040 Fig. 3-41
Display of catenary current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Ifdr Prim. 006 040 Fig. 3-41
Display of feeder current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current I(2fn) Prim 008 095 Fig. 3-42
Display of the second harmonic current component as a primary quantity.

Display of the third harmonic current component as a primary quantity.

M A I N : F e e d i n g M o d e 'Autotransformer Feed'
and with the optional processor module with an integrated DSP
coprocessor fitted.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-3

(continued)
Display of the fifth harmonic current component as a primary quantity.

coprocessor fitted.
MAIN: Voltage V Prim. 004 112 Fig. 3-43
Display of the updated voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage Vcat Prim. 005 042 Fig. 3-43
Display of the updated value for the catenary voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vfdr Prim. 006 042 Fig. 3-43
Display of the updated value for the feeder voltage as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Active Power P Prim. 004 050 Fig. 3-44,
3-45
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Reac. Power Q Prim. 004 052 Fig. 3-44,
3-45
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Load Imped Z Prim. 005 005 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated load impedance value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Load React X Prim. 005 196 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated load reactance value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Load Resist. R Prim. 005 198 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated load resistance value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Load Flow Direction 004 166
Display of the load flow direction.

MAIN: Load Angle phi 004 167
Display of the load angle (power factor angle).

MAIN: Frequency f p.u. 004 070 Fig. 3-47
Display of system frequency referred to fn.

MAIN: Current I p.u. 004 111 Fig. 3-41
Display of the current referred to In.

MAIN: Current Icat p.u. 005 041 Fig. 3-41
Display of the catenary current referred to In.

MAIN: Current Ifdr p.u. 006 041 Fig. 3-41
Display of the feeder current referred to In.

MAIN: Current I(2fn) p.u. 008 096 Fig. 3-42
Display of the second harmonic current component referred to In.
8-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Display of the third harmonic current component referred to In.

coprocessor fitted.
Display of the fifth harmonic current component referred to In.

coprocessor fitted.
MAIN: Voltage V p.u. 004 113 Fig. 3-43
Display of the voltage referred to Vn.

MAIN: Voltage Vcat p.u. 005 043 Fig. 3-43
Display of the updated catenary voltage referred to Vn.

MAIN: Voltage Vfdr p.u. 006 043 Fig. 3-43
Display of the updated feeder voltage referred to Vn.

MAIN: Active Power P p.u. 004 051 Fig. 3-44,
3-45
Display of the updated value for active power referred to nominal apparent
power Sn.
MAIN: Reac. Power Q p.u. 004 053 Fig. 3-44,
3-45
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal
apparent power Sn.
MAIN: Load Impedance Z p.u 005 004 Fig. 3-45,
3-46
Display of the updated operating impedance referred to Zn = 300 Ω.
MAIN: Load Angle phi p.u. 004 078
Display of the updated value for the load angle referred to ϕn = 100°.
MAIN: Active Power Factor 004 054 Fig. 3-44
Display of the updated active power factor.

MAIN: Load Impedance Z Sec 005 000 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated value for the load impedance as secondary quantity.
MAIN: Load Reactance X Sec 005 195 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated value for the load reactance as secondary quantity.
MAIN: Load Resist. R Sec 005 197 Fig. 3-46
Display of the updated value for the load resistance as secondary quantity.
MAIN: kHarm, ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) 008 216 Fig. 3-42
fundamental component of the current.
coprocessor fitted,
and with the harmonics adaptation feature enabled in the
distance protection.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-5

(continued)
Defrost Protection DFRST: Current Idfrst Prim. 004 200
Display of defrost current as a primary quantity.

DFRST: Current Idfrst p.u. 004 201
Display of the defrost current referred to Idfrst,n

DFRST: Current Id p.u. 004 196
Display of the per-unit differential current of the defrost protection.

DFRST: Current IR p.u. 004 197
Display of the per-unit restraining current of the defrost protection.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Status Therm.Replica 004 016 Fig. 3-176
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Object Temperature 004 137 Fig. 3-176
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Coolant Temperature 004 149 Fig. 3-176
Display of coolant temperature. Depending on the setting at

T H E R M : S e l e c t C T A for coolant temperature acquisition, one of the
following values will be displayed:
Setting 'Default Temp. Value': Display of the set temperature value. Setting
'From PT 100' Display of the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer. Setting 'From 20 mA Input': Display of the temperature
measured by an external measuring transducer and transmitted in the form
of direct current.
THERM: Pre-Trip Time Left 004 139 Fig. 3-176
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold ("time-to-trip").
THERM: Therm. Replica p.u. 004 017 Fig. 3-176
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object Temp. p.u. 004 179 Fig. 3-176
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Coolant Temp. p.u. 004 178 Fig. 3-176
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Temp. Offset Replica 004 109 Fig. 3-176
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature

and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the
same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve
amounts to 0 in this case.
8-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: State Receive 1 120 000
COMM3: State Receive 2 120 003
Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State Send 1 121 000
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-7

(continued)
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Output 1 State 106 010
Substation Event
GOOSE: Output 2 State 106 012
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

GOOSE: Input 1 State 106 200
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
8-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Output 1 State 104 100
Status Events
GSSE: Output 2 State 104 103
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.

GSSE: Input 1 State 105 000
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-9

(continued)
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
Configurable Function Keys F_KEY: State F1 080 122 Fig. 3-20

F_KEY: State F2 080 123
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': No function is assigned to the function key.

'Off': The function key is in the "Off" position.
'On': The function key is in the "On" position.
8-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Binary Input INP: State U 301 152 216 Fig. 3-21

INP: State U 302 152 219
INP: State U 303 152 222
INP: State U 304 152 225
INP: State U 601 152 090
INP: State U 602 152 093
INP: State U 603 152 096
INP: State U 604 152 099
INP: State U 605 152 102
INP: State U 606 152 105
INP: State U 701 152 108
INP: State U 702 152 111
INP: State U 703 152 114
INP: State U 704 152 117
INP: State U 705 152 120
INP: State U 706 152 123
INP: State U 801 152 126
INP: State U 802 152 129
INP: State U 803 152 132
INP: State U 804 152 135
INP: State U 901 152 144
INP: State U 902 152 147
INP: State U 903 152 150
INP: State U 904 152 153
INP: State U 1001 152 162
INP: State U 1002 152 165
INP: State U 1003 152 168
INP: State U 1004 152 171
INP: State U 1005 152 174
INP: State U 1006 152 177
INP: State U 1201 152 198
INP: State U 1202 152 201
INP: State U 1203 152 204
INP: State U 1204 152 207
INP: State U 1205 152 210
INP: State U 1206 152 213
INP: State U 1401 190 001
INP: State U 1402 190 005
INP: State U 1403 190 009
INP: State U 1404 190 013
INP: State U 1405 190 017
INP: State U 1406 190 021
INP: State U 1601 192 001
INP: State U 1602 192 005
INP: State U 1603 192 009
INP: State U 1604 192 013
INP: State U 1605 192 017
INP: State U 1606 192 021
INP: State U 1801 194 001
INP: State U 1802 194 005
INP: State U 1803 194 009
INP: State U 1804 194 013
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-11

(continued)
INP: State U 1805 194 017
INP: State U 1806 194 021
INP: State U 2001 153 086
INP: State U 2002 153 089
INP: State U 2003 153 092
INP: State U 2004 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
'Low': Not energized.
'High': Energized.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.
Binary Output OUTP: State K 301 151 044 Fig. 3-28

OUTP: State K 302 151 047
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
OUTP: State K 1007 150 234
OUTP: State K 1008 150 237
8-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
OUTP: State K 1201 151 008
OUTP: State K 1202 151 011
OUTP: State K 1203 151 014
OUTP: State K 1204 151 017
OUTP: State K 1205 151 020
OUTP: State K 1206 151 023
OUTP: State K 1207 151 026
OUTP: State K 1208 151 029
OUTP: State K 1401 169 001
OUTP: State K 1402 169 005
OUTP: State K 1403 169 009
OUTP: State K 1404 169 013
OUTP: State K 1405 169 017
OUTP: State K 1406 169 021
OUTP: State K 1407 169 025
OUTP: State K 1408 169 029
OUTP: State K 1601 171 001
OUTP: State K 1602 171 005
OUTP: State K 1603 171 009
OUTP: State K 1604 171 013
OUTP: State K 1605 171 017
OUTP: State K 1606 171 021
OUTP: State K 1607 171 025
OUTP: State K 1608 171 029
OUTP: State K 1801 173 001
OUTP: State K 1802 173 005
OUTP: State K 1803 173 009
OUTP: State K 1804 173 013
OUTP: State K 1805 173 017
OUTP: State K 1806 173 021
OUTP: State K 2001 151 200
OUTP: State K 2002 151 203
OUTP: State K 2003 151 206
OUTP: State K 2004 151 209
OUTP: State K 2005 151 212
OUTP: State K 2006 151 215
OUTP: State K 2007 151 218
OUTP: State K 2008 151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': No functions are assigned to the output relay.
'Low': The output relay is not energized.
'High': The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-13

(continued)
LED Indicator LED: State H 1 Green 085 180 Fig. 3-37

LED: State H 2 Amber 085 000
LED: State H 3 Amber 085 003
LED: State H17 Red. 085 181
LED: State H 4 Red 085 006 Fig. 3-37

LED: State H 7 Red 085 015
LED: State H10 Red 085 024
LED: State H23 Red 085 145 Fig. 3-37

LED: State H 4 Green 085 056
LED: State H10 Green 085 074
LED: State H23 Green 085 176 Fig. 3-37
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
'Disabled': The LED indicator is not energized.
'Enabled': The LED indicator is energized.
8-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Logic state signals
User Interface HMI: Edit Mode 080 111
The edit mode is displayed by this signal. As a standard it is assigned to

the L E D : F c t . H 1 7 R e d A s s i g n signal.
HMI: Trig. Menu Jmp 1 EXT 030 230
Triggering of menu jump list 1 is displayed by this signal. (See also

associated setting parameter H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t 1 .)
HMI: Trig. Menu Jmp 2 EXT 030 231
Triggering of menu jump list 2 is displayed by this signal. (See also

associated setting parameter H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t 2 .)
HMI: Illumination on EXT 037 101
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched
on.
Communication Interface 1 COMM1: Command Block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Sig/Meas. Block EXT 037 074 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
COMM1: Command Blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-6
COMM1: Sig/Meas. Val.Block 037 075 Fig. 3-7,
3-8, 3-9
COMM1: IEC 60870-5-103 003 219 Fig. 3-7
COMM1: IEC 60870-5-101 003 218 Fig. 3-8
COMM1: IEC 60870-5,ILS 003 221 Fig. 3-9
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: COURIER 103 041
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: Reset No.Tlg.Err.EXT 006 054 Fig.*: 3-69

COMM3: Communications Fault 120 043 Fig. 3-17
COMM3: Comm. Link Failure 120 044 Fig. 3-17
COMM3: Lim.Exceed.,Tel.Err. 120 045
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Comm. Link Faulty 105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is an implausible setting!
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: IED Link Faulty 107 250
Substation Event
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. The GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp to each GOOSE message, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be
carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors
the time at which the next state signal must be received.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-15

(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: IED Link Faulty 105 181
Status Events
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. The GSSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp to each GSSE message, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be
carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the device monitors
the time at which the next state signal must be received.
IRIG-B IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-19

IRIGB: Ready 023 202 Fig. 3-19
Measured Data Input RTDmA: Enabled 035 008 Fig. 3-22

RTDmA: PT100 Open Circuit 040 190 Fig. 3-27
RTDmA: Overload 20 mA Input 040 191 Fig. 3-25
RTDmA: Open Circ. 20mA Inp. 040 192 Fig. 3-25
Binary Output OUTP: Block Outp.Rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-28
OUTP: Reset Latch. EXT 040 015 Fig. 3-28
Fig.*: 3-69
OUTP: Outp. Relays Blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-28
OUTP: Latching Reset 040 088 Fig. 3-28
Measured Data Output mA_OP: Output Enabled EXT 036 085 Fig. 3-31
mA_OP: Reset Output EXT 036 087 Fig. 3-32
Fig.*: 3-69
mA_OP: Enabled 037 102 Fig. 3-30
mA_OP: Output Reset 037 117 Fig. 3-32
mA_OP: Valid BCD Value 037 050 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: 1-Dig. Bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig. 3-33
mA_OP: Value A-1 Valid 069 014 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Value A-1 Output 037 118 Fig. 3-35
mA_OP: Value A-2 Valid 069 015
mA_OP: Value A-2 Output 037 119
8-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Main Function MAIN: Healthy 060 001
Indicates that the device is operational. By default this signal is linked to

LED: Fct.H 1 Green Assign.
MAIN: Enable Protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Group Reset 1 EXT 005 209 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Rst.Co.Cl/Tr.Cmd EXT 005 210 Fig.*: 3-69
MAIN: Group Reset 2 EXT 005 252 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: General Reset EXT 005 255 Fig.*: 3-69
MAIN: Disable Protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Test Mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-53
MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig. 3-53
MAIN: Block. Trip cmd. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Block.Inrush RstrEXT 039 169
Inrush stabilization may be blocked using this setting.

MAIN: Block. MainTrip EXT 038 050 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Block. ReTrip EXT 038 051 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Block. BackTrip EXT 038 052 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Reset Latch.Trip EXT 040 138 Fig. 3-63
Fig.*: 3-69
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT 004 061 Fig. 3-92,
3-125, 3-126,
3-178
MAIN: CB Closed Sig. EXT 036 051 Fig. 3-183
MAIN: Man.Cl.Cmd Enabl.EXT 041 023 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Man. Close Cmd. EXT 041 022 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Manual Close EXT 036 047 Fig. 3-131
MAIN: En.Man.Trip Cmd. EXT 039 053 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. MTrip Cmd EXT 039 054 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Cmd. EXT 039 055 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. BTrip Cmd. EXT 039 107 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: CB Trip EXT 044 131 Fig. 3-186
MAIN: Parallel Trip EXT 037 019 Fig. 3-183
MAIN: Reset Indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig.*: 3-69
MAIN: Min-Pulse Clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Prot. Ext. Disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Protect. Not Ready 004 060 Fig. 3-54
MAIN: Test Mode 037 071 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Blocked/Faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-54
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Main-Trip Blocked 039 050 Fig. 3-59
MAIN: Re-Trip Blocked 039 051 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Back-Trip Blocked 039 052 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Latch. Trip C Reset 040 139 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: Man. Trip Cmd Enabl. 039 080 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. MainTrip Sig. 039 081 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. ReTrip Signal 039 082 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Man. BackTrip Sig. 039 083 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 036 251 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Final Trip 038 103 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Time Switching EXT 003 096
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-17

(continued)
MAIN: Main-Trip Signal 039 101 Fig. 3-59

MAIN: Re-Trip Signal 039 103 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Back-Trip Signal 039 105 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Main-Trip Command 039 011 Fig. 3-59,
3-187
MAIN: Re-Trip Command 039 012 Fig. 3-60
MAIN: Back-Trip Command 039 013 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: General Start 036 000 Fig. 3-57
MAIN: Fault Forward 036 018 Fig. 3-56
MAIN: Fault Reverse 036 019 Fig. 3-56
MAIN: tVmemory Active 040 034 Fig. 3-52
MAIN: Start. PIR Main-Trip 039 014 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Start. PIR Re-Trip 039 015 Fig. 3-58
MAIN: Man Close Cmd. Enab. 039 113 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Man. Close Command 037 068 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Close Command 037 009 Fig. 3-55
MAIN: Inrush Restr. Ready 041 024 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: Inr.Restr. Triggered 041 025 Fig. 3-50
MAIN: Power Flow Forward 039 076
MAIN: Power Flow Reverse 039 077
MAIN: Disabled 060 000
MAIN: Disabled 061 000
Setting Group Selection GROUP: Control Via User EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Activate Grp 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Control Via User 036 102 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Ext.sel. Settg. Grp 003 061 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Grp1 Activated Ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Actual Setting Group 003 062 Fig. 3-72
GROUP: Group 1 Active 036 090 Fig. 3-72
8-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Self-Monitoring CHECK: Alarm (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-73

(see also Chapter 10) CHECK: Alarm (Relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-73
CHECK: Warm Restart Exec. 041 202
CHECK: Cold Restart Exec. 041 201
CHECK: Cold Restart 093 024
CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update 093 025
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure 090 019
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty 041 200
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail 093 040
CHECK: Battery Failure 090 010
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded 096 121
CHECK: +15V Supply Faulty 093 081
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty 093 080
CHECK: Wrong Module Slot 1 096 100
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot 1 097 000
CHECK: Defect.Module Slot10 097 009
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-19

(continued)
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty 093 070
CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty 093 071
CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty 093 110
CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty 093 111
CHECK: IRIGB Faulty 093 117
CHECK: Error K 301 097 046
8-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
CHECK: Undefined Op Code 093 010
CHECK: Invalid Op. 093 011
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt 093 012
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. 093 013
CHECK: Protection Failure 090 021
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error 090 003
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error 093 041
CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM 093 026
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-75

CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block. 093 015
CHECK: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y 093 113
CHECK: Time-out Module Y 093 112
CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V 098 000
CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg1 098 046 Fig. 3-101

CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg1' 098 047 Fig. 3-101
CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg2 098 048 Fig. 3-102
CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg2' 098 049 Fig. 3-102
CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg3 098 050
CHECK: Wrong set. DIST Rg3' 098 051
CHECK: Wrong Set. DIST Rg4 098 007
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-21

(continued)
CHECK: Wrong Set. DIST Rg4' 098 008
CHECK: Undervoltage 098 009
CHECK: VTS/FF V Triggered 098 021
CHECK: VTS Volts Failure 098 017
CHECK: Match.Fact.DFRSTinv. 098 033 Fig. 3-170

CHECK: Communic.Fault COMM3 093 140
CHECK: Hardware Error COMM3 093 143
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers DHMI 093 145
CHECK: CTA Error 098 034 Fig. 3-174

CHECK: Comm.Link Fail.COMM3 093 142
CHECK: Lim.Exceed.,Tel.Err. 093 141
CHECK: Setting Error THERM 098 035
CHECK: Wrong Setting F.loc 098 200
Signal indicating that the line sections have been incorrectly set for the
calculation of fault location.
CHECK: Setting Error CBM 098 020
CHECK: CB No. CB Op. > 098 066
CHECK: CB Rem. No. CB Op. < 098 067
CHECK: CB ΣItrip > 098 068
CHECK: CB ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
CHECK: CB tmax> Cat 098 070
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-1 093 114 Fig. 3-35

CHECK: CB tmax> Fdr 098 071
CHECK: Invalid Scaling A-2 093 115
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC 093 116 Fig. 3-25

CHECK: PT100 Open Circuit 098 024 Fig. 3-27
CHECK: Overload 20 mA Input 098 025 Fig. 3-25
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA Inp. 098 026 Fig. 3-25
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync 093 120
CHECK: Output 30 098 053
CHECK: Output 30 (t) 098 054
8-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Operating Data Recording OP_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 213 Fig. 3-69
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 240 Fig.*: 3-69
Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset Record. EXT 005 241 Fig.*: 3-69
OL_RC: Record. in Progress 035 003 Fig. 3-78
OL_RC: Overl. Mem. Overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-79
Measured Value Error FT_DA: Wrong Setting F.loc 008 191
Fault Recording OSCIL: Reset Record. EXT 005 243 Fig.*: 3-69
OSCIL: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-88
OSCIL: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-88
OSCIL: I> Starting 035 013 Fig. 3-88
OSCIL: Record. in Progress 035 000 Fig. 3-88
OSCIL: System Disturb. Runn 035 004 Fig. 3-88
OSCIL: Fault Mem. Overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-89
OSCIL: Faulty Time Tag 035 002
Distance Protection DIST: Control Via User EXT 038 171 Fig. 3-99
DIST: Z1' Enabled EXT 038 067 Fig. 3-99
DIST: Z4' Enabled EXT 036 129
DIST: Blocking t1 EXT 039 163
DIST: Blocking t2S EXT 039 164 Fig. 3-107

DIST: Blocking t2L EXT 039 165 Fig. 3-107
DIST: Blocking t3S EXT 039 166 Fig. 3-107
DIST: Blocking t3L EXT 039 167 Fig. 3-107
DIST: Blocking t4S EXT 039 002
DIST: Blocking t4L EXT 039 019
DIST: Blocking tWPC EXT 039 168 Fig. 3-111

DIST: Zone Extension EXT 036 046 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Enabled 036 104 Fig. 3-91
DIST: Not Ready 041 086 Fig. 3-95
DIST: Zone 1 Not Ready 038 034 Fig. 3-93
DIST: Zone 2 Not Ready 038 035
DIST: di/dt Not Ready, Z2 039 030 Fig. 3-106,

3-108
DIST: dv/dt Not Ready, Z2 039 031 Fig. 3-106,
3-108
DIST: dphi/dt Not Ready,Z2 039 032 Fig. 3-106,
3-108
DIST: di/dt Not Ready, Z3 039 033
DIST: dv/dt Not Ready, Z3 039 034
DIST: dphi/dt Not Ready,Z3 039 035
DIST: di/dt Not Ready, Z4 039 026
DIST: du/dt Not Ready, Z4 039 027
DIST: dphi/dt Not Ready,Z4 039 038
DIST: WPC Not Ready 039 156 Fig. 3-111
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-23

(continued)
DIST: Wrong Setting Rg,x 041 085 Fig. 3-92,

3-101,3-
102,3-104,
3-105
DIST: Control Via User 038 172 Fig. 3-99
DIST: Z1' Ext. Enabled 038 078 Fig. 3-99
DIST: Z1 Enabled 039 066 Fig. 3-99
DIST: Z1' Enabled 039 067 Fig. 3-99
DIST: WPC Enabled 039 155 Fig. 3-111
DIST: Z1 Extended Extern. 036 140 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Zone Extension SOTF 036 134 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Zone Extension HSR 036 103 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Zone Extension TDR 038 022
DIST: Trip Signal 036 009 Fig. 3-114

DIST: Trip Signal Z1/t1 039 016 Fig. 3-106,
3-107,3-
135,3-136
DIST: Trip Signal Z1,ze 035 074 Fig. 3-106,
3-107
DIST: Trip Signal Z2/t2S 039 017 Fig. 3-107,
3-135,3-136
DIST: Trip Signal Z2/t2L 039 018 Fig. 3-107,
3-135,3-136
3-135,3-136
3-135,3-136
3-114
3-114
DIST: Trip Signal WPC 039 159 Fig. 3-112
DIST: I> Starting 039 001 Fig. 3-96
DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze) Starting 039 003 Fig. 3-101,
3-104
DIST: Z2 Starting 039 005 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Z3 Starting 039 140 Fig. 3-107
DIST: Z4 Starting 039 042
DIST: Z1'(Z1',ze) Starting 039 004 Fig. 3-101,

3-104
DIST: Z2' Starting 039 006 Fig. 3-102,
3-105
DIST: Z3' Starting 039 141
DIST: Z4' Starting 039 043
DIST: WPC Starting 039 158 Fig. 3-112

DIST: Starting 036 135 Fig. 3-101,
3-102,3-104,
3-105, 3-113
8-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
DIST: Fault Forward 036 138 Fig. 3-97

DIST: Fault Reverse 036 139 Fig. 3-97
DIST: Direct. Using Vmeas 038 045 Fig. 3-97
DIST: Direct. Using Memory 038 047 Fig. 3-97
DIST: Fwd. w/o Measurem. 038 044 Fig. 3-97
DIST: di/dt Starting, Z2 039 007 Fig. 3-108
DIST: dv/dt Starting, Z2 039 008 Fig. 3-108
DIST: dphi/dt Starting, Z2 039 142 Fig. 3-108
DIST: di/dt Starting, Z3 039 160
DIST: dv/dt Starting, Z3 039 161
DIST: dphi/dt Starting, Z3 039 162
DIST: di/dt Starting, Z4 039 044
DIST: dv/dt Starting, Z4 039 045
DIST: dphi/dt Starting, Z4 039 046
DIST: tZ1 Elapsed 036 026 Fig. 3-106,

3-107, 3-135,
3-136
DIST: t1,ze Elapsed 035 079 Fig. 3-106,
3-107
DIST: tZ2S Elapsed 039 009 Fig. 3-107,
3-135, 3-136
DIST: tZ2L Elapsed 039 010 Fig. 3-107,
3-135, 3-136,
3-176
DIST: tZ3S Elapsed 039 143 Fig. 3-107,
3-135, 3-136
DIST: tZ3L Elapsed 039 144 Fig. 3-107,
3-135, 3-136
DIST: tZ4S Elapsed 039 047 Fig. 3-107
DIST: tZ4L Elapsed 039 048 Fig. 3-107
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-25

(continued)
High Impedance Protection DELTA: Block. tDelta EXT 038 053
Blocking of timer stage D E L T A : t D e l t a P S x .

DELTA: Enabled 038 054 Fig. 3-115
Indicates that high impedance protection is switched on.

DELTA: Not Ready 038 055 Fig. 3-116
Indicates that high impedance protection is not ready

(i.e. a blocking condition is apparent).
DELTA: Delta I Extended 038 066 Fig. 3-120
Indicates that the harmonics stabilization feature has detected a load

variation.
DELTA: Delta I Blocked 038 068 Fig. 3-120
Indicates that the sudden current change criterion is blocked.

DELTA: Trip Signal 038 056 Fig. 3-121,
3-137
Trip signal by the high impedance protection function.
DELTA: Imin Starting 038 059 Fig. 3-117
The full-cycle r.m.s. value of the current has exceeded the set minimum
current value.
DELTA: Delta I Starting 038 060 Fig. 3-121
Indicates that the sudden current change criterion is met. This signal is
used as a starting for high impedance protection.
DELTA: Delta Phi Starting 038 063 Fig. 3-119
This signal is issued if the angle (with sudden angle change monitoring
enabled) changes by more than the value set for
D E L T A : D e l t a P h i S G x within a defined sampling interval.
DELTA: X-Release 038 065 Fig. 3-118
Indicates that the measured reactance value is within the set limits.
DELTA: I(3fn) Starting 038 076 Fig. 3-120
Indicates that the ratio of the third harmonic current component to the
fundamental has exceeded the starting value set for
DELTA: I(3fn)/I(fn) SGx.
DELTA: I(5fn) Starting 038 077 Fig. 3-120
Indicates that the ratio of the fifth harmonic current component to the
fundamental has exceeded the starting value set for
DELTA: I(5fn)/I(fn) SGx.
VT and CT Supervision C&VTS: Blocking V< EXT 038 033
C&VTS: Blocking Fuse F. EXT 038 037
C&VTS: Enabled 040 094 Fig. 3-122

C&VTS: Undervoltage 038 038 Fig. 3-123
C&VTS: VTS/FF V Triggered 035 081 Fig. 3-124
C&VTS: VTS Volts Failure 038 023 Fig. 3-126
C&VTS: Meas. Voltage o.k. 038 048 Fig. 3-125
8-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Backup Overcurrent-Time BUOC: Blocking tI> EXT 038 127 Fig. 3-128
Protection
BUOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 038 128 Fig. 3-128
BUOC: Enabled 040 093 Fig. 3-127
BUOC: Not Ready 040 030 Fig. 3-128
BUOC: Active 037 021 Fig. 3-128
BUOC: Gen Trip Signal 036 122 Fig. 3-129
BUOC: Trip Signal I> 036 014 Fig. 3-129
BUOC: Trip Signal I>> 036 116 Fig. 3-129
BUOC: Starting I> 036 013 Fig. 3-129
BUOC: Starting I>> 036 115 Fig. 3-129
Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Blocking EXT 036 098
SOTF: Par. ARC Running EXT 039 063 Fig. 3-131

SOTF: Enabled 040 069 Fig. 3-130
SOTF: Z1 Extended 035 076 Fig. 3-131
SOTF: tManual-Close Runn. 036 063 Fig. 3-131
SOTF: Trip Signal 036 064 Fig. 3-131
Auto-Reclose Control RECLS: Reset Counters EXT 005 244 Fig.*: 3-69
RECLS: Enable EXT 037 010 Fig. 3-132
RECLS: Disable EXT 037 011 Fig. 3-132
RECLS: Ext./User Enabled 037 013 Fig. 3-132
RECLS: Enabled 015 064 Fig. 3-132
RECLS: Ready 004 068 Fig. 3-134
RECLS: Not Ready 037 008 Fig. 3-134
RECLS: Lock f. Gen.Starting 036 229 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: CB Drive Ready EXT 004 066
RECLS: Blocking EXT 036 050
RECLS: Blocked by I> 037 126 Fig. 3-133

RECLS: Block. Time Running 037 004 Fig. 3-133
RECLS: Blocked 004 069 Fig. 3-133
RECLS: Test HSR EXT 037 017
RECLS: Test HSR 034 023 Fig. 3-145

RECLS: Reject Test HSR 036 055 Fig. 3-145
RECLS: Cycle Running 037 000 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Start by LOGIC 037 078 Fig. 3-141
RECLS: General Starting EXT 037 096
RECLS: Oper. Time 1 Running 037 005 Fig. 3-148

RECLS: Oper. Time 2 Running 037 065 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Dead Time Running 037 002 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Dead Time HSR Runn. 037 067 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Max. Dead Time Runn. 037 069 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Dead Time TDR Runn. 037 003 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Zone Extension HSR 036 226
RECLS: Zone Extension TDR 036 227 Fig. 3-101

RECLS: (Re)Close Signal HSR 037 007 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: (Re)Close Signal TDR 037 006 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Recl. Time 1 Running 036 042 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Recl. Time 2 Running 036 221 Fig. 3-148
RECLS: Reset Reclaim Time 2 036 222
RECLS: Reset Recl.Time2 EXT 036 223 Fig.*: 3-69

RECLS: Def. Recl.Time Runn. 036 228 Fig. 3-148
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-27

(continued)
RECLS: Reclosure Successful 036 062 Fig. 3-143

RECLS: Trip Signal 039 099 Fig. 3-142,
3-148
RECLS: Sig.Interr. CB Trip 036 040 Fig. 3-148
Definite-Time Overcurrent DTOC: Blocking tI>H EXT 041 062 Fig. 3-148,
Protection 3-151
DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT 041 060 Fig. 3-151
DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 041 061 Fig. 3-151
DTOC: Enabled 040 120 Fig. 3-150
DTOC: Not Ready 040 027
DTOC: Trip Signal tI>H 040 076 Fig. 3-138,

3-139, 3-151
DTOC: Trip Signal tI> 041 020 Fig. 3-138,
3-139, 3-151,
3-153
DTOC: Trip Signal tI>> 040 011 Fig. 3-138,
3-139, 3-151,
3-153
DTOC: Starting I>H 035 022 Fig. 3-151
DTOC: Starting I> 035 020 Fig. 3-151,
3-153
DTOC: Starting I>> 035 021 Fig. 3-151,
3-153
DTOC: tI> Elapsed 040 010 Fig. 3-138,
3-139, 3-151,
3-153
DTOC: tI>> Elapsed 040 106 Fig. 3-138,
3-139, 3-151
3-153
DTOC: Direct. Using Vmeas 036 137 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Direct. Using Memory 036 136 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Dir.Meas. I> Blocked 035 080 Fig. 3-155
DTOC: Meas. I> Non-Direct. 035 077 Fig. 3-155
DTOC: Fault I> Forward 035 137 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Power Flow I> Fwd. 035 223 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Fault I> Reverse 035 140 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Power Flow I> Rev. 035 224 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Dir.Meas. I>> Block. 035 133 Fig. 3-156
DTOC: Meas. I>> Non-Direct 035 078 Fig. 3-156
DTOC: Fault I>> Forward 035 147 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Power Flow I>> Fwd. 035 227 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Fault I>> Reverse 035 148 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: Power Flow I>> Rev. 035 228 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: I> Fwd. w/o Meas. 041 198 Fig. 3-154
DTOC: I>> Fwd. w/o Meas. 041 199 Fig. 3-154
8-28 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Inverse-Time Overcurrent IDMT: Block. tIref> EXT 040 101
Protection IDMT: Enabled 040 100 Fig. 3-157

IDMT: Starting Iref> 040 080 Fig. 3-162,
3-164, 3-167
IDMT: Direct. Using Vmeas 041 015 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: Direct. Using Memory 041 014 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: Dir. Meas. Blocked 041 006 Fig. 3-166
IDMT: Meas.Non-Directional 041 007 Fig. 3-166
IDMT: Fault Forward 041 008 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: Power Flow Forward 041 017 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: Fault Reverse 041 009 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: Power Flow Reverse 041 018 Fig. 3-165
IDMT: tIref> Elapsed 040 082 Fig. 3-162,
3-164, 3-167
IDMT: Trip Signal tIref> 040 084 Fig. 3-138,
3-139, 3-162,
3-164
IDMT: Hold Time Running 040 053 Fig. 3-162,
3-164, 3-167
IDMT: Memory Clear 040 110 Fig. 3-162,
3-164
IDMT: Fwd. w/o Measurem. 041 189 Fig. 3-165
Defrost Protection DFRST: Blocking t EXT 041 206 Fig. 3-170

DFRST: Enabled 041 203 Fig. 3-168,
3-170
DFRST: Starting 041 204 Fig. 3-170
DFRST: Trip Signal 041 205 Fig. 3-170
DFRST: Mismatch 041 207 Fig. 3-170
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Control Via User EXT 038 169 Fig. 3-173
THERM: Select 2 Paral/L EXT 038 072 Fig. 3-173
THERM: Select 3 Paral/L EXT 038 074 Fig. 3-173
THERM: Replica Block EXT 041 074 Fig. 3-176
THERM: CTA Error EXT 038 062 Fig. 3-174
THERM: Reset Replica EXT 038 061 Fig. 3-177
Fig.*: 3-69
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig. 3-171
THERM: Not Ready 040 035 Fig. 3-172
THERM: Control Via User 038 170
THERM: 1 PL Select. Extern. 038 071 Fig. 3-173

THERM: 1 Parall.Line Active 039 070 Fig. 3-173
THERM: Reclosure Blocked 039 024 Fig. 3-176
THERM: Reset Replica 039 061 Fig. 3-177
THERM: Memory Clear 039 112 Fig. 3-176
THERM: CTA Error 039 111 Fig. 3-174
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig. 3-176
THERM: Within Pre-Trip Time 041 109 Fig. 3-176
THERM: Alarm 039 025 Fig. 3-176
THERM: Trip Signal 039 020 Fig. 3-176
THERM: Setting Error,Block. 039 110 Fig. 3-176
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-29

(continued)
Time-Delayed Voltage V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig. 3-179
Protection
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig. 3-179
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig. 3-180
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig. 3-180
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig. 3-178
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig. 3-178
V<>: Not Ready 042 004 Fig. 3-178
V<>: General Start 041 135
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig. 3-179

V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig. 3-179
V<>: tV> Elapsed 041 034 Fig. 3-179
V<>: tV>> Elapsed 041 035 Fig. 3-179
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig. 3-180
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV< Elapsed 041 041 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV< Elapsed & Vmin 041 026 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV< Elaps. Transient 042 023 Fig. 3-180
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV<< Elapsed 041 042 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV<< Elapsed & Vmin 041 066 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV<< Elapsed Trans. 042 025 Fig. 3-180
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig. 3-180
V<>: tV</<< Elaps. Trans. 042 007 Fig. 3-180
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Blocking EXT 038 058 Fig. 3-182
Protection CBF: Enabled 040 055 Fig. 3-181
CBF: Not Ready 040 025 Fig. 3-182
CBF: CB Superv. Signal 039 000 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Failure Main-Trip 039 021 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Failure Re-Trip 036 056 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Re-Trip Signal 039 022 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Back-Trip Signal 039 023 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Timer tBF1 Running 036 066 Fig. 3-183
CBF: Timer tBF2 Running 036 110 Fig. 3-183
CBF: CB Failure 036 017 Fig. 3-183
8-30 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Reset Meas.Val.EXT 005 247 Fig.*: 3-69
CBM: Blocking EXT 044 128 Fig. 3-191
CBM: Enabled 044 130 Fig. 3-184,
3-186
CBM: Cycle Running Cat 044 205 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Cycle Running Fdr 044 206 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Blocked 044 199 Fig. 3-191
CBM: Sig. No. CB Op. > 044 135 Fig. 3-190
CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB Op.< 044 136 Fig. 3-189
CBM: Signal ΣItrip> 044 137
CBM: Signal ΣItrip**2> 044 138
CBM: Signal ΣI*t> 044 139
CBM: tmax> Cat 044 177 Fig. 3-186

CBM: tmax> Fdr 044 178 Fig. 3-186
CBM: Cat Current Dead 044 201 Fig. 3-186
CBM: Fdr Current Dead 044 202 Fig. 3-186
CBM: Setting Error CBM 044 204
Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig. 3-192

LIMIT: tI> Elapsed 004 062
LIMIT: tI>> Elapsed 040 157 Fig. 3-193

LIMIT: tIcat> Elapsed 040 232 Fig. 3-194
LIMIT: tIcat>> Elapsed 040 233 Fig. 3-194
LIMIT: tIfdr> Elapsed 040 234 Fig. 3-194
LIMIT: tIfdr>> Elapsed 040 235 Fig. 3-194
LIMIT: tIdfrst> Elapsed 040 236 Fig. 3-195
LIMIT: tIdfrst>> Elapsed 040 237 Fig. 3-195
LIMIT: tV> Elapsed 040 140 Fig. 3-196
LIMIT: tV>> Elapsed 040 141 Fig. 3-196
LIMIT: tV< Elapsed 040 142 Fig. 3-196
LIMIT: tV<< Elapsed 040 143 Fig. 3-196
LIMIT: tV> & tV< Elapsed 040 144
LIMIT: tV>>&tV<< Elapsed 040 145
LIMIT: tVcat> Elapsed 040 240 Fig. 3-197

LIMIT: tVcat>> Elapsed 040 241 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVcat< Elapsed 040 242 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVcat<< Elapsed 040 243 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVcat>& tVcat< elap. 040 244 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVcat>>& tVA<< el. 040 245 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr> Elapsed 040 246 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr>> Elapsed 040 247 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr< Elapsed 040 248 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr<< Elapsed 040 249 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr>& tVfdr< Elap. 040 250 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tVfdr>>& tVfdr<< El. 040 251 Fig. 3-197
LIMIT: tf> Elapsed 040 196 Fig. 3-198
LIMIT: tf>> Elapsed 040 197 Fig. 3-198
LIMIT: tf< Elapsed 040 198 Fig. 3-198
LIMIT: tf<< Elapsed 040 199 Fig. 3-198
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> 040 180 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> Elapsed 040 182 Fig. 3-199
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-31

(continued)
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> Elapsed 040 183 Fig. 3-199

LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< Elapsed 040 186 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< Elapsed 040 187 Fig. 3-199
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: tT> Elapsed 040 172 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: tT>> Elapsed 040 173 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: tT< Elapsed 040 176 Fig. 3-200
LIMIT: tT<< Elapsed 040 177 Fig. 3-200
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-201
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-201

Fig.*: 3-69
LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
LOGIC: 1 Has Been Set 034 067 Fig. 3-201

LOGIC: 2 Has Been Set 034 068
8-32 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
LOGIC: 8 Has Been Set 034 074 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: 1 Set Externally 034 075 Fig. 3-201
LOGIC: 2 Set Externally 034 076
LOGIC: 8 Set Externally 034 082 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-202
LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-202
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: Output 2 (t) 042 035 Fig. 3-141
LOGIC: Output 3 (t) 042 037
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-33

(continued)
8-34 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Device DVICE: Service Info 031 080 031 080
User Interface HMI: Setting Change Enabl 003 010
To allow settings to be changed from the user interface (HMI).
Communication Interface 1 COMM1: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test 003 180 Fig. 3-13
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test Spont.Sig.Start 003 184 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM1: Test Spont.Sig. End 003 186 Fig. 3-13
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
Communication Interface 2 COMM2: Sel.Spontan.Sig.Test 103 180
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test Spont.Sig.Start 103 184 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘start‘).
COMM2: Test Spont.Sig. End 103 186 Fig. 3-15
Trigger for the transmission of the selected signal (as signal ‘end‘).
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: Rset.No.Tlg.Err.USER 120 037
COMM3: Send Signal for Test 120 050
COMM3: Log. State for Test 120 051
COMM3: Send Signal, Test 120 053
COMM3: Loop Back Send 120 055
COMM3: Loop Back Test 120 054
COMM3: Hold Time for Test 120 052
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Reset Statistics 105 171
Status Events
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs Flags L 105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing whether the corresponding
GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1
to 16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs Flags H 105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing whether the corresponding
GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input
17 to 32).
GSSE: Tx Message Counter 105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset Counters.
GSSE: Rx Message Counter 105 163
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-35

(continued)
GSSE: No. Bin.State Chang. 105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Tx Last Sequence 105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
GSSE: Tx Last Message 105 166
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. Reject. Messages 105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t C o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED View Selection 105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED Receiv. Messages 105 172
Counter of GSSE received messages.

GSSE: IED Rx Last Sequence 105 173
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx Last Message 105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Missed Messages 105 175
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t C o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED Missed Changes 105 176
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t C o u n t e r s .
GSSE: IED Time-Outs 105 177
Number of GSSE received after validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t C o u n t e r s .
8-36 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Binary Output OUTP: Reset Latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-28
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.

OUTP: Relay Assign. f.Test 003 042 Fig. 3-29
Selection of the relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay Test 003 043 Fig. 3-29
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at
OUTP: Hold-time for Test.
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
The test can only be carried out when protection is disabled.
OUTP: Hold Time for Test 003 044 Fig. 3-29
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
Measured Data Output mA_OP: Reset Output USER 037 116 Fig. 3-32
Resetting the measured data output function.
Main Function MAIN: General Reset USER 003 002 Fig. 3-68
Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-
Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-68
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset Latch Trip USER 021 005 Fig. 3-63
Reset of latched trip commands from the user interface.

MAIN: Rst.C.Cl/Tr.Cmd USER 003 007 Fig. 3-55,
3-65
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Group Reset 1 USER 005 253 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Group Reset 2 USER 005 254 Fig. 3-69
Group-resetting commands.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-37

(continued)
MAIN: En.Man.Trip Cmd.USER 003 064 Fig. 3-62
Setting the enable for the issue of a trip command from the user interface.
MAIN: Man.M-Trip Cmd USER 003 065 Fig. 3-62
A trip command is issued from the front panel HMI for the 100 ms. This
setting is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected
Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Man.Re-Trip Cmd USER 003 066 Fig. 3-62
Note:
This command is not executed unless the manual trip has been configured
as re-trip command.
MAIN: Man.B-Trip Cmd USER 003 067 Fig. 3-62
Note:
This command is not executed unless the manual trip has been configured
as back-trip command.
MAIN: En.Man.Clos.Cmd.USER 003 105 Fig. 3-55
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the user interface
(enables manual breaker close operations).
MAIN: Man. Close Cmd. USER 018 033 Fig. 3-55
A close command is issued from the user interface for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm Restart 003 039
A warm restart is being carried out. The device functions as it does when
the power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold Restart 000 085
A cold restart is executed. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default
settings. They are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
Operating Data Recording OP_RC: Reset Record. USER 100 001 Fig. 3-74
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Reset Record. USER 003 008 Fig. 3-75,3-
149
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
8-38 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Overload Recording OL_RC: Reset Record. USER 100 003 Fig. 3-79
Reset of the overload memory.
Fault Recording OSCIL: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-88
To manually trigger fault recording from the user interface for a "fault"
window of 500 ms.
OSCIL: Reset Record. USER 003 006 Fig. 3-89
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Auto-Reclose Control RECLS: Enable USER 003 134 Fig. 3-132
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the user interface (HMI).
RECLS: Disable USER 003 133 Fig. 3-132
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the user interface (HMI).
RECLS: Test HSR USER 011 066 Fig. 3-145
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.

RECLS: Reset Recl.Time2USER 003 025
The reset of the reclaim time 2 (which has been triggered after the final trip)
removes the auto-reclose blocking.
RECLS: Reset Counters USER 003 005 Fig. 3-149
The auto-recloser's counters are reset.
Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Reset Replica USER 022 061 Fig. 3-177
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-39

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Initialize Values 003 011 Fig. 3-188
Values are initialized to trigger circuit breaker condition monitoring.

CBM: Reset Meas.Val. USER 003 013 Fig. 3-188
Resetting circuit breaker condition monitoring

CBM: Set No. CB Oper. Cat 022 131 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set No. CB Oper. Fdr 022 132 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set Remain.CB Op.Cat 022 134 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set Remain.CB Op.Fdr 022 135 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣItrip Cat 022 137 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣItrip Fdr 022 138 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 Cat 022 140 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 Fdr 022 141 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣI*t Cat 022 143 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Set ΣI*t Fdr 022 144 Fig. 3-188
Setting the actual circuit breaker condition.
Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-202

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-202
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Operating Data Recording OP_RC: Operat. Data Record. 003 024 Fig. 3-74
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Mon. Signal Record. 003 001 Fig. 3-75
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-40 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Communication Interface 3 COMM3: No. Telegram Errors 120 042
Number of telegram errors.
Main Function MAIN: No. General Start. 004 000 Fig. 3-57
Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: No. Main-Trip Cmds. 009 005 Fig. 3-65
Number of main-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Re-Trip Cmds. 009 006 Fig. 3-65
Number of re-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Back-Trip Cmds. 009 007 Fig. 3-65
Number of back-trip commands.

MAIN: No. Final Trip Cmds. 004 005 Fig. 3-65
Number of final trip commands.

MAIN: No. Close Commands 009 055 Fig. 3-55
Number of close commands.
Operating Data Recording OP_RC: No. Oper. Data Sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-74
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: No. Monit. Signals 004 019 Fig. 3-75
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload Recording OL_RC: No. Overload 004 101 Fig. 3-78
Number of overload events.
Fault Recording OSCIL: No. of Faults 004 020 Fig. 3-88
Number of faults.
OSCIL: No. System Disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-88
Number of system disturbances (starts).
Auto-Reclose Control RECLS: No. of HSR Recloses 004 004 Fig. 3-149
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.

RECLS: No. of TDR Recloses 004 008
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: No. of CB Oper. Cat 008 011 Fig. 3-188
CBM: No. of CB Oper. Fdr 008 012 Fig. 3-188
Number of circuit breaker operations

CBM: Remain.No. CB Op.Cat 008 014 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Remain.No. CB Op.Fdr 008 015 Fig. 3-188
Number of remaining circuit breaker operations at CB nominal current
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-41

(continued)
8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Overload Data Acquisition OL_DA: Overload Duration 004 102 Fig. 3-76
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: Status THERM Replica 004 147 Fig. 3-77
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load Current THERM 004 058 Fig. 3-77
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object Temp. THERM 004 035 Fig. 3-77
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant Temp. THERM 004 036 Fig. 3-77
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting at

THERM: Select CTA.
Setting 'Default Temp. Value': Display of the set temperature value.
Setting 'From PT 100': Display of the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer.
Setting 'From 20 mA Input': Display of the temperature measured via the
20 mA input.
OL_DA: Pre-Trip t.LeftTHERM 004 148 Fig. 3-77
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold ("time-to-trip").
OL_DA: Offset THERM Replica 004 154 Fig. 3-77
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature

and the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the
same value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve
amounts to 0 in this case.
Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Fault Duration 008 010 Fig. 3-80
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running Time 004 021 Fig. 3-80
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Fault Determination 004 198 Fig. 3-81
Display of the protection element/zone that has identified the fault.

FT_DA: Run Time to Meas. 004 199 Fig. 3-81
Display of the time of fault data acquisition.

FT_DA: Fault Current p.u. 004 025 Fig. 3-83
Display of the phase current referred to In.
8-42 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
FT_DA: FaultVoltage p.u. 004 026 Fig. 3-83
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vn .

FT_DA: Fault Loop Angle 004 024 Fig. 3-83
Display of the fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault Reactance,Prim 004 029 Fig. 3-83
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault Impedance,Prim 004 176 Fig. 3-83
Display of the fault impedance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault Reactance,Sec. 004 028 Fig. 3-83
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault Impedance,Sec. 004 023 Fig. 3-83
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault Locat. Percent 004 027 Fig. 3-86
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: Line ReactXSec 1 SGx.
FT_DA: Fault Location 004 022 Fig. 3-86
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in km).

FT_DA: Icat p.u. 004 181 Fig. 3-84

FT_DA: Ifdr p.u. 004 182 Fig. 3-84

FT_DA: Idfrst p.u. 004 177 Fig. 3-85
Display of the defrost current referred to In.

FT_DA: kHarm, ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) 008 217 Fig. 3-83
Displays the ratio of the second, third and fifth harmonic current
components to the fundamental component of the current.
coprocessor fitted,
and with the harmonics adaptation feature enabled in the
distance protection.
FT_DA: Vcat p.u. 004 183 Fig. 3-84
Display of the catenary voltage referred to Vn.

FT_DA: Vfdr p.u. 004 184 Fig. 3-84
Display of the feeder voltage referred to Vn.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 8-43

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Itrip,Prim Cat 009 212 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Itrip,Prim Fdr 009 213 Fig. 3-188
Primary ruptured current for each circuit breaker contact.

CBM: Itrip Cat 009 047 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Itrip Fdr 009 048 Fig. 3-188
Per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker contact.

CBM: Itrip**2 Cat 009 051 Fig. 3-188
CBM: Itrip**2 Fdr 009 052 Fig. 3-188
Squared per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker contact.

CBM: I*t Cat 009 061 Fig. 3-188
CBM: I*t Fdr 009 062 Fig. 3-188
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
CBM: ΣItrip Cat 009 071 Fig. 3-188
CBM: ΣItrip Fdr 009 073 Fig. 3-188
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
CBM: ΣItrip**2 Cat 009 077 Fig. 3-188
CBM: ΣItrip**2 Fdr 009 078 Fig. 3-188
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker
contact.
CBM: ΣI*t Cat 009 087 Fig. 3-188
CBM: ΣI*t Fdr 009 088 Fig. 3-188
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
8.2.3 Event Recording
Overload Recording OL_RC: Overload Recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-79

OL_RC: Overload Recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-79
Point of entry into the overload log.
Fault Recording OSCIL: Fault Recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-89

OSCIL: Fault Recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-89
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-44 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Instructions
Only qualified personnel, familiar with content on the "Warning" page at the beginning of
this operating manual, may work on or operate this device.
The warning notices at the beginning of Chapter 5 must be observed during installation
and connection of this device.
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut as the ground
connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear
sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor cross section
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always
disconnect the device from the power supply.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the unit is shut off.
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting
cable, technicians must be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Commissioning Test
Preparation
After the P438 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
Is the protection device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the protection device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see section entitled ‘Self-Monitoring’ in Chapter 3). The LED indicators for
‘Operation’ (H1) and ‘Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the
P438 is ready for operation. Upon delivery or when the device is energized after a cold
restart the device type, "P438", and the time of day are shown on the first line of the front
panel LCD.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see section entitled ‘Change-
Enabling Function’ in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering
settings from the integrated user interface (HMI) is described in Chapter 6.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interfaces will be used for setting the
P438 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from
the integrated user interface (HMI).
‘Set/DvID/’ folder:
DVICE: Password Level 1
DVICE: Password Level 2
‘Set/Conf/’ folder:
PC: Manufacturer
PC: Bay Address
PC: Relay Address
PC: Baud Rate
PC: Parity Bit
COMM1: Remote Comms Port1
COMM1: General Enable USER
COMM1: Manufacturer
COMM1: Line Idle State
COMM1: Baud Rate
COMM1: Parity Bit
COMM1: Communicat Protocol
COMM1: Octet Comm. Address
COMM1: Octet Address ASDU
COMM2: Remote Comms Port2
COMM2: Manufacturer
COMM2: Line Idle State
COMM2: Baud Rate
COMM2: Parity Bit
COMM2: Octet Comm. Address
COMM2: Octet Address ASDU
COMM3: Function Group COMM3
COMM3: Baud Rate
9-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

9 Commissioning
(continued)
‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder:
PC: Command Blocking
PC: Sig/Meas. Val.Block
COMM1: USER Command Block
COMM1: USER Sig/Meas Block
COMM2: USER Command Block
COMM2: USER Sig/Meas Block
Further instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.
Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before the blocking is canceled:
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder):
M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d 'yes (on)'
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P438, it is possible to determine
whether the P438 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish the trip coils of the circuit breaker or the higher-level protection
device to operate during testing, the trip commands can be blocked through
M A I N : T r i p C m d . B l o c k U S E R (‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Furthermore, it is possible to block each trip command
separately for testing purposes. This is implemented using the parameters
M A I N : B l o c k M a i n T r i p U S E R , M A I N : B l o c k R e T r i p U S E R or
M A I N : B l o c k B a c k T r i p U S E R ('Set/Func/Glob/' folder) or through the
If a test of the individual commands is required, there is the option of issuing each
individual command for a set time after activating a M A I N : E n . M a n . T r i p
C m d . U S E R enable (in the 'M+T/C+Test/' folder) for a limited time. The parameters
M A I N : M a n . M - t r i p U S E R , M A I N : M a n . R e - t r i p U S E R or
M A I N : M a n . B - t r i p U S E R ('M+T/C+Test/' folder) are used. Simultaneously, the
individual commands can be issued via appropriately configured signal inputs.
Selection of the trip command from the integrated user interface (HMI) is password-
protected (see section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’ in Chapter 6).
Note: The manual trip commands are executed whether or not they have been
configured via selection tables for main trip, re-trip or back-trip.
If the P438 is connected to a control station, the user is advised to activate the test mode
via M A I N : U S E R T e s t M o d e (folder ‘Set/Func/Glob’) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (reason for
transmission: test mode).
9-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary

signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘M+T/Meas/IO’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the signal that is present is recognized correctly by the protection
device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
'Low': Not energized.

'High': Energized.
'Disabled': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - T i m e f o r T e s t in ‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y A s s i g n . f . T e s t , ‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y T e s t (‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder). It is
password-protected (see section entitled ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’ in
Chapter 6).
Note: Checking the output relays is possible only if the P438 has been switched
off-line at M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d [JE47] ('Set/Func/Glob/' folder)
beforehand.
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Checking the
communications interfaces
signals
When using the IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101 or ILS-C interface protocols, each
signal generated in the P438 can be transmitted to the connected control station for test
purposes. First select the signal to be tested (C O M M x : S e l . S p o n t a n . S i g . T e s t ,
‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder). The relevant signal is transmitted according to C O M M x : T e s t
S p o n t . S i g . S t a r t or C O M M x : T e s t S p o n t . S i g . E n d (‘M+T/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Signal generation is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the transformer

connections
The user can check to make sure connection to the system's current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle or for active/reactive power in the 'M+T/Meas/Record/' folder. The load angle
is only determined if at least 10% of the nominal device current is flowing.
Checking the protection

function
Four setting groups are stored in the P438, one of which is activated. Before checking
the protective function, the user should determine which setting group is activated.
The active setting group is displayed at G R O U P : A c t u a l S e t t i n g G r o u p
(‘M+T/Meas/Log/' folder).
Checking distance
protection
Before checking the distance protection function, set an adequate pre-fault time
(> 11 periods at nominal voltage) in order to ensure exact synchronization of the voltage
memory.
In order to check the distance protection function the value at D I S T : I > S G x must
be exceeded. Commonly, double the operate threshold is used. At the same time, one
needs to take into account that, at low voltages, the load blinding by the angles
D I S T : B e t a n A n g l e S G x and D I S T : G a m m a n A n g l e S G x is reduced.
Furthermore, the signal at the binary signal input configured for

M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T must have a logic value of 0 before checking all the
distance zones.
Characteristics
With the P438, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern calculation of
the testing impedances. Functional testing at significant fault angles (for example, 0°,
line impedance angle, 90°), in each case at the zone boundary (tripping impedances
+5% or -5%), is recommended.
Checking the voltage

memory
The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination.
The voltage memory is enabled if the following two conditions are satisfied for at least
11 periods (minimum synchronization time):
The voltage is above 0.65 Vn.

The frequency is in the range 0.95 fn < f < 1.05 fn.
With the starting, the voltage memory is decoupled and the stored voltage can be used
for directional measurement for 6 s maximum.
9-8 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the Switch On To

Fault protection function
In order to check the 'switch on to fault protection' function, the signal at the binary signal
input configured for M A I N : M a n u a l C l o s e E X T must have a logic value of 1.
During the set time S O T F : M a n . C l o s e t i m e r S G x , tripping proceeds either with
general starting or with operation of the dynamic reach stage of distance protection -
depending on the operating mode setting at S O T F : O p e r a t i n g M o d e S G x .
Checking VT and CT
Supervision
The voltage-measuring circuit are monitored. Operation of the monitoring functions can
be observed by selecting the logic state signals C & V T S : V T S V o l t s F a i l u r e
(M+T/Meas/Log/' folder). The monitoring signals can also be entered into the monitoring
signal memory and identified by reading out the monitoring signal memory.
Undervoltage monitoring operates if there is no general starting (the distance protection

starting or the overcurrent protection starting can be avoided by a zero current supply)
and the voltage falls below the operate value.
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
Fuse failure monitoring (VT

supervision)
Fuse failure monitoring identifies a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit by the
monitoring of current and voltage in the absence of general starting. If the voltage falls
below the operate threshold of the undervoltage limit, a sudden voltage decrease without
a sudden current increase has to be detected at the same time.
When checking the function, the current operate value of D I S T : I > S G x should not
be exceeded.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking backup
overcurrent-time protection
The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) – provided it has been
appropriately set – is brought about by the internal measuring-circuit monitoring function
or, if the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker trips, by the binary input signal
MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT.
If the current exceeds the threshold operate value set at B U O C : I > S G x , then the
timer stage is started. After the set time delay (B U O C : t I > S G x ) has elapsed, the
P438 trips. The second stage of the BUOC function operates in the same manner.
Checking definite-time
In order to check definite-time overcurrent protection, appropriate test currents are
applied. If the current exceeds the threshold operate value set at D T O C : I > S G x ,
then the timer stage is started. Once the set delay D T O C : t I > S G x has elasped, the
P438 issues a trip. The second DTOC stage is equivalent.
In order to check the instantaneous high-current stage DTOC: I > H S G x , an

adequately high current should be added at maximum amplitude after an appropriate
preceding event. Accelerated tripping can only result if the associated time delay
DTOC: t I > H S G x has been set to zero delay.
Caution! Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance

with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter
entitled 'Technical Data')
Checking inverse-time
In order to check inverse-time overcurrent protection, appropriate test currents are
applied. The tripping times are determined by the set tripping characteristics (see
Chapter 3 'Operation').

Testing the voltage-time

protection function
In order to check the voltage-time protection function, appropriate test voltages are
applied. If the voltage exceeds the set operate value V < > : V > S G x or falls below
the set operate value V < > : V < S G x then the associated timer stage is started.
Once the set time delay V < > : t V > S G x or V < > : t V < S G x has elapsed, the
P438 issues a trip. The second stage of the V<> function operates in the same manner.
If using the window function for the undervoltage is used, the voltage must not fall below
the set minimum value V < > : V m i n S G x .
9-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the thermal

overload protection
function
In order to test the thermal overload protection function, first reset the thermal replica
T H E R M : R e s e t R e p l i c a U S E R in the 'M+T/C+Test/' folder.
The test should be carried out with maximum coolant temperature. The test current
(value ≥ 0.1 Iref) should be applied abruptly. In accordance with the set test current,
tripping by the thermal overload protection function is issued in keeping with the
calculations set out in Chapter 3 'Operation'.

Checking circuit breaker

failure protection
Check circuit breaker failure protection by blocking the main-trip or re-trip function
(M A I N : B l o c k . M a i n T r i p U S E R or M A I N : B l o c k . R e T r i p U S E R in the
'Set/Func/Glob/' folder). Once the protection criterion has been formed, the Re-trip or
Back-trip command generation can be tested.
Completion of
commissioning
Before the protection device is released for operation, the user should make sure that
the following steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l R e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
R e c o r d i n g , both in ‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(O U T P : U S E R O u t p . r e l . B l o c k , ‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(M A I N : T r i p C m d . B l o c k . U S E R , ‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Protection has been activated (‘on’).
(M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n E n a b l e d , ‘Set/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H 1) should be on.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9-11

9-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for their elimination. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases of
doubt it is better to return the P438 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled ‘Unpacking and Packing’ in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the user interface (HMI).

Check that the supply voltage is present at the device connection points.
Check that the value of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P438 is protected
against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P438 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is O.K.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required Fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5-250V

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2-250V
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P438 issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H 3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the
section entitled ‘Monitoring Signal Memory Readout’ in Chapter 6). The table below
lists possible monitoring or alarm indications (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at C H E C K : F c t A s s i g n . F a u l t , the faulty area, the P438
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Alarm' and
'Blocked/Faulty'.
CHECK: Alarm (LED) 036 070
Alarm configured for LED H3.

CHECK: Alarm (Relay) 036 100
Alarm configured for an output relay.
Key
-:
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Alarm' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/Faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t A s s i g n F a u l t .
2)
: The 'Alarm' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at C H E C K : F c t . A s s i g n . A l a r m .
CHECK: Cold Restart 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Alarm' output relay: Yes / Yes
‘Blocked/Faulty’ output relay: Yes / Yes
CHECK: Cold Rest /SW Update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
CHECK: Blocking /HW Failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Alarm' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty 041 200
Multiple signaling: output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -

'Blocked/Faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
CHECK: Hardware Clock Fail 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

‘Blocked/Faulty’ output relay: -/-
CHECK: Battery Failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

'Blocked/Faulty' output relay: -/-
CHECK: Invalid SW DnLoaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
The + 24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
CHECK: -15V Supply Faulty 093 080
The - 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Module in wrong slot.
Defective module in slot x.

10-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Module A DPR Faulty 093 070
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

CHECK: Module A RAM Faulty 093 071
RAM fault on communication module A.

CHECK: Module Y DPR Faulty 093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

CHECK: Module Y RAM Faulty 093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.

CHECK: IRIGB Faulty 093 117
Although the IRIGB interface is enabled, there is no plausible input signal.

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

10-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)

Output relay K xxxx defective.

CHECK: Undefined Op Code 093 010
Undefined operation code, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Invalid Op. 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Undefined Interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt, i.e. software error.
CHECK: Exception Oper.Syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Protection Failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.
CHECK: Checksum Sett Error 090 003
A checksum error involving the settings in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.
CHECK: Clock Sync. Error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

CHECK: Interm Volt Fail RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the
processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus
module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the
fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all
records are deleted.
CHECK: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

CHECK: Semaph. MT_RC Block. 093 015
Software overloaded.

CHECK: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

10-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers. Y 093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module has been downloaded.

CHECK: Time-out Module Y 093 112
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog module. It

has detected an error.

CHECK: M.c.b. Trip V 098 000
The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of distance protection,

direction measurement of
inverse-time overcurrent
protection and time-voltage
protection, and switching to
backup overcurrent-time
protection, if applicable
2)
CHECK: Wrong Set. DIST Rg4 098 007
CHECK: Wrong Set. DIST Rg4' 098 008
The set value Rg is too high and no closed tripping characteristic can be
determined.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Distance protection blocking.

CHECK: Undervoltage 098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.

'Alarm' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
CHECK: VTS/FF V Triggered 098 021
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: VTS Volts Failure 098 017
Multiple signaling: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

CHECK: Match fact. DFRST inv. 098 033
The amplitude matching factor of the defrost protection is invalid.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Defrost protection blocking.

CHECK: CTA Error 098 034
Coolant temperature acquisition (PT100 or 20mA input) is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Use of preset coolant

temperature or blocking of
the THERM function.
CHECK: Setting Error THERM 098 035
Selection of the thermal model not defined properly.

CHECK: Setting Error CBM 098 020
An invalid characteristic has been set for the circuit breaker monitoring
function.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
CHECK: CB No. CB Op. > 098 066
The maximum number of the circuit breaker operations has been exceeded.

detected.
CHECK: Remain No. CB op. < 098 067
The remaining number of the circuit breaker operations at nominal current

has fallen below the set threshold.

detected.
10-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: CB –Itrip > 098 068
The maximum ruptured current sum has been exceeded.

detected.
CHECK: CB –Itrip**2 > 098 069
The maximum ruptured current squared sum has been exceeded.

detected.
CHECK: CB tmax> Cat 098 070
CHECK: CB tmax> Fdr 098 071
The maximum opening time of a circuit breaker contact has been exceeded.
The opening time is not calculated for this contact

detected.
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

detected.
CHECK: Invalid Scaling IDC 093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
CHECK: PT100 Open Circuit 098 024
The P438 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer.

detected.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Overload 20 mA Input 098 025
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.

detected.
CHECK: Open Circ. 20mA Inp. 098 026
The P438 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

detected.
CHECK: Inv Inp f Clock Sync 093 120
The minute pulse has been assigned to an unsuitable binary input.

detected.
CHECK: Communic.Fault COMM3 093 140
Since the last complete and correct message was received the time period
set at C O M M 3 : T i m e - O u t C o m m . F a u l t has been exceeded and
the signals received are returned to their user-defined default values.

CHECK: Hardware Error COMM3 093 143
A hardware error with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface

(communication Interface 3) has been detected.

CHECK: Comm.Link Fail.COMM3 093 142
The time period set at C O M M 3 : T i m e - O u t L i n k F a i l . to detect a

complete failure of the transmission channel has elapsed and the signals
received are returned to their user-defined default values.

CHECK: Lim.Exceed.,Tel.Err. 093 141
The threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t T e l e g r . E r r o r s has been exceeded

and the signals received are returned to their user-defined default values.

10-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
CHECK: Invalid SW Vers DHMI 093 145
Incorrect or invalid software to operate the detachable serial HMI has been
downloaded.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart/Device blocking

'Blocked/Faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
CHECK: Wrong Setting F.loc 098 200
The line section used to determine the fault location was configured
incorrectly.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: The fault location is not
determined, the measured
value is issued as
Not Measured.
These logic outputs can be included in the list of alarm signals by selection
at C H E C K : F c t A s s i g n . A l a r m . The alarm signals are also
recorded in the monitoring signal memory.

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 10-13

10-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The P438 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. With operating
temperatures of +45 °C inside the device the required maintenance interval may be
extended by one year.
The P438 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock!
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note: Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used

(see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2 P438/EN M/Ad7-S // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and the
battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing

The P438 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P438 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of sub-functions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the device’s general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary opto inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘M+T/Meas/IO’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
11-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘M+T/C+Test/’ folder).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 11-5

11-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of

-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that
neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P438 for approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges
rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the
power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents
of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately!
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 12-1

12-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P438 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5-250V
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2-250 V
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84TE frame 88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 13-1

13-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
14 Order Information
The P438 (as described here with software version -615) is available with two different
hardware variants. The order information is given separately in sections 14.1 and 14.2
below.
The notices below apply to both variants:
Notice
2) Switching is by parameter, the default setting is underlined!
4) Second language provided is in brackets.
5) For the 84TE version only
8) The standard variant is recommended where a higher switching threshold is not
expressly required
17) High impedance protection (DELTA) function requires fitting of the optional
processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 14-1

(continued)
14.1 Hardware Variant -305
Design options
Order information MiCOM P438
Rail catenary protection device P438- 0 2 -305 -4xx -615 -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 -409
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, 7 -410
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -411
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9
Processor extension, Current and voltage transformers
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (3-pole T1...T3) 2) 17) 8 2
and Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (2-pole)
2)
Without DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (3-pole T1...T3) 9 2
and Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (2-pole)
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
With 3 binary modules (add. 18 binary inputs and 24 output relays) 5) 3
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:
VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays A
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC B
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 4 high break contacts C
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts D
Further add. options:
Without 0
With analog module 2
14-2 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

(continued)
Further options
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension No.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) 8) -461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) 8) -462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) 8) -463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) -464
With communication / information interface:
Without Without order extension No.
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC61850, single connection -94
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95
For connection to glass fiber 820 nm Multimode, ST connector 4
Language:
English (German) 4) Without order extension No.
German (English) 4) -801
4)
French (English) Not yet available - on request -802
Spanish (English) 4) Not yet available - on request -803
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

4) Second included language in brackets
5) For 84TE version only
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
17) High impedance fault detection (DELTA) requires DSP-Coprocessor
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 14-3

(continued)
14.2 Hardware Variant -307
Design options
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 -412
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, 7 -413
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -414
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9
Processor extension, Current and voltage transformers

2) 17)
With DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (3-pole T1...T3) 8 2
and Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (2-pole)
Without DSP-Coprocessor, Inom = 1 A / 5 A (3-pole T1...T3) 2) 9 2
and Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (2-pole)
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
5)
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:

VA,nom = 24 … 60 VDC E
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC F
VA,nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor G
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC H
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC and 6 output relays J
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays K
VA,nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays L
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC M
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA,nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts N
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts O
Further add. options:

Without 0
With analog module 2
14-4 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

(continued)
Further options
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension No.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) 8) -461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) 8) -462
8)
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) -463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) 8) -464
With communication / information interface:
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC61850, single connection -94
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
Protocol IEC61850, redundant connection -98

For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, SHP 1
For connection to Mbit/s MHz Ethernet, glass fiber ST, RSTP 2
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, dual homing 3
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95
For connection to glass fiber 820 nm Multimode, ST connector 4
Language:
4)
English (German) Without order extension No.
German (English) 4) -801
French (English) 4) Not yet available - on request -802
4)
Spanish (English) Not yet available - on request -803
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

4) Second included language in brackets
5) For 84TE version only
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
17) High impedance fault detection (DELTA) requires DSP-Coprocessor
18) Communication option required for control function
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 14-5

14-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
Appendix
A Glossary
B Signal List
C Overview of Changes
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 AP-1

Appendix
(continued)
A Glossary A-1
A1 Function Groups A-1
A2 Modules A-2
A3 Symbols A-3
A4 Examples of Signal Names A-10
A5 Symbols Used A-11
B List of Signals B-1

B1 Internal Signal Names B-1
B2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5- B-3
101 (Companion Standard)
B 2.1 Interoperability B-3
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) B-3
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-4
B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-5
B 2.1.4 Application Layer B-6
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions B-12
B3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 B-15
B 3.1 Interoperability B-15
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer B-15
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface B-15
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface B-15
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate B-15
B 3.1.2 Link Layer B-16
B 3.1.3 Application Layer B-16
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data B-16
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU B-16
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor B-16
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction B-16
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction B-17
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor B-18
Direction
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-19
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-20
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction B-22
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction B-22
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction B-23
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control B-24
Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction B-24
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction B-24
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction B-25
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions B-26
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous B-26
Ap-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Appendix
(continued)
C Overview of Changes C-1

P438-301-401/402-601 C-1
P438-301-401/402-602 C-1
P438-301-401/402-603 C-1
P438-301-401/402-603-701 C-3
P438-301-401/402-603-702 C-4
P438-301-401/402-603-703 C-4
P438-301-401/402-604 C-4
P438-301-401/402-604-704 C-5
P438-301-401/402-604-705 C-5
P438-301-401/402-605 C-5
P438-301-401/402-605-706 C-6
P438-301-401/402-605-707 C-6
P438-301-401/402-605-708 C-6
P438-301-401/402-606 C-6
P438-302-403/404/405-607 C-9
P438-302-403/404/405-608 C-10
P438-303-406/407/408-610 C-11
P438-304-409/410/411-611 C-13
P438-304-409/410/411-611-709 C-14
P438-304-409/410/411-612 C-14
P438-305-409/410/411-613 C-15
P438-306-412/413/414 -612-710 C-18
P438-307-412/413/414-613 C-18
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 AN-3

Ap-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
Appendix A - Glossary
A1 Function Groups
Data Model Regional Language Data Model Reference Language

(as used in this manual)
BUOC: Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection BUOC: Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection
C&VTS: VT and CT Supervision MCMON: Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
CBF: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection CBF: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
CBM: Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Circuit Breaker Monitoring
CHECK: Self-Monitoring SFMON: Self-Monitoring
COMM1: “Logical” Communication Interface 1 COMM1: “Logical” Communication Interface 1
(InterMiCOM) (InterMiCOM)
DELTA: High-Impedance Protection DELTA: High-Impedance Protection
DFRST: Defrost Protection DFRST: Defrost Protection
DIST: Distance Protection DIST: Distance Protection
DTOC: Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection DTOC: Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
DVICE: Device DVICE: Device
F_KEY: Function Keys F_KEY: Function Keys
FT_DA: Fault Data Acquisition FT_DA: Fault Data Acquisition
GOOSE: Generic Object Oriented Substation Event GOOSE: Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
GROUP: Setting Group Selection PSS: Parameter Subset Selection
GSSE: Generic Substation State Event GSSE: Generic Substation State Event
HMI: User Interface LOC: Local Control Panel
IDMT: Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection IDMT: Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
IEC: Communication Interface IEC 61850 IEC: Communication Interface IEC 61850
INP: Binary Input INP: Binary Input
IRIGB: IRIG-B Interface IRIGB: IRIG-B Interface
LED: LED Indicator LED: LED Indicator
LIMIT: Limit Value Monitoring LIMIT: Limit Value Monitoring
LOGIC: Logic LOGIC: Logic
mA_OP: Measured Data Output MEASO: Measured Data Output
MAIN: Main Function MAIN: Main Function
MT_RC: Monitoring Signal Recording MT_RC: Monitoring Signal Recording
OL_DA: Overload Data Acquisition OL_DA: Overload Data Acquisition
OL_RC: Overload Recording OL_RC: Overload Recording
OP_RC: Operating Data Recording OP_RC: Operating Data Recording
OSCIL: Fault Recording FT_RC: Fault Recording
OUTP: Binary Output OUTP: Binary Output
PC: PC Link PC: PC Link
RECLS Auto-Reclose Control ARC: Auto-Reclosing Control
RTDmA: Measured Data Input MEASI: Measured Data Input
SOTF: Switch on to Fault Protection SOTF: Switch on to Fault Protection
THERM: Thermal Overload Protection THERM: Thermal Overload Protection
V<>: Under- and Overvoltage Protection V<>: Under- and Overvoltage Protection
P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615 A-1

(continued)
A2 Modules
A: Communication module
B: Bus module
L: HMI Module
P: Processor module
T: Transformer module
V: Power supply module
X: Binary I/O module
Y: Analog I/O module
A-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
A3 Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams
Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12:
modified 1991
Analog information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January 1981
To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been
used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other
flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the
signal flow, output signals on the right side.
Symbol General Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of

related elements, contours of the elements may be
joined or cascaded if the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose

= common contour line is oriented in the signal flow
direction.
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations
with two or more signal flow directions, such as for
symbols with a control block and an output block.
There exists at least one logical link between elements

whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the
signal flow direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination
and one or more qualifiers.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 A-3

(continued)
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to
several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of
several trigger elements, for example.
Output block
An output block contains an output function common
to several symbols.
Settable control block

MAIN: Inom Device The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address
[ 010 003 ] under which the function shown in the text is
D5Z08X5B
implemented.
Settable control block with function blocks

MAIN: Inom Device The digits in the function block show the settings that
[ 010 003 ] are possible for this function.
1.0 The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding
5.0 unit or meaning to each setting.
1.0: 1.0 A
5.0: 5.0 A
D5Z08X6B
A-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
State input
Only the state of the binary input variable is read.
Rising edge-triggered input

Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 causes
operation.
Negation of an output
The value up to the boundary line is negated at the
output.
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the boundary line.
Falling edge-triggered input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 causes
operation.
AND element
The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables
are 1.
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input
variable is 1.
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input
variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be
replaced by any other number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input
variable is 1.
The number in the symbol may be replaced by any

other number if the number of inputs is increased or
decreased accordingly.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 A-5

(continued)
Delay element
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs
after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding
transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values

(in seconds or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
The output variable will be 1 if the input variable
changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for
100 ms, regardless of the duration of the input value
1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-

flop is retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be

changed to any other dwell time duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary
signal.
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the
two input variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the
minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal
exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable
remains 1 until the input signal drops below the
threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
A-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse
sequence is generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse

sequence starts with the input variable transition
(synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse
sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the
input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is
also 1.
Band pass filter

The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of
the input signals. All other frequencies (above and
below 50 Hz) are attenuated.
Counter
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to
1 are counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable
from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive
in general, here a relay, for example.
Signal level converter

with electrical isolation between input and output.
L+ = pos. voltage input
L- = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 A-7

(continued)
Input transducer
with conductor and device identifiers
(according to DIN EN 60445)
Conductor identifiers for current inputs:

for A: A1 and A2
for B: B1 and B2
for C: C1 and C2
for N: N1 and N2
Conductor identifiers for voltage inputs

via transformer 1:
for A: 1U
for B: 1V
for C: 1W
for N: 1N
via transformer 2:
for A: 2U
for B: 2V
Device identifiers for current transformers:

for A: T1
for B: T2
for C: T3
for N: T4
for voltage transformer 1:
for A: T5
for B: T6
for C: T7
for N: T8
for VG-N transformer: T90
for voltage transformer 2:
for A: T15
Change-over contact
with device identifier
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement
(‘closed-circuit operation’).
A-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
PC interface
with pin connections
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication
of the two input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of
the two input variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) are equal to the function in the function
block.
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input
variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 A-9

(continued)
A4 Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter 3 as follows:
Signal Name General Description
OSCIL: Fault recording n Internal signal names are not coded by a data model
305 100
address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a
diamond. The small figure underneath the signal
name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are
listed in Appendix B.
DIST: VNG>> triggered Signal names coded by a data model address are
[ 036 015 ] represented by their address (shown in square
brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.
MAIN: General Reset BED A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its
[ 003 002 ] signal name, address, and the setting preceded by
1: Execute the setting arrow.
A-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
A5 Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I Complex current
Z Complex impedance
Z Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
δ Temperature in °C
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a

defined current and a defined voltage.
τ Time constant
∆T Temperature difference in K (oC)
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 A-11

A-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
Appendix B - Signal List
(continued)
B 1 Internal Signal Names
Internal signal names are not associated to an external address.

In the block (logic) diagrams they are marked with a square (—).
Internal Signal Figure No.

C&VTS: V< triggered Fig. 3-123
COMM1: Selected protocol Fig. 3-6
DELTA: Vmin triggered Fig. 3-117
DIST: Blocking Fig. 3-92
DIST: Enable t2S Fig. 3-108
DIST: Forward direction Fig. 3-97
DIST: Reverse direction Fig. 3-97
DTOC: I> forward-direct. Fig. 3-155
DTOC: I> non-directional Fig. 3-155
DTOC: I> reverse-direct. Fig. 3-155
DTOC: I> Starting Fig. 3-153
DTOC: I>> forward-direct. Fig. 3-156
DTOC: I>> non-directional Fig. 3-156
DTOC: I>> reverse-direct. Fig. 3-156
DTOC: I>> triggered Fig. 3-153
DTOC: V < V< (I>) Fig. 3-155
DTOC: V < V< (I>>) Fig. 3-156
FT_DA: Outp. fault location Fig. 3-82
FT_DA: Save measured values Fig. 3-81
IDMT: Forward trip Fig. 3-166
IDMT: Iref> Triggered Fig. 3-164
IDMT: Non-directional trip Fig. 3-166
IDMT: Reverse trip Fig. 3-166
IDMT: V < V< Fig. 3-166
IDMT: V > Vmin Fig. 3-166
mA_OP: Enable Fig. 3-31
mA_OP: Reset meas.val.outp. Fig. 3-32
MAIN: Blck. 1 sel.functions Fig. 3-53
MAIN: Blck. 2 sel.functions Fig. 3-53
MAIN: Hardware fault Fig. 3-41, -42, -43,-44......
MAIN: I(2fn)/I(fn Fig. 3-42
MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg Fig. 3-51
MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3-48
MAIN: Reset LED Fig. 3-68
MAIN: Time tag Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Voltage mem. enabled Fig. 3-52,
MAIN: ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) Fig. 3-42
RECLS: CB closed Fig. 3-134
RECLS: HSR trip time elapsed Fig. 3-135, 3-138, 3-140, 3-
142
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-1

(continued)
RECLS: HSR-tr.DIST t1 runn. Fig. 3-143 3-149

RECLS: t1 running Fig. 3-143
RECLS: TDR trip time elapsed Fig. 3-136, 3-139, 3-140, 3-
142
RECLS: TDR-tr.DIST t1 runn. Fig. 3-149
SOTF: AR blocked Fig. 3-131
THERM: Block. by CTA error Fig. 3-174
THERM: cPL * Iref Fig. 3-153
THERM: I Fig. 3-176
THERM: With CTA Fig. 3-174
B-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol
interface for substation control systems.
B 2.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets
are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined
parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given
application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different
manufacturers (“equipment stemming”), then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. 1
Note: The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific
parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured
values.
B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
x Point-to-point configuration x Multipoint-party line
x Multiple point-to-point configuration Multipoint-star
1
See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-3
(continued)
B 2.1.2 Physical Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 2
Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced interface X.24/X.27

interface V.24/V.28 interface V.24/V.28
Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
100 bit/s x 2 400 bit/s 2 400 bit/s 56 000 bit/s
300 bit/s x 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
x 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
x 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2
Unbalanced Unbalanced Balanced interface X.24/X.27

interface V.24/V.28 interface V.24/V.28
Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
300 bit/s x 9 600 bit/s 9 600 bit/s
x 600 bit/s 19 200 bit/s
x 1 200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s
1
2
The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.
B-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
B 2.1.3 Link Layer 1 (Network-Specific Parameters)
Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link
x Balanced transmission x Not present

(balanced transmission only)
x Unbalanced transmission x One octet
x Two octets 2
Frame Length x Structured
240 Maximum length L (number of octets) x Unstructured
1
2
Balanced only.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-5
(continued)
B 2.1.4 Application Layer 1
Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Two octets 1
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Structured
x Two octets x Unstructured
x Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
x One octet x Two octets (with originator address)
1
B-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
Selection of Standard ASDUs
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
x <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
x <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
x <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1

=
x <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1
x <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
x <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
x <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
x <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
x <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
x <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
x <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
<13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
<14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
x <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
x <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-7

(continued)
x <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
x <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag ME_EP_TB_1
x <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1
<20> = Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1
<21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1
B-8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
Process Information in Monitor Direction 1 (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1
x <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1
x <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1
<48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1
<49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
<50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
<51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
1
Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-9
(continued)
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
x <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
x <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1
x <103> = Clock synchronization command 1 C_CS_NA_1
x <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1
<105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
<106> = Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1
1
The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station.
2
B-10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
x <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
x <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
<112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
<113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
<120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1
<121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1
<122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
<123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
<124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
<125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1
<126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-11

(continued)
1
B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions
Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
x Global
x Group 1 x Group 7 x Group 13
x Group 5 x Group 11
x Group 6 x Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined.
Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
x Clock synchronization
1
B-12 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
x Direct command transmission Select and execute command
Direct set point command transmission Select and execute set point command
C_SE ACTTERM used
x No additional definition
Short pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Long pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)
Counter request x General request counter
x Counter freeze without reset x Request counter group 1
Counter freeze with reset x Request counter group 2
Counter reset x Request counter group 3
Addresses per group have to be specified x Request counter group 4
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-13

(continued)
Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
x Threshold value
Smoothing value
Low limit for transmission of measured value
High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
File transfer in monitor direction F_FR_NA_1
File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1
B-14 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
B3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103
This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P438.
B 3.1 Interoperability
B 3.1.1 Physical Layer
B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface
x EIA RS 485
x No. of loads 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of them can be operated on one line. For detailed information
see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface
x Glass fiber
x Plastic fiber
x F-SMA connector
x BFOC/2.5 connector
B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate
x 9 600 bit/s
x 19 200 bit/s
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-15

(continued)
B 3.1.2 Link Layer
There are no selection options for the link layer.
B 3.1.3 Application Layer
B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion
standard.
B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
x One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF General Description
x <0> End of general interrogation
x <0> Time synchronization
x <2> Reset FCB
x <3> Reset CU
x <4> Start / restart
<5> Power on
B-16 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
INF General Description Address Description
<16> Auto-recloser active
<17> Teleprotection active
x <18> Protection active 003 030 MAIN: Protection Enabled
x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER
x <20> Blocking of monitor direction 037 075 COMM1: Sig/Meas. Val.Block
x <21> Test mode 037 071 MAIN: Test mode
<22> Local parameter setting
x <23> Characteristic 1 036 090 GROUP: Group 1 Active
x <27> Auxiliary input 1 034 000 LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-17

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
<32> Measurand supervision I
x <33> Measurand supervision V 038 023 C&VTS: VTS Volts Failure
<35> Phase sequence supervision
x <36>1 Trip circuit supervision 041 200 CHECK: Relay Kxx Faulty
x <37> I>> back-up operation 037 021 BUOC: Active
x <38> VT fuse failure 004 061 MAIN: M.c.b. Trip V EXT
<39> Teleprotection disturbed
x <46> Group warning 036 100 CHECK: Alarm (relay)
x <47> Group alarm 004 065 MAIN: Blocked/Faulty
1
The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals
B-18 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
<48> Earth fault L1
<49> Earth fault L2
<50> Earth fault L3
<51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
<52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-19

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
INF General Description Address Device Description
<64> Start /pick-up L1
<67> Start /pick-up N
x <68> General trip 039 101 MAIN: Main-Trip Signal
<69> Trip L1
<70> Trip L2
<71> Trip L3
x <72> Trip I>> (back-up operation) 036 122 BUOC: Gen Trip Signal
x <73> Fault location X in ohms 004 029 FT_DA: Fault reactance,prim
x <74> Fault forward/line 036 018 MAIN: Fault Forward
x <75> Fault reverse/busbar 036 019 MAIN: Fault Reverse
<76> Teleprotection signal transmitted
<77> Teleprotection signal received
x <78> Level 1 039 016 DIST: Trip Signal Z1/t1
<79> Level 2
<80> Level 3
<81> Level 4
<82> Level 5
<83> Level 6
x <84> General Start 036 000 MAIN: General Start
B-20 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
P438 Designations
INF General Description Address Device Description
<85> Breaker failure
<86> Trip measuring system L1
<89> Trip measuring system E
<90> Trip I>
<91> Trip I>>
<92> Trip IN>
<93> Trip IN>>
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-21

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
<128> CB ‘on’ by AR
<129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR
<130> AR blocked
B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction
P438 Designations
<144> Measurand I
<145> Measurands I, V
<146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
<147> Measurands IN, VEN
<148> Measurands IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3, P, Q, f
B-22 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

(continued)
B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-23

(continued)
B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction
x <0> Initiation of general interrogation
x <0> Time synchronization
B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction
P438 Designations
<16> Auto-recloser on/off
<17> Teleprotection on/off
x <18> Protection on/off 003 030 MAIN: Protection Enabled
x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset Indicat. USER
x <23>1 Activate characteristic 1 003 060 GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER
1
Switches GROUP: Setting Grp Sel USER to "Setting Group SG1"
2
3
4
B-24 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613
(continued)
B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction
<240> Read headings of all defined groups
<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
<243> Read directory of a single entry
<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
<245> General interrogation of generic data
<248> Write entry
<249> Write entry with confirmation
<250> Write entry with execution
<251> Write entry abort
P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 B-25

(continued)
B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions
x Test mode
x Blocking of monitor direction
x Disturbance data
Generic services
x Private data
B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can
be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words,
there is only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value Max. MVAL =

nom. value multiplied by
1.2 or 2.4
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
Voltage L1-E
Voltage L2-E
Voltage L3-E
Active power P
Reactive power Q
Frequency f
Voltage L1-L2
B-26 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Appendix C - Overview of Changes
C P438 Version History
Version Changes
P438-301-401/402-601 Initial product release
Released: 03.12.2001
P438-301-401/402-602 Hardware No changes
Released: 13.02.2002 Diagram No changes
Software
THERM The operating mode setting has been changed.
The setting 022 063 T H ER M : O p e r a ti n g m o d e is replaced by the
following 'yes/no'-selection parameters:
022 064 T H ER M : R e l a ti ve R e p l i c a
022 065 T H ER M : Ab s o l u te R e p l i c a
Thus operating mode-dependent visibility control of the parameters is
possible.
If the absolute replica is used, the alarm threshold can now be set as
absolute temperature (T H ER M : Al a r m te m p e r a tu r e PSx) .
Software
COMM1 If an IEC 60870-5 protocol is used, the T H ER M : T r i p Si g n a l
spontaneous signal is now transmitted via the ASDU 1 (spontaneous
signal without relative time).
FT_DA The calculation of the short circuit impedance and reactance and of the
fault location is now also carried out correctly for In = 5 A.
OSCIL The selection table for record triggering has been extended to include
036 2 5 1 M A I N : G e n T r i p S i g n a l .
MAIN Binary signals
036 051 M AIN : C B C l o s e d Si g . EXT
039 014 M AIN : Sta r t. PIR M a i n - T r i p
039 015 M AIN : Sta r t. PIR R e - T r i p
were initialized every time that the protection device had been switched
to on-line. If the device was, for example, switched to off-/on-line for a
short time, a faulty operation of circuit breaker supervision resulted and
possibly also a start of the testing functions in the substation control
system.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-1

(continued)
Version Changes
DIST New addresses for the visibility control of the characteristics:
022 001 D IST : C i r c l e C h a r Ava i l a b .
022 002 D IST : W PC Z o n e A v a i l a b l e
Modification of the designation text of the angle set values according to
the system requirement of the railway companies:
Old designation New designation
012 013 D IST : a l p h a 1 P S 1 Alpha_L 1 (Poly) SG1
072 208 D IST : b e ta 1 PS1 Be ta 1 An g l e SG 1
076 090 D IST : g a m m a 1 PS1 Al p h a 1 ( C i r c l e ) SG1
076 247 D IST : r h o 1 PS1 G a m m a 1 An g l e SG 1
The characteristic definitions have been changed. If the characteristic
parameters are only relevant for one characteristic type, this is marked
by the addition of “(Circle)” or “(Polygon)” in the designation text.
The tripping area that is defined by Rg is valid only for the circular
characteristic. When making settings, the maximum setting for this value
that has to be taken into account is now the same that the impedance
reach Z of the respective zone in the respective direction. The checking
of the setting limit now takes only place for unblocked zones (Z and Z’) in
all setting groups. The fault in the calculation of the maximum
permissible Rg of the 3rd zone has thus also been eliminated.
The discontinuity recognition functions d/dt have been revised:
 The number of parameters has been drastically reduced:
- The sampling interval duration t is now permanently 1.5 cycles.
- Setting the delta value to 'blocked' now disables the respective
measuring system.
 Also in the operate mode 'OR' the short time is active if there is a
simultaneous blocking of all three measuring systems.
 The dphi/dt measuring has been corrected.
 Signals of individual measuring systems are only issued if the
operating mode dx/dt of the zone is also not set to 'disabled'.
The direction stability has been improved and the tripping time for the
faults in zone 1 has been reduced to 40 ms (if setting t1 = 0 s).
The required minimum voltage for the synchronization of the voltage
memory has been reduced to 0.55 Vn.
The hysteresis for the decision 'direction measurement with voltage
memory' has been extended in order to ensure a stable direction
measurement if there are fault voltages of 10  1 V.
Setting parameter 012 202 D IST : V< L o a d b l i n d e r P S 1 has been
replaced by a permanent threshold of 0.1 Vn.
If the polygonal characteristic is used, a tripping for fault impedances in
the quadrant 4 (in the forward range of the characteristic) is now also
issued even if the reverse direction is blocked.
The maximum reach of the third zone has been extended to 700.0 .
C-2 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
C&VTS Fuse failure monitoring has been accelerated so that unwanted distance
protection operation can also be prevented when the load current has
exceeded the low-end threshold I> of the distance measuring system.
The default set value of the enabling threshold
(C &VT S: V< VT S/F u s e F a i l SG x) has been increased to 0.65 Vn.
The 038 023 C &VT S: VT S Vo l ts F a i l u r e signal is issued when the
M.C.B. trip of the binary input is triggered, even if C&VTS is disabled or
not enabled in the active setting group.
NOT When the current threshold is exceeded the start of the timer stages only
takes place after the enabling of the backup overcurrent-time protection.
SOTF Processing of the function in the 'trip with start' operating mode has been
optimized so that shorter typical tripping times, < 45 ms, are obtained.
DTOC The time tagging of the signals resulting from instantaneous high-current
tripping has been improved. This concerns the following signals:
035 022 D T O C : Sta r ti n g I> H
040 076 D T O C : T r i p Si g n a l t I > H
036 000 M AIN : G e n e r a l S t a r t
036 251 M AIN : G e n T r i p Si g n a l
039 101 M AIN : M a i n - T r i p Si g n a l
039 011 M AIN : M a i n - T r i p C o m m a n d
The reset mode has been improved so that reset times represent a
maximum of one cycle (measured in the event of a current decrease
from double the operate value to 0).
DFRST The setting range of operate values D IF _ X: Id > SG x has been
extended to 0.01...1.00 In.
THERM The function's competition problem at start-up initialization has been
corrected. The incorrectly issued 039 110
T H ER M : Se tti n g Er r o r ,Bl o c k . alarm is no longer displayed.
LOGIC Signals L O G IC : R e s e t 6 EXT and L O G IC : R e s e t 8 EXT are
now available in the selection table for the configuration of the binary
inputs.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-3

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-301-401/402-603-701 Hardware No changes
Software
C&VTS The minimum current enabling threshold of the undervoltage and fuse
failure monitoring has been unified to 0.05 In.
The current discontinuity recognition now operates even when the
current decreases.
A detected fuse failure condition is only reset if the measured voltage
exceeds the C &VT S: V> VT S/F u s e F a i l SG x threshold and if
simultaneously a minimum current of 0.05 In flows.
THERM The competition problem of the function in the start-up initialization has
been corrected. The incorrectly issued alarm 039 110
T H ER M : Se tti n g Er r o r ,Bl o c k . is no longer displayed.
Software
C&VTS Bug fixing:
Fuse failure monitoring was enabled too early during device initialization,
which caused unwanted starting.
THERM The dead time for very fast alterations of the coolant temperature has
been extended to 1.5 s in order to correct competition problems with
measuring-circuit monitoring of the analog module (for example the 040
190 R T D m A: PT 1 0 0 F a u l t y signal was not always issued in time in
order to exclude an unwanted operation).
Software
CHECK Bug fixing:
When using the analog module, the 093 112 C H EC K: T i m e - o u t
M o d u l e Y time-out fault occurred after approx. 24.8 days.
C-4 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
Software
OP_RC The list of the following entries has been modified as follows.
Those added:
038 073 T H ER M : 2 PL Se l e c t. Exte r n .
040 145 L IM IT : tV> > & tV< < El a p s e d
040 197 L IM IT : tf> > El a p s e d
004 062 L IM IT : tI> > El a p s e d
Those removed:
039 076 M AIN : Po w e r F l o w F o r w a r d
039 077 M AIN : Po w e r F l o w R e ve r s e
041 085 D IST : W r o n g S e t t i n g R g , x
040 170 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g T >
040 171 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g T > >
040 174 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g T <
040 175 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g T < <
040 180 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g ID C ,l i n >
040 181 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g ID C ,l i n > >
040 184 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g ID C ,l i n <
040 185 L IM IT : Sta r ti n g ID C ,l i n < <
Thus the LIMIT stages do not enter starting signals, but only the
signal “timer stage elapsed”.
MAIN Bug fixing:
The nominal current setting value for 010 017
M AIN : Id fr s t,n o m D e vi c e was initialized to the default set value of
1 A at each start-up of the device.
DTOC The DTOC Protection is now able to operate in directional mode.
IDMT The IDMT Protection is now able to operate in directional mode.
Software
CHECK Bug fixing:
The monitoring timer of the analog module was incorrectly initialized in
version –604 when switching the nominal frequency, which caused the
093 112 C H EC K: T i m e - o u t M o d u l e Y alarm to be issued.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-5

(continued)
Version Changes
Software
RTDmA Open-circuit monitoring of the 20 mA input and the “PT 100” input has
been improved. The plausibility check of displayed measured variables
was extended.
THERM The plausibility check of the “PT 100” measurement was cancelled and
now occurs exclusively in function group RTDmA.
Software
MAIN An inrush detection function, operating with the second harmonic of the
phase current, has been added in order to prevent unwanted tripping
signals issued by the catenary protection device when autotransformers
are switched on or circuit breakers on locomotives are closed. Blocking
of each protection function may be set individually, when an inrush
occurrence is detected.
DIST Bug fixing:
Up to version –604-70x a starting of the protection caused by wrong
phase coupling was not evaluated and signaled. The protection did not
issue a trip signal.
C&VTS The minimum current enable thresholds for undervoltage protection and
fuse failure monitoring are now set via mutual parameters at 014 188
C&VTS: I> Enab V< FuseF SGx.
External blocking of undervoltage protection and fuse failure monitoring
have been added.
Minimum hold-time for fuse failure monitoring is now set at 125 ms
(previously 250 ms).
C-6 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-301-401/402-605-706 This version has no release!
Release: ----
Software
MAIN Bug fixing:
Up to version –605 there was an occasional changeover to In = 5 A
which was observed when the secondary nominal current was set to
In = 1 A, without this changeover being apparent from the device
parameter setting. The fact that such a changeover had taken place
could only be observed by reading the measured operating values.
In order to suppress this mal-functioning a cyclic refreshing of the
secondary nominal current, according to the device parameter setting,
has been introduced.
COMM1(2) The new communication software version 3.17 has been introduced.
With this version the intermittent interruptions of telegrams during
communication per IEC 60870-5-101 protocol no longer occur.
Software
C&VTS Bug fixing:
Up to version –605–707 undervoltage protection was blocked when no
current was measured and the 014 188 C &VT S: I> E n a b V <
F u s e F SG x minimum current enabling threshold was set to 0.00 x In.
Release: 27.01.2006 Diagram No changes
Software
MAIN The close command to the circuit breaker may now be generated from
the front panel user interface (HMI) or via binary signal inputs as well as
through auto-reclose control (RECLS).
It is now possible to select whether the close command is to be
terminated by the 'Closed' position status signal by setting 015 042
MAIN: ClCmd Inhib.by CB Cl.
The binary input function 044 131 M AIN : C B T r i p EXT has been
implemented.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-7

(continued)
Version Changes
CHECK A number of device bugs previously led to a blocking with the second
entry to the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was
already stored in the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the
Technical Manual). This reaction was changed in such a manner that
device blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the same
device fault lies within a set "memory retention time" (021 018
C H E C K : M o n . S i g . R e t e n t i o n ). This makes it possible to tolerate
sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the
monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this
new feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the
fault.
DIST Factors for the zone extension function
D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d H S R S G x and
D I S T : k z e E x t e n d e d T D R S G x are now only applied in conjunction
with auto-reclose control RECLS.
Setting D IST : k z e SO T F /EXT SG x was introduced in order to
enable zone extension via a binary signal input (036 046
D I S T : Z o n e E x t e n s i o n E X T ) or the switch on to fault protection
(SOTF) function.
SOTF This function may now be blocked by a binary signal input,
SOTF: Blocking EXT.
Additionally a blocking signal is sent to auto-recloser (RECLS) during the
manual close time period.
RECLS Auto-reclose control, function group RECLS, has been implemented. It
is now possible to have automatic reclosures consisting of one high-
speed reclosure and up to 9 time-delayed reclosures.
For each tripping function the RECLS function range allows the selection
that the type of fault will permit reclosure or not. Moreover it is possible
to block the function for high current faults.
THERM All parameters associated with coolant temperature acquisition are
hidden if analog module Y has not been fitted to the device. The function
operates with a default coolant temperature.
The further operation may now be selected when there is a CTA failure.
076 177 T H ER M : F u n c t . f . C T A F a i l . S G x
A minimum coolant temperature may be set for the power feed of
catenary sections situated in long tunnels:
076 178 T H ER M : M i n i m u m T e m p e r a t.SG x
The following parameter has been deleted:
072 178 T H ER M : Bl k fo r C T A F a i l SG x
CBM Circuit breaker monitoring, function group CBM, has been implemented.
The permitted remaining number of CB operations at nominal current is
calculated and presented phase selectively and within the framework of
CB state evaluation according to the settable circuit breaker wear
characteristic.
The disconnection currents (ruptured current, and also its square) and
the current-time area integrals for each disconnection are phase-
selectively evaluated and accumulated.
C-8 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
mA_OP The listing of possible entries for the analog measured data output with
either BCD or 20 mA (outputs A-1 & A-2) has been extended.
The following measured values may now be additionally output:
005 004 MAIN: L o a d I m p e d a n c e Z p . u
005 005 MAIN: L o a d I m p e d Z P r i m .
005 000 MAIN: L o a d I m p e d a n c e Z S e c
005 196 MAIN: L o a d R e a c t X P r i m .
005 195 MAIN: L o a d R e a c t a n c e X S e c
005 198 MAIN: L o a d R e s i s t . R P r i m .
005 197 MAIN: L o a d R e s i s t . R S e c
004 053 MAIN: R e a c . Po w e r Q p .u .
004 052 MAIN: R e a c . Po w e r Q p r i m .
004 070 MAIN: F r e q u e n c y f p . u .
004 166 MAIN: L o a d F l o w D i r e c t i o n
004 167 MAIN: L o a d A n g l e p h i
004 078 MAIN: L o a d A n g l e p h i p . u .
004 113 MAIN: Vo l t a g e V p . u .
004 112 MAIN: Vo l t a g e V P r i m .
004 111 MAIN: C u r r e n t I p .u .
004 110 MAIN: C u r r e n t I Pr i m .
004 051 MAIN: Ac ti ve Po w e r P p .u .
005 040 MAIN: Ac ti ve Po w e r P Pr i m .
004 054 MAIN: Ac ti ve Po w e r F a c to r
009 087 CBM:  I * t C a t
009 061 CBM: I* t C a t
009 088 CBM:  I * t F d r
009 062 CBM: I* t F d r
009 071 CBM:  I t r i p C a t
009 047 CBM: Itr i p C a t
009 073 CBM:  I t r i p F d r
009 048 CBM: Itr i p C a t
009 077 CBM:  I t r i p * * 2 C a t
009 051 CBM: Itr i p * * 2 C a t
009 078 CBM:  I t r i p * * 2 F d r
009 052 CBM: Itr i p * * 2 C a t
009 212 CBM: Itr i p ,Pr i m C a t
009 213 CBM: Itr i p ,Pr i m F d r
004 221 RTDmA: T e m p e r a tu r e p .u .
004 022 FT_DA: F a u l t L o c a ti o n
004 027 FT_DA: F a u l t L o c a t. Pe r c e n t
004 177 FT_DA: Id fr s t p .u .
004 176 FT_DA: F a u l t Im p e d a n c e , P r i m
004 023 FT_DA: F a u l t Im p e d a n c e , S e c .
004 029 FT_DA: F a u l t R e a c ta n c e ,Pr i m
004 028 FT_DA: F a u l t R e a c ta n c e ,Se c .
004 026 FT_DA: F a u l t Vo l t a g e p . u .
004 025 FT_DA: F a u l t C u r r e n t p .u .
004 023 FT_DA: F a u l t L o o p A n g l e
004 198 FT_DA: F a u l t D e te r m i n a ti o n
004 178 THERM: C o o l a n t T e m p . p .u .
004 179 THERM: O b j e c t T e m p . p .u .
004 017 THERM: T h e r m . R e p l i c a p .u .
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-9

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-302-403/404/405-607 Hardware The device’s case size 40TE has been released.
Released: 01.06.2006 Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold are now available.
Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires
such binary signal inputs.
Diagram The new terminal connection diagram is now available for device variant
40TE.
Designation texts for binary signal inputs and output relays have been
changed to comply to the Px3x standard, i.e. a designation is now made
up out of the slot number (1 or 2 digits) and a listing number (2 digits).
Example: K2001 instead of K201 (= first output relay at slot number 20).
These new connection diagrams are now valid:
 P438.403 (for 40TE case,
transformer module: ring-terminal connection
other modules: pin-terminal connection)
 P438.404 (for 84TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
 P438.405 (for 84TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
Software
OUTP Bug fixing:
Up to version –606 it was not possible to check the function of output
relay -K208 (now –K2008) during a relay test run.
CBF: The designation for this signal has been altered:
Old designation: 0 3 9 0 0 0 C B F : C B f a i l u r e
New designation: 0 3 9 0 0 0 C B F : C B S u p e r v . S i g n a l
The 036 017 C BF : C B F a i l u r e multiple signal is now generated as a
spontaneous signal when a trip signal is triggered on the back-up CB or
the upstream CB. This new multiple signal is transmitted using the
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol as follows:
Type: 8A, Inf: 80
ASDU: 2, GA: No
CBM Two independent correction values are now available in order to
determine the trip time. Timing tolerances caused by leading or lagging
auxiliary contacts on the CB may now be compensated by applying
parameter 022 018 C BM : C o r r . Ac q u .T .C B Si g . A time-delay
between the internal forming of the trip command and the actual opening
of the CB contacts may now be set at 022 153 C BM : C o r r .
Acqu.T. Trip.
LIMIT: The new 041 043 L IM IT : N o t R e a d y signal now indicates that the
function has been globally enabled but that it has not been enabled in the
active setting group itself. This new multiple signal is transmitted using
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol as follows:
Type: 8A, Inf: 3D
ASDU: 1, GA: Yes
C-10 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-302-403/404/405-608 Hardware No changes
Software
MAIN The primary source for date and time synchronization may now be
selected. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input
for minute signal pulses. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a
binary input for minute signal pulses. Additionally a back-up source can
now be selected.
M AIN : Pr i m .So u r c e T i m e Syn c (103 210)
M AIN : Ba c k u p So u r c e T i m e Syn c (103 211)
COMM2/PC With the new C O M M 2 : Po s i ti ve Ac k n . F a u l t setting (103 203) it is
possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
MAIN Bug fixing:
Up to version –607 a faulty triggering of inrush stabilization was
observed when major current variations occurred.
An external blocking feature for inrush stabilization has been
implemented:
MAIN: Block.Inrush RstrEXT (039 169)
A maximum hold-time for inrush stabilization has been implemented:
M AIN : t L i ft In r .R s tr . SG x (019 001, 019 002, 019 003, 019 004)
C&VTS Bug fixing:
Up to version –607 triggering of the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring
was cancelled when the overcurrent functions DTOC and IDMT had
been started.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-11

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-303-406/407/408-610 Hardware For all model versions there is now a variant available that features an
optional extended detachable, serially-connected, HMI and provides the
following new functions:
 6 freely configurable function keys as well as 6 freely configurable
LED indicators (H 18 to H 23) each situated next to a function key.
 The freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to
H 23) are provided as multi-color LEDs.
To disconnect inductive loads there is a module available with 4 heavy-
duty contacts fitted to slot 10 on the 40TE case or slot 18 on the 84TE
case devices.
The new Ethernet communications module for communication per
IEC 61850 is now available and may be fitted to slot 2 as an alternative
to communication module A. For the optical interface (100 Mbit/s) on the
Ethernet communications module the user may either select the ordering
option ST connector or SC connector.
Diagram The updated terminal connection diagrams include the wiring
configuration for the new heavy-duty binary I/O module as well as the
new Ethernet communications module.
The following numbers have been generated for the new terminal
connection diagrams:
 P438.406 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
 P438.407 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
 P438.408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software Note:
Software version -610 is compatible with all previous hardware releases.
DVICE As the new detachable serial HMI is now available, the following
parameters have been added:
 D VIC E: SW Ve r s i o n D H M I (002 131)
 DVICE: SW Version DHMI DM (002 132)
The order numbers:
 DVICE: AFS Order No. (001 000)
 DVICE: PCS Order No. (001 200)
may now be entered as an alphanumeric variable
containing up to 20 characters.
LED The new detachable, serially-connected, HMI provides the following
extended display functions:
 The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by
the operating mode LED flashing.
 Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable
LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or
green light. If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED
color will be 'amber' (yellow).
Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently
configured LED indicators H 1 and H 17 are now displayed via
configuration parameters and physical state signals.
C-12 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
F_KEY The new detachable serial HMI provides 6 freely configurable function
keys operated either as a key or switch Each function key is provided
with configurable password protection.
HMI As the new detachable, serially-connected, HMI is now available and its
presence is indicated by this additional device identification parameter:
H M I: L o c a l H M I Exi s ts (221 099).
The setting range for parameter
 H M I : F c t . R e a d K e y (080 110)
has been extended. Instead of selecting only one assigned protocol by
pressing the "READ" key there are now up to 16 different addresses
assigned which can be triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of
the "READ" key (menu jump function).
Now it is possible to configure two menu jump lists:
 H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t 1 (030 238)
 H M I : F c t . M e n u J m p L i s t 2 (030 239)
These menu jump lists make it possible to select individual menu points
(e.g. set values, counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely
configurable sequence via function keys, binary signal inputs etc.
CHECK The outputs of Boolean equations 30, 31 and 32 may now be used to
form specific alarm signals.
IEC Initial implementation of the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
GSSE In conjunction with the IEC 61850 communication protocol a
communication procedure has been implemented that is compatible with
previous UCA2 GOOSE for the exchange of binary information within an
Ethernet network section.
GOOSE For the exchange of binary information in an Ethernet network section
the IEC 61850 communication procedure (IEC-GOOSE) has been
implemented.
HMI / Corresponding binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are
MAIN assigned to all default reset functions. Together with the already
identified configuration options these binary input functions are now
made available in a configuration list for the two newly implemented
group resetting functions as well as the extended functional assignment
for the "CLEAR" key ('C'):
 M AIN : F c t.As s i g n . R e s e t 1 (005 248)
 M AIN : F c t.As s i g n . R e s e t 2 (005 249)
 H M I: F c t. R e s e t Ke y (005 251)
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-13

(continued)
Version Changes
MAIN The primary source for date and time synchronization may now be
selected. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input
for minute signal pulses. Available are COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-
B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. Additionally a back-up
source can now be selected. Switching over to the back-up source will
occur according to a settable monitoring time period:
 M AIN : Pr i m . So u r c e T i m e Syn c (103 210)
 M AIN : Ba c k u p So u r c e T i m e Syn c (103 211)
 M AIN : T i m e Syn c . T i m e - O u t (103 212)
The outputs of Boolean equations 30, 31 and 32 may now be used to

form specific fault signals. A device blocking will not occur should such a
fault signal be present.
Bug fixing:
With previous versions, blocking of trip commands was not signaled if
blocking was generated by the following parameters:
 M AIN : T r i p C m d .Bl o c k U SER (021 012)
 M AIN : Bl o c k . T r i p c m d . EXT (036 045)
SOTF Bug fixing:

With previous versions blocking of the switching of distance zone
reaches from Z1 or Z1’ depended on the setting parameters for the
forward direction only.
P438-304-409/410/411-611 Hardware A new communication module A, providing the InterMiCOM protective
interface, COMM3, can now be fitted in slot 3.
Bug fixing:
Binary signal inputs with a higher operate threshold are now also
available for the power supply and the analog modules.
Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires
such binary signal inputs.
Diagram The new terminal connection diagrams include the COMM3 interfaces of
the InterMiCOM teleprotection feature.
 P438 -409: (40TE case, transformer module with ring-terminal
connection, all other modules with pin-terminal
connection)
 P438 -410: (84TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
 P438 -411: (84TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
Software Note:
COMM3 Function group COMM3 has been implemented to permit protective
signaling between two MiCOM protection devices.
CBM Bug fixing:
Up to version -610 measured values for the current-time integral
calculation were presented incorrect by a factor 10.
C-14 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
P438 -304 Hardware No changes
-409/410/411
-611-709 Diagram No changes
Released: 29.09.2008 Software Note:

Software version -611-709 is compatible with all previous hardware
releases.
DIST Bug fixing:
With versions previous to -611 wrong phase coupling protection was only
effective up to approximately 70% of the selectable maximum impedance
value.
Software Note:
IEC The state of the LN (BocPhsPTOC1 and BocPhsPTOC2) linked to
Backup DTOC is now signaled by the Mode.
With distance protection operating normal and Backup DTOC ready
these LN are signaled as 'Blocked' (MODE = 2). When the Backup
DTOC is activated (i.e. a VT M.C.B. trip or triggering by the voltage-
measuring circuit monitoring) the LN is signaled as 'On' (MODE = 1).
When the Backup DTOC has not been activated for a LN then it will
remain 'Off' (Mode = 5).
PC / Bug fixing:
COMM1 / With previous versions an incorrect display of the signal
COMM2 / D IST : I> Sta r ti n g was sometimes observed in the fault recording.
IEC In such cases, with fault recording commencing, the signal was
displayed as 'Enabled'.
The actual signal (binary signal output, LED and spontaneous signal)
was always provided properly.
INP In order to comply with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A, the
IN P: F i l te r (010 220) setting is now available.
The state of binary signal inputs is now logged by a circular or ring
buffer. When the filter function is used a selected binary signal input is
only then considered as enabled if the set number of sampling steps was
enabled.
MAIN Bug fixing:
Up to version -611-709 measured power values were displayed
incorrectly when the operating mode was set to 'Autotransformer Feed'.
DIST The setting value to enable the first undervoltage stage of the wrong
phase coupling protection (076 132) has been extended.
C&VTS The setting values for the voltage monitoring stages (014 229, 014 208,
014 212) have been extended.
DTOC The setting values to enable the undervoltage stages (076 131, 076 150)
have been extended.
IDMT The setting value to enable the first undervoltage stage (0 7 2 0 8 1 ) has
been extended.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-15

(continued)
Version Changes
RECLS The voltage criterion for a reclose command to be issued after the
maximum dead time period (015 128) has been extended.
CBF The CB trip monitoring function has been removed from the circuit
breaker failure protection. The function will now be enabled only if no trip
command has been issued by the protection device.
P438-305-409/410/411-613 Hardware As an option the processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor
is now available. This module offers an enhanced feature and the high-
speed processing of the device’s additional functions. Such high-speed
processing is the pre-condition for the successful application of the new
high impedance protection function (DELTA).
Diagram No changes
Software Note:
Some of the functional enhancements are only visible and available if the
optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted.
HMI The functional assignment for the "CLEAR" key ('C') has been extended.
The reset of the reclaim time for the RECLS function at parameter
R EC L S: R e s e t R e c l .T i m e 2 EXT (036 223) may now be selected
from the selection table for H M I: F c t. R e s e t Ke y (005 251).
F_KEY The default setting of passwords for the function keys have been
changed. Now no password entry is required when a function key is
pressed.
Enabling a password may still be configured for each function key.
MAIN When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP
coprocessor is fitted the second, third and fifth harmonic current
components are determined and issued as measured operating data.
The following measured values are now additionally available
 MAIN: Current I(2fn) Prim (008 095)
 MAIN: Current I(2fn) p.u. (008 096)
When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP

coprocessor is fitted, the ratio of the sum of the second, third and fifth
harmonic current components to the fundamental is calculated and
issued as a measured value M AIN : k H a r m ,  I ( x f n ) / I ( f n ) .
The General Start has been extended by the addition of the starting
signal from the high impedance protection function (DELTA, only when
the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is
fitted).
The Trip signals and Trip commands have been extended by the addition
of the starting signal from the high impedance protection function
(DELTA, only when the optional processor module with an integrated
DSP coprocessor is fitted).
The multiple blockings 1 and 2 have been extended by the addition of the
high impedance protection function blocking (DELTA, only when the
optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
C-16 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
The inrush stabilization has been extended by the addition of the high
impedance protection function blocking (DELTA, only when the optional
processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
The voltage memory function is now comprehensively available for the
distance protection function and the directional overcurrent stages.
The following signals have been shifted within the function groups:
 Previously: D IST : tVm e m o r y Ac ti ve (040 034)
 Now: M AIN : tVm e m o r y Ac ti ve (040 034)
Synchronization of the voltage memory is now terminated by a General
Start.
OSCIL The selection of starting conditions for fault recording has been extended
by the conditions for enabling, starting and tripping from the high
impedance protection function (DELTA, only when the optional processor
module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
FT_DA The setting of the fault location determination has been extended.
Line reactance and line length can now be configured in 10 successive
sections.
DELTA The DELTA function group has been implemented. This function is
available only when the optional processor module with an integrated
DSP coprocessor is fitted.
High impedance errors are detected by sudden current change
monitoring and stabilized by monitoring odd-numbered harmonic current
components. Additional stabilization by sudden angle change monitoring
or reactance limits can be configured.
DIST The accuracy of timer stages of individual zones has been enhanced.
Load blinding has be extended to the polygonal (quadrilateral) tripping
characteristics. Angle Alpha and reactance limit Rg can now be used to
set this feature. Up to the previous version these parameters were
available only for the circular characteristic.
The following parameters have been renamed:
 Previously: DIST: Rgy Circle Fwd SGx
 Now: D IST : R g y, F o r w a r d SG x
 Previously: DIST: Rgy Circle Rev SGx
 Now: D I S T : R g y, R e ve r s e S G x
 Previously: D I S T : a l p h a y ( C i r c l e ) F w d S G x
 Now: DIST: Alpha y SGx
The visibility control for circular characteristics has been cancelled.
The D IST : C i r c l e C h a r Ava i l a b . (022 001) parameter has been
removed.
A fourth distance stage with train start-up detection dx/dt has been
implemented.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-17

(continued)
Version Changes
A visibility control for zones 3 and 4 has been added. Parameters:
 D I S T : Z o n e 3 A v a i l a b l e (022 195)
 DIST: Zone 4 Available (022 196)
are used to render visible input, output and setting parameters for the
respective zones.
Zones are always without effect unless their respective availability has
been set.
Bug fixing:
Up to the previous version the WPC zone was processed even when the
corresponding availability had been not set.
When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP
coprocessor is fitted then the distance protection measured values (Z, R,
X) may be corrected by harmonics factor kHarm, I(xfn)/I(fn). Distance
zone reaches are reduced dynamically according to the second, third
and fifth harmonic current components.
DTOC / Starting timer stages in the directional mode can now be freely selected.
IDMT It is now possible to select whether a time delay is started when a stage
start is issued or with an additional directional criterion.
Direction determination by overcurrent stages are now stabilized by the
voltage memory function (function group MAIN).
If voltage memory is not enabled a Fault forward decision is issued,
independently of the actual fault direction, when the short-circuit voltages
are < 1.0 V.
A load flow direction is now displayed when the short-circuit direction
determination function is available.
C-18 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-306-412/413/414-6xx This is a test version and for internal purposes only.
Released: —
P438-307-412/413/414-6xx This is a test version and for internal purposes only.
Released: —
-711
Diagram No changes
Software
DIST In the case of load blinder blocking (V < 10V) the evaluation of Rg and
alpha is now skipped.
DELTA Internal use of parameters was optimized.
-713
Diagram No changes
Software
FT_DA The calculation of Vmax now takes into account the feeder mode
(Classic Single Feed or Autotransformer Feed).
OSCIL Bug fixing:
The messages (004 181) F T _ D A : I c a t p . u . ,
(004 182) F T _ D A : I f d r p . u . , (004 183) F T _ D A : V c a t p . u . ,
(004 184) F T _ D A : V f d r p . u . were not written into the buffer.
P438-305-409/410/411-614 This is a test version and for internal purposes only.
Release: ―
Hardware No changes
Diagram No changes
Software
DIST The resolution for the settings of R and Z of zones 3 and 4 has been
reduced from 0.01 Ω to 0.1 Ω.
P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 C-19

(continued)
Version Changes
P438-305-409/410/411-615 Hardware New Schneider-Electric design for the local control panel (HMI).
Diagram No changes
Release: 23.02.2011 Software
PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : M a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183)
Note:
Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program
continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The menu point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S V a r i a n t (003 214) may now
be used to set the MODBUS protocol to the variant Private or
Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS
implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices.
The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of
the MODBUS protocol.
Note:
As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1, The menu points C O M M 1 : M a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and
COMM2 C O M M 2 : M a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a
selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined
as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become
necessary to enter texts differing from the default.
Notes:
These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI).
The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding
this will be truncated.
The parameter C O M M 1 : M a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an
IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
DIST The resolution for the settings of R and Z of zones 3 and 4 has been
reduced from 0.01 Ω to 0.1 Ω. Moreover, the maximum setting value for
the reactance of zones 3 and 4 has been increased from 650 Ω to 750 Ω.
C-20 P438/UK M/Be7 // AFSV.12.11061 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615

Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
 2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P438/UK M/De7 10/2014
MiCOM P438
P438/EN AD/Af8
Version P438 -308 -415/416/417 -616
Upgrade Documentation
2 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616
P438, Changes in Software Version -615 to -616
In the new versions of the Rail Catenary Protection Device MiCOM P438,
several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been
included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed
below:
References
Released Version Documentation
23.02.2011 P438 -305 Technical Manual
-409/410/411 P438/UK M/Be7
-615
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 3

(continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
P438 -305 Hardware No changes.
-409/410/411
-615 -714
Release: 17.08.2011
Diagram No changes.
Software
DIST, HMI Bug fixing:
In the previous version the distance zone settings were
displayed with values one hundred times lower than the actual
values.
P438 -308 Hardware The P438 is now fitted with an improved power supply module.
-415/416/417 Note that the voltage range has changed for DC input:
-616
 For the DC / AC variant, the range is now
Release: 07.09.2012 60 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
(previously 48 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC).
 For the DC-only variant, the range is now
24 … 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC).
A new communication module (“REB” = “Redundant Ethernet
Board”) is now available as an ordering option. This module
can be used for redundant communication via IEC 61850 and
may be fitted to slot 2, as an alternative to the other
communication modules. The following communication
protocols are supported:
 SHP (Self-Healing Protocol).
 RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
 DHP (Dual-Homing Protocol).
A detailed description of the module and the appropriate
network connections is available as a separate document
(“Redundant Ethernet Board, Application Guide”).
The binary module X(6I 3O) with 6 binary signal inputs and 3
output relays is now optionally available and may be fitted to
slot 10 (40 TE case) or 18 (84 TE cases).
Diagram The diagrams have been adapted to the new selection of
modules:
 P438 -412: Case 40TE,
transformer module for ring-terminal connection,
other modules for pin-terminal connection
 P438 -413: Case 84TE, pin terminal connection
 P438 -414: Case 84TE, ring terminal connection
4 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Version Changes
Software Note: Software version -616 is compatible with all previous
hardware releases. However, some of the functional
enhancements are only visible and available if the processor
variant with an integrated DSP coprocessor (order option) is
fitted.
IEC Bug fixing:
In a few cases a data change report was not transferred when
a cyclic report was generated at the same time.
FT_DA The determination of the fault location has been enhanced for
the operating mode “Autotransformer feed”. It is now possible
to set the section lengths and reactances separately for the
catenary and the feeder line.
Therefore there are now parameters
F T _ D A : L i n e l e n g t h z - y P S x (for the line feeds z with
z=A / ”catenary line” and z=B / ”feeder line”), instead of the
previously available parameters
F T _ D A : L i n e l e n g t h y P S x (y = 1,…,10). The same
holds for the reactances, so there are now parameters
F T _ D A : L i n e r e a c , s e c z - y P S x instead of the
previously available F T _ D A : L i n e r e a c t , s e c y P S x .
In operating mode “Classic single feed” only the parameters
for line feed A are available.
The new parameter (011 225)
F T _ D A : B l o c k i n g f a u l t l o c . allows for blocking the
determination of the fault location via binary signal, e.g. in
case the autotransformers are still connected.
DIST The parameter (076 132, 077 132, 078 132, 079 132)
D I S T : W P C V < P S x can now be set to Blocked. In this
case, protection against wrong phase coupling is performed
without voltage supervision.
DTOC, Two new DTOC function groups, DTOCA and DTOCB, have
DTOCA, been implemented. These function groups provide a definite
DTOCB time phase current (IA, IB) supervision in the operating mode
“Autotransformer feed”. If the operating mode is set to
“Classic single feed” both function groups are inactive.
The DTOC function group is still available and unchanged. In
both operating modes it supervises the total current
independently of the DTOCx function groups.
The parameters (130 079) D T O C A : B l o c k i n g E X T and
(130 099) D T O C B : B l o c k i n g E X T allow for blocking
these new DTOCx functions, e.g.if the supervision is needed
only in the case of disconnected autotransformers.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 5

(continued)
Version Changes
IDMT, Two new IDMT function groups, IDMTA and IDMTB, have
IDMTA, been implemented. These function groups provide an inverse-
IDMTB time phase current (IA, IB) supervision in the operating mode
“Autotransformer feed”. If the operating mode is set to
“Classic single feed” both function groups are inactive.
The IDMT function group is still available and unchanged. In
both operating modes it supervises the total current
independently of the IDMTx function groups.
The parameters (130 116) I D M T A : B l o c k i n g E X T and
(130 136) I D M T B : B l o c k i n g E X T allow for blocking these
new IDMTx functions, e.g. if the supervision is needed only in
the case of disconnected autotransformers.
ARC The ARC function group has been extended to include the
new overcurrent supervision functions DTOCx and IDMTx.
6 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
2 Changed and New Parameters
2.1 Device Identification (Par – DvID)
Parameter Address
Default Value Min. Max. Unit
Device DVICE: SW vers.Chin.DHMI DM 008 233
2.00 0.00 655.35

Internal software version numbers.
2.2 Configuration Parameters (Par – Conf)
Parameter Address
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCA: Function group DTOCA 056 079
protection, catenary line

Values from table 52, default:
0: Without
Cancelling function group DTOCA or including it in the configuration. If the function group is
cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Note: The function group DTOCA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
Autotransformer feed. It is blocked in case of the setting Classic single feed.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCB: Function group DTOCB 056 080
protection, feeder line

0: Without
Cancelling function group DTOCB or including it in the configuration. If the function group is
Note: The function group DTOCB is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMTA: Function group IDMTA 056 090
protection, catenary line

0: Without
Cancelling function group IDMTA or including it in the configuration. If the function group is
Note: The function group IDMTA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMTB: Function group IDMTB 056 091
protection, feeder line

0: Without
Cancelling function group IDMTB or including it in the configuration. If the function group is
Note: The function group IDMTB is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 7

(continued)
2.3 Function Parameters (Par – Func)
2.3.1 General Functions (Par – Func – Gen)
Parameter Address
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCA: General enable USER 130 065
protection
0: No
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function for CT A.
Note: The function group DTOCA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
DTOCB: General enable USER 130 085

0: No
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function for CT B.
Note: The function group DTOCB is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMTA: General enable USER 130 107
protection
0: No
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function for CT A.
Note: The function group IDMTA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
IDMTB: General enable USER 130 127

0: No
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function for CT B.
Note: The function group IDMTB is active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
2.3.2 Parameter Subsets (Par – Func – PSx)

Parameter Address
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Line length A-1 PSx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
10.00 0.01 500.00 km

FT_DA: Line length A-2 PSx 008 115 008 116 008 117 008 118
block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km
8 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

block. 0.01 500.00 km

The line length A-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the catenary line. The
calculation of fault location is based on this value.
A maximum of 10 line sections may be defined; line distance and line reactance for line sections
not needed are to be set to Blocked.
FT_DA: Line reac,secA-1 PSx 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
For MAIN: Inom device= Ω

1.0A: 10 0.1 500
5.0A: 2 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 6 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. • 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 9

(continued)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Line reac,secA-10PSx 008 187 008 188 008 189 008 190

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
The line reactance A-y defines the reactance Xy of section y of the catenary line. The calculation
of fault location is based on this value.
FT_DA: Line length B-1 PSx 011 145 011 146 011 147 011 148
10.00 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
MAIN: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
block. 0.01 500.00 km

Visible only if:
The line length B-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the feeder line. The calculation
of fault location is based on this value.
10 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Line reac,secB-1 PSx 011 185 011 186 011 187 011 188

1.0A: 10 0.1 500
5.0A: 2 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 11

(continued)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Line reac,secB-10PSx 011 221 011 222 011 223 011 224

1.0A: block. 0.1 500
5.0A: block. 0.02 100
Visible only if:
The line reactance B-y defines reactance Xy of section y of the feeder line. The calculation of fault
location is based on this value.
Note: Valid only with setting MAIN: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: HSR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx 015 196 020 196 021 196 023 196
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: HSR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx 015 197 020 197 021 197 023 197
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: HSR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx 015 213 020 213 021 213 023 213
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: HSR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx 015 214 020 214 021 214 023 214
block. 0.00 10.00 s

Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the 1st or 2nd high-current stage of
DTOCA or DTOCB.
Note: The function groups DTOCA and DTOCB analyze only CT A or CT B, respectively, and
therefore they are active only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed. It is
blocked in case of the setting Classic single feed.
ARC: HSR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx 015 217 020 217 021 217 023 217
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: HSR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx 015 219 020 219 021 219 023 219
block. 0.00 10.00 s

Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the Ikref stage of IDMTA or IDMTB.
Note: The function groups IDMTA and IDMTB analyze only CT A or CT B, respectively, and
ARC: TDR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx 015 198 020 198 021 198 023 198
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: TDR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx 015 199 020 199 021 199 023 199
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: TDR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx 015 215 020 215 021 215 023 215
block. 0.00 10.00 s
12 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
ARC: TDR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx 015 216 020 216 021 216 023 216
block. 0.00 10.00 s

Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the 1st or 2nd high-current stage of
DTOCA or DTOCB.
Note: The function groups DTOCA and DTOCB analyze only CT A or CT B, respectively, and
ARC: TDR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx 015 218 020 218 021 218 023 218
block. 0.00 10.00 s

ARC: TDR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx 015 220 020 220 021 220 023 220
block. 0.00 10.00 s

Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the Ikref stage of IDMTA or IDMTB.
Note: The function groups IDMTA and IDMTB analyze only CT A or CT B, respectively, and
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCA: Enable PSx 130 060 131 060 132 060 133 060
protection
0: No
DTOCB: Enable PSx 130 080 131 080 132 080 133 080

0: No
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent protection – DTOCA /
DTOCB – is enabled.
DTOCA: I> PSx 130 061 131 061 132 061 133 061
1.00 0.08 4.00 Inom

DTOCB: I> PSx 130 081 131 081 132 081 133 081
1.00 0.08 4.00 Inom

Setting for operate value I>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account, and MAIN: Feeder
mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
DTOCA: I>> PSx 130 062 131 062 132 062 133 062
2.00 0.20 4.00 Inom

DTOCB: I>> PSx 130 082 131 082 132 082 133 082
2.00 0.20 4.00 Inom

Setting for operate value I>>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account, and MAIN: Feeder
mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
DTOCA: tI> PSx 130 063 131 063 132 063 133 063
block. 0.00 60.00 s

DTOCB: tI> PSx 130 083 131 083 132 083 133 083
block. 0.00 60.00 s

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into
account, and MAIN: Feeder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 13

(continued)
Parameter Address
DTOCA: tI>> PSx 130 064 131 064 132 064 133 064
block. 0.00 60.00 s

DTOCB: tI>> PSx 130 084 131 084 132 084 133 084
block. 0.00 60.00 s

Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into
account, and MAIN: Feeder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMTA: Enable PSx 130 100 131 100 132 100 133 100
protection
0: No
IDMTB: Enable PSx 130 120 131 120 132 120 133 120

0: No
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent protection – IDMTA /
IDMTB – is enabled (phase current system).
IDMTA: Iref PSx 130 101 131 101 132 101 133 101
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom

IDMTB: Iref PSx 130 121 131 121 132 121 133 121
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom

Setting for the reference current of the curve. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account,
and MAIN: Feeder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
IDMTA: Characteristic PSx 130 102 131 102 132 102 133 102

0: Definite Time
IDMTB: Characteristic PSx 130 122 131 122 132 122 133 122

0: Definite Time
Setting for the tripping characteristic. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account, and
MAIN: Feeder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
IDMTA: Char. factor kt PSx 130 103 131 103 132 103 133 103
1.00 0.01 10.00

IDMTB: Char. factor kt PSx 130 123 131 123 132 123 133 123
1.00 0.01 10.00

Setting for the characteristic time multiplier. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account, and
IDMTA: Min. trip time PSx 130 104 131 104 132 104 133 104
1.00 0.00 10.00 s

IDMTB: Min. trip time PSx 130 124 131 124 132 124 133 124
1.00 0.00 10.00 s

Setting for the minimum trip time. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account, and
14 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
IDMTA: Hold time PSx 130 105 131 105 132 105 133 105
0.00 0.00 600.00 s

IDMTB: Hold time PSx 130 125 131 125 132 125 133 125
0.00 0.00 600.00 s

Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account,
IDMTA: Reset PSx 130 106 131 106 132 106 133 106

1: Without delay
IDMTB: Reset PSx 130 126 131 126 132 126 133 126

1: Without delay
Setting for the release or reset characteristic. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account,
DIST: WPC V< PSx 076 132 077 132 078 132 079 132
0.50 0.10 2.00 Vnom

Visible only if:
DIST: WPC zone available = Yes
Setting for the undervoltage conditions to detect a wrong phase coupling. If this parameter is set
to Blocked, then a wrong phase coupling is detected without voltage supervision.
2.4 Operation (Oper)
2.4.1 Cyclic Values (Oper – Cycl)
2.4.1.1 Logic State Signals (Oper – Cycl – Log)
Parameter Address
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Blocking fault loc. 011 225

0: No
Calculation of the fault location is blocked. The parameters FT_DA: Fault location, FT_DA: Fault
location A, FT_DA: Fault location B are set to Not measured.
Note: FT_DA: Fault location A, FT_DA: Fault location B are available only with the setting
MAIN: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOCA: Blocking EXT 130 079
protection
0: No
DTOCB: Blocking EXT 130 099

0: No
Function groups DTOCx are blocked.
Note: Blocking DTOCx via binary input signal can be required, e.g. for the case that the
overcurrent supervision is needed only in case of disconnected autotransformers.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 15

(continued)
Parameter Address
DTOCA: Blocking tI> EXT 130 066

0: No
DTOCA: Blocking tI>> EXT 130 068

0: No
DTOCB: Blocking tI> EXT 130 086

0: No
DTOCB: Blocking tI>> EXT 130 088

0: No
Blocking of DTOCx timer stage tI> or tI>>, respectively.
DTOCA: Enabled 130 073

0: No
DTOCB: Enabled 130 093

0: No
Signal that the function group DTOCx is enabled.
DTOCA: Not ready 130 076

1: Yes
DTOCB: Not ready 130 096

1: Yes
Signal that the function group DTOCx is not ready.
Note: The function groups DTOCx are never ready with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode = Classic
single feed.
DTOCA: Trip signal tI> 130 071

0: No
DTOCA: Trip signal tI>> 130 072

0: No
DTOCB: Trip signal tI> 130 091

0: No
DTOCB: Trip signal tI>> 130 092

0: No
Trip signal from function group DTOCx. This signal can be assigned to the trip commands (e.g.
MAIN: Fct.asg. M-trip cmd.).
DTOCA: Starting I> 130 069

0: No
DTOCA: Starting I>> 130 070

0: No
16 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
DTOCB: Starting I> 130 089

0: No
DTOCB: Starting I>> 130 090

0: No
An overcurrent fault is detected by the function group DTOCx.
DTOCA: tI> elapsed 130 077

0: No
DTOCA: tI>> elapsed 130 078

0: No
DTOCB: tI> elapsed 130 097

0: No
DTOCB: tI>> elapsed 130 098

0: No
Signal that the DTOCx timer stage has elapsed.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMTA: Block. tIref> EXT 130 108
protection
0: No
IDMTB: Block. tIref> EXT 130 128

0: No
Blocking of IDMTx timer stage tIref>.
IDMTA: Blocking EXT 130 116

0: No
IDMTB: Blocking EXT 130 136

0: No
Function groups IDMTx are blocked.
Note: Blocking IDMTx via binary input signal can be required, e.g. for the case that the
overcurrent supervision is needed only in case of disconnected autotransformers.
IDMTA: Enabled 130 109

0: No
IDMTB: Enabled 130 129

0: No
Signal that the function group IDMTx is enabled.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 17

(continued)
Parameter Address
IDMTA: Not ready 130 117

1: Yes
IDMTB: Not ready 130 137

1: Yes
Signal that the function group IDMTx is not ready.
Note: The function groups IDMTx are never ready with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode = Classic
single feed.
IDMTA: Starting Iref> 130 110

0: No
IDMTB: Starting Iref> 130 130

0: No
An overcurrent fault is detected by the function group IDMTx.
IDMTA: tIref> elapsed 130 112

0: No
IDMTB: tIref> elapsed 130 132

0: No
Signal that the DTOCx timer stage tIref> has elapsed.
IDMTA: Trip signal tIref> 130 113

0: No
IDMTB: Trip signal tIref> 130 133

0: No
Trip signal from function group IDMTx. This signal can be assigned to the trip commands (e.g.
MAIN: Fct.asg. M-trip cmd.).
IDMTA: Hold time running 130 114

0: No
IDMTB: Hold time running 130 134

0: No
Signal that the hold-time for IDMTx (see IDMTA: Hold time PSx, IDMTB: Hold time PSx) is
running.
IDMTA: Memory clear 130 115

1: Yes
IDMTB: Memory clear 130 135

1: Yes
Signal that the memory storing the sum of the starting times is clear.
18 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
2.5 Events (Events)
2.5.1 Measured Event Data (Events – Meas)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Fault current A p.u. 004 181
n.a. 0.00 100.00 Inom

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault current B p.u. 004 182
n.a. 0.00 100.00 Inom

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault voltage A p.u. 004 183
n.a. 0.000 3.000 Vnom

Visible only if:
Display of the catenary voltage referred to Vnom.
FT_DA: Fault voltage B p.u. 004 184
n.a. 0.000 3.000 Vnom

Visible only if:
Display of the feeder voltage referred to Vnom.
FT_DA: Fault loop angle A 235 203
n.a. -180 180 °

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault loop angle B 236 203
n.a. -180 180 °

Visible only if:
Display of the fault angle for the catenary line or feeder line.
Note: This measurement value is available only with the setting MAIN: Feeder mode =
Autotransformer feed.
FT_DA: Fault react.,pri A 235 206
n.a. -320.00 320.00 Ω

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault react.,pri B 236 206
n.a. -320.00 320.00 Ω

Visible only if:
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity for the catenary line or feeder line.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 19

(continued)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Fault imped.,pri A 235 207
n.a. 0.00 320.00 Ω

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault imped.,pri B 236 207
n.a. 0.00 320.00 Ω

Visible only if:
Display of the fault impedance as a primary quantity for the catenary line or feeder line.
FT_DA: Fault react.,sec A 235 205

1.0A: n.a. -320 320
5.0A: n.a. -64 64
Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault react.,sec B 236 205

1.0A: n.a. -320 320
5.0A: n.a. -64 64
Visible only if:
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity for the catenary line or feeder line.
FT_DA: Fault imped.,sec. A 235 202

1.0A: n.a. 0 320
5.0A: n.a. 0 64
Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault imped.,sec B 236 202

1.0A: n.a. 0 320
5.0A: n.a. 0 64
Visible only if:
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity for the catenary line or feeder line.
FT_DA: Fault loc. percent A 235 204
n.a. -320.00 320.00 %

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault loc. percent B 236 204
n.a. -320.00 320.00 %

Visible only if:
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %), referred to the setting at FT_DA: Line
20 P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616

(continued)
Parameter Address
FT_DA: Fault loc. percent A 235 204
n.a. -320.00 320.00 %

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault loc. percent B 236 204
n.a. -320.00 320.00 %

Visible only if:
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %), referred to the setting at FT_DA: Line
reac,secA-1 PSx, for the catenary line or feeder line.
FT_DA: Fault location A 235 201
n.a. -500.0 500.0 km

Visible only if:
FT_DA: Fault location B 236 201
n.a. -500.0 500.0 km

Visible only if:
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km for the catenary line or feeder line.
P438/EN AD/Af8 // AFSV.12.11390 EN /// P438-308-415/416/417-616 21

 2012 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P438/EN AD/Af8 09/2012
 2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
Publication: P438/EN M/Cf8 Version: -615 -616 10/2014

Micom P438: Rail Catenary Protection Device P438/En M/Cf8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P438: Rail Catenary Protection Device P438/En M/Cf8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Micom P438: Rail Catenary Protection Device P438/En M/Cf8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P438

Rail Catenary Protection Device

Version P438 -305 -409/410/411 -615

Content P438/UK M/De7 (-615)

Rail Catenary Protection Device

Version P438 -305 -409/410/411 -615

Installation of the DHMI:

4 P438/UK M/Ae7 // AFSV.12.11060 EN /// P438-305-409/410/411-615 + P438-307-412/413/414-615

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 7

3.12.4 Inrush stabilization (Harmonic 3-79

8 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

3.26.4 Zone Extension 3-205

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 User Interface (HMI) 6-1

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 9

6.6.6 Memory Readout 6-18

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

10 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

1 Application and Scope

A function is selected by a mouse click in the support software:

Communication functions and measured value functions may also be configured or

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-1

Communication Functions P438

Input/output functions P438

1-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Measured value functions

Global functions P438

LLN0.SGCB GROUP Setting group selection

OL_DA Overload data acquisition

OL_RC Overload recording (time-tagged signal logging)

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-3

Functional diagram for

Communications 16S 16S 16E 77 Self-

Defrost 21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 79 27/59

Communications 16S 16S 16E 77 CLC Self-

21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 79 27/59

1-4 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

Inputs and outputs

A special rapid-response output module with 4 Triac-assisted output relays can be

The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 1-5

Local control and display

The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103

External clock synchronization can be accomplished by means of the optional IRIG-B

1-6 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613

2.2 General Data

P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613 2-1

Communication interfaces COMM1, COMM2, COMM 3

IEC communication interface:

IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug.

Current Measuring Inputs:

Other Inputs and Outputs:

Creepage Distances and Clearances

2-2 P438/EN M/Ad7 // AFSV.12.10470 D /// P438-305-409/410/411-613 + P438-307-412/413/414-613